Intergraph Smart® 3D

Structural Manufacturing User's Guide

Version 2018 (12.0)
June 2018
Copyright
Copyright © 1999-2018 Hexagon AB and/or its subsidiaries and affiliates. All rights reserved.
This computer program, including software, icons, graphic symbols, documentation, file formats, and audio-visual displays; may be
used only as pursuant to applicable software license agreement; contains confidential and proprietary information of Hexagon AB
and/or third parties which is protected by patent, trademark, copyright law, trade secret law, and international treaty, and may not be
provided or otherwise made available without proper authorization from Hexagon AB and/or its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Portions of this software are owned by Spatial Corp. © 1986-2018. All Rights Reserved.
Portions of the user interface are copyright © 2012-2018 Telerik AD.

U.S. Government Restricted Rights Legend

Use, duplication, or disclosure by the government is subject to restrictions as set forth below. For civilian agencies: This was developed
at private expense and is "restricted computer software" submitted with restricted rights in accordance with subparagraphs (a) through
(d) of the Commercial Computer Software - Restricted Rights clause at 52.227-19 of the Federal Acquisition Regulations ("FAR") and
its successors, and is unpublished and all rights are reserved under the copyright laws of the United States. For units of the Department
of Defense ("DoD"): This is "commercial computer software" as defined at DFARS 252.227-7014 and the rights of the Government are
as specified at DFARS 227.7202-3.
Unpublished - rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States.
Hexagon PPM
305 Intergraph Way
Madison, AL 35758

Documentation
Documentation shall mean, whether in electronic or printed form, User's Guides, Installation Guides, Reference Guides,
Administrator's Guides, Customization Guides, Programmer's Guides, Configuration Guides and Help Guides delivered with a
particular software product.

Other Documentation
Other Documentation shall mean, whether in electronic or printed form and delivered with software or on Intergraph Smart Support,
SharePoint, or [Link], any documentation related to work processes, workflows, and best practices that is provided by Intergraph as
guidance for using a software product.

Terms of Use
a. Use of a software product and Documentation is subject to the Software License Agreement ("SLA") delivered with the software
product unless the Licensee has a valid signed license for this software product with Intergraph Corporation. If the Licensee has a
valid signed license for this software product with Intergraph Corporation, the valid signed license shall take precedence and
govern the use of this software product and Documentation. Subject to the terms contained within the applicable license
agreement, Intergraph Corporation gives Licensee permission to print a reasonable number of copies of the Documentation as
defined in the applicable license agreement and delivered with the software product for Licensee's internal, non-commercial use.
The Documentation may not be printed for resale or redistribution.
b. For use of Documentation or Other Documentation where end user does not receive a SLA or does not have a valid license
agreement with Intergraph, Intergraph grants the Licensee a non-exclusive license to use the Documentation or Other
Documentation for Licensee’s internal non-commercial use. Intergraph Corporation gives Licensee permission to print a
reasonable number of copies of Other Documentation for Licensee’s internal, non-commercial use. The Other Documentation
may not be printed for resale or redistribution. This license contained in this subsection b) may be terminated at any time and for
any reason by Intergraph Corporation by giving written notice to Licensee.

Disclaimer of Warranties
Except for any express warranties as may be stated in the SLA or separate license or separate terms and conditions, Intergraph
Corporation disclaims any and all express or implied warranties including, but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability
and fitness for a particular purpose and nothing stated in, or implied by, this document or its contents shall be considered or deemed a
modification or amendment of such disclaimer. Intergraph believes the information in this publication is accurate as of its publication
date.
The information and the software discussed in this document are subject to change without notice and are subject to applicable
technical product descriptions. Intergraph Corporation is not responsible for any error that may appear in this document.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 2

The software, Documentation and Other Documentation discussed in this document are furnished under a license and may be used or
copied only in accordance with the terms of this license. THE USER OF THE SOFTWARE IS EXPECTED TO MAKE THE FINAL
EVALUATION AS TO THE USEFULNESS OF THE SOFTWARE IN HIS OWN ENVIRONMENT.
Intergraph is not responsible for the accuracy of delivered data including, but not limited to, catalog, reference and symbol data. Users
should verify for themselves that the data is accurate and suitable for their project work.

Limitation of Damages
IN NO EVENT WILL INTERGRAPH CORPORATION BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, LOSS OF USE OR PRODUCTION, LOSS OF REVENUE
OR PROFIT, LOSS OF DATA, OR CLAIMS OF THIRD PARTIES, EVEN IF INTERGRAPH CORPORATION HAS BEEN ADVISED OF
THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL INTERGRAPH CORPORATION’S LIABILITY EXCEED THE AMOUNT THAT INTERGRAPH
CORPORATION HAS BEEN PAID BY LICENSEE UNDER THIS AGREEMENT AT THE TIME THE CLAIM IS MADE. EXCEPT
WHERE PROHIBITED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NO CLAIM, REGARDLESS OF FORM, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
WITH THE SUBJECT MATTER OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE BROUGHT BY LICENSEE MORE THAN TWO (2) YEARS AFTER
THE EVENT GIVING RISE TO THE CAUSE OF ACTION HAS OCCURRED.
IF UNDER THE LAW RULED APPLICABLE ANY PART OF THIS SECTION IS INVALID, THEN INTERGRAPH LIMITS ITS LIABILITY
TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT ALLOWED BY SAID LAW.

Export Controls
Intergraph Corporation’s commercial-off-the-shelf software products, customized software and/or third-party software, including any
technical data related thereto (“Technical Data”), obtained from Intergraph Corporation, its subsidiaries or distributors, is subject to the
export control laws and regulations of the United States of America. Diversion contrary to U.S. law is prohibited. To the extent
prohibited by United States or other applicable laws, Intergraph Corporation software products, customized software, Technical Data,
and/or third-party software, or any derivatives thereof, obtained from Intergraph Corporation, its subsidiaries or distributors must not be
exported or re-exported, directly or indirectly (including via remote access) under the following circumstances:
a. To Cuba, Iran, North Korea, the Crimean region of Ukraine, or Syria, or any national of these countries or territories.
b. To any person or entity listed on any United States government denial list, including, but not limited to, the United States
Department of Commerce Denied Persons, Entities, and Unverified Lists, the United States Department of Treasury Specially
Designated Nationals List, and the United States Department of State Debarred List
([Link]
c. To any entity when Customer knows, or has reason to know, the end use of the software product, customized software, Technical
Data and/or third-party software obtained from Intergraph Corporation, its subsidiaries or distributors is related to the design,
development, production, or use of missiles, chemical, biological, or nuclear weapons, or other un-safeguarded or sensitive
nuclear uses.
d. To any entity when Customer knows, or has reason to know, that an illegal reshipment will take place.
Any questions regarding export/re-export of relevant Intergraph Corporation software product, customized software, Technical Data
and/or third-party software obtained from Intergraph Corporation, its subsidiaries or distributors, should be addressed to PPM’s Export
Compliance Department, 305 Intergraph Way, Madison, Alabama 35758 USA or at exportcompliance@[Link]. Customer
shall hold harmless and indemnify PPM and Hexagon Group Company for any causes of action, claims, costs, expenses and/or
damages resulting to PPM or Hexagon Group Company from a breach by Customer.

Trademarks
Intergraph®, the Intergraph logo®, Intergraph Smart®, SmartPlant®, SmartMarine®, SmartSketch®, SmartPlant Cloud®, PDS®,
FrameWorks®, I-Route, I-Export, Isogen®, SPOOLGEN, SupportManager®, SupportModeler®, SAPPHIRE®, TANK, PV Elite®,
CADWorx®, CADWorx DraftPro®, GTSTRUDL®, and CAESAR II® are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intergraph Corporation or
its affiliates, parents, subsidiaries. Hexagon and the Hexagon logo are registered trademarks of Hexagon AB or its subsidiaries.
Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. ACIS is a registered trademark of SPATIAL
TECHNOLOGY, INC. Infragistics, Presentation Layer Framework, ActiveTreeView Ctrl, ProtoViewCtl, ActiveThreed Ctrl, ActiveListBar
Ctrl, ActiveSplitter, ActiveToolbars Ctrl, ActiveToolbars Plus Ctrl, and ProtoView are trademarks of Infragistics, Inc. Incorporates
portions of 2D DCM, 3D DCM, and HLM by Siemens Product Lifecycle Management Software III (GB) Ltd. All rights reserved. Gigasoft
is a registered trademark, and ProEssentials a trademark of Gigasoft, Inc. VideoSoft and VXFlexGrid are either registered trademarks
or trademarks of ComponentOne LLC 1991-2018, All rights reserved. Oracle, JD Edwards, PeopleSoft, and Retek are registered
trademarks of Oracle Corporation and/or its affiliates. Tribon is a trademark of AVEVA Group plc. Alma and act/cut are trademarks of
the Alma company. Other brands and product names are trademarks of their respective owners.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 3

Contents
Preface ........................................................................................................................................................ 11

What's New in Structural Manufacturing ................................................................................................ 12

Structural Manufacturing .......................................................................................................................... 14

Selecting Objects .................................................................................................................................. 19
Icons in the Workspace Explorer .......................................................................................................... 22
Icon Relationships ................................................................................................................................. 30
Split Notification .................................................................................................................................... 32
Delete a seam ................................................................................................................................ 33
Plane Methods ...................................................................................................................................... 33
Define a coincident plane ............................................................................................................... 34
Define an offset plane..................................................................................................................... 35
Define plane using angle from plane .............................................................................................. 36
Define a plane using a point and a normal vector .......................................................................... 36
Define a plane using three points ................................................................................................... 37
Define plane by vectors normal ...................................................................................................... 38
Boundary Methods ................................................................................................................................ 38
Pick boundaries .............................................................................................................................. 39
Use the Boundary List dialog box................................................................................................... 39
Define a boundary curve ................................................................................................................ 40
Solve ambiguous solution created by selected boundaries ........................................................... 40
Rebound objects............................................................................................................................. 41
Boundary List Dialog Box ............................................................................................................... 42
Permission Group Behaviors between Tasks ....................................................................................... 46
Permission Group Behaviors Between Tasks ...................................................................................... 47
Permission Group Behaviors in Structural Manufacturing ............................................................. 51
Sketch 2D Best Practices ..................................................................................................................... 52

Marking Lines ............................................................................................................................................ 62

Marking ................................................................................................................................................. 62
Create a marking line by 2D projection .......................................................................................... 75
Create a marking line by intersection ............................................................................................. 76
Create a marking line by reference curve ...................................................................................... 78
Copy and paste a marking line ....................................................................................................... 80
Modify marking ............................................................................................................................... 81
Delete marking ............................................................................................................................... 81
Marking Folder Properties Dialog Box............................................................................................ 81
Marking Line Properties Dialog Box ............................................................................................... 82
Marking by Definition ............................................................................................................................ 87
Create a skid mark ......................................................................................................................... 87
Create a bilge keel mark................................................................................................................. 87
Create a block mark ....................................................................................................................... 88
Marking by Definition Dialog Box ................................................................................................... 88

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 4

 Contents

Margins ....................................................................................................................................................... 91
Fabrication Margin ................................................................................................................................ 91
Add fabrication margin.................................................................................................................... 97
Modify fabrication margin ............................................................................................................... 98
Copy and paste a constant fabrication margin ............................................................................... 99
Copy and paste an oblique fabrication margin ............................................................................... 99
Delete fabrication margin ............................................................................................................. 100
Fabrication Margin Properties Dialog Box .................................................................................... 100
Connect Fabrication Margin ................................................................................................................ 103
Add connected fabrication margin ................................................................................................ 106
Modify a connected fabrication margin......................................................................................... 106
Delete a connected fabrication margin ......................................................................................... 106
Margin Settings Dialog Box .......................................................................................................... 107
Margin Properties Dialog Box (Connect Fabrication Margin) ....................................................... 110
Margin By Assembly Connections ...................................................................................................... 113
Add a margin by assembly connections ....................................................................................... 115
Modify an assembly margin .......................................................................................................... 115
Delete an assembly margin .......................................................................................................... 115
Margin Properties Dialog Box (Margin By Assembly Connections) ............................................. 115
Assembly Margin Properties Dialog Box ...................................................................................... 118
Assembly Margin Child Properties Dialog Box ............................................................................. 118
Regional Margin .................................................................................................................................. 120
Add a regional margin .................................................................................................................. 123
Modify a regional margin .............................................................................................................. 123
Delete a regional margin .............................................................................................................. 124
Regional Margin Properties Dialog Box ....................................................................................... 124

Weld Compensation ................................................................................................................................ 125

Modify weld compensation.................................................................................................................. 127
Delete weld compensation .................................................................................................................. 127
Weld Compensation Settings Dialog Box ........................................................................................... 127
General Tab (Weld Compensation Properties Dialog Box).......................................................... 128
Configuration Tab ......................................................................................................................... 129
Notes Tab ..................................................................................................................................... 130

Shrinkage ................................................................................................................................................. 132

Shrinkage ............................................................................................................................................ 132
Add scaling by edge shrinkage .................................................................................................... 136
Add scaling by axis shrinkage ...................................................................................................... 136
Add by vector shrinkage ............................................................................................................... 137
Modify shrinkage .......................................................................................................................... 138
Copy and paste shrinkage ............................................................................................................ 138
Delete shrinkage........................................................................................................................... 139
Shrinkage Properties Dialog Box ................................................................................................. 139
Multi Shrinkage ................................................................................................................................... 142
Create shrinkage on multiple objects ........................................................................................... 143
Modify shrinkage on multiple objects ........................................................................................... 143
Delete shrinkage from multiple objects ........................................................................................ 144
Multiple Shrinkage Properties Dialog Box .................................................................................... 144

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 5

 Contents

Manufacturing Tab .................................................................................................................................. 147

Create a manufacturing tab ................................................................................................................ 150
Modify a manufacturing tab................................................................................................................. 150
Delete a manufacturing tab ................................................................................................................. 150
Select Tab Type Dialog Box ............................................................................................................... 151
Manufacturing Tab Properties Dialog Box .......................................................................................... 151
General Tab (Manufacturing Tab Properties Dialog Box) ............................................................ 151

Templates ................................................................................................................................................. 153

Plate Template .................................................................................................................................... 153
Create a plate or assembly template set ...................................................................................... 161
Modify a template set ................................................................................................................... 162
Copy and paste a template set..................................................................................................... 162
Delete a template set.................................................................................................................... 162
Plate Template Properties Dialog Box ......................................................................................... 162
Profile Face Template ......................................................................................................................... 169
Create a profile face template set ................................................................................................ 173
Profile Face Template Properties Dialog Box .............................................................................. 174
Tubular Member Template.................................................................................................................. 176
Create a tube template ................................................................................................................. 179
Modify a tube template ................................................................................................................. 179
Delete a tube template ................................................................................................................. 179
Tube and Edge Templates Properties Dialog Box ....................................................................... 179
Edge Template .................................................................................................................................... 184
Create an edge template .............................................................................................................. 186
Modify an edge template .............................................................................................................. 186
Delete an edge template .............................................................................................................. 187

Pin Jig ....................................................................................................................................................... 188

Create a pin jig .................................................................................................................................... 193
Modify a pin jig .................................................................................................................................... 194
Copy and paste a pin jig ..................................................................................................................... 194
Delete a pin jig .................................................................................................................................... 194
Supported Plate List Dialog Box ......................................................................................................... 195
Select Mfg Parts Dialog Box ............................................................................................................... 195
Remarking Lines Dialog Box............................................................................................................... 195
Pin Jig 3D View Dialog Box ................................................................................................................ 196
Pin Jig Properties Dialog Box ............................................................................................................. 202
General Tab (Pin Jig Properties Dialog Box) ............................................................................... 202
Relationships Tab ......................................................................................................................... 208
Configuration Tab ......................................................................................................................... 209
Notes Tab ..................................................................................................................................... 210

Manufacturing Plate ................................................................................................................................ 212

Generate a manufacturing plate ......................................................................................................... 213
Copy and paste a manufacturing plate ............................................................................................... 213
Modify a manufacturing plate .............................................................................................................. 214
Delete a manufacturing plate .............................................................................................................. 214

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 6

 Contents

Manufacturing Plate Properties Dialog Box ........................................................................................ 214

General Tab (Manufacturing Plate Properties Dialog Box) .......................................................... 214
Process Tab (Manufacturing Plate Properties Dialog Box) .......................................................... 219
Marking Tab (Manufacturing Plate Properties Dialog Box) .......................................................... 223
Cut/Mark Tab (Manufacturing Plate Properties Dialog Box) ........................................................ 226
Status Tab .................................................................................................................................... 226

Manufacturing Panel ............................................................................................................................... 227

Generate a manufacturing panel ........................................................................................................ 229
Display the plate parts in a manufacturing panel ................................................................................ 230
Modify a manufacturing panel ............................................................................................................. 231
Delete a manufacturing panel ............................................................................................................. 231
Panel Plate List Dialog Box................................................................................................................. 231
Manufacturing Panel Properties Dialog Box ....................................................................................... 232
General Tab (Manufacturing Panel Properties Dialog Box) ......................................................... 232
Process Tab (Manufacturing Panel Properties Dialog Box) ......................................................... 236
Marking Tab (Manufacturing Panel Properties Dialog Box) ......................................................... 240
Cut/Mark Tab (Manufacturing Panel Properties Dialog Box) ....................................................... 243

Manufacturing Profile.............................................................................................................................. 244

Generate a manufacturing profile ....................................................................................................... 247
Copy and paste a manufacturing profile ............................................................................................. 248
Modify a manufacturing profile ............................................................................................................ 248
Delete a manufacturing profile ............................................................................................................ 248
Enable and set weld compensation .................................................................................................... 248
Manufacturing Profile Properties Dialog Box ...................................................................................... 249
General Tab (Manufacturing Profile Properties Dialog Box) ........................................................ 249
Process Tab (Manufacturing Profile Properties Dialog Box) ........................................................ 252
Marking Tab (Manufacturing Profile Properties Dialog Box) ........................................................ 254
Nesting Tab (Manufacturing Profile Properties Dialog Box)......................................................... 255

Manufacturing Member ........................................................................................................................... 258

Generate a manufacturing member .................................................................................................... 261
Copy and paste a manufacturing member.......................................................................................... 261
Modify a manufacturing member ........................................................................................................ 262
Delete a manufacturing member......................................................................................................... 262
Enable and set weld compensation .................................................................................................... 262
Manufacturing Member Properties Dialog Box ................................................................................... 263
General Tab (Manufacturing Member Properties Dialog Box) ..................................................... 263
Process Tab (Manufacturing Member Properties Dialog Box) ..................................................... 267
Marking Tab (Manufacturing Member Properties Dialog Box) ..................................................... 268
Weld Compensation Settings Dialog Box ........................................................................................... 270
General Tab (Weld Compensation Properties Dialog Box).......................................................... 270
Configuration Tab ......................................................................................................................... 271
Notes Tab ..................................................................................................................................... 272

Part Viewers and Editors ........................................................................................................................ 274

Part Monitor......................................................................................................................................... 274

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 7

 Contents

Display manufacturing plate XML text .......................................................................................... 288

Display manufacturing plate graphically ....................................................................................... 289
Display manufacturing profiles XML text ...................................................................................... 290
Display manufacturing profiles graphically ................................................................................... 290
Display manufacturing template XML text .................................................................................... 290
Display manufacturing template graphically ................................................................................. 291
Part Monitor Dialog Box................................................................................................................ 292
Annotation Editor................................................................................................................................. 293
Create an annotation .................................................................................................................... 300
Save annotation changes to the database ................................................................................... 301
Edit the annotation for a part ........................................................................................................ 301
Increase the size of annotation .................................................................................................... 301
Decrease the size of annotation ................................................................................................... 302
Rotate annotation ......................................................................................................................... 302
Place Annotation Dialog Box ........................................................................................................ 303
Part Editor ........................................................................................................................................... 303
Open the Part Editor environment ................................................................................................ 304
Save a modified part to the database........................................................................................... 306
Validate an edited part.................................................................................................................. 306
Change the thickness direction of a marking ............................................................................... 306
Change the flange direction of a marking..................................................................................... 306
Change the marking side of a marking......................................................................................... 306
Trim markings ............................................................................................................................... 307
Split markings ............................................................................................................................... 307
Offset a marking ........................................................................................................................... 307
Extend a marking.......................................................................................................................... 307
Trim a contour .............................................................................................................................. 308
Close the corners of a contour ..................................................................................................... 308
Split a contour............................................................................................................................... 308
Extend a contour .......................................................................................................................... 308
Zoom in on the features of a contour ........................................................................................... 308
Change the size of an annotation................................................................................................. 309
Rotate an annotation .................................................................................................................... 309
Rotate multiple annotations .......................................................................................................... 309
Change the attributes of a part ..................................................................................................... 309
Specify which layers display in the Part Editor ............................................................................. 310
Part Editor Environment ............................................................................................................... 310

Manufacturing Service Manager ............................................................................................................ 319

Review a manufacturing object ........................................................................................................... 321
Update a manufacturing object ........................................................................................................... 321
Review or update a set of objects selected by a filter ........................................................................ 321
Detail Review a manufacturing object ................................................................................................ 322
Review Dialog Box .............................................................................................................................. 322
Selection of Possible Report Data Dialog Box.................................................................................... 323

New (Block) Assembly ............................................................................................................................ 324

Create a new assembly or assembly block ........................................................................................ 329
Set assembly user-defined planar manufacturing orientation ............................................................ 330

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 8

 Contents

Set assembly manufacturing orientation by object ............................................................................. 331

Edit an assembly or assembly block ................................................................................................... 332
Assembly Properties Dialog Box......................................................................................................... 332
General Tab (Assembly Properties Dialog Box) .......................................................................... 332

Batch Service Manager ........................................................................................................................... 337

Schedule a manufacturing service manager batch job ....................................................................... 337
Delete a manufacturing service manager batch job ........................................................................... 338

Submit Batch Job .................................................................................................................................... 339

Run a detailing batch process............................................................................................................. 339
Run a production batch process ......................................................................................................... 340
Run a custom batch process .............................................................................................................. 340
Add a custom batch process............................................................................................................... 341
Generic Batch Command Dialog Box ................................................................................................. 342
Batch Process Selection Dialog Box .................................................................................................. 343

Manufacturing Services .......................................................................................................................... 344

Run a custom processing command................................................................................................... 346
Stiffeners Diagonal Measurement....................................................................................................... 346
Diagonal Lengths and Mounting Angle Dialog Box ...................................................................... 347
Select Connected Object .................................................................................................................... 350
Display connected objects ............................................................................................................ 351
Dependent and Connected Objects Dialog Box ........................................................................... 351
Macro Editor ........................................................................................................................................ 352
Macro Editor Dialog Box ............................................................................................................... 352
Copy Structure .................................................................................................................................... 354
Copy Structure Properties Dialog Box.......................................................................................... 357
Generate Frame System from Pin Jig ................................................................................................ 358
Generate a frame system from Pin Jig ......................................................................................... 359
Select System Dialog Box ............................................................................................................ 360
Shell Plate Unfold Preview.................................................................................................................. 360

Manufacturing Export ............................................................................................................................. 363

Export to Nesting ................................................................................................................................ 363
Create a MFG data file ................................................................................................................. 364
Structural Manufacturing XML Schema........................................................................................ 365
Profile XML Schema ..................................................................................................................... 365
Managed Export for Smart Production ............................................................................................... 365
Managed Export for DSTV .................................................................................................................. 365
Managed Export Dialog Box ......................................................................................................... 366
Managed Export .................................................................................................................................. 367

Nesting Report ......................................................................................................................................... 368

Run the Nesting Report command...................................................................................................... 368
Nesting Report Dialog Box.................................................................................................................. 369

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 9

 Contents

Check Manufacturability ......................................................................................................................... 371

Check objects for manufacturability .................................................................................................... 372
Schedule check manufacturability using Batch Services ................................................................... 372
Manufacturability Checking Settings Dialog Box ................................................................................ 373
Show Manufacturability Inconsistencies Dialog Box........................................................................... 374

Pre-nesting ............................................................................................................................................... 379

Pre-nesting Manufacturing Plates ....................................................................................................... 379
Pre-nesting Manufacturing Profiles ..................................................................................................... 382
Pre-nesting Setup ............................................................................................................................... 386

Structural Manufacturing Error Log Enable ......................................................................................... 387

Shrinkage Tab (Structural Manufacturing Error Log Enable Dialog Box) ........................................... 387
Part Monitor Tab (Structural Manufacturing Error Log Enable Dialog Box) ....................................... 388
Service Manager Tab (Structural Manufacturing Error Log Enable Dialog Box) ................................ 389
Unfolding Tab (Structural Manufacturing Error Log Enable Dialog Box) ............................................ 390
Performance Tab (Structural Manufacturing Error Log Enable Dialog Box) ...................................... 390
Geometry Tab (Structural Manufacturing Error Log Enable Dialog Box) ........................................... 393

2D Symbol Logging Settings.................................................................................................................. 394

Alma Act/Cut Nesting .............................................................................................................................. 395

Glossary ................................................................................................................................................... 396

Index ......................................................................................................................................................... 414

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 10

Preface
This document is a user's guide for the Structural Manufacturing functionality of Intergraph Smart®
3D and provides command reference information and procedural instructions.

Documentation Comments
For the latest support information for this product, comments or suggestions about this
documentation, and documentation updates for supported software versions, please visit
Intergraph Smart® Support ([Link]

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 11

What's New in Structural Manufacturing
The following changes have been made to the Structural Manufacturing task.
Version 2018 (12.0)
 A new option, Production Option, has been added to Attribute Viewer of Pin Jig Setup
View. For more information, see Pin Jig 3D View Dialog Box (on page 196). (P2 CP:285706)
 Added new unfolding algorithms developed by Seoul National University (SNU) for
unwrapping hull plates. For more information, see Process Tab (Manufacturing Plate
Properties Dialog Box) (on page 219). (P2 CP:290957)
 Added Assembly to the Template Type list so that you can create one template set for
multiple plates. For more information, see Plate Template (on page 153). (P2 CP:297971)
 The software now supports placing a series of bridges to specific plate cutting contours such
as an opening or a feature. For more information, see Cut/Mark Tab (Manufacturing Plate
Properties Dialog Box) (on page 226). (P2 CP:302406)
 You can now edit the name of the plate template. For more information, see Template Tab
(Template Properties Dialog Box) (on page 165). (P2 CP:301809)
 Added the Weld Compensation command to create and edit weld compensation objects. For
more information, see Weld Compensation (on page 125). (P2 CP:308463)
 Provided weld compensation property descriptions. For more information, see General Tab
(Weld Compensation Properties Dialog Box) (on page 128). (P2 CP:307400)
 Added a new option for storing primary, secondary, and tertiary factors with user-defined
units. Previously, the software automatically converted input data to system-defined units
during shrinkage. The new option allows you to select user-defined units so that the software
converts input data to user-defined units instead of using system units. For more information,
see Shrinkage (on page 132) and Multiple Shrinkage Properties Dialog Box (on page 144).
(P2 CP:314404)
 Added information about the 2D Symbol Logging Settings utility. For more information, see
2D Symbol Logging Settings (on page 394). (P3 CP:299000)
 The Nesting Report command provides an interface for reviewing and updating nesting data
in the Smart 3D model. For more information, see Nesting Report (on page 368). (P3
CP:187191)
 A new option, Apply with Supported Side, has been added to Pin Jig Properties. For more
information, see General Tab (Pin Jig Properties Dialog Box) (on page 202). (P3 CP:305129)
 You can now select all common part managers or all manufacturing objects from the Filters
list on the Manufacturing Service Manager ribbon, and use the Group option to use all
connected parts. For more information, see Manufacturing Service Manager (on page 319).
(P3 CP:306638)
 Added information about changes made to Pre-nesting. For more information, see
Pre-nesting Manufacturing Plates (on page 379) and Pre-nesting Manufacturing Profiles (on
page 382). (P3 CP:308656)
 Updated the option descriptions on the Managed Export dialog box. For more information,
see Managed Export Dialog Box (on page 366). (P3 CP:308561)

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 12

 What's New in Structural Manufacturing

 Added a new Generate Frame System from Pin Jig command to Manufacturing Services.
For more information, see Generate Frame System from Pin Jig (on page 358). (P3
CP:308742)
 Added Is Assembly Template and Type, to the General tab of the Assembly Template
Properties dialog box and the Tube and Edge Template Properties dialog box. For more
information, see General Tab (Template Properties Dialog Box) (on page 163) and General
Tab (Tube and Edge Template Properties Dialog Box) (on page 180). (P3 CP:314040)
 Updated available Manufacturing Profile properties. For more information, see General Tab
(Manufacturing Profile Properties Dialog Box) (on page 249). (P3 CP:317375)
 The Shell Plate Unfold Preview command has been added to the Tools > Manufacturing
Services sub-menu. For more information, see Shell Plate Unfold Preview (on page 360). (P3
CP:323715)
 The software now supports Weld Compensation on light parts only if pre-nesting is enabled.
For more information, see Pre-nesting (on page 379). (P3 CP:328757)

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 13

SECTION 1

Structural Manufacturing
The Structural Manufacturing task creates manufacturing data from the model. This data is used
to create and construct the physical parts of the model. This is accomplished by adding
manufacturing-specific information to the detailed parts. After that, the manufacturing parts and
supporting parts are generated by rules.
The manufacturing-specific information includes:
 Fabrication Margins
 Assembly Margins
 Shrinkage
 Manual marking lines (The majority of marking lines are generated automatically by rules.)
 Manufacturing Tabs
The manufacturing supporting parts include:
 Templates
 Pin jigs
Manufacturing data is also controlled by applying rule-based processes and rule-based
automated marking on manufacturing parts, such as:
 Tabs and bridges
 Plate bevels
 Unfolding algorithms for curved plates
 Roll lines
 Location marks for attached structure
 Reference plane marks
Manufacturing data is output in several ways:
 XML, which can be read by external software such as nesting software.
 Profile sketches for profile parts, created in the Drawings and Reports task. For more
information, see the Drawings and Reports User's Guide.
 Template set drawings and reports, created in the Drawings and Reports task. For more
information, see the Drawings and Reports User's Guide.
 Pin jig drawings and reports, created in the Drawings and Reports task. For more information,
see the Drawings and Reports User's Guide.
You can start the Structural Manufacturing task by clicking Tasks > Structural Manufacturing.
The Structural Manufacturing task has these commands:

Select - Used to select objects in the model. For more information, see Selecting

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 14

 Structural Manufacturing

Objects (on page 19).

Marking - Adds manual marking lines to detailed parts, such as Block Control, Painting
Line, and Robot. For more information, see Marking (on page 62).

Marking by Definition - Creates marking lines based on symbol definition. For more
information, see Marking by Definition (on page 87).

Fabrication Margin - Adds fabrication margin to detailed parts at plate edges or profile
ends. You can place constant value margins as well as oblique margins. These margins
extend along the full edge of the plate or at the end of a profile that you select. For more
information, see Fabrication Margin (on page 91).

Connect Fabrication Margin - Selects all of the plates or profiles bounded to the plate
system or part, and selects all the faces at the bounding plate systems or parts to place
margins. For more information, see Connect Fabrication Margin (on page 103).

Margin by Assembly Connections - Selects all of the plates or profiles bounded to

the plate system or part, or selects al of the plates or profiles bounded to an assembly,
and then selects all the faces at the bounding plate systems or parts to place margins.
For more information, see Margin By Assembly Connections (on page 113).

Regional Margin - Adds a margin over regions of an edge. You can create multiple
regional margins along a single edge. For more information, see Regional Margin (on
page 120).

Weld Compensation - Adds weld compensation along the entire edge, or regions of an
edge. You can create multiple weld compensations along a single edge. For more
information, see Weld Compensation (on page 125).

Shrinkage - Adds extra material to detailed parts to account for weld shrinkage by
scaling either along the edge or by axis. For more information, see Shrinkage (on page
132).

Multi Shrinkage - Stretches multiple manufacturing parts to account for steel

shrinkage during welding. For more information, see Multi Shrinkage (on page 142).

Manufacturing Tab - Adds manufacturing tabs to detailed parts at plate edges. You
can place tabs of various types. For more information, see Manufacturing Tab (on page
147).

Plate and Profile Face Template - Creates a set of templates for detailed plate and
profile parts at positions that you specify. The command generates the template shapes
and template table data. For more information, see Plate Template (on page 153) and
Profile Face Template (on page 169).

Tubular Member Template - Creates and modifies templates to check the curvature of
tube member end cuts. For more information, see Tubular Member Template (on page
176).

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 15

 Structural Manufacturing

Edge Template - Creates and modifies templates to check the curvature of edges. For
more information, see Edge Template (on page 184).

Pin Jig - Creates a set of pin jigs for detailed plate parts or assemblies at defined
positions that you specify. For more information, see Pin Jig (on page 188).

Manufacturing Plate - Creates a two-dimensional wireframe representation of a

detailed plate that has manual and automated rule-based manufacturing data such as
margins, shrinkage, marking lines, beveling, and so on, applied. For more information,
see Manufacturing Plate (on page 212).

Manufacturing Panel - Creates a two-dimensional wireframe representation for

detailed plate parts combined into a panel to support panel-line production. For more
information, see Manufacturing Panel (on page 227).

Manufacturing Profile - Creates a two-dimensional wireframe representation of a

detailed profile that has manual and automated rule-based manufacturing data such as
margins, shrinkage, marking lines, beveling, and so on, applied. For more information,
see Manufacturing Profile (on page 244).

Manufacturing Member - Creates a two-dimensional wireframe representation of a

detailed member that has manual and automated rule-based manufacturing data such
as margins, shrinkage, markings lines, beveling, and so on, applied. For more
information, see Manufacturing Member (on page 258).

Part Monitor - Displays the manufacturing part as XML or as graphics interpreted from
XML, in order to preview manufacturing data before it is output. The XML is created as
the command is executed, but is not saved in the database. For more information, see
Part Monitor (on page 274).

Annotation Editor - Moves annotations to avoid overlap, deletes unnecessary

annotation, and adds annotations for clarity during production. For more information,
see Annotation Editor (on page 293).

Part Editor - Edits manufactured parts. You can add markings, contours, and
annotations to manufactured parts, and then save those changes to the database. For
more information, see Part Editor (on page 303).

Manufacturing Service Manager - Updates or reviews objects. For more information,

see Manufacturing Service Manager (on page 319).

New (Block) Assembly - Designs assemblies and assembly blocks and defines
properties for their associated building method. For more information, see New (Block)
Assembly (on page 324).

Batch Service Manager - Schedules a service manager batch job. This command is
available on the right-click menu in the Workspace Explorer for Blocks and
Assemblies. For more information, see Batch Service Manager (on page 337).

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 16

 Structural Manufacturing

Submit Batch Job - Runs batch processes using the Intergraph Batch Services
framework. This command is available on the Tools menu. For more information, see
Submit Batch Job (on page 339).

Custom Processing - Runs custom developed (Visual Basic) reporting software. This
command is available on the Tools > Manufacturing Services menu. For more
information, see Manufacturing Services (on page 344).

Stiffeners Diagonal Measurement - Provides a tool to extract distance information

between two stiffeners or a pin jig for accuracy verification. This tool also provides
information on mounting angles. This command is located on the Tools >
Manufacturing Services menu. For more information, see Stiffeners Diagonal
Measurement (on page 346).

Select Connected Object - Provides a tool to check which objects are connected to a
selected object based on physical connections between the parts. This allows you to
check if a given manufacturing plate or profile is out of date. This command displays the
same list as that shown on the Status tab when you modify a single manufacturing
plate or profile. This command is located on the Tools > Manufacturing Services
menu. For more information, see Select Connected Object (on page 350).

Macro Editor - Provides a tool to view, edit, and overwrite generated macros placed on
profile and member parts. The software displays profile and member parts and the
macros generated for the parts in a grid. You can edit macro attributes in the property
grid, or apply a different macro to a part. You can also reset the definition and attributes
of a macro to the rule-selected values. This command is located on the Tools >
Manufacturing Services menu. For more information, see Macro Editor (on page
352).

Copy Structure - Provides a tool to generate new plate geometry by copying from an
original plate with advanced plate system marks representing the connected structure.
This allows you to product the manufacturing data bypassing any problems from the
original model data set. This command also provides a tool to generate a surface from
plates that can be taken to GAR and repaired before it is used for manufacturing data.
This command is located on the Tools > Manufacturing Services menu. For more
information, see Copy Structure (on page 354).

Generate Frame System from Pin Jig - Generates a frame system based on pin jig
properties. The command creates a coordinate system with the origin at (H0,V0) pin
position, and creates frames at the pin rows and columns along the x-axis and y-axis.
Along the z-axis, the frames are created at the pin jig base plane, at maximum and
minimum pin heights as defined in the catalog. This command is located on the Tools >
Manufacturing Services menu. For more information, see Generate Frame System
from Pin Jig (on page 358).

Export to Nesting - Translates the geometry of selected manufacturing data exchange

formats and stores this information in a specified file. The manufacturing data is not
saved in the Model database. This command is located on the Tools > Manufacturing
Export menu. For more information, see Export to Nesting (on page 363).

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 17

 Structural Manufacturing

Managed Export for Smart Production - Exports both the DSTV and XML data. This
export uses the [Link] default configuration file. This command is
located on the Tools > Manufacturing Export menu. For more information, see
Managed Export for Smart Production (on page 365).

Managed Export for DSTV - Exports the DSTV data for the selected assembly, and
manages the .nc1 files that the software generates. This export uses the
[Link] default configuration file. This command is located on the Tools >
Manufacturing Export menu. For more information, see Managed Export for DSTV
(on page 365).

Managed Export - Creates a neutral export. This export does not have an associated
configuration file. Instead, it uses the configuration file that you select. This export is
intended to be used with custom configuration files. This command is located on the
Tools > Manufacturing Export menu. For more information, see Managed Export (on
page 367).

Check Manufacturability - Analyzes parts in the current workspace and reports the
objects that will be difficult or impossible to manufacture. This command is available on
the Tools menu. For more information, see Check Manufacturability (on page 371).

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 18

 Structural Manufacturing

Selecting Objects
All objects in the Structural Manufacturing task have properties that you can edit. Using the Select
command on the vertical toolbar, you select the type of object that you want to edit or work
with.

An important part of the Select command is the Locate Filter box that appears on the ribbon. The
Locate Filter box contains the available, pre-defined filters for the Select command. When you
choose a filter in the Locate Filter box, the software allows you to select only the filtered objects in
a graphic view and in the Workspace Explorer. For example, if you select Plate Parts, you can
select only plate parts in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer.
When you select multiple objects, you can change the properties that those objects
have in common. If the value of the property is the same for the objects that you have selected,
that value displays in the ribbon bar. If the values are different, the box for that value is blank.
Changing the value of a property makes that the value for all of the selected objects.
The Structural Manufacturing task includes these filters:
All Manufacturing Entities

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 19

 Structural Manufacturing

Allows you to select any manufacturing object.

Assemblies
Limits your selection in the model or in the Workspace Explorer to assemblies.
Control Points
Limits your selection in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer to control points.
Construction Graphics
Limits the selection of items to construction graphics.
Detailing -- Bracket
Limits your selection in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer to brackets.
Detailing -- Collar
Limits your selection in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer to collars.
Detailing -- Feature
Limits your selection in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer to features.
Detailing -- Member
Limits your selection in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer to members.
Detailing -- Physical Connection
Limits your selection in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer to physical connections.
Detailing -- Plate
Limits your selection in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer to plate parts.
Detailing -- Profile
Limits your selection in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer to profiles.
Geometric Construction
Limits your selection in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer to objects created using
Geometric Construction.
Manufactured -- Member
Limits your selection in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer to manufacturing
members.
Manufactured - Panel
Limits your selection in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer to manufacturing
panels.
Manufactured -- Plate
Limits your selection in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer to manufacturing plates.
Manufactured -- Profile
Limits your selection in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer to manufacturing
profiles.
Margin -- Assembly

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 20

 Structural Manufacturing

Limits your selection in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer to assembly margins.
Margin -- Part
Limits your selection in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer to part margins.
Marking
Limits your selection in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer to marking lines.
Pin Jig -- Assembly
Limits your selection in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer to assembly pin jigs.
Pin Jig -- Part
Limits your selection in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer to part pin jigs.
Shrinkage -- Assembly
Limits your selection in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer to assembly shrinkage.
Shrinkage -- Part
Limits your selection in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer to part shrinkage.
Tab
Limits your selection in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer to tabs.
Template -- Assembly
Limits your selection in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer to assembly templates.
Template -- Part
Limits your selection in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer to part templates.
Weld Compensation
Limits your selection in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer to weld compensation.
All
Allows you to select any object in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer.

Inside
Selects all objects entirely inside the fence.

Inside/Overlapping
Selects all objects entirely inside the fence and those objects outside but touching the fence at
some point.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 21

 Structural Manufacturing

Icons in the Workspace Explorer

Analysis Folder

Analysis Model

Assembly

Assembly Connection

Bearing Plate - not detailed

Bearing Plate - detailed

Bearing Plate - detailed, manufactured

Bearing Plate - group member

Bearing Plate - group member, manufactured

Bearing Plate - group master

Bearing Plate - group master, manufactured

Block

Boundary Condition

Bracket System or Leaf System

Bracket Part - not detailed

Bracket Part - detailed

Bracket Part - detailed, manufactured

Bracket Part - group member

Bracket Part - group member, manufactured

Bracket Part - group master

Bracket Part - group master, manufactured

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 22

 Structural Manufacturing

Cable Nozzle on Equipment

Cabletray Nozzle on Equipment

Collar Plate - not detailed

Collar Plate - detailed

Collar Plate - detailed, manufactured

Collar Plate - group member

Collar Plate - group member, manufactured

Collar Plate - group master

Collar Plate - group master, manufactured

Common Part Manager

Common Part Group

Common Part Group and Manufactured

Common Part Group and Standard

Common Part Group, Standard and Manufactured

Common Part Group and Out of Date

Common Part Folder

Common Part Folder Unique Parts

Common Part Folder Unique Parts Out of Date

Conduit Nozzle on Equipment

Coordinate System

Coordinate System Axis

Coordinate System Grid Plane

Coordinate System Elevation Plane

Coordinate System Radial Plane

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 23

 Structural Manufacturing

Coordinate System Radial Cylinder

Curved Member Part - not detailed

Curved Member Part - light

Curved Member Part - light, manufactured

Curved Member Part - detailed

Curved Member Part - detailed, manufactured

Curved Member Part - group member

Curved Member Part - group member, manufactured

Curved Member Part - group master

Curved Member Part - group master, manufactured

Designed Equipment Component

Designed Equipment

Designed Handrail

Designed Member - not detailed

Designed Member - light

Designed Member - light, manufactured

Designed Member - detailed

Designed Member - detailed, manufactured

Designed Member - group member

Designed Member - group member, manufactured

Designed Member - group master

Designed Member - group master, manufactured

Edge Treatment

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 24

 Structural Manufacturing

Equipment

Equipment Component

Equipment Foundation

Equipment Shape

Equipment Solid

Equipment Solid - Added

Equipment Solid - Subtracted

Equipment Solid - Suppressed

Feature (includes corner feature, edge feature, face feature, slot, and so on)

Footing

Footing Components

Foundation Port

Frame Connection

Handrail

HVAC Nozzle on equipment

Insert Plate - not detailed

Insert Plate - detailed

Insert Plate - detailed, manufactured

Insert Plate - group member

Insert Plate - group member, manufactured

Insert Plate - group master

Insert Plate - group master, manufactured

Ladder

Linear Member Part - not detailed

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 25

 Structural Manufacturing

Linear Member Part - light

Linear Member Part - light, manufactured

Linear Member Part - detailed

Linear Member Part - detailed, manufactured

Linear Member Part - group member

Linear Member Part - group member, manufactured

Linear Member Part - group master

Linear Member Part - group master, manufactured

Load Case

Load Combination

Member Assembly Connection Cutback Feature

Member Assembly Connection Plate Part

Member Assembly Connection

Member Fireproofing

Member Part

Member Split Connection

Member System

Opening

Panel - manufactured

Physical Connection

Pipe Nozzle on Equipment

Planning Joint - butt weld

Planning Joint - lap weld

Planning Joint - tee weld

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 26

 Structural Manufacturing

Planning Joint Folder

Plate Part - not detailed

Plate Part - light

Plate Part - light, manufactured

Plate Part - detailed

Plate Part - detailed, manufactured

Plate Part - detailed, manufactured, with manufacturing part assembly child

Plate Part - group member

Plate Part - group member, manufactured

Plate Part - group master

Plate Part - group master, manufactured

Plate System or leaf system

Profile Edge Reinforcement System or Leaf System

Profile Edge Reinforcement Part

Profile Edge Reinforcement Part - light

Profile Edge Reinforcement Part - light, manufactured

Profile Edge Reinforcement Part - detailed

Profile Edge Reinforcement Part detailed, manufactured

Profile Edge Reinforcement Part - group member

Profile Edge Reinforcement Part - group member, manufactured

Profile Edge Reinforcement Part - group master

Profile Edge Reinforcement Part - group master, manufactured

Seam - Design

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 27

 Structural Manufacturing

Seam - Intersection

Seam - Planning

Seam - Straking

Slab Assembly Connection

Slab

Stair

Standalone Plate Part - not detailed

Standalone Plate Part - detailed

Standalone Plate Part - detailed, manufactured

Standalone Plate Part - group member

Standalone Plate Part - group member, manufactured

Standalone Plate Part - group master

Standalone Plate Part - group master, manufactured

Standalone Profile Edge Reinforcement Part - not detailed

Standalone Profile Edge Reinforcement Part - detailed

Standalone Profile Edge Reinforcement Part - detailed, manufactured

Standalone Profile Edge Reinforcement Part - group member

Standalone Profile Edge Reinforcement Part - group member, manufactured

Standalone Profile Edge Reinforcement Part - group master

Standalone Profile Edge Reinforcement Part - group master, manufactured

Standalone Stiffener Part - not detailed

Standalone Stiffener Part - detailed

Standalone Stiffener Part - detailed, manufactured

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 28

 Structural Manufacturing

Standalone Stiffener Part - group member

Standalone Stiffener Part - group member, manufactured

Standalone Stiffener Part - group master

Standalone Stiffener Part - group master, manufactured

Stiffener Part - not detailed

Stiffener Part - light

Stiffener Part - light, manufactured

Stiffener Part - detailed

Stiffener Part - detailed, manufactured

Stiffener Part - group member

Stiffener Part - group member, manufactured

Stiffener Part - group master

Stiffener Part - group master, manufactured

Stiffener System or Leaf System

Wall Assembly Connection

Wall Part

Wall Run

Wall System

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 29

 Structural Manufacturing

Icon Relationships
The following table describes the relationships indicated by the icons in the Workspace Explorer.
In general, there is a base icon for each type of entity. This base icon is then embellished
depending upon the role that entity plays in the model. Using the system plate part as an example:

- Base icon for plate parts. Base parts use blue icons

- Light (not detailed) plate part. Light parts use white icons. Not all entities have this version.

- Light plate part that has been manufactured. The plus symbol indicates that the part has
manufacturing data. This only occurs if the detail part is deleted after manufacturing has been
done.

- Detailed plate part without manufacturing data. Detailed parts use red icons.

- Detailed plate part with manufacturing data. The plus symbol indicates that the part has
manufacturing data.
Common part grouping is also indicated by the icons. Under common part grouping, a master part
is used as the basis for deciding commonality. Other parts that compare themselves to the master
part are part of that common part group.
Selecting a grouped part for manufacturing automatically transfers the selection to the master
part. When you manufacture the master part, all corresponding parts in the group are also
manufactured. However, only the master part contains the manufacturing object.

- Detailed member of the common group. Member entities display a blue background.

- Detailed and manufactured member of the common group.

- Detailed master part of the common group. Master entities display a yellow background.

- Detailed and manufactured master part of the common group.

GPartAsAssembly

Group Member,
Group Member
manufactured,

Group master,
manufactured

manufactured

manufactured

manufactured
Group master
HasMFBearin
Detailed,
,
Detailed
Light,

Child
Light
Base

Bearing Plate

N/A N/A N/A

Bracket Part

N/A N/A N/A

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 30

 Structural Manufacturing

GPartAsAssembly

Group Member,
Group Member
manufactured,

Group master,
manufactured

manufactured

manufactured

manufactured
Group master
HasMFBearin
Detailed,
,
Detailed
Light,

Child
Light
Base

Bearing Plate

Collar Plate

N/A N/A N/A

Insert Plate

N/A N/A N/A

Standalone Plate Part

N/A N/A N/A

System Plate Part

Standalone Stiffener Part

N/A N/A N/A

System Profile Edge Reinforcement Part

N/A

Standalone Profile Edge Reinforcement Part

N/A N/A N/A

System Stiffener Part

N/A

Linear Member Part

N/A

Curved Member Part

N/A

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 31

 Structural Manufacturing

GPartAsAssembly

Group Member,
Group Member
manufactured,

Group master,
manufactured

manufactured

manufactured

manufactured
Group master
HasMFBearin
Detailed,
,
Detailed
Light,

Child
Light
Base

Bearing Plate

Designed Member

N/A

Split Notification
When a seam is added, deleted, or modified, the plate or profile systems and parts split by the
seam are affected. The software notifies different tasks to transfer attributes and objects to the
new systems and parts. The Molded Forms, Structural Detailing, Planning, Hole Management,
and Structural Manufacturing tasks are affected by split notification.
The software uses split notification when:
 A design or planning seam is added and Execute Split is run in the Molded Forms task.
 A design or planning seam that has already been split is deleted or modified in the Molded
Forms task.
 An intersection seam is added and split when Execute Split is run in the Molded Forms task.
 A profile or plate system creating an intersection seam is deleted or modified in the Molded
Forms task.
 A planning seam is added when Manage Block Intersections is run and an intersecting
part is set to Split or Offset in the Planning task.
 A planning seam is deleted when Manage Block Intersections is run and an
intersecting part is set to Intersected or Assigned in the Planning task.
 A planning seam is modified when the cutting plane of a block is modified in the Planning task.

Identifying Seams in Workspace Explorer

You can identify the type of seam in the Workspace Explorer by the icon.

 Design seams

 Planning seams

 Straking seams

 Intersection seams

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 32

 Structural Manufacturing

Delete a seam
If you delete or rebound a seam, the software deletes leaf systems and parts and creates new leaf
system and parts.
Molded Forms properties and material information are transferred from the first system (as
defined by the software) to the new system. The default naming rule is used to name the new leaf
system. Logical connections that crossed the split are replaced by a new connection with the
same properties as the first system.
Structural Detailing properties and features are transferred to the new part. If one part is detailed
and the other is not, the new part is detailed.

Hole features are transferred to the new part. The parent system of a hole feature is:
 A plate part if a cut is applied only to a single part.
 A root plate system if the cuts are applied to multiple plate parts.
The structural hole fittings in the Hole Management task are placed on the To Do List only if a split
passes through a hole trace.
Block and assembly assignments in the Planning task are transferred. If the original parts were in
the same assembly or block, then the new part is placed in that assembly or block. If the original
parts were in different assemblies, then the new part is placed in the assembly last used by split
notification.
Manufacturing parts are updated using the Manufacturing Service Manager.
Connections to ladders, stairs, handrails, members, hangers, and equipment are transferred to
the new part.

Plane Methods
You must often define planes used for object surfaces and sketching planes. Usually, but not
necessarily, these planes are based from an existing plate or from a grid or reference plane
created using the Grids task. The following methods define planes:
Offset from Plane
Defines a plane at a specified offset distance from another plane. An offset distance of 0
defines a coincident plane.
Plane by Point and Vector

Defines a plane using a vector normal to the plane being defined. A third point defines the

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 33

 Structural Manufacturing

plane position along the vector.

Plane by Three Points

Defines a plane using three points that you identify in the model.

What do you want to do?

 Define a coincident plane (on page 34)
 Define an offset plane (on page 35)
 Define a plane using a point and a normal vector (on page 36)
 Define a plane using three points (on page 37)

Define a coincident plane

1. Click By Plane or Offset Plane .
In Hole Management, click Coincident Plane .
2. In the model or Workspace Explorer, select a reference plane, a grid plane, or a planar plate
system.
A preview of the selected plane displays. The local coordinate system of the plane displays at
the plane's center.

 You create reference planes in the Grids task by selecting Ship in the Grid Type box of the
Grid Wizard. For this plane method, you can select reference planes in the Workspace
Explorer or in a graphic view.

 You create grid planes in the Grids task by selecting Grids in the Grid Type box of the Grid
Wizard. For this plane method, you can best select grid planes in the Workspace Explorer.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 34

 Structural Manufacturing

 For more information, see Create Coordinate System (Grid Wizard) in the Grids User's Guide.

Define an offset plane

1. Click By Plane or Offset Plane .
2. In the model or Workspace Explorer, select the base plane from which to offset the new
plane. The base plane can be a reference plane, a grid plane, or a planar plate system.
A preview of the selected plane displays. The local coordinate system of the plane displays at
the plane's center.

3. In the Offset box, type the offset distance from the plane and press TAB.
The plane moves to the new location.
-OR-
4. Graphically define the offset:
a. Click Offset Lock .
The option changes to unlocked .
b. Move the pointer to the required location and click.
The plane and plane coordinate system move to the new location, Offset Lock
changes to locked , and the offset value displays in the Offset box.
c. If an adjustment to the offset is needed, type a new value in the Offset box.
5. To move the plane independent of its previous definition, see Move a defined plane.

 You can graphically define the offset with the best precision by also using PinPoint. For more
information, see PinPoint in the Common User's Guide.
 By moving the pointer back and forth over the base plane in the graphic view, you can change
the offset direction. You can also change the direction by changing the sign in the Offset box.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 35

 Structural Manufacturing

 When Offset Lock is set to locked , the Offset value does not change when the pointer
moves.

Define plane using angle from plane

1. Click Angle from Plane .
2. In the model or Workspace Explorer, select the base plane from which to angle the plane
that you are defining. This plane can be a planar plate system, face port of a plate port, or a
grid plane.
3. Select a rotation axis. The rotation axis must be parallel to the surface of the selected plane.
The rotation axis can be a linear seam, profile system, landing curve, system edge or
connection.
4. In the Angle box, specify the rotation angle of the plane relative to the selected base plane.

Define a plane using a point and a normal vector

1. Click Plane by Point and Vector .
2. Select a vector in the model that is normal to the required plane. The vector can be any
linear geometry that is part of the construction of a model object, such as a plate system edge
or a profile system landing curve. Use QuickPick to select a line geometry element.

3. Click the Line geometry element.

The selected geometry highlights in yellow.

4. Move the cursor to a point that is on the required plane, and then click.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 36

 Structural Manufacturing

A preview of the plane and its local U_V_N coordinate system displays. The plane is
coincident with the point and normal to the vector.

5. To move the plane independent of its previous definition, see Move a defined plane.
You can graphically define the point with the best precision by also using PinPoint. For
more information, see PinPoint in the Common User's Guide.

Define a plane using three points

1. Click Plane by Three Points .
2. Specify on the first point that defines the plane.
3. Specify the second point that defines the plane.

4. Specify the third point that defines the plane.

 You can define points on the surfaces, edges, and corners of systems and parts. You can
control the types of points by using Tools > Options. For more information, see SmartSketch
Tab (Options Dialog Box) in the Common User's Guide.
 You can define points on grid planes, especially at intersections.

You can control the types of points using Tools > Options. For more information, see
SmartSketch Tab (Options Dialog Box) in the Common User's Guide.
In Molded Forms, define parametric points by using Insert > Topological Points. For more
information, see Topological Points (Insert Menu).

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 37

 Structural Manufacturing

Define plane by vectors normal

1. Click Plane by Vectors Normal .
2. In the model or Workspace Explorer, click the plane to which the new plane is normal.
The plane can be a planar plate system, a face port of a plate part, or a grid plane.
3. Specify the first point that defines the vector.
4. Specify the second point that defines the vector.

 You can define points on the surfaces, edges, and corners of systems and parts. You can
control the types of points by using Tools > Options. For more information, see SmartSketch
Tab (Options Dialog Box) in the Common User's Guide.
 You can define points on grid planes, especially at intersections.

You can control the types of points using Tools > Options. For more information, see
SmartSketch Tab (Options Dialog Box) in the Common User's Guide.
 In Molded Forms, define parametric points by using Insert > Topological Points. For more
information, see Topological Points (Insert Menu).

Boundary Methods
You must often define boundaries when creating plate systems, profiles, edge reinforcements,
and other objects. The common methods for defining boundaries are:

Pick Boundaries
Define boundaries by selecting them graphically either in a graphics view or in the
Workspace Explorer.
Pick Edges
This option is only available if you pick a plate as a boundary. Select the plate edges to use.
Click Pick Boundaries to exit the Pick Edges option and select other boundaries.

Boundary List
Define boundaries by selecting them from a list of potential boundaries. For more information,
see Boundary List Dialog Box (on page 42).
Boundary Curve

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 38

 Structural Manufacturing

Define the boundary by drawing its shape.

Solve Ambiguity
If the boundaries that you selected can form the object in more than one way, then you have
defined an ambiguous solution. The software prompts you to select one or more solutions.

What do you want to do?

 Pick boundaries (on page 39)
 Use the Boundary List dialog box (on page 39)
 Define a boundary curve (on page 40)
 Solve ambiguous solution created by selected boundaries (on page 40)
 Modify plate boundaries using Boundary List
 Rebound objects (on page 41)

Pick boundaries
1. Click Pick Boundaries .
2. In a graphic view or Workspace Explorer, select an object or grid plane to use as a
boundary.
3. Continue selecting objects or grid planes until you have completed defining the boundaries for
the object.
To remove an object from the group of boundaries, select the object again.

Use the Boundary List dialog box

1. On the command ribbon, click Boundary List .
The Boundary List dialog box displays.
2. To remove a boundary, select the boundary in the list, and then click Remove .

3. To remove all boundaries, click Remove All .

4. To add a new boundary, click Add , and then select a boundary in the graphic view or in
the Workspace Explorer. You can also type the boundary name and an optional offset value
in the Offset box or the Name box.
For more information, see Boundary List Dialog Box (on page 42).

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 39

 Structural Manufacturing

Define a boundary curve

1. Select Boundary Curve .
2. Define the sketching plane for the curve.
Define a coincident plane (on page 34)
Define an offset plane (on page 35)
Define a plane using a point and a normal vector (on page 36)
Define a plane using three points (on page 37)

3. Click Add Intersecting Item .

4. Select objects in the model that intersect the sketching plane that you want to use as
reference geometry. These extra objects display in the 2D environment.
5. Click Add Projection Item .
6. Select objects in the model that do not intersect the sketching plane and that you want to use
as reference geometry. These extra objects are projected onto the sketching plane and
display in the 2D environment.
7. Select Auto to automatically add all related objects to the select set, if needed.
8. Click Sketch 2D .
The 2D environment displays.
9. In the 2D environment, sketch the boundary.
You can constrain the boundary to geometric construction points referenced from
profile cross-section key points or offset from plate systems. For more information, see Point
at Offset from Keypoint Command and Point at Minimum Distance Command in the
SmartSketch Drawing Editor Drawing Editor Help, available within the 2D environment.
10. Click Finish in the 2D environment.
The 3D environment and the main command ribbon return.
Deleting a boundary curve from the 2D environment also removes it from the
Boundary List dialog box.

Solve ambiguous solution created by selected boundaries

The command switches to Solve Ambiguity automatically if an ambiguous solution exists
after clicking Accept or Finish. All possible solutions created by the selected boundaries
display in the graphic view.
1. Move the pointer over a solution, and then click to select it.
2. Continue to select solutions until you have defined the entire bounded object. A correct
solution to ambiguity meets these conditions:
 Each solution must have a common edge with at least one other solution.
 Each boundary must be used by at least one solution.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 40

 Structural Manufacturing

 To modify the ambiguous solution after creating an object, select Solve Ambiguity , and
select new solutions.
 To remove a previously-selected solution, select the solution again.
 Pressing the SHIFT key selects the Pick Edges option after you have selected a boundary
plate. Press SHIFT again to return to the Pick Boundaries option.

Rebound objects
Use this procedure to replace a boundary with another boundary, such as when the boundary is
used by multiple objects.
1. Select Tools > Automatic Reconnect.
The Automatic Reconnect dialog box displays.
2. On the Boundary tab, select Rebound.
3. For Old boundary filter, select an object type from the list. For example, if the boundary is a
reference plane, select Grids.
4. Specify the old boundary object in the Old boundary object box. You can select the object
from either the Workspace Explorer or the graphic view, type the object name into the box,
or select an object from the list, which shows the last ten selections you have made.
5. For New boundary filter, select an object type from the list. For example, if the boundary is a
plate system, select Plate Systems.
6. Specify the new boundary object in the New boundary object box. You can select the object
from either the Workspace Explorer or the graphic view, type the object name into the box,
or select an object from the list, which shows the last ten selections you have made.
7. Optionally, to further filter restrict the objects to rebound, select values for Scope filter and
the Entity filter.
8. Click Apply.
All entities that are bounded to the old boundary display in Candidates list and highlight in the
graphic view.
9. In Candidates list, clear the check box for objects you do not want to rebound.
10. Click Rebound.
11. Click View Log to see the rebound status.
12. Click Close.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 41

 Structural Manufacturing

Boundary List Dialog Box

Displays the boundaries for the object that you are placing:
 Model objects, such as plate systems and profile systems. You can also bound profiles by
plate edges, other profiles, and seams.
 Reference planes and other plane definitions.
 Sketched boundary curves created using the Sketch 2D option on a supported ribbon.
Boundary curves are prefixed with SketchGroup_.
 A standalone plane created during a copy, move, or mirror operation when a boundary was
not included in the operation. You can replace the standalone plane with a new boundary.
Open this dialog box by clicking Boundary List on the command ribbon during the boundary
definition step.

Tools > Options defines the Highlight color. For more information, see Colors Tab (Options
Dialog Box) in the Common User's Guide.
Preview Type
This option applies only to plates.
Each selected boundary highlights in the graphic view according to the selected preview type.
In the following examples, two plate systems, a reference plane, and a sketched boundary are
the selected boundaries of the vertical plate.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 42

 Structural Manufacturing

Bounding Objects - Highlights the selected boundary object as an outline. Reference planes
display as translucent shaded planes.

Bounding Geometry - Highlights the internal boundary geometry used by the software. The
internal geometry is typically an unlimited length line for model objects and reference plane
boundaries.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 43

 Structural Manufacturing

Edges - Highlights edges of the bounded object where the bounded object intersects with the
selected boundary.

For Bounding Objects and Bounding Geometry, the complete sketched

boundary curve geometry displays as drawn in Sketch 2D , as shown in the following
example.

Add
Specifies a new boundary. You can select a boundary in the graphic view or the Workspace
Explorer.

 You can also type the boundary name and an optional offset value in the Name box or the
Offset box, and then press TAB or ENTER.
 Invalid text displays with a gray background in the Name box or the Offset box.
 A profile has a maximum of two boundaries, but a plate edge boundary displays on two
rows of the boundary list. Both the plate edge and the edge's parent plate system display
in the list.

 The boundary list holds a maximum of two items. If you click Add with two items
already in the list, Smart 3D removes the first list item, and then adds the new item to the
bottom of the list.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 44

 Structural Manufacturing

 When you select a boundary in the list and Smart 3D has computed the landing curve, the
software highlights the end point of the profile with a red star.

 If you modify a row with a new boundary or offset, Smart 3D maintains the existing
relationships of the previous boundary. This maintains manual end cuts, corner features,
and manual logical connections. Manual logical connections go on the To Do List if the
other profile no longer touches the modified profile.
Remove
Removes the selected boundary from the list.

 Deleting a boundary curve from the 2D environment (Sketch 2D on the main

command ribbon) also removes it from the Boundary List dialog box.
 Do not use the DELETE key to remove boundaries. DELETE removes sketched
boundaries but does not remove bounding reference planes or reference objects.

Clear All
Removes all boundaries from the list.

/ Disconnect
Removes the relationships of a boundary to its definition method. When you disconnect a
boundary, it becomes a standalone plane. This option is active by default for a standalone
plane created during a copy, move, or mirror operation.
After disconnecting a boundary, you must select a replacement boundary in the
graphic view or the Workspace Explorer.

Extend Sketch Boundary in Graphic View

Extends a sketched boundary to a point in space or to another element selected in the graphic
view. This option is available when you select a sketched boundary (with a name prefixed with
SketchGroup_).
Name
Specifies the name of a boundary.
Offset

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 45

 Structural Manufacturing

Specifies an offset distance from the boundary. You can type the following formats for offset
values:
 Offset distance without units.
Example: 5, when default units are millimeters (mm). The software converts the distance
to 5 mm.
 Offset distance with units. The value converts to the default units.
Example: 5 m, when default units are millimeters (mm). The software converts the
distance to 5000 mm.
 Coordinate System: Frame plus or minus an offset distance.
Example (when the model has multiple coordinate systems): CS_0:F20 + 1.5 m
Example (when the model has one coordinate system): F20 + 1.5 m
Invalid text displays with a gray background in the Name box or the Offset box.
Apply
This option applies only to plates.
Displays a preview of the boundaries in the graphic view.
Gaps between boundaries display with a glyph.

The glyph uses the Handle color defined in Tools > Options. For more information, see
Colors Tab (Options Dialog Box) in the Common User's Guide.
OK
Closes the dialog box and saves the boundary changes.
To cancel boundary changes, you can click OK and then exit the parent command
without clicking Finish. You can also select the northwest arrow to close the boundary list
dialog box without saving the changes.
See Also
Use the Boundary List dialog box (on page 39)

Permission Group Behaviors between Tasks

Permission groups provide controls for when, where, and by whom the model can be updated.
Permission groups are assigned according to several common types of workflow. They typically
fall into the following categories:
 By Function: such as Outfitting versus Structure, or Piping versus Equipment versus Molded
Forms versus Structural Detailing.
 By System: such as Hull versus Deck1 versus TransvBhd1. This includes the ability to place
the hull system (and its child leaf systems, seams, connections related seams, reference
curves and openings) in a different permission group than the hull detailing objects and other
connected objects.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 46

 Structural Manufacturing

 By Area: Fwd versus Aft, or by block or assembly.

 Combinations: for example, By Function and By Area (Molded Forms for Block1 versus
Detailing for Block1).
The permission group of an object is not modified regardless of the Active Permission Group
unless the permission group is explicitly changed on the Configuration tab of the Properties
dialog box as described under the change propagation sections below.

Permission Group Behaviors Between Tasks

Permission groups provide controls for when, where, and by whom the model can be updated.
Permission groups are assigned according to several common types of workflow. They typically
fall into the following categories:
 By Function: such as Outfitting versus Structure, or Piping versus Equipment versus Molded
Forms versus Structural Detailing.
 By System: such as Hull versus Deck1 versus TransvBhd1. This includes the ability to place
the hull system (and its child leaf systems, seams, connections related seams, reference
curves and openings) in a different permission group than the hull detailing objects and other
connected objects.
 By Area: Fwd versus Aft, or by block or assembly.
 Combinations: for example, By Function and By Area (Molded Forms for Block1 versus
Detailing for Block1).
The permission group of an object is not modified regardless of the Active Permission Group
unless the permission group is explicitly changed on the Configuration tab of the Properties
dialog box as described under the change propagation sections below.

Molded Forms Behavior

Plate systems and profile systems are assigned to the Active Permission Group.
Leaf systems, light parts, reference curves, and logical connections are assigned the permission
group of their parent.
Seams and openings are assigned to the permission group of the plate or profile system they cut.
You must have write access to the root plate system being cut when placing an opening or design
seam.
In the Execute Split command, seams and knuckles that you do not have permission to modify
are not selectable in the table.
Logical connections between profile systems and plate systems are in same permission group as
the profile systems.
Logical connections between different root systems are created as children of the bounded or
penetrated system.
Summary of Molded Forms permission behaviors:

Object Permission Group Comments

Root plate system Active Permission Group

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 47

 Structural Manufacturing

Object Permission Group Comments

Leaf plate system Same as root plate system

Root and child logical Same as dependent root plate

connections system

Reference curve Same as root plate system

Design seam, intersection Same as root plate system Must have write access to
seam root plate system

Opening Same as root plate system Must have write access to

root plate system

Manual logical connection Permission group of system for Must have write access to at
which you have write access, least one of the systems
use first system selected if you being connected
have write access to both
systems

Root profile system Active Permission Group Profiles are handled

similarly to plates

Logical connection between Same permission group as root

stiffener or edge reinforcement profile system
and the plate being stiffened

Beam Active Permission Group

Molded Forms Change Propagation

The root system and its child leaf system, logical connections, reference curves, seams and
openings always have the same permission group. When the permission group is changed for any
of these objects, the permission group is also changed for the other objects.
If plate system A is bounded by plate system B, you can modify A without write access to B. Plate
System B is placed on the To Do List as Out of Date if the change to A impacts B.

Structural Detailing Behavior

The detailed part permission group is not assigned from the parent system permission group.
Detailed parts created with Execute Detailing are assigned to the Active Permission Group.
You can modify this assignment. You must have write permission to the part to detail the part.
If a detailed part is deleted, the resulting light part maintains the permission group of the detailed
part.
You can assign different permission groups to parts sharing the same leaf system as created by a
planning seam.
You can only add seams and features to a part if you have write permissions to the part.
Summary of Structural Detailing permission behaviors:

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 48

 Structural Manufacturing

Object Permission Group Comments

Light Root Plate Part (before Same as plate system at

detailing) creation

Detailed Root Plate Part Active Permission Group when Must have write access to the
detailed. Part keeps this light part
permission group if the detail
part is deleted.

Leaf part Same as root part

Straking seam Same as root part Must have write access to root
part

Feature placed by command Same as root part Must have write access to root
(edge, corner, sketched, free part
edge treatment)

Assembly Connection Same as dependent part

Feature, part, physical Same as assembly connection

connection created by
assembly connection

Free end cut object and its Same as root part

features

Standalone part Active Permission Group

Structural Detailing Change Propagation

The detailed part, its child leaf parts, features and straking seams always have the same
permission group. Assembly connections always have the same permission group as the
dependent part in the connection. Assembly connection children always have the same
permission group as the assembly connection. Standalone parts plus associated features and
connections always have the same permission group. When the permission group is changed for
any of these objects, the permission group is also changed for the other objects.
If you do not have write access to a part, the part is placed on the To Do List as Out of Date if a
change is made to the part. Assembly connections and features are also not created until the part
is updated on the To Do List by someone with write access.

Hole Management Behavior

Hole traces and outfitting catalog hole fittings are assigned to the Active Permission Group.
Hole cuts and structural hole fittings are assigned the permission group of their parent structural
part (plate or profile).
Summary of Hole Management permission behaviors:

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 49

 Structural Manufacturing

Object Permission Group Comments

Hole trace Active Permission Group

Hole cut Same as root plate part Must have write access to parent plate
part. Root plate part must be detailed
in the Structural Detailing task.

Outfitting catalog hole Active Permission Group

fitting

Structural hole fitting Active Permission Group Must have write access to parent plate
part. Root plate part must be detailed
in the Structural Detailing task.

Hole Management Change Propagation

The permission group of an outfitting catalog hole fitting can be changed without changing the
permission group of the hole trace.
The permission group of a structural hole fitting can be changed without changing the permission
group of the hole cut or parent plate part.
A hole cut and its parent plate part always have the same permission group. When the permission
group is changed for one of these objects, the permission group is also changed for the other
object.

Planning Behavior
Planning permission group behavior is related to Molded Forms and Structural Detailing behavior
because planning seams split leaf systems.
When Manage Intersections is run and an intersecting part is set to Split or Offset, planning
seams are created in the Active Permission Group. You must have write access to the root
system.
Summary of Planning permission behaviors:

Object Permission Group Comments

Planning seam Active Permission Group Must have write access to the root system of the
parts being split.

Block or assembly Active Permission Group

Planning Change Propagation

Write access is required to both parts to remove a planning split using Flatten Assembly or
Manage Intersections. The resulting new part is assigned to the same permission group as the
original parts if they belonged to the same permission group. The new part is assigned to the
Active Permission Group if the original parts were in different permission groups.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 50

 Structural Manufacturing

Global Workshare Behavior

Global Workshare allows managed replication of the model at several sites. One of the restrictions
of a Workshare configuration is that you only have Read access to objects that are controlled by
non-local permission groups.
A system is a logical grouping of sub-systems. When you add or remove a sub-system, you are
modifying the definition of the parent system. Therefore, you must have write access to the parent
system. You do not need write access to the grandparent system.
When participating in a Global Workshare Configuration, you must manage all permission groups
at the host site. The sub-system requirement to have write access to its parent system is not
possible if the sub-system's permission group is created at the satellite site and the parent
system's permission group is created at the host site.
For example, your host site is Houston and your satellite site is London. You create a system
named "Midbody", and its controlling permission group is in Houston. You assign John, who works
in London, write access. During the workshare replication process, the Midbody system and
permission group is replicated in London. In London, John can add systems, plates, profiles and
whatever else he wants to the Midbody system because John was given write access to the
system's permission group in Houston. John cannot delete or change any of the properties of the
Midbody system in London because the host site, Houston, owns it. He can only add objects to the
system. If John were to travel to Houston and log on there, he could delete or change any of the
properties of the Midbody system because the Houston host site owns it.

Permission Group Behaviors in Structural Manufacturing

When a new Structural Manufacturing object is created, or the permission group and the approval
status of an existing Structural Manufacturing object is modified, then the permission group and
approval status is propagated and applied to any children under the parent object. For example,
the children of a given plate or profile maintains the same permission group and approval status
as the parent object.
Assembly Margin
Inherits the permission group and approval status of the parent assembly.
Fabrication Margin
Created with the active permission group.
Pin Jig
Inherits the permission group and approval status of the parent objects. They pass these
settings on to the pin jig children, such as intersection points, remarking lines, and so on.
Shrinkage
Inherits the permission group and approval status of the parent object.
Marking Lines Folder
Inherits the permission group from the parent of the object to which the marking lines belong.
Marking Lines
Inherits the permission group and approval status of the parent object.
Templates
Inherits the permission group and approval status of the parent objects. They pass these

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 51

 Structural Manufacturing

settings on to the template children, such as base control lines, sketching lines, and so on.
Manufacturing Plate
Inherits the permission group and approval status of the parent object.
Manufacturing Profile
Inherits the permission group and approval status of the parent object.

Sketch 2D Best Practices

The Sketch 2D option is used in several commands to create sketched boundaries,
openings, curves for extruded plate systems, and profile and seam landing curves. The following
Sketch 2D best practices help you create objects in Molded Forms that you detail in the Structural
Detailing task and manufacture in the Structural Manufacturing task.

Templates
Sketch 2D default display options are saved in the file [Product
Folder]\Common2D\Symbol2D\Templates\[Link]. You can change the default display by
changing options in this file:
1. Right-click [Link] and select Properties.
2. Clear Read-only and click OK.
3. Open [Link] and change any of the following default display options:
 File > Properties. You can change the units displayed in command ribbon bars on the
Units tab.
 View > Toolbars. You can select the toolbars that are displayed.
 Format > Dimensions. You can change the units used in dimensions, the text size, and
other dimension properties.
 Tools > Options. You can change the default colors on the Colors tab.
 Tools > Display Manager. You can change the default geometry color, line type, and
width for individual layers.
 Tools > SmartSketch Settings. You can select the SmartSketch relationships that are
enabled on the Relationships tab.
4. Save and close the file.

Fractional Units
The default units and precision values in Sketch 2D are defined in a 3D task. For example, if the
file [Product Folder]\Common2D\Symbol2D\Templates\[Link] has default units set to mm,
and the units of measure in Molded Forms are set to ft-in, Sketch 2D defines the units of
measurement as ft-in.
The Properties dialog box in Sketch 2D allows you to view the defined units of measurement and
to specify the fractional precision value. If you need to use a specific fractional precision value for
all tasks in Sketch 2D, you can specify the precision value in the template file, which takes
precedence over the precision value defined by the 3D task.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 52

 Structural Manufacturing

The following example shows how to modify the length readout precision to 1/64 in the template
file:
1. In the Molded Forms task, click Tools > Options.
The Options dialog box displays.
2. Under Units of Measure, set the distance readout to ft-in (fractional), and set the precision
value to 1/64.
3. Click OK.
The distance units in Sketch 2D are now in ft-in with a precision value of 1/64.

Number of sketch files allowed per plate

Sketch 2D geometry for an object is saved in 2D files cached in the model and related to the
object.
The Boundary Curve step for the plate system commands uses one 2D file. All boundary
curves are in one 2D file for each plate system, and are modified, added, or deleted in the same
file.

The Place Opening , Stiffener Profile System by 2D Projection , and Design Seam by
2D Sketch commands can each have:
 Multiple 2D files, with a separate file for each object on one plate system. The software
modifies the objects in the 2D file and deletes the objects from the graphic view or
Workspace Explorer.
 Geometry for multiple objects in one 2D file. The objects are modified or deleted in the 2D file.
 One 2D file that applies to multiple plate systems. Changes to the 2D file are reflected on all
plate systems.
 A combination of these files.

Add items to sketch

The Add Intersecting Item and Add Projection Item steps are used to add reference
structure to Sketch 2D. Select the minimum number of needed items.
More than 30 items added to a sketch file can slow down software performance when
the object is recomputed.
Next, you can select Auto to automatically add all objects that are relative to the object to be
sketched to the current select set. Items that pass the criteria are added to the select set and are
highlighted in the graphic view, as well as the Workspace Explorer.
The filter criteria that the software uses to determine eligible candidates depend upon whether
Add Intersecting Item or Add Projection Item was selected in a previous step. The following
table lists the various relevant objects that are automatically imported based on the target, or base
sketch, object type.

Base Sketch Object Intersecting Objects Projecting Objects

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 53

 Structural Manufacturing

Plate System  Stiffeners  Reference Curves

 Edge Reinforcements  Stiffeners
 Seams  Penetration Plates
 Bounded Objects
 Bounding Objects
 Knuckle Reference Curves

Plate Part None supported in the current version of None supported in the current version of
the software the software

Profile System None supported in the current version of None supported in the current version of
the software the software

Member None supported in the current version of None supported in the current version of
the software the software

Designed Member (Built Up) Same as Plate System Same as Plate System

If no objects are added to the select set, the software displays a message on the status bar.
If you clear Auto, all selected objects, whether added to the select set automatically or manually,
are cleared. Selecting Auto adds back those objects that initially passed the filter criteria, but it
does not add back any objects that you selected manually.
When the selected plate system is large, Auto automatically adds all objects
relative to the sketch in the context of intersecting or project. This can slow down software
performance.

Layers
The software automatically defines several layers in Sketch 2D. Reference items (selected
automatically by the software or manually using the Add Intersecting Item and Add
Projection Item steps) are placed on those layers:

Default Layer
The software only uses geometry that you create on the Default layer. You can put other
geometry, such as construction lines, on other layers. The Default layer must be the first layer
alphabetically. To avoid a conflict, you should add a "z" prefix to any layer which you add, such as
"z_construction."

Infinite Elements Layer

Contains reference items with infinite geometry intersecting the sketch plane, such as grid planes.
Objects on this layer can be used with dimensions and relationships.

Inputs Layer
Contains other reference items intersecting the sketch plane that can also be used with
dimensions and relationships. The reference geometry includes openings, design seams, plate
systems, and profile systems.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 54

 Structural Manufacturing

No_Constrained_Elements Layer
Contains reference items that do not intersect the sketch plane. Also contains reference items that
cannot be used with relationships and dimensions, such as plate and profile parts. By default, you
cannot select reference geometry on the No_Constrained_Elements layer. To make the
geometry selectable, you must make No_Constrained_Elements the active layer, and then
switch back to the Default layer.
You can add relationships and dimensions to reference geometry on the
No_Constrained_Elements layer, but the relationships are not saved when you click Finish.

Multiple reference planes

You can add reference planes to Sketch 2D that are different than the sketching plane, but parallel
to the sketching plane. This is useful in defining landing curves for projected profiles and seams on
the hull. Use Add Projection Item to add the reference planes.

The additional reference plane intersection geometry is gray in color and placed on the
No_Constrained_Elements layer.

Using SmartSketch Drawing Editor to save sketch geometry

SmartSketch Drawing Editor, delivered to [Product Folder]\Shape2D\Bin\[Link],
can be used to save geometry commonly used in Sketch 2D, such as:
 Mother curves and extrusion curves for extruded plate systems.
 Boundary curves.
 Openings or sketched features not included in the Catalog.
 Landing curves for projected profiles and seams.
You can copy the geometry from Sketch 2D and paste it into SmartSketch Drawing Editor or
create the geometry directly in SmartSketch Drawing Editor. Geometry can be saved in multiple
SmartSketch Drawing Editor files or into a single file with multiple sheets. The geometry can be
copied from SmartSketch Drawing Editor and pasted into Sketch 2D as needed.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 55

 Structural Manufacturing

Deleting reference geometry

You can delete reference geometry from the sketch when the software includes geometry that you
do not want to see. The reference structure is not deleted, and the reference geometry is
recreated the next time that you open the sketch.

Modifying groups of geometry

The software automatically groups Sketch 2D geometry when you click Finish. When you modify
the existing 2D geometry of an object, you must maintain the original group identifier by using the
following methods:
1. To modify or delete existing geometry, use QuickPick, Top Down or Bottom Up with
Select Tool to select the geometry instead of the group.
2. To add new geometry to a group, use Edit > Group Modify.
3. To replace all geometry in a group with geometry copied to the clipboard, use Replace Group
Elements .

Rectangles
Use Line or Line/Arc Continuous to create rectangles.
If you use Rectangle , you must select Tools > Maintain Relationships. Right-click the
geometry, and then select Convert. This converts the rectangle into four lines and the correct
connection relationships are created at the corners.

Constraints
Use relationships and dimensions to constrain geometry to reference structure. This keeps the
geometry properly related to the reference structure if the reference structure changes.
Keep relationships and dimensions as simple as possible. This allows the geometry the best
chance to update if the reference structure changes.

Connections
Connection relationships are required for the software to create connected geometry.
Do not create a connection between the corner of the sketched geometry, and the corner of the
bounding object. Instead, move the constraint slightly off the corner.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 56

 Structural Manufacturing

Good: All endpoints of opening are connected.

Bad: Missing connection at one corner causes the creation of the opening to fail.

Good: All endpoints of extrusion curve are connected.

Bad: Missing connection on extrusion curve.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 57

 Structural Manufacturing

Plate system is missing part of the curve.

Extending sketch geometry to intersect bounding structure

Extend sketch geometry beyond bounding reference structure geometry to ensure that the sketch
geometry intersects the reference structure at all locations.
Good:

Extrusion curve extends beyond the hull. Bracket boundary curve extends
beyond the top flange and the
bottom of the bottom flange.

Bad:

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 58

 Structural Manufacturing

Overlapping sketch geometry for boundary curves

A boundary curve with all geometry connected is treated as one edge in the Graphics View. You
may sometimes want parts of the curve to be treated as separate edges at sharp discontinuities
such as corners. This allows you to add edge reinforcements in the Molded Forms task or edge
treatments in the Structural Detailing task to part of the boundary curve without defining additional
boundaries. In order to separate the boundary curve into separate edges, overlap the boundary
curve geometry instead of connecting it at the corners:

Creating boundary curves on the thickness side of a plate

If your plate boundaries include a plate system with the thickness direction towards the plate that
you are creating, a profile mounted to the bounding plate system and a sketched boundary, and
then the boundary curve must intersect both the profile system and profile part.
In the following example:
 The solid blue line is the molded surface of the bounding plate system.
 The dashed blue line is the thickness direction for the bounding plate part.
 The dashed gray profile outline is the bounding profile system mounted to the bounding plate
system at the molded surface (on the No_Constrained_Elements layer).
 The dashed blue profile outline is the bounding profile part mounted to the thickened bounding
plate part.
 The solid black line is the intended boundary curve intersecting the profile part.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 59

 Structural Manufacturing

 The solid red line is the required adjustment to the boundary curve, passing through both the
profile part and profile system, and intersecting the profile system.

The black line is the intended boundary curve. It can be constrained to the dashed blue profile part
using relationships and dimensions. The red lines are additional geometry that must connect to
the black boundary curve, pass through the profile part geometry, and intersect the dashed grey
profile system geometry.

Arcs in boundary curves

If a boundary curve ends with a circular or elliptical arc, you must add a line segment pointing
away from the direction of the arc. This prevents the arc from extending back onto the boundary
curve as the curve is calculated.
In the following example, the black curves are the intended boundary curve. The red line is the
extension to the boundary curve that prevents the arc from extending back onto the boundary
curve.

Multiple curves
Do not create a close boundary curve contour that overlaps trimming input geometry. Instead,
draw two separate curves. In the following example, there are two separate curves, one for corner
feature and one for diagonal boundary.

1 - Corner feature curve

2 - Diagonal boundary curve

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 60

 Structural Manufacturing

Associative offsets
The Associative Offset command allows you to create a curve based on an existing curve, and
to place the new curve at a specified offset. To use this command, you must add it to a toolbar.
1. Right-click an existing toolbar, and click Toolbars.
2. Click Customize on the Toolbars dialog box.
3. Click Manipulation on the Categories list.
4. Drag the Associative Offset icon from the Buttons list to an existing toolbar.
For more information on the Associative Offset command see the Associative Offset
Command topics in the SmartSketch Drawing Editor help file.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 61

SECTION 2

Marking Lines
Most markings are automatically applied to the detailed parts by rules. However, a certain amount
of markings need to be placed manually.
When you create or edit a marking line, the dialog box title displays the plate part name
using the format Plate Part: <name of the plate part>.

The Structural Manufacturing task provides the following commands to create marking lines:

Marking - Creates the manual marking lines on plate parts, profile parts, members, and pin
jigs. For more information, see Marking (on page 62).

Marking by Definition - Creates the manual marking lines based on symbol definition. For
more information, see Marking by Definition (on page 87).

Marking
Creates the manual marking lines on plate parts, profile parts, members, and pin jigs. Marking
lines are used to assist the construction processes.

Marking Line Types

Location
The trace curve of plate, profile, collar plate, and bracket. These marking lines are created
automatically. They are applied to flat plate, curved plate, flat profile, curved profile, template,
jigs and remarking objects.
End connection
The cross section stamp on a plate or profile. These marking lines are created automatically.
They are applied to flat plate, curved plate, flat profile, and curved profile objects.
Lap connection
These marking lines are created automatically. They are applied to flat plate, curved plate, flat
profile, and curved profile objects.
Tab and bridge
A marking for the final cut. These marking lines are created automatically. They are applied to
flat plate and curved plate objects.
Template line
Template positions on a plate. These marking lines are created automatically. They are
applied to curved plate objects.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 62

 Marking Lines

Roll boundaries
Roll lines showing roll range with radius and direction information. These marking lines can be
created automatically or manually. They are applied to curved plates and curved profile
objects.
Flat of bottom, flat of side, and other hull knuckle lines
Delivered by the naval architecture software through the Molded Forms task. These marking
lines can be created automatically or manually. They are applied to curved plates and
template objects.
Knuckle line
Handles corrugated plates. These marking lines can be created automatically or manually.
They are applied to curved plate and curved profile objects.
Ship direction
These marking lines can be created automatically or manually. They are applied to flat plate,
curved plate, flat profile, curved profile, template, jig and remarking objects.
Labels
All labels. These marking lines are created automatically. They are applied to flat plate,
curved plate, flat profile, curved profile, and template objects.
Fitting - plate to plate - butt joint
Line across two coplanar plates. These marking lines can be created automatically with
arguments or manually. They are applied to flat plate and curved plate objects.
Fitting - plate to plate - tee joint
Short fitting lines on both plates on the joint edge. These marking lines can be created
automatically with arguments or manually. They are applied to flat plate and curved plate
objects.
Fitting - profile to plate - penetration
A pair of lines on the plate indicating the top of the profile. These marking lines can be created
automatically with arguments or manually. They are applied to flat plate and curved plate
objects.
Fitting - profile to plate
Short fitting lines on both plates on the joint edge. These marking lines are created
automatically with arguments. They are applied to flat plate, curved plate, flat profile, and
curved profile objects.
Seam control
A pair of lines parallel to the seam in defined distance to check accuracy of a connection.
These marking lines can be created automatically with arguments or manually. They are
applied to flat plate, curved plate, flat profile, and curved profile objects.
Hole
Includes air and drain holes. These marking lines are created automatically with arguments.
They are applied to flat plate, curved plate, flat profile, and curved profile objects.
Reference plane lines
Waterlines, frames, and buttock lines. These marking lines are created automatically with

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 63

 Marking Lines

arguments. They are applied to flat plate, curved plate, flat profile, curved profile, and
template objects.
Roll lines
Roll lines for shell rolling. These marking lines can be created automatically with arguments or
manually. They are applied to curved plate objects.
Web frames check lines
Used for checking the accuracy of web frames cut out of plates. These marking lines are
created automatically with arguments. They are applied to curved plate objects.
Bending control lines
Lines for checking bending of the cylindrical or conical shapes, such as hawse pipe. These
marking lines are created automatically with arguments. They are applied to curved plate and
curved profile objects.
Inverse bending line
These marking lines are created automatically with arguments. They are applied to curved
profile objects.
Base control line
Marked on the template and shell plate. These marking lines are created automatically with
arguments. They are applied to curved plate and template objects.
Site line
Marked on the template. These marking lines are created automatically with arguments. They
are applied to template objects.
Plate edge check lines
Used for checking the accuracy of plates in fabrication and assemblies. These marking lines
are created automatically with arguments. They are applied to flat plate and curved plate
objects.
Block Mark
Reference line for all block panels. These marking lines are created manually. They are
applied to flat plate, curved plate, flat profile, and curved profile objects.
Painting line
Only for shell plate. Border between different colors. These marking lines are created
manually. They are applied to flat plate and curved plate objects.
Robot mark
Robot positioning mark. These marking lines are created manually. They are applied to flat
plate and curved plate objects.
Name Mark
Text that needs to be projected on a plate. These marking lines are created manually. They
are applied to flat plate and curved plate objects.
User defined marking line
These marking lines are created manually. They are applied to flat plate, curved plate, flat
profile, curved profile, template, and jig and remarking objects.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 64

 Marking Lines

Margin
Assigned margin. These marking lines are created automatically. They are applied to flat
plate, curved plate, flat profile, and curved profile objects.
Pin jig diagonal
Mapped to the individual part. These marking lines are created manually. They are applied to
jig and remarking objects.
Diagonal
From the pin jig. In the case of a profile, it is a fitting mark on the profile. These marking lines
are created automatically. They are applied to flat plate, curved plate, flat profile, curved
profile, template, and jig and remarking objects.
Pin jig remarking additional
Mapped to the individual part. These marking lines are created manually. They are applied to
jig and remarking objects.
Remarking additional
From the pin jig. In the case of a profile, it is a fitting mark on the profile. These marking lines
are created automatically. They are applied to flat plate, curved plate, flat profile, and curved
profile objects.

Marking Ribbon
Displays the controls used to create a marking line.

Properties
Activates the Marking Line Properties dialog box, which you use to view and modify the
properties of the marking lines that you are about to place in the model. For more information,
see Marking Line Properties Dialog Box (on page 82).

Part
Select the detailed plate or profile, or pin jig. You can select the part in a graphic view or in the
Workspace Explorer.

Select Reference Curve

Select the reference curves that you want to use to create the marking line. This option is only
available when the Mode is set to Reference Curve.

2D Sketch
Opens the Sketch 2D environment, where you sketch the marking line. This option displays
when the Mode box is set to 2D Projection.

Intersection
Select the intersection that you want to use to create the marking line. This option is only
available when the Mode is set to Intersection.

Sketching Plane
Select the sketching plane for the marking line.
Depending upon the object you selected as the part, the sketching plane can be a

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 65

 Marking Lines

planar face from any of the following:

 Webs or flanges for profiles and members.
 Plate faces, when the base or offset is planar.
 Frames.

Add Intersecting Item

Allows you to select objects that intersect the sketching plane in the 3D environment. You see
the selected objects in the Draft 2D environment when you are drawing the marking.
Add Projection Item
Allows you to select objects that do not intersect the sketching plane in the 3D environment.
The objects are projected onto the sketching plane, and you see the selected objects in the
Draft 2D environment when you are drawing the marking.

Constraint Table
Activates the Constraint Table dialog from which you can modify sketch curve constraint
values without going back into the Sketch 2D environment. A sketch curve must have already
been defined in Sketch 2D before this option is available.
 Type - Displays the constraint type. You cannot edit the type.
 Name - Displays the constraint name. You cannot edit the name.
 Value - Defines the constraint value. Include the units of measurement when you edit the
value: deg, mm, in, and so forth. You cannot edit a value if it is derived by a formula.
 Value Type - Displays the value type: angle, radial, linear, and so forth. You cannot edit
the value type.
 Formula - Displays the formula used to derive the constraint value. You cannot edit
formulas, nor can you edit values derived by formulas.
 Layers - Filters which constraints display in the dialog based on the Sketch 2D layer to
which they belong. By default, all constraints on all layers display.
Sketch 2D
Activates the Sketch 2D environment in which you can draw the marking.

Reference Plane
Indicates that the marking line is at the intersection of the part and a reference plane. This
option displays when the Mode box is set to Intersection.

Select Boundaries
Allows you to select marking line boundaries.

Select Related Part

Allows you to select detailed plate or profile parts to receive marking line attributes.
Finish
Creates the marking line that you have defined.
Cancel

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 66

 Marking Lines

Clears the selection.

Accept
Accepts the selection.

Solve Ambiguity
If the boundaries that you selected can form the object in more than one way, then you have
defined an ambiguous solution. The software prompts you to select one or more solutions.
View
Specifies the orientation for the Sketch 2D view.
 Standard - The transverse view is looking forward. The longitudinal view is looking port.
The plan view is looking down with forward to the right and port up.
 Look at Side - The view orientation is based on the Side property so that you are looking
at the side that owns the mark.
 Transverse Plate

 Port Hull Plate

 Starboard Hull Plate

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 67

 Marking Lines

 Deck Plate

Mode
Specifies whether the marking line is generated by two-dimensional projection, by
intersection, or by reference curve.
 2D Projection
 Intersection
 Reference Curve
Type
Select the type of marking line to place. The values available depend on the type of the
selected parts.
Plate Mark Types:
 Block Mark
 Paint Mark
 Name Mark
 Robot Mark

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 68

 Marking Lines

 User Defined Mark

 Plate Location Mark
 Profile Location Mark
 Plate to Plate Tjoint Mark
 Profile to Plate Mark
 SeamControl Mark
 RollLine Mark
 RollBoundaryMark
 Knuckle Line Mark
 Naval Arch Ref Line
 ShipDirectionMark
 PinJigMarking
 Base Control Line Mark
 Bending Control Line Mark
 Bracket Location Mark
 Buttock Line Mark
 Collar Plate Loc Mark
 Diagonal Mark
 End Connection Mark
 FrameLine Mark
 Lap Connection Mark
 Plate Edge Check Mark
 TemplatePosMark
 WaterLine Mark
 Frame Check Lines Mark
 Mount Angle Mark
 Opening Mark
 Cutting Ref Mark
 Geometry Cut Mark
 End Cut Mark
 Hole Trace Mark
 Hole Ref Mark
 Seam Bend Mark
 Common Seam Mark
 Edge Location Mark

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 69

 Marking Lines

 Conn Part Mark

 Reference X Mark
 Reference Y Mark
 Reference Z Mark
 Reference Center Mark
 Lap Trace Mark
 Lap Ref Mark
 Lap Edge Mark
 Roll Section Ref Mark
Profile Mark Types:
 Block Mark
 Paint Mark
 Name Mark
 Robot Mark
 User Defined Mark
 End Connection Mark
 SeamControlMark
 FittingMark
 Plate Location Mark
 Knuckle Line Mark
 Mount Angle Mark
 Opening Mark
 Cutting Ref Mark
 Geometry Cut Mark
 End Cut Mark
 Hole Trace Mark
 Hole Ref Mark
 Profile to Profile Penetration
 Edge Location Mark
 Conn Part Mark
 Ship Direction Mark
 Lap Connection Mark
 WaterLine Mark
 Frameline Mark
 Buttock Line Mark

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 70

 Marking Lines

 Builtup Connection Mark

Member Mark Types:
 Block Mark
 Paint Mark
 Name Mark
 Robot Mark
 User Defined Mark
Pin Jig Mark Types:
 Extend PinJig Intersection
 PinJig Marking
 PinJig Diagonal
 Naval Arch Ref Line
 Mount Angle Mark
 Bending Interval Mark
 Annotation Mark
 Jig Floor Mark
 Opening Mark
 Cutting Ref Mark
 Geometry Cut Mark
 End Cut mark
 Hole Trace Mark
 Hole Ref Mark
 Feature Label Mark
 Profile to Profile Penetration
 Seam Bend Mark
 Common Seam Mark
 Edge Location Mark
 Conn Part Mark
 Knuckle Tab Mark
 Tab Ref Mark
 Reference X Mark
 Reference Y Mark
 Reference Z Mark
 Reference Center Mark
 Part Checklines Mark

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 71

 Marking Lines

 Lap Trace Mark

 Edge Fit Mark
 Lap Ref Mark
 Lap Edge Mark
 Knuckle Fit Mark
 Roll Section Mark
 Support Mark
 Ladder Mark
 Foundation Mark
 Stair Mark
 Paper Template Mark
 Builtup Connection Mark
Do not create a marking line that overlaps the profile's remarking line. Extend the
profile's marking line to meet the contour.
In this case, the pin jig output contains a marking line that takes the place of the original
profile's marking line and the extension created in the previous steps.
This extended marking line can participate in intersection point creation, or not, depending on
the custom rules for the type of the marking line that you extended.
Side
Select the side on which to define the marking line. The values available depend on the part
type. The software displays an arrow indicating the side of the part on which the marking is
placed.
 The options for plates include molded, anti-molded, base side, and offset side.
 The options for stiffeners include web left, web right, and top flange.
 The options for members include web left, web right, top flange, bottom flange, top flange
right bottom, top flange left bottom, bottom flange right top, and bottom flange left top.
 The options for pin jigs include supported and remarking sides.

 MostMarking - Side with the most marking lines. For the initial manual marking line, this
is the side with the most automated marking (such as intersection marks).
 MoldedSide - Molded side.
 Base Side - The bottom side for decks based on the ship direction.
 Offset Side - The top side for decks based on the ship direction.
 AssemblyOrientation - Side based on assembly orientation (if the part is in an
assembly).
 AntiMoldedSide - Anti-molded side (the thickness side).
 MostStiffener - Side on which the most stiffeners are mounted.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 72

 Marking Lines

 Web left - Available for profiles.

 Web right - Available for profiles.
 Top flange - Available for profiles.

Define Plane Controls

Coincident Plane
Specifies that you want the plate part placed on the reference plane.
Offset from a Plane
Places the plate system a specified distance from the reference plane. If you choose this
option, you must define the offset distance.
Angle from plane
Places the plate part at a specified angle or slope to the reference plane. If you choose this
option, you must define an axis of rotation and the angle or slope.
Plane by Point and Vector
Specifies the reference plane by defining a vector perpendicular to the reference plane. A
third point defines the reference plane position along the vector.

Plane by Three Points

Specifies the reference plane using three points that you specify in the model.
Plane by Vectors Normal
Specifies the reference plane as being normal to another plane that you select and having a
rotation parallel to a vector that you define.
/ Offset lock
Locks the Offset value, disabling updates of the offset value by mouse moves. The Lock
option is only available when you use the Offset from a Plane option.
Offset
Specify the offset distance for the plate part from the selected reference plane. You can
specify the offset dynamically in graphics or by typing the distance. The Offset option is only
available when you use the Offset from a Plane option.
Angle
Specify the angle at which to place the plate part relative to the reference plane. You have to
define the axis of rotation using two points before you can define the angle. The Angle option
is only available when you use the Angle from plane option.
Step
Specifies the angle step. The step is incremented by this value when the cursor is moved in
the graphic view. The Step option is only available when you use the Angle from plane
option.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 73

 Marking Lines

Select Vector
Select or define a vector normal to the needed plane. This option is only available when you
use the Plane by Point and Vector option.
Define Point
Specify the point along the vector at which to place the plane. This option is only available
when you use the Plane by Point and Vector option.
Define Point 1
Specify the location of the first of three points that defines the plane. This option is only
available when you are using the Plane by Three Points option.
Define Point 2
Specify the location of the second of three points that defines the plane. This option is only
available when you are using the Plane by Three Points option.
Define Point 3
Specify the location of the third of three points that defines the plane. This option is only
available when you are using the Plane by Three Points option.
Select Plane
Select the plane to which your reference plane is to be normal. This option is only available
when you are using the Plane by Vectors Normal option.
Select First Point
Specify the location of the first vector point. Your reference plane is parallel to this vector. This
option is only available when you are using the Plane by Vectors Normal option.
Select Second Point
Specify the location of the second vector point. Your reference plane is parallel to this vector.
This option is only available when you are using the Plane by Vectors Normal option.
Display Side
Indicates whether the arrow indicating the marking side displays.

What do you want to do?

 Create a marking line by 2D projection (on page 75)
 Create a marking line by intersection (on page 76)
 Create a marking line by reference curve (on page 78)
 Copy and paste a marking line (on page 80)
 Modify marking (on page 81)
 Delete marking (on page 81)

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 74

 Marking Lines

Create a marking line by 2D projection

1. Click Marking .
2. Select 2D Projection from the Mode list.

3. On the Marking ribbon, click Part .

4. Select the part to mark.

 You can select the parts in the model, or from the Workspace Explorer.
 A red arrow indicates the side of the part on which the markings are placed. Select a
different value from the Side list to place the markings on a different side of the part.

5. Click Sketch 2D , and then click Sketching Plane and specify a sketching plane.
6. Click Sketch 2D , and sketch the marking line.
7. Click Finish on the ribbon in the 2D Sketch environment.

8. Click Select Related Part , and select the related parts to receive the marking line
attributes.
You can select the parts in the model, or from the Workspace Explorer.

9. Click Properties to review the marking attributes.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 75

 Marking Lines

The attributes that display depend on the type of marking after the selection of the
related part. For example, the Connection GUID, Related Part Name, Direction, and so on
may display.

10. Click Finish.

Create a marking line by intersection

1. Click Marking .
2. Select Intersection from the Mode list.

3. On the Marking ribbon, click Part .

4. Select the part to mark.

 You can select the parts in the model, or from the Workspace Explorer.
 A red arrow indicates the side of the part on which the markings are placed. Select a
different value from the Side list to place the markings on a different side of the part.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 76

 Marking Lines

5. Click Reference Plane , and specify a reference plane that intersects the plate.

6. Click Select Boundaries , and select the boundaries to define the marking line. For more
information, see Boundary Methods (on page 38).

 You can select the reference planes in the model, or from the Workspace Explorer.
 You can select other markings on the part in the model as boundaries.
7. If the boundary definition results in more than one solution, click Solve Ambiguity to
choose the solution to use. For more information, see Solve ambiguous solution created by
selected boundaries (on page 40).

8. Click Select Related Part , and select the related parts to receive the marking line
attributes.
You can select the parts in the model, or from the Workspace Explorer.

9. Click Properties to review the marking attributes.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 77

 Marking Lines

The attributes that display depend on the type of marking after the selection of the
related part. For example, the Connection GUID, Related Part Name, Direction, and so on
may display.

10. Click Finish.

Create a marking line by reference curve

1. Click Marking .
2. Select Reference Curve from the Mode list.

3. On the Marking ribbon, click Part .

4. Select the part to mark.

 You can select the parts in the model, or from the Workspace Explorer.
 A red arrow indicates the side of the part on which the markings are placed. Select a
different value from the Side list to place the markings on a different side of the part.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 78

 Marking Lines

5. Select the marking type to use from the Type list.

6. Select the reference curve to define the geometry for the marking line.

 You can select reference curves and logical connections in the model, or from the
System tab of the Workspace Explorer.
 You can select edge ports of the parts in the model.

7. Click Select Boundaries , and select the boundaries to define the marking line. For more
information, see Boundary Methods (on page 38).

 You can select the reference planes in the model, or from the Workspace Explorer.
 You can select other markings on the part in the model as boundaries.

8. If the boundary definition results in more than one solution, click Solve Ambiguity to
choose the solution to use. For more information, see Solve ambiguous solution created by
selected boundaries (on page 40).

9. Click Select Related Part , and select the related parts to receive the marking line
attributes.
You can select the parts in the model, or from the Workspace Explorer.

10. Click Properties to review the marking attributes.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 79

 Marking Lines

The attributes that display depend on the type of marking after the selection of the
related part. For example, the Connection GUID, Related Part Name, Direction, and so on
may display.

11. Click Finish.

Copy and paste a marking line

1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the marking lines to copy.

 You can select the marking lines in the model, or from the Workspace Explorer.
 You can set the Locate Filter to Marking to make the selection easier.
3. Click Edit > Copy.
4. Select a point in the model as a reference point from which to copy.
5. Click Edit > Paste.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 80

 Marking Lines

6. Select the part on which to paste the marking lines on the plate input line of the Paste dialog
box.

 You must select a detailed plate or profile for the destination.

 If the marking that you copied is from a plate, you must select a plate for the destination. If
the marking that you copied is from a profile, you must select a profile for the destination.
7. Select the sketching plane for the marking lines.
8. Click OK on the Paste dialog box.

Modify marking
1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the marking to modify.
You can select the marking in the model, or from the Workspace Explorer.
3. Using the ribbon controls, edit the marking as needed.
You cannot change the parent plate when you modify the object.

Delete marking
1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the marking to delete.

3. Click Delete .

Marking Folder Properties Dialog Box

Specifies the properties for the marking folder that you are editing.
See Also
General Tab (Marking Folder Properties Dialog Box) (on page 81)
Relationships Tab (on page 84)

General Tab (Marking Folder Properties Dialog Box)

Name
Specifies the name of the marking folder. If you change the name, then the name rule
changes automatically to User Defined.
Name Rule
Select a name rule for the marking folder.
Detailed Part Status
Displays the status of the parent object for the marking folder. This property only displays
when you are modifying a marking folder.
Manufacturing Object Status

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 81

 Marking Lines

Displays the status of the marking folder. This property only displays when you are modifying
a marking folder.

Marking Line Properties Dialog Box

Specifies the properties for the marking lines that you are editing.
See Also
General Tab (Marking Line Properties Dialog Box) (on page 82)
Relationships Tab (on page 84)
Configuration Tab (on page 84)
Notes Tab (on page 86)

General Tab (Marking Line Properties Dialog Box)

Name
Specifies the name of the marking line set. If you change the name, then the name rule
changes automatically to User Defined.
Name Rule
Select a name rule for the marking line set.
 Select DefaultNameRule to use the following syntax: <"MK">_<Parent
Name>-<Workshare Location ID>. For example, MK_<B0.1-7.1-4.1-2>-SH.1-1-1, where
MK denotes a marking object, <B0.1-7.1-4.1-2>-SH.1-1 is the parent name, and 1 is the
Workshare Location ID. If there is no parent, the parent name is "NoParent."
 Select User Defined to type a name in the Name box.
Type
Select the type of marking line to place.
Side
Select the side on which to place the marking line.
Detailed Part Status
Displays the state of the parent part or parts for the manufacturing object. This property only
displays when you are modifying a part.
Up to Date - The part state is current with all of its relationships, such as connected parts.
Out of Date - The part state is not current with all of its relationships, such as connected parts.
A relationship change can cause this state. You can update the detailed part by using Tools >
Recompute Objects. For more information, see Recompute Objects in the Common User's
Guide.
In Error - The part encountered an error. A relationship change such as connected parts can
cause the error. You can clear the error by using View > To Do List. For more information,
see To Do List in the Common User's Guide.
Warning - The part encountered a warning. A relationship change such as connected parts
can cause the warning. You can clear the error by using View > To Do List. For more
information, see To Do List in the Common User's Guide.
Light Part - The part has not been detailed.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 82

 Marking Lines

Manufacturing Object Status

Displays the status of the manufacturing object. This property only displays when you are
modifying a manufacturing object.
Up to Date - The part state is current with all of its relationships, such as connected parts.
Out of Date - The part state is not current with all of its relationships, such as detailed parts. A
relationship change can cause this state. You can update the manufacturing part by using
Manufacturing Service Manager . For more information, see Manufacturing Service
Manager (on page 319).
In To Do List - The part encountered an error or warning. A relationship change such as
connected parts can cause this state. You can clear the error by using View > To Do List. For
more information, see To Do List in the Common User's Guide.
Up to Date (Pre-nesting) - The state of a pre-nested part is current with all of its
relationships, such as connected parts.
Out of Date (Pre-nesting) - The state of a pre-nested part is not current with all of its
relationships, such as connected parts. A relationship change can cause this state.
In To Do List (Pre-nesting) - The pre-nested part encountered an error. A relationship
change can cause this state.
For more information on the pre-nesting service, see Pre-Nesting (on page 379).
Physical Connection GUID
Displays the GUID of the physical connection. This property only displays when you have a
specific type of marking line (example: Location Mark) and when the related part is selected.
Related Part Name
Displays the name of the related part. This property only displays when you have a specific
type of marking line and when the related part is selected.
Direction
Select the direction of the related part. This property only displays when you have a specific
type of marking line and when the related part is selected.
Fitting Angle
Specifies the fitting angle. This property only displays when you have a specific type of
marking line and when the related part is selected.
Part GUID
Displays the GUID of the related part. This property only displays when you have a specific
type of marking line and when the related part is selected.
Flange Direction
Specifies the flange direction. This property only displays when you have a specific type of
marking line and when the related part is selected.
Max Assembly Margin Value
Specifies the maximum assembly margin value. This property only displays when you have a
specific type of marking line and when the related part is selected.
Max Fabrication Margin Value

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 83

 Marking Lines

Specifies the maximum fabrication margin value. This property only displays when you have a
specific type of marking line and when the related part is selected.
Max Custom Margin Value
Specifies the maximum custom margin value. This property only displays when you have a
specific type of marking line and when the related part is selected.

Relationships Tab
Displays all objects related to the selected object for which you are viewing properties. For
example, if you are viewing the properties of a pipe run, the related pipeline, features, parts,
associated control points, hangers or supports, and equipment display on this tab. All WBS
assignments, including project relationships, display on this tab.
Additional examples for marine relationships are as follows:
 For plate and profile system properties, the related bounded objects, bounding objects, and
connections are shown.
 For plate and profile system part properties, parent systems are shown.
 For assembly connection properties, all connected objects are shown.
 For the properties of a frame connection on a member, supported, supporting, and auxiliary
supporting parts are shown.
 For split connection properties, the parent and auxiliary supporting parts are shown.
Name
Specifies the name of the object.
Type
Specifies the type of object.
Go To
Displays the properties of the selected object.

Configuration Tab
Displays the creation, modification, and status information about an object.
Plant/Ship
Displays the name of the model. You cannot change this value.
Permission Group
Specifies the permission group to which the object belongs. You can select another
permission group, if needed. Permission groups are created in Project Management.
Transfer
Reassigns ownership of the selected model objects from their current permission group to
another satellite or host permission group. This option is only available if the active model or
project is replicated in a workshare configuration. The option is not available if all of the
objects in the select set already belong to another location and are non-transferable. For more
information, see Transfer Ownership Dialog Box in the Common User's Guide.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 84

 Marking Lines

Approval State
Specifies the status of the selected object or filter. The display depends on your access level.
You might be unable to change the status of the object. The list is defined by the
ApprovalStatus codelist.
You can only edit or manipulate an object with a status of Working.
Status
Specifies the location of the object in the workflow process. Changing this property sets the
Approval State. The list is controlled by the ApprovalReason codelist in the
[Link] file. You must bulkload this file. For more information, see
ApprovalReason in the Reference Data Guide.
Date Created
Specifies the creation date of the object.
Created by
Specifies the name of the person who created the object.
Date Last Modified
Specifies the date of the last modification to the object.
Last Modified by
Specifies the name of the person who last modified the object.

Transfer Ownership Dialog Box

Allows you to specify a new location and permission group for the selected model objects.
Current location
Displays the name of the location with which the current permission group is associated. All
the objects in the select set must belong to the same location.
Current permission group
Displays the name of the permission group with which the selected objects are currently
associated. If all the objects in the select set do not belong to the same permission group, this
box displays blank.
New location
Specifies the name of the location to which you want to assign the objects. In a global
workshare configuration, this box lists all the locations in which you have write access to one
or more permission groups. The selection in this box filters the entries in the New permission
group box.
New permission group
Specifies the new permission group to which to assign the selected objects. If you specify a
value in the New location box, this list displays all permission groups to which you have write
access in the selected location. If you do not specify a value in the New location box, this list
includes all permission groups to which you have write access in all locations except the
current location. This box is blank if you do not have write access to any permission groups at
any locations other than the current one.
We strongly recommend that administrators follow naming convention rules that

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 85

 Marking Lines

include the location as a prefix in the permission group name.

Notes Tab
Creates and edits user-definable text placed by the designer on an object in the model. The notes
provide special instructions related to the object for the fabricator and are available in downstream
tasks. For example, the notes appear in two-dimensional drawings and within design review
sessions.
Only one note of a given kind from a given object can be shown on a drawing. For
example, if there are two fabrication notes on a piping part, then only one of the notes shows on
the drawing. It is important to know about and to consider this situation when defining notes on an
object in the modeling phase. For example, you can display one Fabrication note and one
Installation note by defining two separate labels for the two kinds of notes.
Key point
Specifies the key point on the object to which you want to add a note.
Notes at this location, listed by name
Lists all notes for the selected key point on the object.
Date
Displays the date that the note was created. The system automatically supplies the date.
Time
Displays the time that the note was created. The system automatically supplies the time.
Purpose of note
Specifies the purpose of the note.
Author
Displays the login name of the person who created the note. The system automatically
supplies this information. You cannot change this information.
Note text
Defines the note text. The software does not limit the length of the note text.
Show dimension
Indicates that the note generates a dimension.
If you are displaying the properties for a Support component, then a dimension can be
included for the component in the Support drawings, if you select the Show dimension
option. The note must be associated with one of the key points for the Support component. It
is recommended that you set the Purpose of note as Fabrication, but this is not a
requirement. The note Name and Note text are not used when you select this option.
New Note
Creates a new note on the object.
Standard Note
Displays a list of standard notes from which you can select. This feature is not available in this
version.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 86

 Marking Lines

Highlight Note
Highlights the note in the graphic view so that you can easily find the note and the object to
which it is related. This feature is not available in this version.
Delete Note
Deletes the currently displayed note.

Marking by Definition
Creates marking lines based on symbol definition.

Marking by Definition Dialog Box (on page 88)

What do you want to do?

 Create a skid mark (on page 87)
 Create a bilge keel mark (on page 87)
 Create a block mark (on page 88)

Create a skid mark

1. Click Marking by Definition on the vertical toolbar.
The Marking by Definition dialog box displays.
2. In the Select marking line definition box, select Skid Mark.
3. Set the remaining parameters to meet your needs. You may need to click Expand to display
the offset parameters.

Create a bilge keel mark

1. Click Marking by Definition on the vertical toolbar.
The Marking by Definition dialog box displays.
2. In the Select marking line definition box, select Bilge Keel Mark.
3. Set the remaining parameters to meet your needs.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 87

 Marking Lines

Create a block mark

1. Click Marking by Definition on the vertical toolbar.
The Marking by Definition dialog box displays.
2. In the Select marking line definition box, select Block Mark.
3. Set the remaining parameters to meet your needs.

Marking by Definition Dialog Box

Specifies the properties for the marking lines.
Select marking line definition
Select the type of marking line definition from the list. This specifies the marking by definition
symbol defined in the catalog. The marking line definition determines the parameters that
display on the dialog box.
Preview
Displays a preview of the marking lines.

Bilge Keel Mark

Plate System
Select the plate system associated with the marking line.
Plate/Profile System
Select the connected plate or profile system associated with the marking line.
Reference Surface
Select the reference surface of connected system parts associated with the marking line.
Marking Side
Select the side on which the marking lines are placed.
Marking Type
Select the marking type for the marking lines.
Name Rule
Select the naming rule for the marking lines.
Apply
Creates the marking line using the parameters specified on the dialog box. The parameters
remain active on the dialog box.
OK
Creates the marking line using the parameters specified on the dialog box. The parameters
are cleared from the dialog box.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 88

 Marking Lines

Skid Mark
Plate System
Select the plate system associated with the marking line.
Lower Frame
Select the lower frame associated with the marking line.
Upper Frame
Select the upper frame associated with the marking line.
Longitudinal Reference
Select the longitudinal reference associated with the marking line.
Plane Reference
Select the plane reference associated with the marking line.
Marking Type
Select the marking type for the marking lines.
Marking Side
Select the side on which the marking lines are placed.
Name Rule
Select the naming rule for the marking lines.
Expand
Expands the dialog box to display the offset parameters for the marking line.
Starting Plane
Specify the starting plane from which the skid mark is created. The skid mark is placed from
the starting plane to the next frame. This option displays only if you click the Expand button.
Offset
Specify the girth offset distance from the longitudinal reference. This option displays only if
you click the Expand button.
Add
Adds a new row to the table. This option displays only if you click the Expand button.
Delete
Deletes the active row. If no row is active, deletes the first row in the table. This option displays
only if you click the Expand button.

Block Mark
Pin Jig
Specifies the pin jig associated with the assembly.
Offset Value
Specifies the offset distance from the pin jig base plane where marks are created on plates

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 89

 Marking Lines

connected to plates supported by the pin jig.

Supported Plates by Type
Specifies the type of supported plate. The available options include:
 Transversal - Software automatically selects all of the transversal plates that are
connected to the plates supported by the pin jig.
 Longitudinal - Software automatically selects all of the longitudinal plates that are
connected to the plates supported by the pin jig.
 Transversal and Longitudinal - Software automatically selects both the transversal and
the longitudinal plates that are connected to the plates supported by the pin jig.
 User Selection - Nothing is selected automatically.
Supported Plates by User
Select individual plates that are connected to plates supported by the pin jig. This option is
only available if Supported Plates by Type is set to User Selection.
Marking Type
Specifies the marking type for the marking lines.
Marking Side
Specifies the side on which the marking lines are placed.
Name Rule
Specifies the naming rule for the marking lines.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 90

SECTION 3

Margins
The margin commands add material at plate edges or profile ends.

In This Section
Fabrication Margin ......................................................................... 91
Connect Fabrication Margin........................................................... 103
Margin By Assembly Connections ................................................. 113
Regional Margin ............................................................................. 120

Fabrication Margin
Adds material at plate edges or profile ends. The material is removed after bending or
assembly if it is no longer needed.
You can place simple constant value margins.

You can also place oblique (variable) margins. For an oblique margin, the value is linearly
distributed between the start and end points. Oblique margins are only applied to plates.

1 - Oblique margin

The following fabrication margin types are delivered with the software:
Bending margin
Extra material applied to the manufacturing part to ensure proper object shape and size after
bending.
Bending margin is a plate or profile part before bending. The margin is used during the
bending work on the part using a bending machine. The bending margin is applied parallel to
the edge of the part. You can apply bending margins to all sides of the part. The bending
margin is removed after the bending work of the part is completed. The workflow in the shop is
as follows:

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 91

 Margins

 Cut the part including the bending margin.

 Bend the curved part.
 After the bending work is complete, remove any remaining bending margin.
Heating margin
Extra material applied to the manufacturing part to ensure proper object shape and size after
heating.
Heating margin is a margin applied to a part that is bent by heating, or to a part that is known
to distort during the manufacturing process and requires heating to remove the distortion. The
margin is used by the heating process. Heating margins are applied as oblique or parallel
margins to the edge of the part. The workflow in the shop is as follows:
 Cut the part including the heating margin.
 Heat the part.
End face margin
Extra material applied to the manufacturing part that is consumed as part of the assembly
process. Extra material is typically added parallel to the part end face or edge at the assembly
or block lateral face.
During assembly, the margin gradually shrinks and eventually disappears after completion of
the assembly or block.
Intercostal margin
Material that is removed at the ends of a manufacturing part when the ends are fillet welded.

Generic Margin - Non Trimmed

Extra material applied to the manufacturing part that is consumed during manufacturing.
Generic Margin - Trimmed
Extra material applied to the manufacturing part that should be removed after manufacturing.
If the edge of the plate contains features, you can specify that those features remain fixed, or
move with the margin.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 92

 Margins

The following example shows an edge feature that moves with the fabrication margin:

The following example shows an edge feature that does not move with the fabrication margin:

For built-up profiles, you can define the margin for the web and flange separately.
Margins can be applied in two different ways, depending upon the rules. Margins can be
applied by translation, or by applying a constant offset through the length of the curve.

Offset Translated

Coaming
Add the additional material necessary to account for your modeling practice.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 93

 Margins

PanelEnd
Adds material to support the 2-stage production cutting process of plates. Smart 3D applies
the solution in combination with panel assembly and panel welding sequence.
By default, the margin is applied by translation for all profiles and members. That is, the contour
curve is shifted in the margin direction. To apply a margin by constant offset, you must modify the
rules. For more information, see the Structural Manufacturing Reference Data Guide.

Fabrication Margin Ribbon

Displays the controls used to add a fabrication margin to plate edges or profile ends.

Properties
Opens the Fabrication Margin Properties dialog box, which you use to view and modify the
properties of the fabrication margin that you are about to place in the model. For more
information, see Fabrication Margin Properties Dialog Box (on page 100).

Part
Select the detailed plate, profile, or member part to which you want to add the fabrication
margin. You can select the part in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer.

 If the Rule box is selected and you first select a plate that is oblique by rule, then the
oblique properties are set and you can pick only connected plates.
 If the Rule box is selected and you first select a plate that is constant by rule, then you can
pick only plates that comply with that rule.
 If the Rule box is not selected, then you can select any plates. The software applies the
last used margin as a default.
 If the Mode box is set to Constant, then you can select any parts.
 If the Mode box is set to Oblique, then you can select only connected parts.
 If you clear a part, then the software automatically clears the faces of that part.

Lateral Face
Select the plate later faces (edges) or profile ends on which to add margin. Because a face
can only have one margin of a given type, the faces of the selected parts that already have a
margin of the currently selected type are highlighted and not selectable.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 94

 Margins

 If the Mode box is set to Constant, then you can select any face of the selected parts. If you
select two parts, and then select the face between those parts, the software selects one edge
of the connected parts. You must select an edge on the other plate for placing multiple
margins. You can place a margin on only one edge of the plat. For example, if you select p1,
p2, and p3 in the Part step, then you can select one edge on each of the plates to place a
margin.

 If the Mode box is set to Oblique, then you can select only connected, continuous faces. For
example if you select p1 and p2, then you cannot select p3.

 After the faces are selected, then the software runs the appropriate rules to set the margins
and the default feature move setting.
Start End
Select the start point for the oblique margin on one side of the selected faces. This option is
only available if the Mode box is set to Oblique.
Finish
Creates the fabrication margin using the parameters that you have defined.
Cancel
Clears the selection.
Accept
Accepts the selection.
Part Filter
Specifies the type of part that you can select.
Rule
Specifies that the margin is placed by rule.
Mode
Specifies whether the margin is constant or oblique.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 95

 Margins

If you have selected multiple plates or faces, you cannot change from constant to
oblique. You can change multiple plates or faces from oblique to constant.
Type
Select the type of margin to apply. For more information on the available types, see
Fabrication Margin (on page 91).
Value
Specifies the amount of margin to apply. This option displays when The Mode box is set to
Constant.
Start Value
Specifies the amount of margin to apply at the identified start point of the selected lateral face.
This option displays when The Mode box is set to Oblique.
End Value
Specifies the amount of margin to apply at the opposite point of the identified start point at the
selected lateral face. The oblique margin is linearly distributed between the start and end
points. This option displays when the Mode box is set to Oblique.
Direction
Indicates the direction in which the margin is applied to the object. When the direction is set to
Perpendicular to Edge, the margin is applied normal to the lateral face port. When the
direction is set to Global for a plate, the margin is applied in the direction along the X, Y, or Z
axis in which the plate is oriented. If the direction is set to Global for a profile, the margin is
applied along the landing curve direction.
Geometry Change
Indicates whether the margin should be trimmed. The following options are available:
 As Margin - Trimming is needed. The extension is only on the edge.
 By Stretch - No trimming is needed. The software stretches the shape along the part like
shrinkage.
 As Reference - No request to extend the geometry. The margin is placed as a reference.
Stretch Offset
The length of the adjacent edge that the software adjusts while applying the margin. This
option is only editable if Geometry Change is set to By Stretch.

What do you want to do?

 Add fabrication margin (on page 97)
 Modify fabrication margin (on page 98)
 Copy and paste a constant fabrication margin (on page 99)
 Copy and paste an oblique fabrication margin (on page 99)
 Delete fabrication margin (on page 100)

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 96

 Margins

Add fabrication margin

1. Click Fabrication Margin .

2. On the Fabrication Margin ribbon, click Part .

3. Select the parts for which you want to add a fabrication margin.
You can select the plate parts in the model, or from the Workspace Explorer.

4. Click Lateral Face .

5. Select the plate lateral faces (edges) or profile ends on which to add the margin.
6. Select the margin mode.
7. Select the margin type.
8. Type the margin values.
9. Select the margin direction.
10. Specify the margin geometry change and stretch offset values.
11. Click Accept .
12. Click Finish.

 If the Rule box is selected and you first select a plate that is oblique by rule, then the oblique
properties are set and you can pick only connected plates.
 If the Rule box is selected and you first select a plate that is constant by rule, then you can
pick only plates that comply with that rule.
 If the Rule box is not selected, then you can select any plates. The software applies the last
used margin as a default.
 If the Mode box is set to Constant, then you can select any parts.
 If the Mode box is set to Oblique, then you can select only connected parts.
 If you clear a part, then the software automatically clears the faces of that part.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 97

 Margins

 If the Mode box is set to Constant, then you can select any face of the selected parts. If you
select two parts, and then select the face between those parts, the software selects one edge
of the connected parts. You must select an edge on the other plate for placing multiple
margins. You can place a margin on only one edge of the plat. For example, if you select p1,
p2, and p3 in the Part step, then you can select one edge on each of the plates to place a
margin.

 If the Mode box is set to Oblique, then you can select only connected, continuous faces. For
example if you select p1 and p2, then you cannot select p3.

 After the faces are selected, then the software runs the appropriate rules to set the margins
and the default feature move setting.

Modify fabrication margin

1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the margin to modify.
You can select the plate parts in the model, or from the Workspace Explorer.
3. Using the ribbon controls, edit the margin as needed.
You cannot change the parent plate when you modify the object.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 98

 Margins

Copy and paste a constant fabrication margin

1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the margin to copy.

 You can select the margin in the model, or from the Workspace Explorer.
 You can set the Locate Filter to Constant Margin to make the selection easier.
3. Click Edit > Copy.
4. Click Edit > Paste.
5. Select the plate lateral faces (edges) or profile ends on which to paste the margin.

 You must select a destination that does not already have a margin of the type that you are
pasting. That is, a plate or profile cannot have duplicate margins of the same type.
 If the margin that you copied is from a plate, you must select a plate for the destination. If
the margin that you copied is from a profile, you must select a profile for the destination. If
the margin that you copied is from a member, you must select a member for the
destination.
6. Click OK on the Paste dialog box.

Copy and paste an oblique fabrication margin

1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the margin to copy.

 You can select the margin in the model, or from the Workspace Explorer.
 You can set the Locate Filter to Oblique Margin to make the selection easier.
3. Click Edit > Copy.
4. Click Edit > Paste.
5. Select the plate lateral faces (edges) or profile ends on which to paste the margin.

 You must select a destination that does not already have a margin of the type that you are
pasting. That is, a plate or profile cannot have duplicate margins of the same type.
 If the margin that you copied is from a plate, you must select a plate for the destination. If
the margin that you copied is from a profile, you must select a profile for the destination. If
the margin that you copied is from a member, you must select a member for the
destination.
6. Click OK on the Paste dialog box.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 99

 Margins

Delete fabrication margin

1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the fabrication margin to delete.

3. Click Delete .

Fabrication Margin Properties Dialog Box

Specifies the properties for the fabrication margin that you are editing.
See Also
General Tab (Fabrication Margin Properties Dialog Box) (on page 100)
Feature Tab (Fabrication Margin Properties Dialog Box) (on page 103)
Relationships Tab (on page 84)
Configuration Tab (on page 84)
Notes Tab (on page 86)

General Tab (Fabrication Margin Properties Dialog Box)

Name
Specifies the name of the part on which the margin is being created or modified. This column
is not editable.
Status
Indicates whether the margin is being created or modified. This column is not editable.
Rule
Indicates whether the margin properties come from the rule or are user defined. The possible
values are Apply and Ignore. By default, this value is set to Apply for all margins that are
being created. If you change the values, the rule status automatically changes to Ignore. For
the existing margins, the status is Ignore. This column is editable.
Mode
Indicates the mode of the margin object. This column is not editable.
Type
Indicates the type of margin to apply. This column is editable.
Bending margin
Extra material applied to the manufacturing part to ensure proper object shape and size after
bending.
Bending margin is a plate or profile part before bending. The margin is used during the
bending work on the part using a bending machine. The bending margin is applied parallel to
the edge of the part. You can apply bending margins to all sides of the part. The bending
margin is removed after the bending work of the part is completed. The workflow in the shop is
as follows:
 Cut the part including the bending margin.
 Bend the curved part.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 100

 Margins

 After the bending work is complete, remove any remaining bending margin.
Heating margin
Extra material applied to the manufacturing part to ensure proper object shape and size after
heating.
Heating margin is a margin applied to a part that is bent by heating, or to a part that is known
to distort during the manufacturing process and requires heating to remove the distortion. The
margin is used by the heating process. Heating margins are applied as oblique or parallel
margins to the edge of the part. The workflow in the shop is as follows:
 Cut the part including the heating margin.
 Heat the part.
End face margin
Extra material applied to the manufacturing part that is consumed as part of the assembly
process. Extra material is typically added parallel to the part end face or edge at the assembly
or block lateral face.
During assembly, the margin gradually shrinks and eventually disappears after completion of
the assembly or block.
Intercostal margin
Material that is removed at the ends of a manufacturing part when the ends are fillet welded.

Generic Margin - Non Trimmed

Extra material applied to the manufacturing part that is consumed during manufacturing.
Generic Margin - Trimmed
Extra material applied to the manufacturing part that should be removed after manufacturing.
Margin Value
Specifies the amount of margin to apply. This option displays when Constant Margin is
selected in the Mode box.
Start Value
Specifies the amount of margin to apply at the identified start point of the selected lateral face.
This option displays when Oblique Margin is selected in the Mode box.
End Value
Specifies the amount of margin to apply at the opposite point of the identified start point at the
selected lateral face. The oblique margin is linearly distributed between the given start and
end points. This option displays when Oblique Margin is selected in the Mode box.
Direction
Indicates the direction in which the margin is applied to the object. When the direction is set to
Perpendicular to Edge, the margin is applied normal to the lateral face port. When the

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 101

 Margins

direction is set to Global for a plate, the margin is applied in the direction along the X, Y, or Z
axis in which the plate is oriented. If the direction is set to Global for a profile, the margin is
applied along the landing curve direction.
Geometry Change
Indicates whether the margin should be trimmed. The following options are available:
As Margin - Trimming is needed. The extension is only on the edge.
By Stretch - No trimming is needed. The software stretches the shape along the part like
shrinkage.
As Reference - No request to extend the geometry. The margin is placed as a reference.
Stretch Offset
The length of the adjacent edge that the software adjusts while applying the margin. This is
only editable if the Geometry Change is set to By Stretch.
Action
Indicates whether or not the margin properties are applied to the margin object. The possible
values for objects that you are creating are Apply and Ignore. The possible values for objects
that you are modifying are Apply, Ignore, and Delete. If the value is set to Apply, the
modified properties are applied to the margin object. If the value is set to Ignore, then the
modified properties are not applied to the margin object. If the value is set to Delete, then the
margin object is deleted.
Add Margin
Adds a new row to the grid. This new row indicates the properties of another margin object
that are created at the same port of the selected part. By default, all of the properties of the
selected margin are copied onto the new margin object except for the margin type. You can
edit these properties.
Rule
Indicates whether or not margins are placed by rule.
Margin Type
Indicates the group margin type. This is the same value as shown in the ribbon bar.
Margin Value
Indicates the group margin value. This is the same value as shown in the ribbon bar.
Offset Direction
Indicates the offset direction. This is the same value as shown in the ribbon bar.
Update Dependent Objects
Indicates whether or not the dependent object parameters need to be updated if the parent
margin properties change.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 102

 Margins

Feature Tab (Fabrication Margin Properties Dialog Box)

Feature name
Specifies the name of the feature. Features are listed in order from one end of the face to the
other. When you select a feature on the dialog box, that feature highlights in the model.
Condition
Specifies the movement option for the feature when the margin is applied. Options include Fix
or Move.
Set by Rule
Sets the movement condition for all selected features as specified by the rules.
See Also
Fabrication Margin Properties Dialog Box (on page 100)

Connect Fabrication Margin

Selects all of the plates or profiles bounded to the plate system or part, and selects all the faces
at the bounding plate systems or parts to place margins.
Parts can be bounded to both sides of the plate system. Use the toggle button to select parts
connected to either side.

Connect Fabrication Margin Ribbon

Displays the controls used to add a fabrication margin to all of the plate edges or profile ends
connected to a selected part.

Fabrication Margin Settings

Opens the Fabrication Margin Settings dialog box, which you use to view and modify the
properties of the fabrication margin that you are about to place in the model. For more
information, see Margin Settings Dialog Box (on page 107).

Connected Part
Select the bounding plate system or part. The software highlights all of the connected parts on
one side of your selection and displays an arrow indicating the active side. Click the Direction
toggle to highlight the connected parts on the other side of your selection.

Part
Select the plate or profile part to which you want to add the fabrication margin. You can select
the part in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer.

 Connected fabrication margins are always Constant.

 If the Rule box is not selected, then you can select any plates. The software applies the
last used margin as a default.
 If you clear a part, then the software automatically clears the faces of that part.

Lateral Face

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 103

 Margins

Select the plate later faces (edges) or profile ends on which to add margin. Because a face
can only have one margin of a given type, the faces of the selected parts that already have a
margin of the currently define type assigned are highlighted and not selectable.

Margin Properties
Displays a dialog box that allows you to review or edit the properties of the margins that you
are creating or editing. For more information, see Margin Properties Dialog Box (Connect
Fabrication Margin) (on page 110).
Finish
Creates the fabrication margin using the parameters that you have defined.
Cancel
Clears the selection.
Accept
Accepts the selection.
Name Rule
Specifies the naming rule for the margin objects that you are creating. The naming rule is not
applied on margin objects that you are modifying.
Connected Part Filter
Specifies the filter for selecting connected parts. The available options are provided by the
fabrication margin rule. By default, the following options are available:
 Plate - Allows you to select plate parts.
 Profile - Allows you to select profile parts.
 Plate System - Allows you to select plate systems.
 Member - Allows you to select members.

Direction
Toggles the side of the side of the bounding plate system or part that the software uses to find
connected parts. A red arrow displays in the model to indicate the current direction.
Part Filter
Specifies the filter for selecting parts. The available options are provided by the fabrication
margin rule. By default, the following options are available:
 Plate - Allows you to select plate parts.
 Profile - Allows you to select profile parts.
 Member - Allows you to select members.
 Bracket - Allows you to select brackets.
 All - Allows you to select plates, profiles, members, and brackets. This is a combination of
all other filters. This option respects the Profile with SetBack option set on the
Properties dialog box.
 All with Setback - Allows you to select plates, profiles (including profiles with setback),
members, and brackets.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 104

 Margins

 Customize - Opens the New tab on the Properties dialog box.

Naming Rule
Specifies that the margin is placed by rule.
Margin Type
Select the type of margin to apply. For more information on the available types, see
Fabrication Margin (on page 91).
Margin Value
Specifies the amount of margin to apply. This option displays when The Mode box is set to
Constant.
Margin Direction
Indicates the direction in which the margin is applied to the object. When the direction is set to
Perpendicular to Edge, the margin is applied normal to the lateral face port. When the
direction is set to Global for a plate, the margin is applied in the direction along the X, Y, or Z
axis in which the plate is oriented. If the direction is set to Global for a profile, the margin is
applied along the landing curve direction.
Geometry Change
Indicates whether the margin should be trimmed. The following options are available:
 As Margin - Trimming is needed. The extension is only on the edge.
 By Stretch - No trimming is needed. The software stretches the shape along the part like
shrinkage.
 As Reference - No request to extend the geometry. The margin is placed as a reference.
Stretch Offset
The length of the adjacent edge that the software adjusts while applying the margin. This
option is only editable if Geometry Change is set to By Stretch.

What do you want to do?

 Add connected fabrication margin (on page 106)
 Modify a connected fabrication margin (on page 106)
 Delete a connected fabrication margin (on page 106)

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 105

 Margins

Add connected fabrication margin

1. Click Connection Margin .
2. Select the bounding plate system or part based on the filter criteria that you have defined
using the Connected Part Filter box.

 You can select the plate parts in the model, or from the Workspace Explorer.
 The software highlights the connected parts on one side of the bounding object. Click the
Direction toggle to select the connected parts on the other side of the bounding
object.

3. Click Fabrication Margin Settings .

The Margin Properties dialog box displays.
4. Set the margin settings to meet your needs. For more information, see Margin Properties
Dialog Box (Connect Fabrication Margin) (on page 110).
5. Click Finish.

 Connected fabrication margins are always Constant.

 If the Rule box is not selected, then you can select any plates. The software applies the
last used margin as a default.
 If you clear a part, then the software automatically clears the faces of that part.

Modify a connected fabrication margin

1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the connected fabrication margin to modify.
You can select the assembly margins from the Workspace Explorer.
3. Using the ribbon controls, edit the margin as needed.

Delete a connected fabrication margin

1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the connected fabrication margin to delete.

3. Click Delete .

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 106

 Margins

Margin Settings Dialog Box

Displays options for viewing or editing common properties of the selected margin objects.
 General Tab (Margin Properties Dialog Box) (on page 107)
 Part Filters (Margin Properties Dialog Box) (on page 110)
Name
Specifies the name of the assembly margin.
Naming Rule
Specifies the naming rule applied to the margin objects to create. Select User Defined to type
a name in the Name box.
Margin Naming Rule
Specifies the naming rule for the assembly margin children.
Margin Type
Specifies the common margin type of the margin objects.
Margin Value
Specifies the common margin value of the margin objects.
Margin Direction
Specifies the common margin direction of the margin objects.
Geometry Change
Specifies the common margin geometry change of the margin objects.
Stretch Offset
Specifies the common margin stretch offset value of the margin objects.

General Tab (Margin Properties Dialog Box)

Part
Specifies the name of the part on which the margin is being created or modified. This column
is not editable.
Status
Indicates whether the margin is being created or modified. This column is not editable.
Rule
Indicates whether the margin properties come from the rule or are user defined. The possible
values are Apply and Ignore. By default, this value is set to Apply for all margins that are
being created. If you change the values, the rule status automatically changes to Ignore. For
the existing margins, the status is Ignore. This column is editable.
Mode
Indicates the mode of the margin object. This column is not editable.
Type

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 107

 Margins

Type of margin to apply. This column is editable.

Bending margin
Extra material applied to the manufacturing part to ensure proper object shape and size after
bending.
Bending margin is a plate or profile part before bending. The margin is used during the
bending work on the part using a bending machine. The bending margin is applied parallel to
the edge of the part. You can apply bending margins to all sides of the part. The bending
margin is removed after the bending work of the part is completed. The workflow in the shop is
as follows:
 Cut the part including the bending margin.
 Bend the curved part.
 After the bending work is complete, remove any remaining bending margin.
Heating margin
Extra material applied to the manufacturing part to ensure proper object shape and size after
heating.
Heating margin is a margin applied to a part that is bent by heating, or to a part that is known
to distort during the manufacturing process and requires heating to remove the distortion. The
margin is used by the heating process. Heating margins are applied as oblique or parallel
margins to the edge of the part. The workflow in the shop is as follows:
 Cut the part including the heating margin.
 Heat the part.
End face margin
Extra material applied to the manufacturing part that is consumed as part of the assembly
process. Extra material is typically added parallel to the part end face or edge at the assembly
or block lateral face.
During assembly, the margin gradually shrinks and eventually disappears after completion of
the assembly or block.
Intercostal margin
Material that is removed at the ends of a manufacturing part when the ends are fillet welded.

Generic Margin - Non Trimmed

Extra material applied to the manufacturing part that is consumed during manufacturing.
Generic Margin - Trimmed
Extra material applied to the manufacturing part that should be removed after manufacturing.
Start Value
Specifies the amount of margin to apply at the identified start point of the selected lateral face.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 108

 Margins

This option displays when Oblique Margin is selected in the Mode box.
End Value
Specifies the amount of margin to apply at the opposite point of the identified start point at the
selected lateral face. The oblique margin is linearly distributed between the given start and
end points. This option displays when Oblique Margin is selected in the Mode box.
Direction
Indicates the direction in which the margin is applied to the object. When the direction is set to
Perpendicular to Edge, the margin is applied normal to the lateral face port. When the
direction is set to Global for a plate, the margin is applied in the direction along the X, Y, or Z
axis in which the plate is oriented. If the direction is set to Global for a profile, the margin is
applied along the landing curve direction.
Geometry Change
Indicates whether the margin should be trimmed. The following options are available:
 As Margin - Trimming is needed. The extension is only on the edge.
 By Stretch - No trimming is needed. The software stretches the shape along the part like
shrinkage.
 As Reference - No request to extend the geometry. The margin is placed as a reference.
Stretch Offset
The length of the adjacent edge that the software adjusts while applying the margin. This is
only editable if the Geometry Change is set to By Stretch.
Action
Indicates whether or not the margin properties are applied to the margin object. The possible
values for objects that you are creating are Apply and Ignore. The possible values for objects
that you are modifying are Apply, Ignore, and Delete. If the value is set to Apply, the
modified properties are applied to the margin object. If the value is set to Ignore, then the
modified properties are not applied to the margin object. If the value is set to Delete, then the
margin object is deleted.
Rule
Indicates whether or not margins are placed by rule.
Type
Indicates the group margin type. This is the same value as shown in the ribbon bar.
Value
Indicates the group margin value. This is the same value as shown in the ribbon bar.
Update Dependent Objects
Indicates whether or not the dependent object parameters need to be updated if the parent
margin properties change.
Add Margin
Adds a new row to the grid. This new row indicates the properties of another margin object
that to create at the same port of the selected part. By default, all of the properties of the
selected margin are copied onto the new margin object except for the margin type. You can
edit these properties.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 109

 Margins

Part Filters (Margin Properties Dialog Box)

Plate
Indicates whether you can select plate parts.
Profile
Indicates whether you can select profile parts.
Member
Indicates whether you can select member parts.
Bracket
Indicates whether you can select bracket parts.
Profile with Set Back
Indicates whether profiles with set back (with only logical connections) are considered for
margins.

Margin Properties Dialog Box (Connect Fabrication Margin)

Part
Specifies the name of the part on which the margin is being created or modified. This column
is not editable.
Status
Indicates whether the margin is being created or modified. This column is not editable.
Rule
Indicates whether the margin properties come from the rule or are user defined. The possible
values are Apply and Ignore. By default, this value is set to Apply for all margins that are
being created. If you change the values, the rule status automatically changes to Ignore. For
the existing margins, the status is Ignore. This column is editable.
Mode
Indicates the mode of the margin object. This column is not editable.
Type
Type of margin to apply. This column is editable.
Bending margin
Extra material applied to the manufacturing part to ensure proper object shape and size after
bending.
Bending margin is a plate or profile part before bending. The margin is used during the
bending work on the part using a bending machine. The bending margin is applied parallel to
the edge of the part. You can apply bending margins to all sides of the part. The bending
margin is removed after the bending work of the part is completed. The workflow in the shop is
as follows:
 Cut the part including the bending margin.
 Bend the curved part.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 110

 Margins

 After the bending work is complete, remove any remaining bending margin.
Heating margin
Extra material applied to the manufacturing part to ensure proper object shape and size after
heating.
Heating margin is a margin applied to a part that is bent by heating, or to a part that is known
to distort during the manufacturing process and requires heating to remove the distortion. The
margin is used by the heating process. Heating margins are applied as oblique or parallel
margins to the edge of the part. The workflow in the shop is as follows:
 Cut the part including the heating margin.
 Heat the part.
End face margin
Extra material applied to the manufacturing part that is consumed as part of the assembly
process. Extra material is typically added parallel to the part end face or edge at the assembly
or block lateral face.
During assembly, the margin gradually shrinks and eventually disappears after completion of
the assembly or block.
Intercostal margin
Material that is removed at the ends of a manufacturing part when the ends are fillet welded.

Generic Margin - Non Trimmed

Extra material applied to the manufacturing part that is consumed during manufacturing.
Generic Margin - Trimmed
Extra material applied to the manufacturing part that should be removed after manufacturing.
Start Value
Specifies the amount of margin to apply at the identified start point of the selected lateral face.
This option displays when Oblique Margin is selected in the Mode box.
End Value
Specifies the amount of margin to apply at the opposite point of the identified start point at the
selected lateral face. The oblique margin is linearly distributed between the given start and
end points. This option displays when Oblique Margin is selected in the Mode box.
Direction
Indicates the direction in which the margin is applied to the object. When the direction is set to
Perpendicular to Edge, the margin is applied normal to the lateral face port. When the
direction is set to Global for a plate, the margin is applied in the direction along the X, Y, or Z
axis in which the plate is oriented. If the direction is set to Global for a profile, the margin is
applied along the landing curve direction.
Geometry Change

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 111

 Margins

Indicates whether the margin should be trimmed. The following options are available:
 As Margin - Trimming is needed. The extension is only on the edge.
 By Stretch - No trimming is needed. The software stretches the shape along the part like
shrinkage.
 As Reference - No request to extend the geometry. The margin is placed as a reference.
Stretch Offset
The length of the adjacent edge that the software adjusts while applying the margin. This is
only editable if the Geometry Change is set to By Stretch.
Action
Indicates whether or not the margin properties are applied to the margin object. The possible
values for objects that you are creating are Apply and Ignore. The possible values for objects
that you are modifying are Apply, Ignore, and Delete. If the value is set to Apply, the
modified properties are applied to the margin object. If the value is set to Ignore, then the
modified properties are not applied to the margin object. If the value is set to Delete, then the
margin object is deleted.
Rule
Indicates whether or not margins are placed by rule.
Type
Indicates the group margin type. This is the same value as shown in the ribbon bar.
Value
Indicates the group margin value. This is the same value as shown in the ribbon bar.
Update Dependent Objects
Indicates whether or not the dependent object parameters need to be updated if the parent
margin properties change.
Add Margin
Adds a new row to the grid. This new row indicates the properties of another margin object
that to create at the same port of the selected part. By default, all of the properties of the
selected margin are copied onto the new margin object except for the margin type. You can
edit these properties.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 112

 Margins

Margin By Assembly Connections

Creates or modifies margins at the connections between two assemblies or blocks. It creates
an assembly margin parent object grouping all the assembly margin children.
For built-up profiles, you can define the margin for the web and flange separately.

Margin By Assembly Connections Ribbon

Displays the controls used to add a fabrication margin to all of the plate edges or profile ends
connected to a selected assembly.

Assembly Margin Settings

Opens the Assembly Margin Settings dialog box, which you use to view and modify the
properties of the fabrication margin that you are about to place in the model. For more
information, see Assembly Margin Properties Dialog Box (on page 118).

Block or Assembly
Select the block or assembly to which you want to add the margin.

Select Connected Assembly

Select the adjacent block or assembly to specify the connection between assemblies to which
you want to add the margin.

Part
Select the plate or profile part to which you want to add the fabrication margin. You can select
the part in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer.

 Connected fabrication margins are always Constant.

 If the Rule box is not selected, then you can select any plates. The software applies the
last used margin as a default.
 If you clear the selection from a part, then the software automatically clears the selection
from the faces of that part.

Margin Properties

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 113

 Margins

Displays a dialog box that allows you to review or edit the properties of the margins that you
are creating or editing. For more information, see Margin Properties Dialog Box (Margin By
Assembly Connections) (on page 115).
Finish
Creates the fabrication margin using the parameters that you have defined.
Cancel
Clears the selection.
Accept
Accepts the selection.
Name Rule
Specifies the naming rule for the margin objects that you are creating. The naming rule is not
applied on margin objects that you are modifying.
Assembly Filter
Specifies the filter for selecting assemblies.
Rule
Specifies that the margin is placed by rule.
Type
Select the type of margin to apply. For more information on the available types, see
Fabrication Margin (on page 91).
Value
Specifies the amount of margin to apply. This option displays when The Mode box is set to
Constant.
Offset Direction
Indicates the direction in which the margin is applied to the object. When the direction is set to
Perpendicular to Edge, the margin is applied normal to the lateral face port. When the
direction is set to Global for a plate, the margin is applied in the direction along the X, Y, or Z
axis in which the plate is oriented. If the direction is set to Global for a profile, the margin is
applied along the landing curve direction.

What do you want to do?

 Add a margin by assembly connections (on page 115)
 Modify an assembly margin (on page 115)
 Delete an assembly margin (on page 115)

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 114

 Margins

Add a margin by assembly connections

1. Click Margin By Assembly Connections .
2. Select the assembly or block based on the filter criteria that you have defined using the
Assembly Filter box.
3. Select the connected assembly or block based on the filter criteria that you have defined using
the Assembly Filter box.

4. Click Margin Properties .

The Margin Properties dialog box displays.
5. Set the margin settings to meet your needs. For more information, see Margin Properties
Dialog Box (Margin By Assembly Connections) (on page 115).
6. Click Finish.

Modify an assembly margin

1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the assembly margin to modify.
You can select the assembly margins from the Workspace Explorer.
3. Using the ribbon controls, edit the margin as needed.
You can select multiple Assembly Margin or Assembly Margin Child objects to modify
at the same time.

Delete an assembly margin

1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the assembly margin to delete.

3. Click Delete .

Margin Properties Dialog Box (Margin By Assembly

Connections)
Name
Specifies the name of the part on which the margin is being created or modified. This column
is not editable.
Status
Indicates whether the margin is being created or modified. This column is not editable.
Rule
Indicates whether the margin properties come from the rule or are user defined. The possible
values are Apply and Ignore. By default, this value is set to Apply for all margins that are
being created. If you change the values, the rule status automatically changes to Ignore. For

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 115

 Margins

the existing margins, the status is Ignore. This column is editable.

Mode
Indicates the mode of the margin object. This column is not editable.
Type
Type of margin to apply. This column is editable.
Bending margin
Extra material applied to the manufacturing part to ensure proper object shape and size after
bending.
Bending margin is a plate or profile part before bending. The margin is used during the
bending work on the part using a bending machine. The bending margin is applied parallel to
the edge of the part. You can apply bending margins to all sides of the part. The bending
margin is removed after the bending work of the part is completed. The workflow in the shop is
as follows:
 Cut the part including the bending margin.
 Bend the curved part.
 After the bending work is complete, remove any remaining bending margin.
Heating margin
Extra material applied to the manufacturing part to ensure proper object shape and size after
heating.
Heating margin is a margin applied to a part that is bent by heating, or to a part that is known
to distort during the manufacturing process and requires heating to remove the distortion. The
margin is used by the heating process. Heating margins are applied as oblique or parallel
margins to the edge of the part. The workflow in the shop is as follows:
 Cut the part including the heating margin.
 Heat the part.
End face margin
Extra material applied to the manufacturing part that is consumed as part of the assembly
process. Extra material is typically added parallel to the part end face or edge at the assembly
or block lateral face.
During assembly, the margin gradually shrinks and eventually disappears after completion of
the assembly or block.
Intercostal margin
Material that is removed at the ends of a manufacturing part when the ends are fillet welded.

Generic Margin - Non Trimmed

Extra material applied to the manufacturing part that is consumed during manufacturing.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 116

 Margins

Generic Margin - Trimmed

Extra material applied to the manufacturing part that should be removed after manufacturing.
Start Value
Specifies the amount of margin to apply at the identified start point of the selected lateral face.
This option displays when Oblique Margin is selected in the Mode box.
End Value
Specifies the amount of margin to apply at the opposite point of the identified start point at the
selected lateral face. The oblique margin is linearly distributed between the given start and
end points. This option displays when Oblique Margin is selected in the Mode box.
Direction
Indicates the direction in which the margin is applied to the object. When the direction is set to
Perpendicular to Edge, the margin is applied normal to the lateral face port. When the
direction is set to Global for a plate, the margin is applied in the direction along the X, Y, or Z
axis in which the plate is oriented. If the direction is set to Global for a profile, the margin is
applied along the landing curve direction.
Geometry Change
Indicates whether the margin should be trimmed. The following options are available:
 As Margin - Trimming is needed. The extension is only on the edge.
 By Stretch - No trimming is needed. The software stretches the shape along the part like
shrinkage.
 As Reference - No request to extend the geometry. The margin is placed as a reference.
Stretch Offset
The length of the adjacent edge that the software adjusts while applying the margin. This is
only editable if the Geometry Change is set to By Stretch.
Action
Indicates whether or not the margin properties are applied to the margin object. The possible
values for objects that you are creating are Apply and Ignore. The possible values for objects
that you are modifying are Apply, Ignore, and Delete. If the value is set to Apply, then the
modified properties are applied to the margin object. If the value is set to Ignore, then the
modified properties are not applied to the margin object. If the value is set to Delete, then the
margin object is deleted.
Rule
Indicates whether or not margins are placed by rule.
Type
Indicates the group margin type. This is the same value as shown in the ribbon bar.
Value
Indicates the group margin value. This is the same value as shown in the ribbon bar.
Offset Direction
Indicates the offset direction. This is the same value as shown in the ribbon bar.
Update Dependent Objects

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 117

 Margins

Indicates whether or not the dependent object parameters need to be updated if the parent
margin properties change.
Add Margin
Adds a new row to the grid. This new row indicates the properties of another margin object to
create at the same port of the selected part. By default, all of the properties of the selected
margin are copied onto the new margin object except for the margin type. You can edit these
properties.

Assembly Margin Properties Dialog Box

Specifies the properties for the assembly margin that you are editing.
See Also
General Tab (Assembly Margin Properties Dialog Box) (on page 118)
Relationships Tab (on page 84)
Configuration Tab (on page 84)
Notes Tab (on page 86)

General Tab (Assembly Margin Properties Dialog Box)

Name
Specifies the name of the assembly margin.
Name Rule
Select the naming rule to use to name the assembly margin. Select User Defined to type a
name in the Name box.
Plate Margin
Specifies the margin value to add to plates that are connected in the adjacent block or
assembly.
Profile Margin
Specifies the margin value to add to profiles that are connected in the adjacent block or
assembly.

Assembly Margin Child Properties Dialog Box

Specifies the properties for the assembly margin child that you are editing.
See Also
General Tab (Assembly Margin Child Properties Dialog Box) (on page 119)
Relationships Tab (on page 84)
Configuration Tab (on page 84)
Notes Tab (on page 86)

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 118

 Margins

General Tab (Assembly Margin Child Properties Dialog Box)

Name
Specifies the name of the assembly margin child.
Name Rule
Select the naming rule to use to name the assembly margin child. Select User Defined to type
a name in the Name box.
Plate Margin
Specifies the margin value to add to plates that are connected in the adjacent block or
assembly.
Profile Margin
Specifies the margin value to add to profiles that are connected in the adjacent block or
assembly.
Manufacturing Object Status
Displays the status of the manufacturing object. This property only displays when you are
modifying a manufacturing object.
Up to Date - The part state is current with all of its relationships, such as connected parts.
Out of Date - The part state is not current with all of its relationships, such as detailed parts. A
relationship change can cause this state. You can update the manufacturing part by using
Manufacturing Service Manager . For more information, see Manufacturing Service
Manager (on page 319).
In To Do List - The part encountered an error or warning. A relationship change such as
connected parts can cause this state. You can clear the error by using View > To Do List. For
more information, see To Do List in the Common User's Guide.
Up to Date (Pre-nesting) - The state of a pre-nested part is current with all of its
relationships, such as connected parts.
Out of Date (Pre-nesting) - The state of a pre-nested part is not current with all of its
relationships, such as connected parts. A relationship change can cause this state.
In To Do List (Pre-nesting) - The pre-nested part encountered an error. A relationship
change can cause this state.
For more information on the pre-nesting service, see Pre-Nesting (on page 379).
Mode
Specifies the margin mode of the assembly margin child.
Type
Specifies the margin type of the assembly margin child.
Value
Specifies the applied margin value.
Direction
Specifies the direction in which the margin is applied.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 119

 Margins

Geometry Change
Specifies whether or not the margin should be trimmed.
Stretch Offset
Specifies the stretch offset value set on the assembly margin child.

Regional Margin
Adds a margin over a region of an edge. You can create multiple regional margins along a
single edge.
The following example shows two constant margins (displayed in red) and an oblique margin
(displayed in yellow) on the plate.

The following example shows a constant margin of -20mm on a profile.

 You can provide an offset type and distance when using the Along Edge selection method.
The software calculates the region based on these properties.
 You can select a reference plane or surface that does not intersect the selected port when
using the Reference selection method. The software places the point on the port after
calculating the offset.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 120

 Margins

 You can select plates, profiles, seams, and so on that intersect the selected port and provide
offset properties when using the Reference selection method. The software calculates the
margin end point based on the point of intersection and offset properties.

Regional Margin Ribbon

Controls parameters for adding a regional margin.

Properties
Activates the Regional Margin Properties dialog box, which you use to view and modify the
settings for the regional margin you have selected. For more information, see Regional
Margin Properties Dialog Box (on page 124).

Select Part
Select the object on which to place the margins. The object can be a plate, profile, or member,
depending on the setting in the Part Filter box. This option is not available during
modification.

Select Edge
Select the edge of the object on which to place the margins. This option is not available during
modification.
Select Edge Segment
Select the edge segment upon which to place the regional margin. This option is only
available for profiles and members.
Select Start Point
Select the start point of the margin. This can be either of the two end points of the edge
segment.
Select End Point
Select the end point of the margin.
Finish
Creates or modifies the regional margin.
Cancel
Clears the selection.
Accept
Accepts the selection.
Part Filter
Indicates which object can be selected. Available options include:
 Plate
 Profile
 Member
Rule
Indicates whether the margin is created by rule.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 121

 Margins

Mode
Specifies the mode of margin to apply. You cannot change the mode of an existing margin.
Available options include:
 Constant
 Oblique
Type
Specifies the type of margin to apply. Available options include:
 Heating
 Bending
 Intercostal
 Coaming
 End Face
 Non-trimmed
 Trimmed
Start Value
Specifies the amount of margin to apply. If Mode is set to Constant, this is the margin value.
If Mode is set to Oblique, this is the margin value applied to the start end.
End Value
Specifies the amount of margin to apply to the end point when Mode is set to Oblique.
Add
Creates a new margin, or updates the selected margin. The new margin highlights in white.
Delete
Deletes the selected margin. This option is only available when you select one of the margins
in the Show Form dialog box.
Form
Indicates whether to display a dialog box containing all of the margins that have been placed.
All of the margins in this dialog box are created when you click Finish. Select a row to display
the corresponding margin values in the ribbon bar. When you select a margin on the dialog
box, the corresponding margin highlights in the model.

What do you want to do?

 Add a regional margin (on page 123)
 Modify a regional margin (on page 123)

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 122

 Margins

 Delete a regional margin (on page 124)

Add a regional margin

1. Click Regional Margin .
The Regional Margin ribbon displays.
2. Select the type of object to which to apply the margin from the Part Filter list.
3. Select the part to which to apply the margin from the model.
4. Select the edge to which to apply the margin.
5. Depending on the selection method you chose, select the start and end points or the edge
segment and start point.
6. Set up the remaining properties to meet your requirements.

7. Click Properties .
The Regional Margin Properties dialog box displays.
8. Set the margin settings to meet your needs. For more information, see Regional Margin
Properties Dialog Box (on page 124).
9. Click Finish.

Modify a regional margin

1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the regional margin to modify.
You can select the margins from the Workspace Explorer.
The margins highlight in the model. All margins on the same edge as the selected margin
display in the Show Form dialog box.
3. Using the ribbon controls, edit the margin as needed. For more information, see Regional
Margin (on page 120).
4. Click Add to update the changes to a margin.
5. Click Finish.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 123

 Margins

Delete a regional margin

1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the margin to delete.

3. Click Delete .

Regional Margin Properties Dialog Box

Specifies the properties for the regional margin that you are editing.
See Also
General Tab (Regional Margin Properties Dialog Box) (on page 124)
Feature Tab (Regional Margin Properties Dialog Box) (on page 125)

General Tab (Regional Margin Properties Dialog Box)

Name
Specifies the name of the regional margin.
Name Rule
Select the naming rule to use to name the regional margin. Select User Defined to type a
name in the Name box.
Direction
Specifies the common margin direction for the margin objects.
Geometry Change
Specifies the common margin geometry change for the margin objects.
Stretch Offset
Specifies the common margin stretch offset value for the margin objects.
Mode
Specifies the mode of margin to apply. You cannot change the mode of an existing margin.
Available options include:
 Constant
 Oblique
Type
Specifies the type of margin to apply. Available options include:
 Heating
 Bending
 Intercostal
 Coaming
 End Face
 Non-trimmed

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 124

 Weld Compensation

 Trimmed
Start Value
Specifies the amount of margin to apply. If Mode is set to Constant, this is the margin value.
If Mode is set to Oblique, this is the margin value applied to the start end.
End Value
Specifies the amount of margin to apply to the end point when Mode is set to Oblique.

Feature Tab (Regional Margin Properties Dialog Box)

Displays all of the features on the edge of the plate. If there are no features, this tab is blank. You
can assign the Fix or Move property for each margin. This property is then common to all of the
margins you place.

Weld Compensation
Adds weld compensation along the entire edge, or regions of an edge. You can create multiple
weld compensations along a single edge.
You can apply different weld compensation properties along plate shapes with nonparallel edges.

You can also apply different weld compensation properties for different sections of T-beam webs
with irregular openings.

Weld Compensation Ribbon

Properties
Activates the Weld Compensation Settings dialog box, which you use to view and modify
the settings for the selected weld compensation object. For more information, see Weld
Compensation Settings Dialog Box (on page 127).
Select Part
Select the plate part for the weld compensation.
Select Port
Select the edge of the plate for the weld compensation.
Select Start Point

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 125

 Weld Compensation

Select the weld compensation starting point. The software highlights the part where you can
set the point.
Select End Point
Allows you to set the weld compensation end point. The software highlights the part where
you can set the point.
Finish
Creates or modifies the weld compensation object.
Cancel
Clears the active step in the workflow, and returns to the previous step.
Accept
Accepts the current step in the workflow, and proceeds to the next step.
Sel Method
Specifies the selection method associated with the weld compensation.
Offset Type
Specifies the offset type associated with the weld compensation.
Offset Value
Specifies the distance from the reference point or object to the location in which the software
applies the weld compensation.
Weld Comp Radius
Specifies the approximate compensation shape along the selected edge of the part.

Weld Comp Offset

Specifies the offset distance for the weld.

Accept Weld Compensation to Form

Adds the current weld compensation values to the table if Form is selected.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 126

 Weld Compensation

Cancel Weld Compensation from Form

Deletes the highlighted weld compensation values from the table if Form is selected.
Form
Creation - Displays the weld compensation radius and weld compensation offsets defined for
the new weld compensations.
Modification - Displays the weld compensation radius and weld compensation offsets
defined for existing weld compensations on the selected edge.

Modify weld compensation

1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the weld compensation to modify.
You can select the weld compensation from the Workspace Explorer.
The Weld Compensation ribbon displays, and the software highlights the weld
compensation in the model. All weld compensations on the same edge as the selected weld
compensation display in the Show Form dialog box.
3. Using the ribbon, edit the weld compensation as required. For more information, see Weld
Compensation (on page 125).
4. Click Add to update the changes to the weld compensation.
5. Click Finish.

Delete weld compensation

1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the weld compensation to delete.
You can select the weld compensation from the Workspace Explorer.
The weld compensation highlights in the model. All weld compensations on the same edge as
the selected weld compensation display in the Show Form dialog box.

3. Click Delete .

Weld Compensation Settings Dialog Box

Specifies the properties for the weld compensation object that you are editing.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 127

 Weld Compensation

See Also
General Tab (Weld Compensation Properties Dialog Box) (on page 128)
Configuration Tab (on page 84)
Notes Tab (on page 86)

General Tab (Weld Compensation Properties Dialog Box)

Name
Displays the name of the selected object. If the name is too long to entirely display in the box,
hover the cursor over the box to display the complete name as a tool tip. If the name is not
defined by a rule, User Defined displays. If this name is generated by a naming rule,
Naming Rule displays. If you type a name in this box, Smart 3D automatically changes the
naming rule to User Defined.
Name Rule
Displays the available name rules for the selected object. Specify the naming rule to use to
name the object. You can select one of the listed rules, or you can select User Defined to
specify a custom name in the (Name) box.
Weld Compensation Radius
Specifies the approximate compensation shape along the selected edge of the part.

Weld Compensation Offset

Specifies the offset distance for the weld.

Direction
Specifies the direction in which Smart 3D applies the weld.
Creation Type
Specifies how the weld compensation was generated. This property is only available during
modification of an existing weld compensation.
Manufacturing Object Status
Specifies the status of the manufacturing object associated with the weld compensation. This

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 128

 Weld Compensation

property is only available during modification of an existing weld compensation.

Detailed Part Status
Specifies the status of the detailed part associated with the weld compensation. This property
is only available during modification of an existing weld compensation.

Configuration Tab
Displays the creation, modification, and status information about an object.
Plant/Ship
Displays the name of the model. You cannot change this value.
Permission Group
Specifies the permission group to which the object belongs. You can select another
permission group, if needed. Permission groups are created in Project Management.
Transfer
Reassigns ownership of the selected model objects from their current permission group to
another satellite or host permission group. This option is only available if the active model or
project is replicated in a workshare configuration. The option is not available if all of the
objects in the select set already belong to another location and are non-transferable. For more
information, see Transfer Ownership Dialog Box in the Common User's Guide.
Approval State
Specifies the status of the selected object or filter. The display depends on your access level.
You might be unable to change the status of the object. The list is defined by the
ApprovalStatus codelist.
You can only edit or manipulate an object with a status of Working.
Status
Specifies the location of the object in the workflow process. Changing this property sets the
Approval State. The list is controlled by the ApprovalReason codelist in the
[Link] file. You must bulkload this file. For more information, see
ApprovalReason in the Reference Data Guide.
Date Created
Specifies the creation date of the object.
Created by
Specifies the name of the person who created the object.
Date Last Modified
Specifies the date of the last modification to the object.
Last Modified by
Specifies the name of the person who last modified the object.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 129

 Weld Compensation

Notes Tab
Creates and edits user-definable text placed by the designer on an object in the model. The notes
provide special instructions related to the object for the fabricator and are available in downstream
tasks. For example, the notes appear in two-dimensional drawings and within design review
sessions.
Only one note of a given kind from a given object can be shown on a drawing. For
example, if there are two fabrication notes on a piping part, then only one of the notes shows on
the drawing. It is important to know about and to consider this situation when defining notes on an
object in the modeling phase. For example, you can display one Fabrication note and one
Installation note by defining two separate labels for the two kinds of notes.
Key point
Specifies the key point on the object to which you want to add a note.
Notes at this location, listed by name
Lists all notes for the selected key point on the object.
Date
Displays the date that the note was created. The system automatically supplies the date.
Time
Displays the time that the note was created. The system automatically supplies the time.
Purpose of note
Specifies the purpose of the note.
Author
Displays the login name of the person who created the note. The system automatically
supplies this information. You cannot change this information.
Note text
Defines the note text. The software does not limit the length of the note text.
Show dimension
Indicates that the note generates a dimension.
If you are displaying the properties for a Support component, then a dimension can be
included for the component in the Support drawings, if you select the Show dimension
option. The note must be associated with one of the key points for the Support component. It
is recommended that you set the Purpose of note as Fabrication, but this is not a
requirement. The note Name and Note text are not used when you select this option.
New Note
Creates a new note on the object.
Standard Note
Displays a list of standard notes from which you can select. This feature is not available in this
version.
Highlight Note

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 130

 Weld Compensation

Highlights the note in the graphic view so that you can easily find the note and the object to
which it is related. This feature is not available in this version.
Delete Note
Deletes the currently displayed note.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 131

SECTION 4

Shrinkage
The shrinkage commands stretch manufacturing parts to account for steel shrinkage during
construction.

In This Section
Shrinkage ....................................................................................... 132
Multi Shrinkage .............................................................................. 142

Shrinkage
Stretches a manufacturing part to account for steel shrinkage during welding. Adding
shrinkage changes the position of marks and openings on the part because they are stretched
along with the part. The part shrinks back to its needed size and shape in the welding process.

For plate parts, you can define shrinkage in one or two directions as scaling shrinkage (defined by
the expansion ratio and the expansion direction). For profiles, you can only apply scaling
shrinkage to the length.
By default, the software prompts you to identify the edges so that it can determine the shrinkage
directions. If you select the shrinkage type by global axis, the software sets the primary and
secondary axis based on the plate type:
 For deck plates, the primary factor is the X axis and the secondary factory is Y axis.
 For transverse plates, the primary factor is the Y axis and the secondary factory is the Z axis.
 For longitudinal plates, the primary factor is the X axis and the secondary factory is the Z axis.
A small coordinate system, based on the shrinkage directions with the appropriate values, also
displays in the Part Monitor.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 132

 Shrinkage

For built-up profiles, you can define the shrinkage for the web and flange separately.

Shrinkage Ribbon
Displays the controls used to add a shrinkage margin to plate edges or profile ends.
Properties
Activates the Shrinkage Properties dialog box, which you use to view and modify the
properties of the shrinkage margin that you are about to place in the model. For more
information, see Shrinkage Properties Dialog Box (on page 139).

Plates or Profiles
Select the plate or profile part to which you want to add the shrinkage. You can select the part
in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer.
Because of the different ways in which shrinkage is applied to plates and profiles,
you can only select either plates or profiles.
Primary Direction
Select a line to indicate the primary direction for the shrinkage. The primary direction vector is
in the direction of the first selected plate lateral face.

Secondary Direction
Select a line to indicate the secondary direction for the shrinkage. The secondary direction
vector is perpendicular to the primary direction vector unless another plate lateral face is
selected.
Finish
Creates the shrinkage using the parameters that you have defined.
Accept
Accepts the selected objects.
Cancel
Cancels the object selection.
Mode
Select the mode of shrinkage to apply. The following options are available:
 Part-Private - Places shrinkage on the parts.
 Part-Assembly Based - Places shrinkage on the parts of an assembly depending on the
shrinkage of the assembly.
 Assembly - Places global axis shrinkage on an assembly.
Factor
Select the method for calculating the shrinkage. The available options change based on the
Mode setting.
 When the Mode is Part-Private, the available Factor options include:
 Built Up Profile Standard Rule
 Part Rule

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 133

 Shrinkage

 User Defined
 When the Mode is set to Part-Assembly Based, the available Factor options include:
 By Increments
 By Sum Factors
 User Defined
 When the Mode is Assembly, the available Factor options include:
 Assembly
 Built Up Member Custom
 Built Up Member Standard
 Built Up Profile Custom
 Panel Assembly
 Pre Sub Block
 Sub Block
 User Defined
Shrinkage Type
Select the direction type of shrinkage to apply.
 By Axis - Uses a grid system axis to define the shrinkage direction.
 By Edge - Uses one of two edges to determine the shrinkage directions.
 By Vector - Provides an additional list called selection method from which you can select
the primary and secondary shrinkage directions.
Selection Method
Select the primary and secondary shrinkage directions. This option is only available when
Shrinkage Type is By Vector. The available methods include:
 Coordinate System
 Edge
 Global
 Vector
Frame System
Shows all the frame systems from the catalog rule in the range of the selected plate. This
option is only visible when the Shrinkage Type is By Axis, or when the Shrinkage Type is
By Vector and the Selection Method is Coordinate System.
Primary
Select an axis corresponding to the frame system selected in the Frame System select list to
represent the Primary Direction. This axis can also be picked in the Primary Direction step.
This option is only visible when the Type is By Axis.
Secondary
Select an axis corresponding to the frame system selected in the Frame System select list to

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 134

 Shrinkage

represent the Secondary Direction. This axis can also be picked in the Secondary Direction
step. This option is only visible when the Type is By Axis.
Primary Factor
Select a factor for the amount of extra material to apply in the primary direction.

 The units displayed in the primary, secondary, and tertiary factor fields are determined by
the Slope setting on the Units of Measure tab of the Options dialog box. Click Tools >
Options to display this dialog box.
 Click Units in the list to display a list of customized units. To display custom units in the
list, add the units to the StrMfgShrinkageUOM sheet in the [Link]
workbook, and then bulk load the workbook. The [Link] workbook is
delivered to [Product Folder]\ShipCatalogData\BulkLoad\DataFiles\StructManufacturing.
 The software updates the defined factors depending on the selected units.
Secondary Factor
Select a factor for the amount of extra material to apply in the secondary direction.
If no shrinkage is needed in the secondary direction, use a Secondary
Factor of 0.00.
Tertiary Factor
Select a factor for the amount of extra material to apply in the tertiary direction. This option is
available only when the Mode is Assembly.

What do you want to do?

 Add scaling by edge shrinkage (on page 136)
 Add scaling by axis shrinkage (on page 136)
 Modify shrinkage (on page 138)
 Copy and paste shrinkage (on page 138)
 Delete shrinkage (on page 139)

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 135

 Shrinkage

Add scaling by edge shrinkage

1. Click Shrinkage .
2. On the Shrinkage ribbon, select the Mode that meets your requirements.

3. Click Plates/Profiles/Assembly .
4. Select the parts to which you want to add shrinkage.

 You can select the parts in the model, or from the Workspace Explorer.
 Because of the different ways in which shrinkage is applied to plates and profiles, you can
only select one type at a time.
5. Click Primary Direction .
6. Select a line to indicate the primary direction for the shrinkage.

7. Click Secondary Direction .

8. Select a line to indicate the secondary direction for the shrinkage.
9. Type a value in the Primary Factor box.
10. Type a value in the Secondary Factor box.
If no shrinkage is needed in the secondary direction, then use a Secondary
Factor of 0.00.
11. Click Finish.

Add scaling by axis shrinkage

1. Click Shrinkage .
2. On the Shrinkage ribbon, select the Mode that meets your requirements.

3. Click Plates/Profiles/Assembly .
4. Select the parts to which to add shrinkage.

 You can select the parts in the model or from the Workspace Explorer.
 Because of the different ways in which shrinkage is applied to plates and profiles, you can
only select one type at a time.
5. Select By Axis from the Shrinkage Type list.
6. Select a grid system to define the shrinkage directions.
7. Select the primary axis from the list.
8. Select the secondary axis from the list.
9. Type a value in the Primary Factor box.
10. Type a value in the Secondary Factor box.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 136

 Shrinkage

If no shrinkage is needed in the secondary direction, use a Secondary

Factor of 0.00.
11. Type a value in the Tertiary Factor box.
If no shrinkage is needed in the tertiary direction, then use a Tertiary
Factor of 0.00.
12. Click Finish.

Add by vector shrinkage

1. Click Shrinkage .
2. On the Shrinkage ribbon, select the Mode that meets your requirements.

3. Click Parts or Profiles .

4. Select the parts to which to add shrinkage.

 You can select the parts in the model or from the Workspace Explorer.
 Because of the different ways in which shrinkage is applied to plates and profiles, you can
only select one type at a time.
5. Select By Vector from the Shrinkage Type list.
6. Select the selection method from the Selection Method list.
7. Depending on the selection method you chose, select the Primary and Secondary directions.
8. Type a value in the Primary Factor box.
9. Type a value in the Secondary Factor box.
If no shrinkage is needed in the secondary direction, use a Secondary
Factor of 0.00.
10. Type a value in the Tertiary Factor box.
If no shrinkage is needed in the tertiary direction, then use a Tertiary
Factor of 0.00.
11. Click Finish.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 137

 Shrinkage

Modify shrinkage
1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the shrinkage to modify.
You can select the shrinkage in the model, or from the Workspace Explorer.
3. Using the ribbon controls, edit the shrinkage as needed.

 You cannot change the parent plate when you modify the object.
 If you are modifying a single plate, you can change the shrinkage type.
 If you set the value of the Shrinkage Type box to By Axis, then the software computes both
the primary and secondary axes automatically.

Copy and paste shrinkage

1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the shrinkage to copy.

 You can select the shrinkage in the model, or from the Workspace Explorer.
 You can set the Locate Filter to Shrinkage to make the selection easier.
3. Click Edit > Copy.
4. Click in the model to define the point from which to copy.
5. Click Edit > Paste.
6. Select the part on which to paste the shrinkage.

 You must select a destination that does not already have shrinkage.
 If the shrinkage that you copied is from a plate, you must select a plate for the destination.
If the shrinkage that you copied is from a profile, you must select a profile for the
destination.
7. Select the primary direction for the shrinkage.
8. Optionally, select a secondary direction for the shrinkage.
9. Click OK on the Paste dialog box.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 138

 Shrinkage

Delete shrinkage
1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the shrinkage to delete.

3. Click Delete .

Shrinkage Properties Dialog Box

Specifies the properties for the shrinkage that you are editing.
See Also
General Tab (Shrinkage Properties Dialog Box) (on page 139)
Relationships Tab (on page 84)
Configuration Tab (on page 84)
Notes Tab (on page 86)
Shrinkages Tab (Shrinkage Properties Dialog Box) (on page 141)

General Tab (Shrinkage Properties Dialog Box)

Name
Specifies the name of the shrinkage.
Naming Rule
Select the naming rule to use to name the shrinkage.
 Select DefaultNameRule to let the software automatically name new objects. If the
Shrinkage Type is set to Scaling by Edge, the following syntax is used: <"Scaling
shrinkage ">-<Workshare Location ID>. For example, Scaling shrinkage -1. If the
Shrinkage Type is set to Global Axis, the following syntax is used: <"Global shrinkage
">-<Workshare Location ID>. For example, Global shrinkage -1.
 Select User Defined to type a name in the Name box.
Detailed Part Status
Displays the status of the parent object for the shrinkage. This property only displays when
you are modifying a shrinkage.
Manufacturing Object Status
Displays the status of the shrinkage. This property only displays when you are modifying a
shrinkage.
Shrinkage Type
Select the direction type of shrinkage to apply.
 Select By Axis to select a grid system axis to define the shrinkage direction.
 Select By Edge to select one of two edges so that it can determine the shrinkage
directions.
 Select By Vector and the software provides one more list called selection method and
depends upon the selection method there you can select the primary and secondary
directions.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 139

 Shrinkage

Selection Method
 Coordinate System - Select primary and secondary direction vectors as axis.
 Edge - Select primary and secondary direction vectors as plate edges.
 Global - Primary and secondary direction as standard vectors [X (1, 0, 0), Y (0, 1, 0), Z (0,
0, 1)].
 Vector - User can create shrinkage in any direction with the help of Shrinkage Direction
Vectors control.

 Validate calculates the primary/secondary vector with respect to the plate normal and
primary/secondary vector.
Frame System
Shows all the frame systems from the catalog rule in the range of the selected plate. This
option is only visible when the Shrinkage Type is By Axis, or when the Shrinkage Type is
By Vector and the Selection Method is Coordinate System.
Primary Direction
Displays the coordinate system name and primary direction of the shrinkage when the
Shrinkage Type is By Axis. When Shrinkage Type is By Vector depends upon the
selection method it will show axis (Coordinate System) or vector (Global and vector). This box
is empty when Shrinkage Type is By Edge or selection method is Edge.
Secondary Direction
Displays the coordinate system name and secondary direction of the shrinkage when the
Shrinkage Type is By Axis. When Shrinkage Type is By Vector depends upon the
selection method it will show axis (Coordinate System) or vector (Global and vector). This box
is empty when Shrinkage Type is By Edge or selection method is Edge.
Primary Factor
Select a factor for the amount of extra material to apply in the primary direction.

 The units displayed in the primary, secondary, and tertiary factor fields are determined by
the Slope setting on the Units of Measure tab of the Options dialog box. Click Tools >
Options to display this dialog box.
 Click Units in the list to display a list of customized units. To display custom units in the
list, add the units to the StrMfgShrinkageUOM sheet in the [Link]
workbook, and then bulk load the workbook. The [Link] workbook is
delivered to [Product Folder]\ShipCatalogData\BulkLoad\DataFiles\StructManufacturing.
 The software updates the defined factors depending on the selected units.
Secondary Factor

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 140

 Shrinkage

Select a factor for the amount of extra material to apply in the secondary direction.
Tertiary Factor
Select a factor for the amount of extra material to apply in the tertiary direction. Use values
from 0mm to 1m for plates and profiles.
See Also
Shrinkage Properties Dialog Box (on page 139)

Shrinkages Tab (Shrinkage Properties Dialog Box)

Displays the shrinkages on all the parent assemblies so that you can review how the software
calculates shrinkage values for part-assembly based shrinkage. This tab also displays the values
of the selected shrinkage.
This tab is available if the Shrinkage Mode is Part - Assembly Based, or Part - Private.
Name
Displays the shrinkage name.
Mode
Displays the shrinkage mode. Assembly indicates that the values are associated with the
parent assembly shrinkages.
Primary Direction
Displays the coordinate system name and primary direction of the shrinkage when the
Shrinkage Type is By Axis. When Shrinkage Type is By Vector depends upon the
selection method it will show axis (Coordinate System) or vector (Global and vector). This box
is empty when Shrinkage Type is By Edge or selection method is Edge.
Secondary Direction
Displays the coordinate system name and secondary direction of the shrinkage when the
Shrinkage Type is By Axis. When Shrinkage Type is By Vector depends upon the
selection method it will show axis (Coordinate System) or vector (Global and vector). This box
is empty when Shrinkage Type is By Edge or selection method is Edge.
Primary Factor (mm/m)
Displays the primary factor of the shrinkage.
Secondary Factor (mm/m)
Displays the secondary factor of the shrinkage.
Tertiary Factor (mm/m)
Displays the tertiary factor of the shrinkage.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 141

 Shrinkage

Multi Shrinkage
Stretches multiple manufacturing parts to account for steel shrinkage during welding.

Multi Shrinkage Ribbon

Specifies parameters for applying shrinkage to multiple parts.
Select
Select the objects that meet your criteria. You can select objects in the graphics view, or from
the Workspace Explorer. Use the Filter list to limit the objects that are available for your
selection

Multiple Shrinkage Properties

Displays the Multiple Shrinkage Properties dialog box. For more information, see Multiple
Shrinkage Properties Dialog Box (on page 144).
Finish
Creates or modifies the shrinkage using the parameters that you have defined.
Accept
Accepts the selected objects.
Cancel
Cancels the object selection.
Mode
Specifies the mode for the shrinkage objects that are created. The software changes the
contents of the Filter list based on this option.
Filter
Specifies the filter criteria for selection. The available options are:
 Parts - Allows you to pick plate parts, profile parts, or member parts.
 Parts or Assemblies - Allows you to pick plate parts, profile parts, member part, or
assemblies. If you select an assembly, the software automatically selects all parts of that
assembly.
 Plate Parts - Allows you to pick plate parts.
 Plate Part and Connected Profiles - Allows you to pick plate parts. The software
automatically selects any profiles connected to the plate parts.
 Profile Parts - Allows you to pick profile parts.
 Member Parts - Allows you to pick member parts.
Factor
Specifies the rule that the software uses while creating the shrinkage objects. You can modify
this rule if necessary.
Name Rule

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 142

 Shrinkage

Specifies the naming rule for the shrinkage objects that are created. The naming rule is not
applied to the shrinkage objects that are modified using this command.

What do you want to do?

 Create shrinkage on multiple objects (on page 143)
 Modify shrinkage on multiple objects (on page 143)
 Delete shrinkage from multiple objects (on page 144)

Create shrinkage on multiple objects

1. Select the shrinkage mode from the Mode list.
2. Select the value from the Filter list that best meets your requirement.
3. Select the objects to which you want to add shrinkage.
4. Select the shrinkage rule from the Factor list that proposes the values for shrinkages to place
on the selected objects.

5. Click Multiple Shrinkage Properties .

6. Review and reset the parameters as required.
7. Set the Action to Apply.
8. Click OK on the Multiple Shrinkage Properties dialog box.
9. Click Finish.

Modify shrinkage on multiple objects

1. Select the shrinkage mode from the Mode list.
2. Select the value from the Filter list that best meets your requirement.
3. Select the objects for which you want to modify shrinkage. You can also select an assembly to
add all its children to the Multiple Shrinkage Properties dialog box.

4. Click Multiple Shrinkage Properties .

5. Review and reset the parameters as required.
6. Set the Action to Apply.
7. Click OK on the Multiple Shrinkage Properties dialog box.
8. Click Finish.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 143

 Shrinkage

Delete shrinkage from multiple objects

1. Select the value from the Filter list that best meets your requirement.
2. Select the objects from which you want to delete shrinkage.

3. Click Multiple Shrinkage Properties and set the parameters to meet your requirements.
4. Set the Action to Delete.
5. Click OK on the Multiple Shrinkage Properties dialog box.
6. Click Finish.

Multiple Shrinkage Properties Dialog Box

Specifies the parameters for shrinkage objects that are created or modified.
Name
Specifies the name of the part on which shrinkage is either being created or modified. This
column is not editable.
Object Type
Specifies the type of the object. The possible values for this column are Plate Part, Profile
Part, Member Part, Assembly, and Block. This column is not editable.
Status
Indicates if a shrinkage object is being created or modified. The possible values for this
column are Create or Modify. This column is not editable.
Mode
Indicates the mode of the shrinkage object. The possible values are Assembly,
Part-Assembly Based, and Part-Private.
Factor Rule
Indicates the shrinkage rule.
Shrinkage Type
Indicates the shrinkage type of the shrinkage object. Possible values are By Axis, By Edge,
and By Vector. For plate parts, only the By Axis and By Vector type of shrinkage can be
placed using this command. If a rule proposes Scaling by Edge for a particular plate part,
then the entire row would be disabled and shrinkage is not created for that plate part.
However, you can modify the Primary and Secondary values of the scaling by edge
shrinkage on a plate part. This column is not editable. For assemblies, you can place only the
By Axis and By Vector type of shrinkage.
Frame System
Specifies the frame system from which the primary and the secondary directions of the
shrinkage are selected. This column is editable. Possible values are all of the frame systems
that are in range of the plate part and those given by the catalog rule.
Primary
Specifies the primary direction of the shrinkage object. This column is editable.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 144

 Shrinkage

Primary Value
Specifies the primary value of the shrinkage object. This column is editable.

 The units displayed in the primary, secondary, and tertiary value fields are determined by
the Slope setting on the Units of Measure tab of the Options dialog box. Click Tools >
Options to display this dialog box.
 The software updates the available primary, secondary, and tertiary values depending on
the selected units.
Secondary
Specifies the secondary direction of the shrinkage object. This column is editable.
Secondary Value
Specifies the secondary value of the shrinkage object. This column is editable.
Tertiary Value
Specifies the tertiary value of the shrinkage object on an assembly. This column is editable for
Shrinkage with Assembly Mode.
Action
Indicates whether the shrinkage properties are applied to the shrinkage object or not. The
possible values in creation are Apply and Ignore. Possible values in modification are Apply,
Ignore, and Delete. If this option is set to Apply, then the modified properties are applied to
the shrinkage object. If it is set to Ignore, then the modified properties are not applied to the
shrinkage object. If this option is set to Delete, the shrinkage object is deleted.
Filters
Defines a filter for the displayed rows. You can use these options to view all of the existing
shrinkages under assemblies, regardless of their type. The options from left to right are:
 Mode - Displays in italics any shrinkages that are of a mode different than the mode
selected in the ribbon bar.
 Object - Refines the filter based on the type of objects that you select.
 Show All objects - Displays all objects.
 Show Rule Objects - Refines the filter based on the rule displayed in the Rule box.
 Show Out of Date Objects - Displays objects that are out of date.
 Rule - Refines the filter based on the selected rule. This list contains all of the associated
rules. This option is not available if the Object filter is set to Show All Objects.
Recompute
The list at the bottom of the dialog box contains options that determine which shrinkage
objects display on the dialog box.
 Show All Objects - Displays all the objects from the selected list.
 Show Rule Objects - Displays all the objects for which the selected factor rule proposes
eligible values.
 Show Out of Date - Displays all of the objects that are out of date.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 145

 Shrinkage

Click Recompute to recalculate the values for each shrinkage object displayed on the dialog
box. To apply the new values on the shrinkages, click OK, and Finish the command.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 146

SECTION 5

Manufacturing Tab
Adds manufacturing tabs to detailed parts at plate edges. You can place tabs of various types.
Plates might have sharp corners or bent edges that could become deformed during fabrication,
erection or assembly. Manufacturing tabs are additional material around such areas. Tabs are
applied when seams or plate edges cross at angles that would produce acute angle corners.
Welding often damages or melts off these sharp corners, so the tabs are added to protect the
sharp part corners. These tabs are trimmed off after welding.

Tabs are introduced when cutting out a plate from a flat sheet, or padding material that is added
later. Either way, tabs modify the manufactured part’s outer contour.

A tab could have several shapes, depending upon where they are located. For example, in order
to protect a circular opening through which a seam passes, you could protect the opening edge
with tabs of different shapes as shown below.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 147

 Manufacturing Tab

Manufacturing Tab Ribbon

Displays the controls used to create or edit manufacturing tabs.

Properties
Activates the Manufacturing Tab Properties dialog box, which you use to view and modify
the properties of the manufacturing tabs that you are about to place in the model. For more
information, see Manufacturing Tab Properties Dialog Box (on page 151).
Plate Part

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 148

 Manufacturing Tab

Select the plate part on which to create the manufacturing tab.

Driven Port
Select the port whose geometry changes as the tab is created.
Driving Port
Select the object that is the entity that needs protecting. The geometry of the driving object
may be lengthened a bit in the process of creating the manufacturing tab, but it is likely to
remain largely unchanged.

Tab Position
Select the position for the tab. This button is enabled when the software identifies an
ambiguity while creating the tab.
Finish
Creates the marking line that you have defined.
Cancel
Clears the selection.
Accept
Accepts the selection.
Select Part Item
Specifies the filter for items that you can select when using the Driven Port or
Driving Port options. Select More to display the Select Tab Type dialog box. You can select
an item type from the catalog on this dialog box. For more information, see Select Tab Type
Dialog Box (on page 151).
Retain Inputs
Specifies which inputs to the manufacturing tab Smart 3D retains.
 NoObjects
 Plate
 Plate, Driven
 Plate, Driven, Driving

What do you want to do?

 Create a manufacturing tab (on page 150)
 Modify a manufacturing tab (on page 150)
 Delete a manufacturing tab (on page 150)

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 149

 Manufacturing Tab

Create a manufacturing tab

1. Click Manufacturing Tab .
2. Select the plate part.
3. Select a part item from the Select Part Item list. If the part that you want to use is not in the
list, select More and then select a part from the Select Tab Type dialog box.
4. Select a driven port.
The driven port is the port that changes to accommodate the tab. The ports that you
can select are controlled by the value in the Select Part Item box.
5. Select a driving port.
The driving port is the port that needs protection. The ports that you can select are
controlled by the value in the Select Part Item box.
6. If the Tab Position button is enabled, click it and select a point for the tab. This button is
enabled if the driving object and the driven object intersect in more than one place.
7. Click Finish.

Modify a manufacturing tab

1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the manufacturing tab to modify.
You can select the manufacturing tab from the Workspace Explorer.
3. Using the ribbon controls, edit the manufacturing tab as needed.

Delete a manufacturing tab

1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the manufacturing tab to delete.

3. Click Delete .

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 150

 Manufacturing Tab

Select Tab Type Dialog Box

Displays options for selecting manufacturing tab objects from the catalog.

Manufacturing Tab Properties Dialog Box

Specifies the properties for the manufacturing tab that you are editing.
See Also
General Tab (Manufacturing Tab Properties Dialog Box) (on page 151)
Relationships Tab (on page 84)
Configuration Tab (on page 84)
Notes Tab (on page 86)

General Tab (Manufacturing Tab Properties Dialog Box)

Standard
Name
Specifies the name of the manufacturing tab.
Name Rule
Select the naming rule to use to name the manufacturing tab.
 Select DefaultNameRule to let the software automatically name new objects. For a
manufacturing tab, the following syntax is used: <"Mfg Tab">-<Workshare Location ID>.
For example, "Mfg Tab-1".

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 151

 Manufacturing Tab

 Select User Defined to type a name in the Name box.

Part Item
Indicates the name of the catalog part used to create the tab. This property is read only.
Detailed Part Status
Indicates the status of the detailed part. This property is read only.
Manufacturing Object Status
Indicates the status of the manufacturing object. This property is read only.

Production
Bevel on Tab Contour
Indicates the bevel status on the outer contour created by the Manufacturing Tab command.
 Ignore - The bevel is not applied.
 Driven - The bevel is applied to the portion of the contour touching the driven edge.
 Driving - The bevel is applied to the portion of the contour touching the driving edge.
 Both - The bevel is applied to the portion of the contour touching either the driven or
driving edges.
Bevel on Tab Mark
Indicates the bevel status on the marking between the plate and the tab.
 Ignore - The bevel is not applied.
 Apply - The bevel is applied along the marking.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 152

SECTION 6

Templates
The template commands create a set of templates at user-defined positions.
When you create or edit a template, the dialog box title displays the plate part name
using the format Plate Part: <name of the reference plane>.

In This Section
Plate Template ............................................................................... 153
Profile Face Template.................................................................... 169
Tubular Member Template ............................................................ 176
Edge Template .............................................................................. 184

Plate Template
Creates a set of templates at user-defined positions. The command generates the template
outer contour shapes and reference point data that can be used for output in template table data.

Templates are used to check and control the actual curvature during and after the bending.
A template is a single object aligned with a respective marking line on a plate. A template set is a
group of templates prepared for a single plate to check its curvature during and after the bending
process.
In addition to specifying the shape and spacing for the templates, you can apply rule-based
processes and marking sets to the templates, analogous to the processes and markings applied
to plate parts.
If the software cannot compute the base plane or the base control line by rule, it
displays a message box to warn you of the condition.
The software identifies the following template types:
Frame
A frame template set is a general way to make a template. This type of template is used in
most cases. A frame template set consists of templates at each frame position on a selected

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 153

 Templates

plate. You can specify an interval value for defining the template positions, and you can add
additional templates if needed.

Aft and Forward

An aft and forward template set is similar to the frame template set, except that the location of
the templates is determined by the aft and forward seam.
Center Line
A center line template set is a special case of the frame template set where the base control
line is a ship center line.

Perpendicular

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 154

 Templates

A perpendicular template set specifies the templates at planes normal to the plate surface.

Stem/Stern

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 155

 Templates

A stem/stern template specifies that the templates are set on the corner of the shell plate, the
inflection points of the center line, and at interpolation points which are determined by the
software to meet your input parameters. The software calculates intersections between the
shell plate and the sections that are perpendicular to the centerline at each template position.
The position of the inflection point, on the edge of a plate part, is determined by having the
second derivate value of zero.

Perpendicular XY
A perpendicular XY template set is often positioned on the plates next to the stem/stern. The
templates are set on the planes that are perpendicular to the XY plane and the unfolding base
line. The unfolding is defined by the midpoints of both butt lines. The software sets templates

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 156

 Templates

on the corner of the shell plate and interpolation points, which are determined by the software
to satisfy your input parameters.

User Defined
A user defined template set lets you sketch the base control line and the template locations in
the two-dimensional drafting environment. The template locations must intersect the base
control line.

Plate Template Ribbon

Displays the controls used to add templates to the model.

Properties
Activates the Template Properties dialog box, which you use to view and modify the
properties, including process and marking properties, of the template that you are about to
place in the model. For more information, see Plate Template Properties Dialog Box (on page
162).

Part
Select the detailed plate part or assembly to which you want to add the template. You can
select the part in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer. You can select the assembly

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 157

 Templates

in the Workspace Explorer.

Rule
Indicates if you are using a customized filter to select the part.
Template Type
Indicates the template type on which to place the template. The available options are:
 Plate - Places templates on plate parts.
 Profile Face - Places templates on profile faces.
 Assembly - Places templates on multiple plates.
Base Plane
Selects the base plane for the template. The base plane is an offset balance plane of a plate
or a panel. The base plane is an alignment plane for all of the templates in the template set.
For more information on the available base planes, see Plate Template (on page 153).
Base Control Line
Overrides the automatically generated base control line, and starts Sketch2D so that you can
draw the base control line. The base control line is a basic alignment line for the templates
within the set on the plate. It is also a reference for creating the template table.

Add Template
Starts Sketch2D so that you can draw a custom template location.

Bottom Line
Selects the action to perform from the list. The available options include the following:

 Pick Bottom Line - Selects a bottom line to modify.

 Pick Point - Selects a point on the base control line for creating a bottom line.
 Edit Bottom Line - Starts Sketch2D so that you can modify the bottom line.

 Delete - Deletes the manually edited bottom line.

Finish
Displays a dialog box asking if you want to accept or reject the changes. If you click Accept,
the software displays a preview of the template set. This option creates the template using the
parameters that you have defined.

Assembly
Highlights the selected assembly. This command is available when you select Assembly
from the Template Type list, and then select an assembly in the Workspace Explorer.

Parts
Highlights the plate parts in the selected assembly. This command is available when you
select Assembly from the Template Type list, and then select an assembly in the
Workspace Explorer.

Supported Plates List

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 158

 Templates

Displays the Supported Plate List dialog box. This command is available when you select
Assembly from the Template Type list, and then select an assembly in the Workspace
Explorer. For more information, see Supported Plate List Dialog Box (on page 195).
Cancel
Clears the selection.
Accept
Accepts the supported items in the selection, and creates the base plane and the base control
line.

Switch Upper/Lower
Reverses the seam location definition in the upper and lower direction.

Switch Fore/Aft
Reverses the seam location definition in the fore and aft direction.
BasePlane
Select the base plane type from the list. The available options include the following:
 Most Planar Natural - Generates a plane based on the planar portion of the plate
surface. The planar portion should be at least 30 percent.
 Average of Corners Plane - Generates a plane based on the number of vertices of the
plate surface. The system takes the normal from the plane defined by each combination
of three vertices and calculates these normals based.
 By System - Generates the base plane based on system defaults.
 User Defined - Defines the base plane either by the Six Plane Control methods (for more
information see Plane Methods (on page 33)) or the By Three Points method.
 Parallel Axis - Uses the coordinate axis which is most in line with the normal of the plate
to define the base plane.
 True Natural - Generates the base plane from the normal at the center of the plate
surface.
 Lower Aft Corners - Generates the base plane from the lower aft corners of the plate
surface.
 Upper Aft Corners - Generates the base plane from the upper aft corners of the plate
surface.
 Lower Fore Corners - Generates the base plane from the lower fore corners of the plate
surface.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 159

 Templates

 Upper Fore Corners - Generates the base plane from the upper fore corners of the plate
surface.
 Mid Template Based - Generates the base plane based on the plane at the mid-point of
the plate.

By Three Points
Selects three vertex points to define the plane for the base plane. The software highlights the
nearest vertex point to the cursor in red. When you select a vertex, it displays in yellow. This
option is only available when User Defined is selected in the BasePlane list.
Side
Selects the side for the template.
 BaseSide
 OffsetSide
 MoldedSide
 AntiMoldedSide
Template Type
Selects the related template for its base plane and side. This option is only available if you
select a plate that has defined templates defined.
Frame System
Selects a frame system to associate with the template. The list contains the frame systems
from the catalog rule, as well as the frame system inherited from the parent assembly.
Process List
Selects a template process from the list. A process is a rule-based geometrical definition of a
template based on particular manufacturing information. For example, template spacing is a
process.
 Default_TemplateProcessPlate
 FrameEqualHeight_TemplatePlate
 Frame_TemplateProcessPlate
 Perpendicular_TemplateProcessPlate
 UserDefined_TemplateProcessPlate
 Even_TemplateProcessPlate
 CenterLine_TemplateProcessPlate
 StemStern_TemplateProcessPlate
 AftForward_TemplateProcessPlate
 PerpendicularXY_TemplateProcessPlate
 Box_TemplateProcessPlate
 UserDefinedBox_TemplateProcessPlate
 UserDefBoxEdges_TemplatesProcessPlate

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 160

 Templates

Marking List
Select a process from the list.
 Default_TemplateMarkingPlate
 Box_TemplateMarkingPlate

What do you want to do?

 Create a plate template set (see "Create a plate or assembly template set" on page 161)
 Modify a template set (on page 162)
 Copy and paste a template set (on page 162)
 Delete a template set (on page 162)

Create a plate or assembly template set

1. Click Template .

2. On the Template ribbon, click Part .

A status bar message instructs you to select a part or an assembly.
3. From the Template Type list, select the template type (Plate or Assembly).
4. Select the plate parts or assembly for the template set.
You can select the parts or assembly in the model, or from the Workspace Explorer.

5. Click Base Plane if you want to change the balance type, template side, or choose a
related template.
6. Click Accept .
7. Click Base Control Line if you want to manually sketch the base control line. Using the
available drawing commands in the 2D environment, draw the base control line.

8. Click Add Template if you want to manually sketch template locations. Using the
available drawing commands in the 2D environment, draw the templates.
9. Click Accept to display a preview of the template set.

10. If necessary, click Bottom Line to manually extend the bottom line of the template set.
11. Click Finish on the ribbon in the 2D environment.
12. Select the Process type.

13. Click Properties , and change the default Process and Marking values if needed.
14. Click OK.
15. Click Finish.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 161

 Templates

Modify a template set

1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the template set to modify.
You can select the template set in the model or from the Workspace Explorer.
3. Using the ribbon controls, edit the template set as needed.
You cannot change the parent plate when you modify the object.

Copy and paste a template set

1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the template set to copy.

 You can select the template set in the model, or from the Workspace Explorer.
 You can set the Locate Filter to Templates to make the selection easier.
3. Click Edit > Copy.
4. Click Edit > Paste.
5. Select the part on which to paste the template set.
You must select a detailed plate for the destination.
6. Click OK on the Paste dialog box.

Delete a template set

1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the template set to delete.

3. Click Delete .

Plate Template Properties Dialog Box

Specifies the properties for the template that you are editing.
See Also
Plate Template (on page 153)
General Tab (Template Properties Dialog Box) (on page 163)
Template Tab (Template Properties Dialog Box) (on page 165)
Process Tab for Plates (Template Properties Dialog Box) (on page 166)
Marking Tab (Template Properties Dialog Box) (on page 168)
Relationships Tab (on page 84)
Configuration Tab (on page 84)
Notes Tab (on page 86)

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 162

 Templates

General Tab (Template Properties Dialog Box)

Name
Specifies the name of the template set. If you change the name, then the name rule changes
automatically to User Defined.
Name Rule
Selects a name rule for the template set.
 Select DefaultNameRule to use the following syntax: <"T"><Block Name>-<Single Part
Name>_<Template Index number>-<Workshare Location ID>. For example,
TB0.1-7.1-4.1-2-1_1-1, where T denotes the template object, B0.1-7.1-4.1-2 is the block
name, 1 is the single part name, the 1 following the underscore is the template index
number, and the final 1 is the Workshare Location ID.
 Select User Defined to manually type a name in the Name box.
Frame System
Specifies the frame system for the template set. The list contains the frame systems of the
parent assembly systems, the frame systems provided by the rule, and the frame systems in
the range of the template. By default, the template set inherits the frame system from the
parent.
Surface Type
Displays the surface type used by the template. The list contains Part Surface, Molded
Surface, and Part Surface Base. By default, Part Surface is used.
Material Type
Specifies the object material type, such as Steel - Carbon or Steel - High Strength.
Material Grade
Specifies the object material grade. To change the options on the list, edit the Structure >
Materials > Properties node in Catalog.
Thickness
Specifies the material thickness for the templates.
Master Part
The master part of the assembly template set. The master part helps define the marking and
process settings. You can change the master part by selecting a different part from the list
box.
Is Assembly Template
Specifies whether the template set is created on the part or assembly.
Type
Specifies the type of template. The list contains Plate, Profile-Face, Tube, and Profile-Edge.
Detailed Part Status
Displays the state of the parent part or parts for the manufacturing object. This property only
displays when you are modifying a part.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 163

 Templates

Up to Date - The part state is current with all of its relationships, such as connected parts.
Out of Date - The part state is not current with all of its relationships, such as connected parts.
A relationship change can cause this state. You can update the detailed part by using Tools >
Recompute Objects. For more information, see Recompute Objects in the Common User's
Guide.
In Error - The part encountered an error. A relationship change such as connected parts can
cause the error. You can clear the error by using View > To Do List. For more information,
see To Do List in the Common User's Guide.
Warning - The part encountered a warning. A relationship change such as connected parts
can cause the warning. You can clear the error by using View > To Do List. For more
information, see To Do List in the Common User's Guide.
Light Part - The part has not been detailed.
Manufacturing Object Status
Displays the status of the manufacturing object. This property only displays when you are
modifying a manufacturing object.
Up to Date - The part state is current with all of its relationships, such as connected parts.
Out of Date - The part state is not current with all of its relationships, such as detailed parts. A
relationship change can cause this state. You can update the manufacturing part by using
Manufacturing Service Manager . For more information, see Manufacturing Service
Manager (on page 319).
In To Do List - The part encountered an error or warning. A relationship change such as
connected parts can cause this state. You can clear the error by using View > To Do List. For
more information, see To Do List in the Common User's Guide.
Up to Date (Pre-nesting) - The state of a pre-nested part is current with all of its
relationships, such as connected parts.
Out of Date (Pre-nesting) - The state of a pre-nested part is not current with all of its
relationships, such as connected parts. A relationship change can cause this state.
In To Do List (Pre-nesting) - The pre-nested part encountered an error. A relationship
change can cause this state.
For more information on the pre-nesting service, see Pre-Nesting (on page 379).

See Also
Plate Template Properties Dialog Box (on page 162)

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 164

 Templates

Template Tab (Template Properties Dialog Box)

This tab is available when you edit an existing template set.
Name
Displays the names of the templates in the selected template set. If you select a name, the
corresponding template highlights in the model. You can edit the template name if your
selection for the Process List on the Template ribbon bar is one of the following:
 UserDefined_TemplateProcessPlate
 UserDefinedBox_TemplateProcessPlate
 UserDefBoxEdges_TemplateProcessPlate
 UserDefined_TemplateProcessProfile
You can edit the template names of other process list types by customizing the UserDefVals
process rule for plates, profiles, tubes, and edges.
Index
Displays the index number assigned to each template. You can sort templates in each group
by changing the index.
Group
Displays the group number assigned to each template. You can create groups of templates by
changing the group number. By default, all templates along the primary direction are assigned
to Group1, and all templates along the secondary direction (normal to the primary direction)
are assigned to Group2. All other templates are assigned to other groups. There can be any
number of groups.
IsReference
Indicates which templates are designated as the reference templates. Two templates, one
each from the primary group and secondary groups, are defined as the reference templates
by default. The intersection of the two reference templates is called the reference point.
Type
Indicates the type for each template in the template set.
 System - System generated template.
 Sketched - Template created by the Add Sketched Templates step.
 Edited (System) - System generated template modified in the Bottom Line step.
 Edited (Sketched) - Sketched template modified in the Bottom Line step.
 Edited (Point) - Template created by selecting a point on the base control line in the
Bottom Line step.
See Also
Plate Template Properties Dialog Box (on page 162)

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 165

 Templates

Process Tab for Plates (Template Properties Dialog Box)

Type
Specifies the type of template. Template types include:
 frame
 center line
 perpendicular
 stern/stem
 perpendicular XY
 aft and forward
 user defined
 even
 box
 user defined box
 user defined box with edges
Side
Specifies the side on which the template set is applied.
Orientation
Specifies the orientation for the template. Template orientations include:
 along frame
 perpendicular
 normal to base plane
Min Height
Specifies the minimum height of the template.
Max Height
Specifies the maximum height of the template.
Position
Specifies the positions at which templates must be placed. This could be at Frames, at Even
Distance, or at Edges.
Extension

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 166

 Templates

Specifies the extension for the template.

Base Plane
Specifies the base plane options for the template. Base plane options include:
 Normal to plate
 Parallel to plate
 By system
 User defined
Direction
Specifies the direction of the template. Direction options include:
 Longitudinal
 Transversal
 Waterline
Template Service
Specifies the rule that computes the base plane, base control line, and template contours.

Type Side Min Max Orientation Direction Position Position Extension Base
Height Height Even Frames Plane

Frame 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
(Note 3) (Note 1)

Center 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Line (Note 1)

Perpendicular 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
(Note 1)

Perpendicular 0 0 0 X 0 X X 0 0
XY (Note 2)

Stern/ 0 0 0 X X X X 0 0
Stem (Note 2)

User 0 0 0 0 X X X 0
Defined

Legend:

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 167

 Templates

0 - meaningful
X - not meaningful; ignored

1. If orientation is AlongFrame, Position Even should not be used and PositionFrames

should be set to PositionFrame.
2. The BySystem option is always applied because the BasePlane is generated by special
logic in the code level.
3. If Type is set to Frame, Direction should always be set to Transversal (Y direction).
See Also
Plate Template Properties Dialog Box (on page 162)

Marking Tab (Template Properties Dialog Box)

When you select multiple objects, you can change the properties that those objects
have in common. If the value of the property is the same for the objects that you have selected,
that value displays in the ribbon bar. If the values are different, the box for that value is blank.
Changing the value of a property will make that the value for all of the selected objects.
User Answers
Selects a template process type from the list. This list is the same as the Process list on the
Template ribbon.
Parameter
Displays the parameters for the process that you have selected.
Value
You can modify the parameter values if necessary.
Rule-Based
If the value of the parameter is rule-based, a check box displays. You can clear the check box
and then select a different parameter value if necessary.
Catalog Value
Displays the original catalog value for the process if you modified the value.
SideMark
For future use.
SeamMarks
Creates marks at seam locations at both ends of each template.
BaseCtlLineMark
Creates a mark on the top line of the template at some distance from the top base control line.
ShipDirectionMark
Creates a mark indicating the ship direction.
LabelMark
For future use.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 168

 Templates

FrameMarks
Creates marks of intersecting frames.
KnuckleMarks
Creates marks of intersecting knuckles with the template bottom line.
ReferenceMarks
Creates marks of intersecting reference curves with the template bottom line.
TemplateMarks
Creates marks of intersecting templates with the template.
CustomMarks
Creates any other marks based on rule.
See Also
Plate Template Properties Dialog Box (on page 162)

Profile Face Template

Creates a set of templates at user-defined positions. The command generates the template
outer contour shapes and reference point data that can be used for output in template table data.

Templates are used to check and control the actual curvature during and after the bending.
A template is a single object aligned with a respective marking line on a plate. A template set is a
group of templates prepared for a single plate to check its curvature during and after the bending
process.
In addition to specifying the shape and spacing for the templates, you can apply rule-based
processes and marking sets to the templates, analogous to the processes and markings applied
to plate parts.
If the software cannot compute the base plane or the base control line by rule, it
displays a message box to warn you of the condition.
The software identifies the following template types:
Frame
A frame template set is a general way to make a template. This type of template is used in
most cases. A frame template set consists of templates at each frame position on a selected

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 169

 Templates

plate. You can specify an interval value for defining the template positions, and you can add
additional templates if needed.
Even
An even template set consists of templates at even distances along the base control line of
the selected profile.
Aft and Forward
An aft and forward template set is similar to the frame template set, except that the location of
the templates is determined by the aft and forward seam.
Perpendicular
A perpendicular template set specifies the templates at planes normal to the plate surface.
User Defined
A user defined template set lets you sketch the base control line and the template locations in
the two-dimensional drafting environment. The template locations must intersect the base
control line.

Profile Face Template Ribbon

Displays the controls used to add templates to the model.

Properties
Activates the Template Properties dialog box, which you use to view and modify the
properties, including process and marking properties, of the template that you are about to
place in the model. For more information, see Plate Template Properties Dialog Box (on page
162).

Part
Select the detailed profile part to which you want to add the template. You can select the part
in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer.
Rule
Indicates if you are using a customized filter to select the part.
Template Type
Indicates the template type on which to place the template. The available options are:
 Plate - Places templates on plate parts.
 Profile Face - Places templates on profile faces.
 Assembly - Places templates on multiple plates.
Base Plane
Selects the base plane for the template. The base plane is an offset balance plane of a plate
or a panel. The base plane is an alignment plane for all of the templates in the template set.
For more information on the available base planes, see Plate Template (on page 153).
Base Control Line
Overrides the automatically generated base control line, and starts Sketch2D so that you can
draw the base control line. The base control line is a basic alignment line for the templates

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 170

 Templates

within the set on the plate. It is also a reference for creating the template table.

Add Template
Starts Sketch2D so that you can draw a custom template location.

Bottom Line
Selects the action to perform from the list. The available options include the following:

 Pick Bottom Line - Selects a bottom line to modify.

 Pick Point - Selects a point on the base control line for creating a bottom line.
 Edit Bottom Line - Starts Sketch2D so that you can modify the bottom line.

 Delete - Deletes the manually edited bottom line.

Finish
Displays a dialog box asking if you want to accept or reject the changes. If you click Accept,
the software displays a preview of the template set. This option creates the template using the
parameters that you have defined.

Assembly
Highlights the selected assembly. This command is available when you select Assembly
from the Template Type list, and then select an assembly in the Workspace Explorer.

Parts
Highlights the plate parts in the selected assembly. This command is available when you
select Assembly from the Template Type list, and then select an assembly in the
Workspace Explorer.

Supported Plates List

Displays the Supported Plate List dialog box. This command is available when you select
Assembly from the Template Type list, and then select an assembly in the Workspace
Explorer. For more information, see Supported Plate List Dialog Box (on page 195).
Cancel
Clears the selection.
Accept
Accepts the supported items in the selection, and creates the base plane and the base control
line.

Switch Upper/Lower
Reverses the seam location definition in the upper and lower direction.

Switch Fore/Aft
Reverses the seam location definition in the fore and aft direction.
BasePlane
Select the base plane type from the list. The available options include the following:

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 171

 Templates

 Most Planar Natural - Generates a plane based on the planar portion of the plate
surface. The planar portion should be at least 30 percent.
 Average of Corners Plane - Generates a plane based on the number of vertices of the
plate surface. The system takes the normal from the plane defined by each combination
of three vertices and calculates these normals based.
 By System - Generates the base plane based on system defaults.
 User Defined - Defines the base plane either by the Six Plane Control methods (for more
information see Plane Methods (on page 33)) or the By Three Points method.
 Parallel Axis - Uses the coordinate axis which is most in line with the normal of the plate
to define the base plane.
 True Natural - Generates the base plane from the normal at the center of the plate
surface.

By Three Points
Selects three vertex points to define the plane for the base plane. The software highlights the
nearest vertex point to the cursor in red. When you select a vertex, it displays in yellow. This
option is only available when User Defined is selected in the BasePlane list.
Side
Selects the side for the template.
 WebLeft
 WebRight
 TopFlange
 BottomFlange
Template Type
Selects the related template for its base plane and side. This option is only available if you
select a plate that has defined templates defined.
Frame System
Selects a frame system to associate with the template. The list contains the frame systems
from the catalog rule, as well as the frame system inherited from the parent assembly.
Process List
Selects a template process from the list. A process is a rule-based geometrical definition of a
template based on particular manufacturing information. For example, template spacing is a
process.
 Default_TemplateProcessProfile
 Frame_TemplateProcessProfile
 Perpendicular_TemplateProcessProfile
 UserDefined_TemplateProcessProfile
 Even_TemplateProcessProfile
 AftForward_TemplateProcessProfile
Marking List

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 172

 Templates

Select a process from the list.

 Default_TemplateMarkingProfile

What do you want to do?

 Create a profile face template set (on page 173)
 Modify a Template Set (on page 162)
 Copy and Paste a Template Set (on page 162)
 Delete a Template Set (on page 162)

Create a profile face template set

1. Click Template .

2. On the Template ribbon, click Profile Parts .

3. From the Template Type list, select Profile Face.
4. Select the profile parts for which you want to create the template set.
You can select the parts in the model, or from the Workspace Explorer.

5. Click Base Plane if you want to change the balance type, template side, or choose a
related template.
6. Click Accept .
7. Click Base Control Line if you want to manually sketch the base control line. Using the
available drawing commands in the 2D environment, draw the base control line.

8. Click Add Template if you want to manually sketch template locations. Using the available
drawing commands in the 2D environment, draw the templates.
9. Click Accept to display a preview of the template set.

10. If necessary, click Bottom Line to manually extend the bottom line of the template set.
11. Click Finish on the ribbon in the 2D environment.
12. Select the Process type.

13. Click Properties , and change the default Process and Marking Set values if needed.
14. Click OK.
15. Click Finish.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 173

 Templates

Profile Face Template Properties Dialog Box

Specifies the properties for the template that you are editing.
See Also
Profile Face Template (on page 169)
General Tab (Template Properties Dialog Box) (on page 163)
Template Tab (Template Properties Dialog Box) (on page 165)
Process Tab for Profile Faces (Template Properties Dialog Box) (on page 174)
Marking Tab (Template Properties Dialog Box) (on page 168)
Relationships Tab (on page 84)
Configuration Tab (on page 84)
Notes Tab (on page 86)

Process Tab for Profile Faces (Template Properties Dialog Box)

When you select multiple objects, you can change the properties that those objects
have in common. If the value of the property is the same for the objects that you have selected,
that value displays in the ribbon bar. If the values are different, the box for that value is blank.
Changing the value of a property makes that the value for all of the selected objects.
User Answers
Select a template process type from the list. This list is the same as the Process list on the
Template ribbon.
Parameter
Displays the parameters for the process that you have selected.
Value
You can modify the parameter values if necessary.
Rule-Based
If the value of the parameter is rule-based, a check box displays. You can clear the check box
and then select a different parameter value if necessary.
Catalog Value
Displays the original catalog value for the process if you modified the value.
Type
Specifies the type of the template. Template types include:
 frame
 perpendicular
 user defined
 aft forward
 even
Side
Specifies the side on which the template set is applied.
Orientation

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 174

 Templates

Specifies the orientation for the template. Template orientations include:

 along frame
 perpendicular
 normal to base plane
Min Height
Specifies the minimum height of the template.
Max Height
Specifies the maximum height of the template.
Position
Specifies the positions at which templates must be placed. This could be at Frames, at Even
Distance, or at Edges.
Extension
Specifies the extension for the template. Extensions include:
 BothSidesFixed - Creates a template on both sides of the base control line and extends
that template on both sides with a fixed value.
 BothSidesNo - Creates a template on both sides of the base control line with no
extension.
 BothSidesOffset - Creates a template on both sides with an extension based on the
offset.
 LowerSideFixed - Creates a template with a fixed extension only on the lower side of the
base control line.
 LowerSideOffset - Creates a template with an offset-based extension only on the lower
side of the base control line.
 LowerSideNo - Creates a template with no extension only on the lower side of the base
control line.
 UpperSideFixed - Creates a template with a fixed extension only on the upper side of the
base control line.
 UpperSideOffset - Creates a template with an offset extension only on the upper side of
the base control line.
 UpperSideNo - Creates a template with no extension only on the upper side of the base
control line.
Template Service
Creates template profiles.
See Also
Profile Face Template Properties Dialog Box (on page 174)

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 175

 Templates

Tubular Member Template

Creates and modifies templates to check the curvature of tube member end cuts.
Tube template rules are delivered to the [Product
Folder]\SharedContent\Src\StructManufacturing\Rules\MfgTemplateSet\Definitions\Tube folder.

Tube member with end cut.

Tube template with base plane, side lines, and base

control line on end cut.

Base plane perpendicular to axis.

Base plane in global direction.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 176

 Templates

Template output with short distance base control line

and ExtnRad90.

Template output with base control line at the model

origin and ExtnLinear100.

Tubular Member Template Ribbon

Displays the controls used to add tube templates to the model.

Properties
Activates the Template Properties dialog box, which you use to view and modify the
properties, including process and marking properties, of the template that you are about to
place in the model. For more information, see Tube and Edge Templates Properties Dialog
Box (on page 179).

Tubular Member Parts

Select the tubular member part to which you want to add the template. You can select the part
in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer.

Base Plane
Select the base plane for the template. The base plane is an offset balance plane based on
the tube axis. The base plane can be perpendicular to the tube axis, or it can be along one of
the global axes.
Base Plane
 By System
 NormalToAxis
 Global
 UserDefined
Side
 Outer
 Inner
Side End
 Base

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 177

 Templates

 Offset
Process List
 Default_TemplateProcessTube
 ShortDistBCL_TemplateProcessTube
 LongDistBCL_TemplateProcessTube
Marking List
 Default_TemplateMarkingTube
Base Control Line
Currently, this step is not supported. It overrides the automatically generated base control line
and starts Sketch2D so that you can draw the base control line. The base control line controls
the position on the 3D tube template where the tube is opened to unfold. The tube opens at
the opposite position to the base control line and the 2D tube template output is generated by
unfolding the 3D tube template.
Finish
Displays a dialog box asking if you want to accept or reject the changes. If you click Accept,
the software displays a preview of the template set. This action creates the template using the
parameters that you have defined.
Cancel
Clears the selection.
Accept
Accepts the selection.
Process List
Select a template process from the list. A process is a rule-based geometrical definition of a
template based on particular manufacturing information. For example, template spacing is a
process.
 Default_TemplateProcessTube
 ShortDistBCL_TemplateProcessTube
 LongDistBCL_TemplateProcessTube
Marking List
Select a process from the list.
 Default_TemplateMarkingTube

What do you want to do?

 Create a tube template (on page 179)
 Modify a tube template (on page 179)
 Delete a tube template (on page 179)

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 178

 Templates

Create a tube template

1. Click Tube Template .

2. On the Tube Template ribbon, click Tubular Member Parts .

3. Select the tube parts for which you want to create the template set.
You can select the parts in the model or from the Workspace Explorer.

4. Click Base Plane if you want to change the balance type, template side, or choose a
related template.
5. Click Accept .
6. Select the Process type.

7. Click Properties , and change the default Process and Marking Set values, if needed.
8. Click OK.
9. Click Finish.

Modify a tube template

1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the tube template to modify.
You can select the template in the model or from the Workspace Explorer.
3. Using the ribbon controls, edit the tube template as needed.
You cannot change the parent plate when you modify the object.

Delete a tube template

1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the tube template to delete.

3. Click Delete .

Tube and Edge Templates Properties Dialog Box

Specifies the properties for the template that you are editing.
See Also
Tubular Member Template (on page 176)
General Tab (Tube and Edge Template Properties Dialog Box) (on page 180)
Template Tab (Tube and Edge Template Properties Dialog Box) (on page 181)
Process Tab (Tube and Edge Template Properties Dialog Box) (on page 182)
Marking Tab (Tube and Edge Template Properties Dialog Box) (on page 184)
Relationships Tab (on page 84)
Configuration Tab (on page 84)
Notes Tab (on page 86)

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 179

 Templates

General Tab (Tube and Edge Template Properties Dialog Box)

Name
Specifies the name of the template set. If you change the name, then the name rule changes
automatically to User Defined.
Name Rule
Selects a name rule for the template set.
 Select DefaultNameRule to use the following syntax: <"T"><Block Name>-<Single Part
Name>_<Template Index number>-<Workshare Location ID>. For example,
TB0.1-7.1-4.1-2-1_1-1, where T denotes the template object, B0.1-7.1-4.1-2 is the block
name, 1 is the single part name, the 1 following the underscore is the template index
number, and the final 1 is the Workshare Location ID.
 Select User Defined to manually type a name in the Name box.
Frame System
Specifies the frame system for the template set. The list contains the frame systems of the
parent assembly systems, the frame systems provided by the rule, and the frame systems in
the range of the template. By default, the template set inherits the frame system from the
parent.
Material Type
Displays the surface type used by the template. The list contains Part Surface, Molded
Surface, and Part Surface Base. By default, Part Surface is used.
Is Assembly Template
Specifies whether the template set is created on the part or assembly.
Type
Specifies the type of template. The list contains Plate, Profile-Face, Tube, and Profile-Edge.
Detailed Part Status
Displays the state of the parent part or parts for the manufacturing object. This property only
displays when you are modifying a part.
Up to Date - The part state is current with all of its relationships, such as connected parts.
Out of Date - The part state is not current with all of its relationships, such as connected parts.
A relationship change can cause this state. You can update the detailed part by using Tools >
Recompute Objects. For more information, see Recompute Objects in the Common User's
Guide.
In Error - The part encountered an error. A relationship change such as connected parts can
cause the error. You can clear the error by using View > To Do List. For more information,
see To Do List in the Common User's Guide.
Warning - The part encountered a warning. A relationship change such as connected parts
can cause the warning. You can clear the error by using View > To Do List. For more
information, see To Do List in the Common User's Guide.
Light Part - The part has not been detailed.
Manufacturing Object Status

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 180

 Templates

Displays the status of the manufacturing object. This property only displays when you are
modifying a manufacturing object.
Up to Date - The part state is current with all of its relationships, such as connected parts.
Out of Date - The part state is not current with all of its relationships, such as detailed parts. A
relationship change can cause this state. You can update the manufacturing part by using
Manufacturing Service Manager . For more information, see Manufacturing Service
Manager (on page 319).
In To Do List - The part encountered an error or warning. A relationship change such as
connected parts can cause this state. You can clear the error by using View > To Do List. For
more information, see To Do List in the Common User's Guide.
Up to Date (Pre-nesting) - The state of a pre-nested part is current with all of its
relationships, such as connected parts.
Out of Date (Pre-nesting) - The state of a pre-nested part is not current with all of its
relationships, such as connected parts. A relationship change can cause this state.
In To Do List (Pre-nesting) - The pre-nested part encountered an error. A relationship
change can cause this state.
For more information on the pre-nesting service, see Pre-Nesting (on page 379).

See Also
Tube and Edge Templates Properties Dialog Box (on page 179)

Template Tab (Tube and Edge Template Properties Dialog Box)

Because tube template sets contains a single template, only one template displays in this tab.
Name
Displays the names of the templates in the selected template set. If you select a name, the
corresponding template highlights in the model.
Index
Displays the index number assigned to each template. You can sort templates in each group
by changing the index.
Group
Displays the group number assigned to each template. You can create groups of templates by
changing the group number. By default, all templates along the primary direction are assigned
to Group1, and all templates along the secondary direction (normal to the primary direction)
are assigned to Group2. All other templates are assigned to other groups. There can be any
number of groups.
IsReference
Indicates which templates are designated as the reference templates. Two templates, one
each from the primary and secondary groups, are defined as the reference templates by
default. The intersection of the two reference templates is called the reference point.
Type
Indicates the type for each template in the template set.
 System - System generated template.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 181

 Templates

See Also
Tube and Edge Templates Properties Dialog Box (on page 179)

Process Tab (Tube and Edge Template Properties Dialog Box)

When you select multiple objects, you can change the properties that those objects
have in common. If the value of the property is the same for the objects that you have selected,
that value displays in the ribbon bar. If the values are different, the box for that value is blank.
Changing the value of a property makes that the value for all of the selected objects.
User Answers
Select a template process type from the list. This list is the same as the Process list on the
Template ribbon.
Parameter
Displays the parameters for the process that you have selected.
Value
You can modify the parameter values if necessary.
Rule-Based
If the value of the parameter is rule-based, a check box displays. You can clear the check box
and then select a different parameter value if necessary.
Catalog Value
Displays the original catalog value for the process if you modified the value.
Min Height
Specifies the minimum height of the base plane from the end cut. Available options include:
 Fixed
 Height_50
 Height_100
 Height_150
 Height_200
Max Height
Specifies the maximum height of the base plane from the end cut.
Extension
Specifies the extension to apply on the bottom line. Available options include:
 ExtnRad90
 ExtnLinear100
 ExtnAlongEdge50
 Ignore
Side
Specifies the side on which the template set is applied.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 182

 Templates

 Outer
 Inner
SideEnd
Specifies the tube end on which the template set is applied. Available options include:
 Base
 Offset
Type
Specifies the template type based on the base control line position. Template types include:
 ShortDistance BCL
 LongDistanceBCL
 ModelOrigin
 Global X Max
 Global X Min
 Global Y Max
 Global Y Min
 Global Z Max
 Global Z Min
Base Plane
Specifies the base plane option. Base plane options include:
 BySystem
 NormalToAxis
 Global
 User defined
Template Service
Specifies the rule that computes the base plane, base control line, and template contours.
UserDefinedValues
Specifies the rule the returns any user-defined values.
TemplateNaming
Specifies the rule the computes the template name.
Bevel
Specifies the rule the computes the bevel.
See Also
Tube and Edge Templates Properties Dialog Box (on page 179)

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 183

 Templates

Marking Tab (Tube and Edge Template Properties Dialog Box)

When you select multiple objects, you can change the properties that those objects
have in common. If the value of the property is the same for the objects that you have selected,
that value displays in the ribbon bar. If the values are different, the box for that value is blank.
Changing the value of a property makes that the value for all of the selected objects.
User Answers
Select a template process type from the list. This list is the same as the Process list on the
Template ribbon.
Parameter
Displays the parameters for the process that you have selected.
Value
You can modify the parameter values if necessary.
Rule-Based
If the value of the parameter is rule-based, a check box displays. You can clear the check box
and then select a different parameter value if necessary.
Catalog Value
If you modified the value, the original catalog value for the process displays.
BaseCtlLineMark
Creates a mark on the top line of the template at some distance from the top base control line.
FittingMark
Creates fitting marks. This option only applies to tube templates.
FrameMarks
Creates marks of intersecting frames.
QuarterLineMarks
Creates quarter line marks. This option only applies to tube templates.
SeamMarks
Creates seam marks.
ShipDirectionMark
Creates ship direction marks.
CustomMark
Creates custom marks.
See Also
Tube and Edge Templates Properties Dialog Box (on page 179)

Edge Template
Creates and modifies templates to check the curvature of edges.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 184

 Templates

Edge template rules are delivered to the [Product

Folder]\SharedContent\Src\StructManufacturing\Rules\MfgTemplateset\Definitions\Edge folder.

Edge Template Ribbon

Displays the controls used to add edge templates to the model.
Properties
Activates the Template Properties dialog box, which you use to view and modify the
properties, including process and marking properties, of the template that you are about to
place in the model. For more information, see Tube and Edge Templates Properties Dialog
Box (on page 179).

Edge Parts
Select the edge part to which to add the template. You can select the part in a graphic view or
in the Workspace Explorer.
Finish
Displays a dialog box asking if you want to accept or reject the changes. If you click Accept,
the software displays a preview of the template set. This action creates the template using the
parameters that you have defined.
Cancel
Clears the selection.
Accept
Accepts the selection.
Side
Selects the side for the template.
 WebLeft
 WebRight
 Top
 Bottom
Offset
Select the offset for the template.
 No_Offset
 Offset_10
 Offset_20
 Full_Offset
Process List
Select a template process from the list. A process is a rule-based geometrical definition of a
template based on particular manufacturing information. For example, template spacing is a
process.
 Default_TemplateProcessEdge

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 185

 Templates

Marking List
Select a process from the list.
 Default_TemplateMarkingEdge

What do you want to do?

 Create an edge template (on page 186)
 Modify an edge template (on page 186)
 Delete an edge template (on page 187)

Create an edge template

1. Click Edge Template .

2. On the Edge Template ribbon, click Edge Parts .

3. Select the edge parts for which you want to create the template set.
You can select the parts in the model or from the Workspace Explorer.
4. Select the side for the template from the Side list.
5. Select the type of offset to use from the Offset list.
6. Select the process type to use from the Process List list.

7. Click Properties , and change the default Process and Marking Set values, if needed.
8. Click OK.
9. Click Finish.

Modify an edge template

1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the edge template to modify.
You can select the template in the model or from the Workspace Explorer.
3. Using the ribbon controls, edit the edge template as needed.
You cannot change the parent plate when you modify the object.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 186

 Templates

Delete an edge template

1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the edge template to delete.

3. Click Delete .

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 187

SECTION 7

Pin Jig
Creates a set of pin jigs at positions defined in the work center. The work center is defined in
the Planning task. This command also allows you to add rows, columns, and individual pin
locations.

A pin jig is a manufacturing aid consisting of a height-adjustable pedestal that supports a part such
as a plate, assembly, or block. You can place multiple pin jigs on a plate, assembly, or block.
When you place pin jigs, you must specify the base plane of the supported parts. The base plane
is a plane that represents the workshop floor. The software calculates the height of the pins as the
distance between the base plane and the part, taking into account the used pin head. The spacing
between the jig grid lines is derived from the work center information that has been assigned to the
assembly to which the parts belong.

Pin Jig Ribbon

Displays the controls used to define a pin jig.

Properties
Activates the Pin Jig Properties dialog box, which you use to view and modify the properties
of the pin jig that you are about to place in the model. For more information, see Pin Jig
Properties Dialog Box (on page 202).

Select Assembly/Plate Part(s)

Select the detailed plate part or assembly that is the parent of the pin jig.
A detailed plate part or assembly can have multiple pin jigs.
Select
Manually select the supported plate parts. This button only displays if you select an assembly.

Select Supported Plate Parts

Displays the Supported Plate List dialog box. For more information, see Supported Plate List
Dialog Box (on page 195).
Accept
Accepts the selected supported objects.
Cancel
Cancels the object selection.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 188

 Pin Jig

Select Boundaries
Define the outer contour seams and butts for the pin jig, which is required for reporting. The
aft, lower, fore, and upper seam selections are also used to rename the seams on the
drawings.

Boundary Steps
Aft
Specifies the aft boundary. If the software can compute the aft boundary, that is the default.

Lower
Specifies the lower boundary. If the software can compute the lower boundary, that is the
default.
The aft and lower boundaries must have a common point. This point determines
the origin point for the plate parts on the pin jig.

Fore
Specifies the fore boundary. If the software can compute the fore boundary, that is the default.

Upper
Specifies the upper boundary. If the software can compute the upper boundary, that is the
default.

 You can select multiple boundary objects within each seam definition. For example, the
aft boundary can be comprised of several seams, plate boundaries, and so on that are
linked together.
 You can select seams, or any object that would form a plate boundary, to define the
contour boundaries.
Aft Boundary Name
Displays the name assigned to the aft boundary. You can change the default to meet your
needs.
Lower Boundary Name
Displays the name assigned to the lower boundary. You can change the default to meet your
needs.
Fore Boundary Name
Displays the name assigned to the fore boundary. You can change the default to meet your
needs.
Upper Boundary Name
Displays the name assigned to the upper boundary. You can change the default to meet your
needs.
Display List
Indicates whether the Boundary Steps dialog box displays.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 189

 Pin Jig

The Boundary Steps dialog box displays a list of boundaries for the selected plates. For a
regular plate with four boundaries, this dialog box displays the list of boundaries and the
corresponding directions. For irregular plates, such as plates forming an L shape, the dialog
box displays the boundaries but does not assign directions. You can specify the boundary by
selecting the corresponding checkbox. When you select the boundary, it highlights in the
model. A single boundary can be assigned to multiple directions. Multiple boundaries can be
assigned to a single direction.

Base Plane
Specify the base plane for the pin jig. The base plane defines the jig floor.
Balance Method
Specifies the balance method for the pin jig. For some methods, you can select the inputs
from the model by selecting the User Inputs option.

Direction Toggle
Reverses the direction of the base plane.
User Inputs
Indicates that you select inputs for the Balance Method from the model. Valid inputs include:

 Reference lines - Seams, knuckles, reference curves, and marking lines that pass
over the selected plates.

 Select Points - Plate corners, end points of seams, knuckles, reference curves, and
marking lines.
If the balance method is set to User Defined, the Plane Definition Control
buttons display.
Coincident Plane
Specifies that you want the plate part placed on the reference plane.
By Plane or Offset Plane
Places the plate system a specified distance from the reference plane. If you choose this
option, you must define the offset distance. An offset distance of zero defines a coincident
plane.
Angle from plane
Places the plate part at a specified angle or slope to the reference plane. If you choose this
option, you must define an axis of rotation and the angle or slope.
Plane by Point and Vector

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 190

 Pin Jig

Specifies the reference plane by defining a vector perpendicular to the reference plane. A
third point defines the reference plane position along the vector.

Plane by Vectors Normal

Specifies the reference plane as being normal to another plane that you select and having a
rotation parallel to a vector that you define.

/ Remove/Maintain Relationships of the Plane

Maintains the relationships of the plane to the definition method and the geometry used by the
definition method. For example, a plane created with Offset from Plane maintains the
relationship of the selected plane and the Offset value. Otherwise, this option disables the
relationships of the plane to allow moving of the plane.
When you copy a bracket and use Edit > Paste > Delete Optional to remove a
boundary, Remove/Maintain Relationships of the Plane / is not visible. You must
first click Select Bracket Supports to allow the command to determine the applicable
options.
/ Offset lock
Locks the Offset value, disabling updates of the offset value by mouse moves. The Lock
option is only available when you use the Offset from a Plane option.
Offset
Specify the offset distance for the plate part from the selected reference plane. You can
specify the offset dynamically in graphics or by typing the distance. The Offset option is only
available when you use the Offset from a Plane option.
Angle
Specify the angle at which to place the plate part relative to the reference plane. You have to
define the axis of rotation using two points before you can define the angle. The Angle option
is only available when you use the Angle from plane option.
Step
Specifies the angle step. The step is incremented by this value when the cursor is moved in
the graphic view. The Step option is only available when you use the Angle from plane
option.
Select Vector
Select or define a vector normal to the needed plane. This option is only available when you
use the Plane by Point and Vector option.
Define Point
Specify the point along the vector at which to place the plane. This option is only available
when you use the Plane by Point and Vector option.
Define Point 1
Specify the location of the first of three points that defines the plane. This option is only

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 191

 Pin Jig

available when you are using the Plane by Three Points option.
Define Point 2
Specify the location of the second of three points that defines the plane. This option is only
available when you are using the Plane by Three Points option.
Define Point 3
Specify the location of the third of three points that defines the plane. This option is only
available when you are using the Plane by Three Points option.
Select Plane
Select the plane to which your reference plane is to be normal. This option is only available
when you are using the Plane by Vectors Normal option.
Select First Point
Specify the location of the first vector point. Your reference plane is parallel to this vector. This
option is only available when you are using the Plane by Vectors Normal option.
Select Second Point
Specify the location of the second vector point. Your reference plane is parallel to this vector.
This option is only available when you are using the Plane by Vectors Normal option.

Remarking Lines
Displays the Remarking Lines dialog box from which you can modify existing remarking lines
and add new remarking lines. You can also view and modify the attribute values of the
remarking lines. For more information, see Remarking Lines Dialog Box (on page 195).

Modify Jig Setup

Activates the Pin Jig 3D View dialog box. For more information, see Pin Jig 3D View Dialog
Box (on page 196).
Finish
Creates the pin jig.
Pin Alignment
Specifies the alignment of the pins on the jig floor. This option is available when Base Plane
is selected during placement of a new pin jig. It is also available when Jig Setup is
selected during creation and modification of an existing pin jig. The available options are:
 Default - Pins are aligned based on the tightest box bounding the supported plates.
 Longest Edge - Pins are aligned based on the longest contour. The rows or columns of
pins are parallel to the line joining the end points of the longest contour.
 Global - Pins are aligned based on the global coordinate system. The rows or columns of
pins are parallel to the global axes.
 Centerline - Pins are aligned based on the centerline. A row of pins is placed on the
centerline. This option is only available when the selected plates cross the centerline of
the hull.
Minimum Pin Height

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 192

 Pin Jig

Select the minimum height of the pins from the list. This option is set automatically if the Pin
Height Rule box is set to By Rule.
Pin Height Rule
Select the rule from the list.
Equipment
Select the equipment to use from the list. This information comes from the work centers
assigned to the assembly to which the supported parts belong.

What do you want to do?

 Create a pin jig (on page 193)
 Modify a pin jig (on page 194)
 Copy and paste a pin jig (on page 194)
 Delete a pin jig (on page 194)

Create a pin jig

1. Click Pin Jig .

2. On the Pin Jig ribbon, click Select Assembly/Plate Part(s) .

3. Select the plate part or assembly for which you want to create the pin jig.
You can select the part in the model, or from the Workspace Explorer.
4. If creation of a pin jig has previously failed on the selected plate part, click Define Seams and
Butts , and select the butts and seams.
5. Select the balance method that you want to use from the Balance Method list.

6. If you select the User Defined balance method, click Base Plane and specify a plane to
represent the shop floor for the jig.
If you select the Most Planar Natural balance method, specify the percentage of planarity for
the supported plates to define the base plane.
7. For some of the balance methods, you can specify the inputs by selecting the User Inputs
option.

a. Select Reference Line - Select a seam, knuckle, reference curve, or marking line
that passes over the selected plates.

b. Select Points - Select the points necessary depending on the Balance Method
selected. These points can be plate corners, end points of seams or knuckles, reference
curves, or marking lines.
8. If necessary, click Remarking Lines to view and modify the remarking lines.

9. Click Modify Jig Setup .

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 193

 Pin Jig

10. Using the commands in the Pin Jig 3D View, modify the jig layout if needed.
11. Click Finish.

Modify a pin jig

1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Pin Jig Part in the Locate Filter box.
3. Select the part or pin jig.
You can select the part or pin jig in the model, or from the Workspace Explorer.
4. Using the ribbon controls, edit the pin jig as needed. For more information, see Pin Jig (on
page 188).
You cannot change the parent plate when you modify the object.

Copy and paste a pin jig

1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the pin jig to copy.

 The pin jig must be the child of a plate. It cannot be the child of an assembly.
 You can select the pin jig in the model, or from the Workspace Explorer.
 You can set the Locate Filter to Pin Jigs to make the selection easier.
3. Click Edit > Copy.
4. Click Edit > Paste.
5. Select the plate on which to paste the pin jig.
You must select a detailed plate for the destination.
6. Click OK on the Paste dialog box.

Delete a pin jig

1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the pin jig to delete.

3. Click Delete .

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 194

 Pin Jig

Supported Plate List Dialog Box

Specifies all of the plate parts within the selected assembly so that you can specify which plate
parts are supported by the pin jig. This is available only when you select an assembly for the pin
jig.
Supported Plate List
Displays the currently selected plate parts.
Potential Boundary List
Displays all of the plate parts within the selected assembly. By default this list contains all of
the shell plates under the selected assembly.
Add
Moves the selected plate parts from the Potential Boundary List to the Supported Plate
List.
Remove
Moves the selected plate parts from the Supported Plate List to the Potential Boundary
List.
Clear All
Moves all plate parts from the Supported Plate List to the Potential Boundary List.

Select Mfg Parts Dialog Box

Lists all of the manufacturing parts, such as marking lines and pin jigs, associated with the
selected detailed part so that you can select the object to review or modify. Use the selection filter
to limit the types of objects included in the list.

Remarking Lines Dialog Box

Tree View
Displays the remarking lines associated with the pin jig. When you expand a node in the tree
view, the entities represented by the remarking line display. There may also be a node called
SKIPPED ENTITIES if entities are skipped for remarking.
The following properties display when you select a remarking line from the tree view:
Name
Displays the name of the selected marking line.
Direction
Displays the direction of the remarking line. Available options include Auto, Horizontal, and
Vertical.
Remarking Type
Displays the remarking type associated with the remarking line. This option is not editable.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 195

 Pin Jig

Intersection Point
Indicates whether the remarking line is used for the creation of intersection points.
Sorted Index
Displays the index value associated with the remarking line.
The following properties display when you select the entity from the tree view
Name
Displays the name of the selected entity.
Remarking Line Name
Displays the parent of the selected entity. You can change the parent or select New
Remarking Line to assign the entity to a remarking line that does not yet exist. This option is
also available for skipped entities
Filter Objects
Displays all remarking lines with a particular attribute value. Click Filter Objects, and then
select the attribute value by which to filter the objects.
Merge
Combines the selected remarking lines in the tree control.
Unmerge
Separates the selected remarking lines in the tree control.
Select All
Selects all of the remarking lines in the tree control, and highlights all of the remarking lines in
the model view.

Pin Jig 3D View Dialog Box

Specifies the graphic layout for the pin jig that you are editing.
Select
Selects pins to display their attributes. The type of object that you can select is determined by
the value in the Object Type box.
View Type
Specifies the view orientation for the pin jig.

Rotate View
Rotates the view 90 degrees in the clockwise direction.

Move
Moves the entire jig set relative to the pin jig layout.

Move From
Defines the starting point for the move.

Move To

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 196

 Pin Jig

Defines the ending point for the move.

Horizontal Offset
Specifies a horizontal offset value.
Vertical Offset
Specifies a vertical offset value.
Move
Moves the jig set using the parameters that you have specified.

Rotate
Rotates the entire jig set about the specified point.
Rotation Method
Specifies the method for rotating the PinJig. The available options are:
 Angle - Applies rotation by an angle about a point. View type decides the axis of rotation.
 Pin Heights - Applies rotation about a point such that the reference pin gets the specified
height after rotation. This option is not available for side-view rotation.
 Intersection Point Heights - Applies rotation about a point such that the reference
intersection point gets the specified height after rotation. This option is not available for
side-view rotation.

Reference Point
Specifies the reference pin whose height is updated on rotation. This option is only available if
the Rotation Method is set to Pin Heights.

Reference Point
Specifies the reference intersection point whose height is updated on rotation. This option is
only available if the Rotation Method is set to Intersection Point Heights.

Reference Intersection Point

Specify the intersection point to use as the reference point in the girth length computation for
all the intersection points in the pin jig. This point has no relationship with the rotate or move
commands.

Add Pin
Add pins one at a time to the jig set. These pins are added at horizontal and vertical offset
from an existing pin.

Add Pins
Add a row of pins to the jig set. These pins are added as offset from the row of an existing pin.
Add
Adds the pin to the jig set using the parameters that you have specified.
Direction
Select a second pin to specify the direction from the selected pin in which you want to place
the row or column of pins.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 197

 Pin Jig

Offset
Specify a distance from the selected pin for the row of pins.

Delete Pin
Deletes a manually added pin.
Object Type
Determines which objects are selectable.
Pin Alignment
Specifies the alignment of the pins on the jig floor. This option is available when Base Plane
is selected during placement of a new pin jig. It is also available when Jig Setup is
selected during creation and modification of an existing pin jig. The available options are:
 Default - Pins are aligned based on the tightest box bounding the supported plates.
 Longest Edge - Pins are aligned based on the longest contour. The rows or columns of
pins are parallel to the line joining the end points of the longest contour.
 Global - Pins are aligned based on the global coordinate system. The rows or columns of
pins are parallel to the global axes.
 Centerline - Pins are aligned based on the centerline. A row of pins is placed on the
centerline. This option is only available when the selected plates cross the centerline of
the hull.
Display Text
Indicates that the pin height text displays. The available options are:

 Pin heights - Displays the heights of all the pins in the view.

 Intersection point heights - Displays the heights of all the intersection points in the
view.

 Remarking girth lengths - Displays the lengths of all the remarking girths in the view.
Attribute Viewer
Displays information about the selected object. The information displayed depends upon the
type of the selected object.
Production Option
Specifies the production options to be displayed in the attribute viewer. The available options
are:
 Margin and Shrinkage - Considers both margin and shrinkage in the reporting data.
 Margin - Considers only margins in the reporting data.
 Shrinkage - Considers only shrinkage in the reporting data.

Select Pivot Point

Specifies the point about which to rotate the pin jig. This point can be any point in the setup
view. If the Rotation Method box is set to Angle, this point defaults to the (H0, V0) pin. There
is no default for the other rotation methods.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 198

 Pin Jig

Rotate
Rotates the jig set around the specified pin, using the parameters that you have specified.
Angle
Specify the rotation angle.
Reference Height
Specify the height of the reference object after rotation.

Pin
Name
The pin name in row, column format.
Row
The row to which the pin belongs.
Column
The column to which the pin belongs.
Height
For a pin, this is the height of the pin. For an intersection point, this is the height of the
intersection point from the floor.
Added
Indicates whether or not the pin was manually added.
Corner
Indicates whether or not the pin is a corner pin.
Horizontal Marking Distance
Indicates the horizontal distance between the pin and the nearest remarking line.
Vertical Marking Distance
Indicates the vertical distance between the pin and the nearest remarking line.
Nearest Corner Point
Indicates the nearest corner point from the selected pin.
Horizontal Distance to Nearest Corner Point
Indicates the horizontal distance between the pin and the nearest corner point.
Vertical Distance to Nearest Corner Point
Indicates the vertical distance between the pin and the nearest corner point.

Minimum Pin Information

Row
The row to which the minimum pin belongs.
Column

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 199

 Pin Jig

The column to which the minimum pin belongs.

Height
The height of the minimum pin.
Added
Indicates whether or not the minimum pin was manually added.

Intersection Point
Name
The type of the intersection point, such as a corner point.
Base Position
The position on the jig floor.
Upper Position
The position on the supported plates.
Cusp Angle
The change in direction at the cusp point.
Horizontal Remarking Line
The name of the horizontal remarking line through which the point passes.
Vertical Remarking Line
The name of the vertical remarking line through which the point passes
If there are multiple remarking lines that overlap one another, the software chooses the
longest remarking line to participate in creating intersection points with other crisscrossing
remarking lines. If the overlapping remarking lines are identical, the software chooses based on
the priority set by the pin jig rules. By default, this order is contour lines, then frames, and then
seams.

Closest Pin Information

Name
The name of the closest pin in row, column format.
Row
The row to which the closest pin belongs.
Column
The column to which the closest pin belongs.
Horizontal Distance from Pin
The horizontal distance between the closest pin and the intersection point.
Vertical Distance from Pin
The vertical distance between the closest pin and the intersection point.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 200

 Pin Jig

Remarking Line
Name
The name of the remarking line.
Girth Length
The length through the remarking line.
End-to-End
The distance between the start and end points of the remarking line.

Start Point Information

Name
The name of the starting point of the remarking line.
Position
The position of the starting point on the supported plates.

End Point Information

Name
The name of the ending point of the remarking line.
Position
The position of the ending point on the supported plates.

Remarking Girth
The remarking girth is the portion of a remarking line which lies between two
intersection points.

Remarking Line
Select the remarking line.

First Intersection Point

Select the first intersection point on the selected remarking line.

Second Intersection Point

Select the second intersection point on the selected remarking line.
 Girth Length - The portion of the remarking line selected.
 Straight Length - The distance between the start and end points of this portion of the
remarking line.

Remarking Line
Name
The name of the remarking line.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 201

 Pin Jig

1st Intersection
Position
The location of the first point of the remarking line segment.

2nd Intersection
Position
The location of the second point of the remarking line segment.
See Also
Pin Jig (on page 188)
Marking (on page 62)

Pin Jig Properties Dialog Box

Specifies the properties for the pin jig that you are editing.
See Also
General Tab (Pin Jig Properties Dialog Box) (on page 202)
Relationships Tab (on page 84)
Configuration Tab (on page 84)
Notes Tab (on page 86)

General Tab (Pin Jig Properties Dialog Box)

Standard
Name
Specifies the name of the pin jig set. If you change the name, then the name rule changes
automatically to User Defined.
Name Rule
Select a name rule for the jig set.
 Select DefaultNameRule to use the following syntax for a plate system: <"PJ">_<Parent
Name>-<Workshare Location ID>-<Index number>. If the parent is an assembly system,
the following syntax is used: <"AJ">_<Parent Name>-<Workshare Location ID>-<Index
number>. For example, AJ_A10-1-103, where AJ represents the type of pin jig being
used, A10 is the assembly parent name, 1 is the workshare location ID, and 103 is a
reference number.
 Select User Defined to type a name in the Name box.
Frame System
Specifies the frame system for the pin jig set. The list contains the frame systems of the parent
assembly systems, the frame systems provided by the rule, and the frame systems in the
range of the pin jig.
Indicates that the value is inherited from the parent. By default, the pin jig set inherits the
frame system from the parent.
Pin Origin Position

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 202

 Pin Jig

Specifies the position of the pin origin. This property is available in both the creation and
modification modes of the command. The possible values are:
 LowerLeft
 LowerRight
 UpperLeft
 UpperRight
Balance Method
Specifies the balance type assigned to the pin jig. This is a read-only box.
Jig Floor
Specifies the jig floor associated with the pin jig set. This is a read-only box.

Longitudinal Size
Specifies the longitudinal length of the entire jig floor. You can use this value to verify the
assembly range for the selected pin jig structural assembly or part.
Transversal Size
Specifies the transversal width of the entire jig floor. You can use this value to verify the
assembly range for the selected pin jig structural assembly or part.
Longitudinal Range
Specifies the maximum longitudinal length of an assembly placed on the jig floor. You can use
this value to verify the assembly range for the selected pin jig structural assembly or part.
Transversal Range
Specifies the maximum transverse width of an assembly placed on the jig floor. You can use
this value to verify the assembly range for the selected pin jig structural assembly or part.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 203

 Pin Jig

Longitudinal Interval
Specifies the longitudinal interval between pins. The software uses this value during the pin jig
computation.
Transversal Interval
Specifies the transversal interval between pins. The software uses this value during the pin jig
computation.
Longitudinal Naming
Specifies the naming convention used for longitudinal pin positions.
 0 Indicates numeric naming.
 1 Indicates alphabetic naming.
Transversal Naming
Specifies the naming convention used for transversal pin positions.
 0 Indicates numeric naming.
 1 Indicates alphabetic naming.
Pitch Floor Margin
Specifies the maximum allowable distance between the assembly and the jig contour.
Pin Control
Specifies the method used to set the pins into position.
 0 Indicates manual.
 1 Indicates automatic or computer-controlled.
Jig Tip Type
Specifies the tip type (such as corn, half sphere, or diamond) for the pins. The software uses
this value to calculate the real pin height. This height includes the gap between the pin head
and the part surface.

A - Pin interval
B - Part surface
C - Seam location
D - Pin height without the jig tip
E - Pin height with the jig tip

Pin Minimum Height

Specifies the minimum height of the pin jig set. The software uses this value during the pin jig
computation.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 204

 Pin Jig

Pin Maximum Height

Specifies the maximum height of the pin jig set. The software uses this value during the pin jig
computation.
Seam Distance
Specifies the minimum distance between pins and seam lines. This value is of significance to
those pins that are close to an outer contour or inner seam.
Pin Jig Type
Specifies the pin jig type set by the software. This is a read-only box.
Pin Jig Purpose
Specifies the purpose of the pin jig.

Marking Settings
Apply Rule
Specifies whether the display of remarking lines is based on a rule, or is user defined. If this
option is selected, all of the rules display as read-only. If this option is not selected, the rules
are editable.
This check box is only available during the creation of the pin jig.
Pin Jig Remarking Rule Set
Specifies the rule set that the software uses to get the geometry for remarking lines of each
type.
Default - Identical to Based on Physical Connection. The options is available so that legacy
models continue to work.
Based on Logical Connection - Generates the remarking surface by stitching together the
surfaces of the leaf plate systems of the supported plates. It uses the existing geometry (as-is)
of logical connections between the following objects:
 Supported plates and connected plates for plate remarking lines.
 Supported plates and connected profiles for profile remarking lines.
 Supported plates for seam remarking lines.
Based on Physical Connection - Generates the remarking surface by stitching the surfaces
of the sides of the supported plate parts that face away from the jig floor. This option uses the
physical connections between the following objects:
 Supported plates and connected plates for plate remarking lines.
 Supported plates and connected profiles for profile remarking lines.
 Supported plates for seam remarking lines.
The geometry for these remarking lines corresponds to the portion of the physical
connection geometry that lies on the remarking surface.
Based on Part Surface and Logical Connection - Generates the remarking surface by
stitching the surfaces of the sides of the supported plate parts that face away from the jig floor.
This options uses the logical connections between the following objects:
 Supported plates and connected plates for plate remarking lines.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 205

 Pin Jig

 Supported plates and connected profiles for profile remarking lines.

 Supported plates for seam remarking lines.
Seam Remarking Lines
Specifies whether seam remarking lines are applied or ignored. This value defaults to Ignore
for individual plates. For assemblies, this value defaults to Apply.
Plate Remarking Lines
Specifies whether plate remarking lines are applied or ignored. The following options are
available:
Ignore - Indicates that plate remarking lines are not applied.
Apply - Creates a remarking line at the logical connection.
Both Sides - Creates remarking lines representing the molded and anti-molded sides of the
connected plate part.
Both Sides with LC - Creates the remarking lines representing the molded and anti-molded
sides of the connected plate parts along with the logical connection remarking line.
Apply with Supported Side - Creates the remarking lines representing the connected plate
parts on the remarking side. Also creates the remarking lines representing the connected
plate jigs on the pin jig anti-marking side (supported side).
Profile Remarking Lines
Specifies whether profile remarking lines are applied or ignored.
X-Axis Remarking Lines
Specifies whether frame remarking lines are applied or ignored.
Y-Axis Remarking Lines
Specifies whether longitudinal remarking lines are applied or ignored.
Z-Axis Remarking Lines
Specifies whether buttock remarking lines are applied or ignored.
Reference Curve Remarking Line
Specifies whether naval architecture reference curves are applied or ignored.
User Remarking Lines
Specifies whether user remarking lines are applied or ignored.
User Extensions
Specifies whether user extensions are applied or ignored.

Accuracy Check Points

Apply Rule
Specifies whether the display of accuracy check points is based on a rule, or is user defined. If
this option is selected, all of the rules display as read-only. If this option is cleared, the rules
are editable.
This check box is only available during the creation of the pin jig.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 206

 Pin Jig

Pin Jig Accuracy Check Rule Set

Specifies the rule set that the software uses to get the accuracy points. You can modify or add
rule sets.
Remarking Bend Points
Specifies whether bend points are applied or ignored at remarking sharp bends.
Aft Boundary
Specifies the accuracy points on the Aft Boundary.
Lower Boundary
Specifies the accuracy points on the Lower Boundary.
Fore Boundary
Specifies the accuracy points on the Fore Boundary.
Upper Boundary
Specifies the accuracy points on the Upper Boundary.
Custom
Specifies the custom accuracy points.
Along Girth From Lower - Creates points starting from the lower boundary at a specified
distance along the girth.
Along Girth From Upper - Creates points starting from the upper boundary at a specified
distance along the girth.
Along Girth From Aft - Creates points starting from the aft boundary at a specified distance
along the girth.
Along Girth From Fore - Creates points starting from the fore boundary at a specified
distance along the girth.
At Pin Lines - Creates points at the intersection of pin rows and columns with the boundary.
At and Middle of Pin Lines - Creates points at the intersection of pin rows and columns with
the boundary. Additional points are created at the middle of these points.

Position and Orientation

Adjust Pin Bed on Move/Rotate
Indicates whether the pins should be adjusted when the pin jig is moved or rotated.
Added Pin Behavior on Move/Rotate
Defines the behavior of the added pins when you move or rotate the pin jig.
1. Stay with the supported part.
2. Stay with the jig floor. (Not currently available)
3. Reapply the X and Y offsets from the reference pin. (Not currently available)
Origin Pin - X
Defines the X-axis coordinate of the origin pin (H0, V0).
Origin Pin - Y

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 207

 Pin Jig

Defines the Y-axis coordinate of the origin pin (H0, V0).

Origin Pin - Z
Defines the Z-axis coordinate of the origin pin (H0, V0).
Horizontal Pin - X
Defines the X-axis coordinate of the horizontal pin (H0, V1).
Horizontal Pin - Y
Defines the Y-axis coordinate of the horizontal pin (H0, V1).
Horizontal Pin - Z
Defines the Z-axis coordinate of the horizontal pin (H0, V1).
Vertical Pin - X
Defines the X-axis coordinate of the vertical pin (H1, V0).
Vertical Pin - Y
Defines the Y-axis coordinate of the vertical pin (H1, V0).
Vertical Pin - Z
Defines the Z-axis coordinate of the vertical pin (H1, V0).
See Also
Pin Jig Properties Dialog Box (on page 202)

Relationships Tab
Displays all objects related to the selected object for which you are viewing properties. For
example, if you are viewing the properties of a pipe run, the related pipeline, features, parts,
associated control points, hangers or supports, and equipment display on this tab. All WBS
assignments, including project relationships, display on this tab.
Additional examples for marine relationships are as follows:
 For plate and profile system properties, the related bounded objects, bounding objects, and
connections are shown.
 For plate and profile system part properties, parent systems are shown.
 For assembly connection properties, all connected objects are shown.
 For the properties of a frame connection on a member, supported, supporting, and auxiliary
supporting parts are shown.
 For split connection properties, the parent and auxiliary supporting parts are shown.
Name
Specifies the name of the object.
Type
Specifies the type of object.
Go To
Displays the properties of the selected object.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 208

 Pin Jig

Configuration Tab
Displays the creation, modification, and status information about an object.
Plant/Ship
Displays the name of the model. You cannot change this value.
Permission Group
Specifies the permission group to which the object belongs. You can select another
permission group, if needed. Permission groups are created in Project Management.
Transfer
Reassigns ownership of the selected model objects from their current permission group to
another satellite or host permission group. This option is only available if the active model or
project is replicated in a workshare configuration. The option is not available if all of the
objects in the select set already belong to another location and are non-transferable. For more
information, see Transfer Ownership Dialog Box in the Common User's Guide.
Approval State
Specifies the status of the selected object or filter. The display depends on your access level.
You might be unable to change the status of the object. The list is defined by the
ApprovalStatus codelist.
You can only edit or manipulate an object with a status of Working.
Status
Specifies the location of the object in the workflow process. Changing this property sets the
Approval State. The list is controlled by the ApprovalReason codelist in the
[Link] file. You must bulkload this file. For more information, see
ApprovalReason in the Reference Data Guide.
Date Created
Specifies the creation date of the object.
Created by
Specifies the name of the person who created the object.
Date Last Modified
Specifies the date of the last modification to the object.
Last Modified by
Specifies the name of the person who last modified the object.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 209

 Pin Jig

Notes Tab
Creates and edits user-definable text placed by the designer on an object in the model. The notes
provide special instructions related to the object for the fabricator and are available in downstream
tasks. For example, the notes appear in two-dimensional drawings and within design review
sessions.
Only one note of a given kind from a given object can be shown on a drawing. For
example, if there are two fabrication notes on a piping part, then only one of the notes shows on
the drawing. It is important to know about and to consider this situation when defining notes on an
object in the modeling phase. For example, you can display one Fabrication note and one
Installation note by defining two separate labels for the two kinds of notes.
Key point
Specifies the key point on the object to which you want to add a note.
Notes at this location, listed by name
Lists all notes for the selected key point on the object.
Date
Displays the date that the note was created. The system automatically supplies the date.
Time
Displays the time that the note was created. The system automatically supplies the time.
Purpose of note
Specifies the purpose of the note.
Author
Displays the login name of the person who created the note. The system automatically
supplies this information. You cannot change this information.
Note text
Defines the note text. The software does not limit the length of the note text.
Show dimension
Indicates that the note generates a dimension.
If you are displaying the properties for a Support component, then a dimension can be
included for the component in the Support drawings, if you select the Show dimension
option. The note must be associated with one of the key points for the Support component. It
is recommended that you set the Purpose of note as Fabrication, but this is not a
requirement. The note Name and Note text are not used when you select this option.
New Note
Creates a new note on the object.
Standard Note
Displays a list of standard notes from which you can select. This feature is not available in this
version.
Highlight Note

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 210

 Pin Jig

Highlights the note in the graphic view so that you can easily find the note and the object to
which it is related. This feature is not available in this version.
Delete Note
Deletes the currently displayed note.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 211

SECTION 8

Manufacturing Plate
Creates a two-dimensional wireframe representation of a detailed plate that has
manufacturing data such as margins, shrinkage, marking lines, and beveling applied.
The plates that the software allows you to select are controlled by manufacturing plate rules that
can be customized by your administrator.
You can specify the unfolding algorithm for the software to use by changing the
Surface Type Requested for Unfolding property on the General tab of the Manufacturing
Plate Properties dialog box. For more information, see General Tab (Manufacturing Plate
Properties Dialog Box) (on page 214).

Manufacturing Plate Ribbon

Displays the controls used to create a manufacturing plate.

Properties
Activates the Manufacturing Plate Properties dialog box, which you use to view and modify
the properties, including process and marking properties, of the manufacturing plate that you
are about to place in the model. For more information, see Manufacturing Plate Properties
Dialog Box (on page 214).

Plate Parts
Select the detailed plate part for which you want to create the manufacturing plate. The plate
part must be a child of an assembly. You can select the part in a graphic view or in the
Workspace Explorer.
Finish
Creates the manufacturing plate using the parameters that you have defined.
Cancel
Clears all selected plates.
Accept
Accepts all selected plates.
Process List
Select a plate process set from the list. A process is a rule-based geometrical definition of a
manufacturing plate based on particular manufacturing information. For example, adding a
margin to a plate edge is a process.
Marking List
Select a marking set from the list. A marking set is a group of rule-based marking line types
that can be applied. For example, structural location marking lines, reference marking lines,
and roll lines can be grouped together and applied.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 212

 Manufacturing Plate

What do you want to do?

 Generate a manufacturing plate (on page 213)
 Copy and paste a manufacturing plate (on page 213)
 Modify a manufacturing plate (on page 214)
 Delete a manufacturing plate (on page 214)

Generate a manufacturing plate

1. Click Manufacturing Plate .

2. On the Manufacturing Plate ribbon, click Plate Parts .

3. Select the detailed plate parts for which you want to generate manufacturing plates.
You can select the parts in the model, or from the Workspace Explorer.
4. Click Accept
5. Select the process type from the Process List.
6. Select the marking set from the Marking List.

7. Click Properties , and change the default Process and Marking values if necessary.
8. Click OK.
9. Click Finish.

Copy and paste a manufacturing plate

1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the manufacturing plate to copy.

 You can select the manufacturing plate in the model, or from the Workspace Explorer.
 You can set the Locate Filter to Manufacturing Plates to make the selection easier.
3. Click Edit > Copy.
4. Click Edit > Paste.
5. Select the plate on which to paste the manufacturing plate.
You must select a non-manufactured, detailed plate for the destination.
6. Click OK on the Paste dialog box.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 213

 Manufacturing Plate

Modify a manufacturing plate

1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. On the Assembly tab of the Workspace Explorer, select the manufacturing plate to modify.
Manufacturing plates do not have a graphic representation, so you cannot select
them in the graphic view.
3. Using the ribbon controls, edit the manufacturing plate as needed.

Delete a manufacturing plate

1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. On the Assembly tab of the Workspace Explorer, select the manufacturing plate to delete.

3. Click Delete .

Manufacturing Plate Properties Dialog Box

Specifies the properties for the manufacturing plate that you are editing.
See also
General Tab (Manufacturing Plate Properties Dialog Box) (on page 214)
Process Tab (Manufacturing Plate Properties Dialog Box) (on page 219)
Marking Tab (Manufacturing Plate Properties Dialog Box) (on page 223)
Cut/Mark Tab (Manufacturing Plate Properties Dialog Box) (on page 226)
Relationships Tab (on page 84)
Configuration Tab (on page 84)
Notes Tab (on page 86)
Status Tab (on page 226)

General Tab (Manufacturing Plate Properties Dialog Box)

Standard
Name
Specifies the name of the manufacturing plate.
Name Rule
Select the naming rule to use to name the manufacturing plate.
 Select DefaultNameRule to use the following syntax: <Parent Name (excluding block
name)>-<Workshare Location ID>. For example, SH.12-1-1, where SH.12-1 is the parent
name (the block name is taken out of the parent name), and 1 is the Workshare Location
ID.
 Select User Defined to type a name in the Name box.
Frame System
Specifies the frame system associated with the manufacturing plate.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 214

 Manufacturing Plate

Surface Type Requested for Unfolding

Specifies the surface that the software uses when computing the unfolding. Available options
include the following:
Detailing Neutral Surface - This is the default option. Detailing gets the unbounded
reference surface without features, and then offsets to the required location based on the
rule-given neutral axis offset value. The software intersects the extended surface with the
plate solid to trim the surface within the boundaries. This surface considers all the aspects
such as bounding elements and bevel parameters to give the exact part length.

Detailing Part Surface - This option is implemented in Structural Detailing. The selected part
surface is retrieved before any features are applied, and then the surface is offset in the
required direction. In this option, there is no trimming involved. Bevel offset parameters are
applied, but there is a considerable difference in part lengths because it does not trim the
offset surface to lateral faces.

True Molded Surface - This option is implemented in Structural Manufacturing. It takes the
immediate parent leaf plate system of the selected plate part, and gets its surface geometry.
This geometry is then offset to the required surface. The part geometry is not used. The
molded surface is offset according to the neutral axis ratio value. Bevel offset parameters are
applied, but there is a considerable difference in part lengths because it does not trim the
offset surface to lateral faces.
Shrinkage, margins, and bevels are applied as usual. The part lengths are not as
accurate for bevels as is unfolding with the neutral surface, however, because the bevel
correction is applied to the true molded surface contours. Manufacturing Service Manager
, Marking , and Marking by Definition work as usual.
True Part Surface - This option is implemented in Structural Manufacturing. It takes the plate
part surface before any features or chamfers, and then offsets that surface in the required
direction. This option applies bevel offset parameters, but there is a considerable difference in
part lengths because it does not trim the offset surface to lateral faces.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 215

 Manufacturing Plate

Detailing Molded Surface - This option is implemented in Structural Detailing. It takes the
molded surface and intersects it with the part solid to give it the same shape as the part,
including accounting for bounding part thicknesses. It should give the same result as
Detailing Neutral Surface, except that it is computed in the molded surface instead of the
neutral surface. This option fails in cases where it cannot successfully intersect the solid part
with the molded system surface. Bevel offset parameters are applied, but there is a
considerable difference in part lengths because it does not trim the offset surface to lateral
faces.

For a plate bounded only by design or planning seams and other contours, there is no
difference; the plate subsystem and the molded part surface are the same. However, if the
part is bounded by any other plate systems or profiles, the surface accounts for the detailed
shape and thickness of these boundaries. The plate subsystem does not. It is bounded only
by the molded surfaces of its boundaries.
Imported Surface - This option is implemented in Structural Manufacturing. For this option,
Manufacturing Plate accepts a .sat file. This imported surface is used for generating
contours and specifying the curves. All the marking lines are projected onto this imported
surface, rather than the surface inherited from the part surface. Imported surface geometry is
fed to the unfolding algorithm. Bevel corrections, margins, and shrinkages are applied on the
resulting manufacturing data.
Import Bigger Reference Surface - This option is implemented in Structural Manufacturing.
For this option, Manufacturing Plate accepts a .sat file. The outer contours and markings
are projected onto a larger reference surface. Imported surface geometry is fed to the
unfolding algorithm. Bevel corrections, margins, and shrinkages are applied on the resulting
manufacturing data. This option is similar to Imported Surface without using the boundary
contours of the imported surface.
For non-planar surfaces, the software first tries to unfold the neutral surface by
default. If there is a failure getting the neutral surface and its contour data, the software uses
the molded side of the object and puts the object on the To Do List with a warning indicating
that the unfolding used the molded side for processing. This process is followed for both
planar and curved geometry.
Surface Type Used for Unfolding
Displays the surface type that was used to generate the unfolding data. This property is
read-only.
Plate Tightness
Specifies the plate tightness associated with the manufacturing plate.
Naming Category
Displays the naming category associated with the manufacturing plate.
Length
Specifies the length of the manufacturing plate.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 216

 Manufacturing Plate

Width
Specifies the width of the manufacturing plate.
Curvature Type
Displays the curvature type of the manufacturing object. The ProfileCurvature codelist defines
this list.
Plate Type
Specifies the plate type associated with the manufacturing plate.
Is Panel
Specifies whether the part is a manufacturing panel. Because this part is a plate part, the
default value is False.
Detailed Part Status
Displays the state of the parent part or parts for the manufacturing object. This property only
displays when you are modifying a part.
Up to Date - The part state is current with all of its relationships, such as connected parts.
Out of Date - The part state is not current with all of its relationships, such as connected parts.
A relationship change can cause this state. You can update the detailed part by using Tools >
Recompute Objects. For more information, see Recompute Objects in the Common User's
Guide.
In Error - The part encountered an error. A relationship change such as connected parts can
cause the error. You can clear the error by using View > To Do List. For more information,
see To Do List in the Common User's Guide.
Warning - The part encountered a warning. A relationship change such as connected parts
can cause the warning. You can clear the error by using View > To Do List. For more
information, see To Do List in the Common User's Guide.
Light Part - The part has not been detailed.
Manufacturing Object Status
Displays the status of the manufacturing object. This property only displays when you are
modifying a manufacturing object.
Up to Date - The part state is current with all of its relationships, such as connected parts.
Out of Date - The part state is not current with all of its relationships, such as detailed parts. A
relationship change can cause this state. You can update the manufacturing part by using
Manufacturing Service Manager . For more information, see Manufacturing Service
Manager (on page 319).
In To Do List - The part encountered an error or warning. A relationship change such as
connected parts can cause this state. You can clear the error by using View > To Do List. For
more information, see To Do List in the Common User's Guide.
Up to Date (Pre-nesting) - The state of a pre-nested part is current with all of its
relationships, such as connected parts.
Out of Date (Pre-nesting) - The state of a pre-nested part is not current with all of its
relationships, such as connected parts. A relationship change can cause this state.
In To Do List (Pre-nesting) - The pre-nested part encountered an error. A relationship
change can cause this state.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 217

 Manufacturing Plate

For more information on the pre-nesting service, see Pre-Nesting (on page 379).
Survivability Status
Specifies the status associated with the manufacturability object. The list is defined by the
MfgState codelist.
Generated State - All the steps and rules were successfully applied, and the manufacturing
part was generated based on the steps and rules.
Partial State - Not all steps or rules were applied successfully. The information is not
complete and you must add information to pass the manufacturability check. After the check
passes, the step moves to Modified State.
Modified State - You have provided additional information that could lead to acceptance of
the manufacturability check. The part remains in a warning state on the To Do List. You can
refresh the part so that it is regenerated. If the check is successful, it gets a new status.

Nesting
Export Date
Displays the export date of the manufacturing object.
Registration Date
Displays the registration date of the manufacturing object.
Nesting Date
Displays the nesting date of the manufacturing object.
Lot Number
Displays the lot number of the manufacturing object.
Part Registered Number
Displays the part registered number of the manufacturing object.
Order Number
Displays the order number of the manufacturing object.
Lot Material Type
Displays the lot material type of the manufacturing object.
Lot Material Grade
Displays the lot material grade of the manufacturing object.
Lot Length
Displays the lot length of the manufacturing object.
Lot Width
Displays the lot width of the manufacturing object.
Lot Thickness
Displays the lot thickness of the manufacturing object.
Part Type

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 218

 Manufacturing Plate

Specifies the part type of the manufacturing object.

Output Type
Displays the output type of the manufacturing object.
Output Status
Indicates whether or not the nesting system is up to date. This attribute is not currently used.

User Process
Displays user-defined pre-processes that the software applies to all of the selected plates.
See Also
Manufacturing Plate Properties Dialog Box (on page 214)

Process Tab (Manufacturing Plate Properties Dialog Box)

Processes are rule-based and can be customized by each manufacturing facility.
When you select multiple objects, you can change the properties that those objects
have in common. If the value of the property is the same for the objects that you have selected,
that value displays in the ribbon bar. If the values are different, the box for that value is blank.
Changing the value of a property makes that the value for all of the selected objects.
Results
Select a manufacturing plate process type from the list. This list is the same as the Process
List on the manufacturing plate ribbon.
Parameter
Displays the parameters for the process that you have selected.
Value
Specifies modifiable parameter values.
Rule-Based
If the value of the parameter is rule-based, a check box displays. Clear the check box and
then select a different parameter value if necessary.
Catalog Value
If you modified the value, the original catalog value for the process displays.

Parameters
Neutral Axis
Some facilities make the neutral axis position a function of thickness. This determines the
position based on material, thickness, and bending direction where there is no change in
length when unwrapping.
Upside
The side of the part that is facing up while it is being cut.
Unwrap Algorithm
Select the unwrap algorithm:

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 219

 Manufacturing Plate

 Developable - Useful for unwrapping knuckled plates and single curved shell plates.
Bending lines are evaluated on the curved surface.

Unwrapping is done by unbending at the bending lines. The first two bending lines define
the plane that the shell plate is unwrapped into. The unbending is then done by rotating a
part of the shell plate around a bending line. By doing this rotation around all bending
lines, the shell plate is unwrapped into a plane.
 Flat - Useful for unwrapping flat plates. There is no unfolding done with this algorithm. The
contour curves and markings are simply transformed into a plane.
 TwoDirUnfold - Minimizes the change of curve length after unwrapping the curve to a
plane. Because this approach is based on minimizing the change of curve length, it does
not handle extremely curved surfaces (for example, bending angles larger than 120
degrees) which includes most closed surfaces. For a curved part with a great degree of
curvature (such as near the nose), split the plate into several pieces before unwrapping it.
 Geodesic_Merge - Depends on n-surface merge as it uses iso-u and iso-v meshed
points to evaluate normal and derivatives to derive local geodesic. The algorithm then
uses the meshed points to derive one-to-many corresponding u-v parameters for
unwrapping curves on the surface. The quality of this method largely depends on the
accuracy of the merged surfaces and the parameterization. This method can handle
closed surfaces if n-surface can generate a good result.
This method uses an approach similar to finite element modeling, where the surface to
unfold is approximated into a regular mesh of points and normals. The objectives are to
preserve the geodesic length and minimize the deformation of the mesh. This method
produces accurate results when unfolding developable surfaces such as cylinders, cones,
or developable ruled surfaces.
 SNU - Useful for unwrapping hull plates. All of the patches comprising the hull shape,
along with the contour and marking data, is sent to a third-party unfolding algorithm
developed by Seoul National University (SNU).

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 220

 Manufacturing Plate

 SNU_Single_Surface - Similar to SNU, except that the patches are merged into a single
b-spline surface before the software sends it to the SNU algorithm.
 SNU_FourSided_10 - Adds material to all four sides to create a rectangle which provides
a 10 mm margin around the original contours.

1 - Margin dimension
2 - Newly calculated contour

 SNU_FourSided_50 - Adds material to all four sides to create a rectangle which provides
a 50 mm margin around the original contours.
 SNU_FourSided_100 - Adds material to all four sides to create a rectangle which
provides a 100 mm margin around the original contours.
 SNU_Thermal - Indicates that the shop applied heat to shape the plate using steel
contraction.
 SNU_Cold - Indicates that the shop used pressure rolling to shape the plate using steel
expansion.
 SNU_Neutral - Indicates that the shop used hydraulic presses to shape the plate using
linear bending. This method does not induce expansion or contraction.
 SNU_Thermal - Rev - Similar to SNU_Thermal, except that the spine is reversed by
calculating perpendicular to the auto-spine direction.
 SNU_Cold - Rev - Similar to SNU_Cold, except that the spine is reversed by calculating
perpendicular to the auto-spine direction.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 221

 Manufacturing Plate

 The spine direction on a surface determines how that surface unfolds. The base
position of the spine determines the its elongation size and direction.

 The spine direction depends on the shipyard fabrication practices. The facility
determines whether to use an auto-spine or a reverse spine, and applies that
direction to the algorithm. For example, if the spine is parallel to the longer side, the
curvature of the surface is ignored, and the spine is positioned parallel to the longer
side. However, this process might not be right for every shipyard.

Bevel
The facilities need to handle the bevel information depending on their capabilities. They can
have a continuous bevel, a bevel within increments, or a fixed bevel. The deviation angle
determines when a segment of a physical connection should be created to provide new bevel
information for that segment.
Roll Lines
Specifies the roll line calculation process.
User Defined Values
Shipyards can control certain values used during the unfold process of plate parts.
Weld Tab
Automatically specifies a weld tab based on the assigned custom rule. These can be partially
solved by replacing the feature by an alternative representation defined for scallops.
Feature Tab
Automatically specifies a feature tab based on the process rule.
Knuckle Tab
Automatically specifies a knuckle tab based on the process rule.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 222

 Manufacturing Plate

Margin
Specifies margin values for the manufacturing object based on the process rule.
Shrinkage
Specifies shrinkage values for the manufacturing object based on the process rule.
Marking
Specifies marking lines for the manufacturing object based on the process rule.
Cut Mark Control
Controls the behavior of cut, mark, and ignore behavior for all features, openings, and hole
traces.
Marking Validate
Controls the validation of marking lines. You can merge overlapping marking lines or connect
disjointed markings.
Plate Custom
Stores custom manufacturing plate part attributes that will be exported to the final XML.
Feature
Shipyards control the way the plate features are processed during unwrap. Some openings
must be unwrapped with the plate. The rest should be reapplied after the unwrap process is
completed.
Some facilities are using this in their analysis software to determine if they are influencing the
strength of a plate and therefore should or should not be included in the unwrap process.

Marking Tab (Manufacturing Plate Properties Dialog Box)

Manufacturing plate marking sets are rule-based and can be customized by facility.
When you select multiple objects, you can change the properties that those objects
have in common. If the value of the property is the same for the objects that you have selected,
that value displays in the ribbon bar. If the values are different, the box for that value is blank.
Changing the value of a property makes that the value for all of the selected objects.
User Answers
Select a manufacturing plate marking set from the list. This list is the same as the Marking
Set list on the manufacturing plate ribbon.
Parameter
Displays the parameters for the marking set that you have selected.
Value
You can modify the marking values if necessary.
Rule-Based
If the value of the marking set is rule-based, a check box displays. Clear the check box and
then select a different marking value if necessary.
Catalog Value

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 223

 Manufacturing Plate

If you modified the value, the original catalog value for the marking displays.
The following marking processes are considered to be included in the marking lists. This marking
list is fixed and uses the codelist proposal of Yes/No values.
The rules for marking lines, and the symbols they place, are customizable. For
example, you can customize the marking line rules to place marking lines at the left, right, or
center of the connected part.

Marking Type Comments

Plate Location System generated parameter. This parameter marks the locations of
the bounded plates.

Profile Location System generated parameter. This parameter marks the location of
stiffening profiles.

Collar Location System generated parameter. This parameter marks the location of
connected collar plates.

Bracket Location System generated parameter. This parameter marks the location of
connected bracket plates.

Lap Connection System generated parameter. This parameter marks the location of
lap connected plates.

End Connection System generated parameter. This parameter marks the locations of
end connected profiles.

Fitting Plate to Plate T Shipyards need to control the number of symbols, symbol type, and
Joint its parameters. Used for accuracy control when positioning
connected parts.

Fitting Plate to Profile Shipyards need to control the number of symbols, symbol type, and
Penetration its parameters. Used for accuracy control when positioning
connected parts.

Fitting Plate to Profile Shipyards need to control the number of symbols, symbol type, and
its parameters. Used for accuracy control when positioning
connected parts.

Reference Planes Frame System generated parameter. Displays the intersection of the plate
and X-planes within the range of the plate.

Reference Planes System generated parameter. Displays the intersection of the plate
WaterLine and Y-planes within the range of the plate.

Reference Planes Buttock System generated parameter. Displays the intersection of the plate
and Z-planes within the range of the plate.

Block Control User marking. Displays marks for accuracy control.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 224

 Manufacturing Plate

Marking Type Comments

Seam Control User marking. Displays marks for accuracy control.

Template Location Lines System generated parameter. Marks the locations of templates.

Base Control Line System generated parameter. Marks the location of template base
control lines.

Roll Lines System generated parameter. Marks the roll on a curved plate.

Knuckle Lines System generated parameter. Marks the location of a knuckle.

Naval Architect Lines System generated parameter. Marks the naval architect lines, such
as flat-of-side or flat-of-bottom.

Roll Boundaries System generated parameter. Marks the start and end of a roll on a
curved plate.

Ship Direction System generated parameter. Tick marks showing the global
orientation of the plate.

Diagonals System generated parameter. Displays the diagonals of the plate.

Robot Mark System generated parameter. Displays robot marks generated with
the User defined marking line option of the Marking command.

Painting Line System generated parameter. Displays painting lines generated with
the User defined marking line option of the Marking command.

Mark (ship name) User marking. Marks the ship name of the plate.

Plate Edge Check Lines System generated parameter. Displays marks near the plate edge for
accuracy control.

Web Frames Check Lines System generated parameter. Displays marks near the plate edge
connected to the hull for accuracy control.

Bridge This parameter is not currently used.

Feature Tab This parameter is not currently used.

Welding Tab This parameter is not currently used.

Bending Control Line System generated parameter. Displays the bending control lines
generated in the unfold process.

Margin System generated parameter. Displays the pre-margin contour. For a

negative margin, this lies outside the final plate contour and is not
marked.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 225

 Manufacturing Plate

Marking Type Comments

User Defined User marking. Displays user-defined markings.

Cut/Mark Tab (Manufacturing Plate Properties Dialog Box)

Specifies the properties for adding, cutting, or marking conditions to the manufacturing plate that
you are editing. By using the properties on this tab you can override the PlateCutMarkControl
option available for manufacturing plates, profiles, and members.
Feature Name
Specifies the names of features, openings, and holes. When you select a feature on the dialog
box, that feature highlights in the model.
Condition
Specifies the cut option for the feature when it is applied to the unfolded manufacturing part.
The available options include Cut, Mark, Ignore, or any of the Bridge options.
Set by Rule
Sets the cut condition for all selected features as specified by the rules. Select a feature row in
the first column to use this button.

Status Tab
Specifies the status of the plate parts and physical connections contained in the manufacturing
part or panel. When an object displays Out of Date for Manufacturing Object Status on the
General tab, you can look at the Status tab to see which parts or connections are responsible.

You can perform updates with Manufacturing Service Manager . For more information, see
Manufacturing Service Manager (on page 319).
Detailed Part
The plate part is detailed.
Light Part
The plate part is not detailed. No physical connections for the part are included in the
manufacturing part definition. The manufacturing part is out of date.
Up to Date
The state of the physical connection is current in its relationships to the plate parts.
Deleted
The physical connection has been deleted because of a change in the detailed part or the
deletion of the detailed part. The manufacturing part or panel is out of date.
Modified
The plate part has been modified and the manufacturing part or panel is out-of-date.
Added

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 226

 Manufacturing Panel

The object was created after creation of the manufacturing part. The manufacturing part or
panel is out of date.
Removed
The object was removed after creation of the manufacturing part. The manufacturing part or
panel is out of date.

Manufacturing Panel
Creates a two-dimensional wireframe representation for detailed plate parts combined into a
panel. Each representation contains manufacturing data such as margins, shrinkage, marking
lines, and beveling to support panel line production. The output of a manufacturing panel can be
saved to an .xml document accessible through Managed Export (on page 367) and
Manufacturing Service Manager (on page 319) .
A panel is a collection of edge-to-edge plate parts that are welded together into one plate before
other parts, such as plates, profiles, or brackets, are welded. All plate parts for the panel must be
in the same planning assembly.

A manufacturing panel is similar to a manufacturing plate. A manufacturing plate contains a single

plate, while a manufacturing panel contains a collection of welded plates. Manufacturing plates
and manufacturing panels are used at different stages of the manufacturing process and have
their own process and marking requirements.
You can specify the unfolding algorithm for the software to use by changing the
Surface Type Requested for Unfolding property on the General tab of the Manufacturing
Panel Properties dialog box. For more information, see General Tab (Manufacturing Panel
Properties Dialog Box) (on page 232).

Manufacturing Panel Ribbon

Displays the controls used to create a manufacturing panel.

Properties
Opens the Manufacturing Panel Properties dialog box to view and modify the panel
properties, which include process and marking properties. For more information, see
Manufacturing Panel Properties Dialog Box (on page 232).

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 227

 Manufacturing Panel

Select an Assembly or Block

Specifies the assembly containing the panel to manufacture. Select the assembly from the
Assembly tab of the Workspace Explorer.
Select Plate Parts
Specifies the plates to include in the manufacturing panel. Select the plates in a graphic view
or in the Workspace Explorer.
Finish
Creates the manufacturing panel using the parameters that you have defined.
Panel Plate List
Opens the Panel Plate List dialog box to review and define the plates included in the panel.
For more information, see Panel Plate List Dialog Box (on page 231). This option is not
available when you are modifying an existing panel.
Cancel
Clears all selected plates.
Accept
Accepts all selected plates for inclusion in the manufacturing panel.
Process List
Selects a panel process set from the list. A process is a rule-based geometrical definition of a
manufacturing panel based on particular manufacturing information. For example, adding a
margin to a plate edge is a process.
Marking List
Selects a marking set from the list. A marking set is a group of rule-based marking line types
that can be applied. For example, structural location marking lines, reference marking lines,
and roll lines can be grouped together and applied.

What do you want to do?

 Generate a manufacturing panel (on page 229)
 Display the plate parts in a manufacturing panel (on page 230)
 Modify a manufacturing panel (on page 231)
 Delete a manufacturing panel (on page 231)

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 228

 Manufacturing Panel

Generate a manufacturing panel

1. Click Manufacturing Panel .

The command ribbon displays.

2. Click Select an Assembly or Block , and then select an assembly from the Assembly
tab of the Workspace Explorer.
3. Select the detailed plate parts in the assembly to include in the panel.

 You can select the parts in a graphic view or from the Workspace Explorer.

 You can also click Panel Plate List , and then select the plates from the Panel Plate
List dialog box.
4. Click Accept .
5. Select the process type from the Process List.
6. Select the marking set from the Marking List.
7. If required, click Properties , change the default Process and Marking values, and then
click OK.
8. Click Finish.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 229

 Manufacturing Panel

The software creates the panel object under the assembly on the Assembly tab of the
Workspace Explorer.

Display the plate parts in a manufacturing panel

1. In the Structural Manufacturing task, click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. On the Assembly tab of the Workspace Explorer, select the manufacturing panel to modify.
Manufacturing panels do not have a graphic representation, so you cannot select
them in the graphic view.
The plate parts on the panel highlight in the graphic view and in the Workspace Explorer.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 230

 Manufacturing Panel

Modify a manufacturing panel

1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. On the Assembly tab of the Workspace Explorer, select the manufacturing panel to modify.
Manufacturing panels do not have a graphic representation, so you cannot select
them in the graphic view.
3. Using the ribbon controls, edit the manufacturing panel as required.

Delete a manufacturing panel

1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. On the Assembly tab of the Workspace Explorer, select the manufacturing panel to delete.

3. Click Delete .

Panel Plate List Dialog Box

Displays the plates in the panel. You open this dialog box by clicking Panel Plate List on the
command ribbon.
Current List
Displays the currently selected plates for the panel.

Potential List
Expands the dialog box and opens the Potential List.

Add Parts to the Current List

Moves the selected plate in the Potential List to the Current List.
Remove Parts from the Current List
Removes the selected plate from the Current List and moves it to the Potential List.

Clear All Parts from the Current List

Removes all plates from the Current List and moves them to the Potential List.
Potential List
Displays other plates in the assembly. You can add plates to the panel by moving the plates
from the Potential List to the Current List.
All plates must be edge-to-edge to form the panel.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 231

 Manufacturing Panel

Manufacturing Panel Properties Dialog Box

Specifies the properties for the manufacturing panel that you are editing.
See also
General Tab (Manufacturing Panel Properties Dialog Box) (on page 232)
Process Tab (Manufacturing Panel Properties Dialog Box) (on page 236)
Marking Tab (Manufacturing Panel Properties Dialog Box) (on page 240)
Cut/Mark Tab (Manufacturing Panel Properties Dialog Box) (on page 243)
Relationships Tab (on page 84)
Configuration Tab (on page 84)
Notes Tab (on page 86)
Status Tab (on page 226)

General Tab (Manufacturing Panel Properties Dialog Box)

Standard
Name
Specifies the name of the manufacturing panel.
Name Rule
Specifies the naming rule to use for the manufacturing panel.
 Select DefaultNameRule to use the following syntax: Panel-<Assembly
Name>-<Sequence Number>. For example, Panel-A1000001-9, where A1000001 is the
assembly name, and 9 indicates the ninth panel created in the model.
 Select User Defined to type a name in the Name box.
Frame System
Specifies the coordinate system associated with the manufacturing plate. Select Inherit from
Assembly Parent, or select an existing model coordinate system, such as CS_0. Inherit
from Assembly Parent is the default value.
Master Part
Specifies the plate part in the manufacturing panel used to trigger the process and marking
rules. The software uses the plate part geometry with the rules defined in the Process List
and Marking List boxes of the Manufacturing Panel ribbon.
Surface Type Requested for Unfolding
Specifies the surface that the software uses when computing the unfolding. Available options
include the following:

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 232

 Manufacturing Panel

Detailing Neutral Surface - This is the default option. Detailing gets the unbounded
reference surface without features, and then offsets to the required location based on the
rule-given neutral axis offset value. The software intersects the extended surface with the
plate solid to trim the surface within the boundaries. This surface considers all the aspects
such as bounding elements and bevel parameters to give the exact part length.

Detailing Part Surface - This option is implemented in Structural Detailing. The selected part
surface is retrieved before any features are applied, and then the surface is offset in the
required direction. In this option, there is no trimming involved. Bevel offset parameters are
applied, but there is a considerable difference in part lengths because it does not trim the
offset surface to lateral faces.

True Molded Surface - This option is implemented in Structural Manufacturing. It takes the
immediate parent leaf plate system of the selected plate part, and gets its surface geometry.
This geometry is then offset to the required surface. The part geometry is not used. The
molded surface is offset according to the neutral axis ratio value. Bevel offset parameters are
applied, but there is a considerable difference in part lengths because it does not trim the
offset surface to lateral faces.
Shrinkage, margins, and bevels are applied as usual. The part lengths are not as
accurate for bevels as is unfolding with the neutral surface, however, because the bevel
correction is applied to the true molded surface contours. Manufacturing Service Manager
, Marking , and Marking by Definition work as usual.
True Part Surface - This option is implemented in Structural Manufacturing. It takes the plate
part surface before any features or chamfers, and then offsets that surface in the required
direction. This option applies bevel offset parameters, but there is a considerable difference in
part lengths because it does not trim the offset surface to lateral faces.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 233

 Manufacturing Panel

Detailing Molded Surface - This option is implemented in Structural Detailing. It takes the
molded surface and intersects it with the part solid to give it the same shape as the part,
including accounting for bounding part thicknesses. It should give the same result as
Detailing Neutral Surface, except that it is computed in the molded surface instead of the
neutral surface. This option fails in cases where it cannot successfully intersect the solid part
with the molded system surface. Bevel offset parameters are applied, but there is a
considerable difference in part lengths because it does not trim the offset surface to lateral
faces.

For a plate bounded only by design or planning seams and other contours, there is no
difference; the plate subsystem and the molded part surface are the same. However, if the
part is bounded by any other plate systems or profiles, the surface accounts for the detailed
shape and thickness of these boundaries. The plate subsystem does not. It is bounded only
by the molded surfaces of its boundaries.
Imported Surface - This option is implemented in Structural Manufacturing. For this option,
Manufacturing Plate accepts a .sat file. This imported surface is used for generating
contours and specifying the curves. All the marking lines are projected onto this imported
surface, rather than the surface inherited from the part surface. Imported surface geometry is
fed to the unfolding algorithm. Bevel corrections, margins, and shrinkages are applied on the
resulting manufacturing data.
Import Bigger Reference Surface - This option is implemented in Structural Manufacturing.
For this option, Manufacturing Plate accepts a .sat file. The outer contours and markings
are projected onto a larger reference surface. Imported surface geometry is fed to the
unfolding algorithm. Bevel corrections, margins, and shrinkages are applied on the resulting
manufacturing data. This option is similar to Imported Surface without using the boundary
contours of the imported surface.
For non-planar surfaces, the software first tries to unfold the neutral surface by
default. If there is a failure getting the neutral surface and its contour data, the software uses
the molded side of the object and puts the object on the To Do List with a warning indicating
that the unfolding used the molded side for processing. This process is followed for both
planar and curved geometry.
Surface Type Used for Unfolding
Displays the surface type that was used to generate the unfolding data. This property is
read-only.
Length
Displays the length of the manufacturing panel. This property is read-only.
Width
Displays the width of the manufacturing panel. This property is read-only.
Curvature Type
Displays the curvature type of the manufacturing object. The ProfileCurvature codelist defines

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 234

 Manufacturing Panel

this list.
Plate Type
Displays the plate type associated with the plate parts in the manufacturing panel. Plate type
is inherited from the parent plate system.
Is Panel
Specifies whether the part is a manufacturing panel. Because this part is a manufacturing
panel, the default value is True. This option allows you to distinguish between manufactured
plate and manufactured panels for querying purposes.
Detailed Part Status
Displays the state of the parent part or parts for the manufacturing object. This property only
displays when you are modifying a part.
Up to Date - The part state is current with all of its relationships, such as connected parts.
Out of Date - The part state is not current with all of its relationships, such as connected parts.
A relationship change can cause this state. You can update the detailed part by using Tools >
Recompute Objects. For more information, see Recompute Objects in the Common User's
Guide.
In Error - The part encountered an error. A relationship change such as connected parts can
cause the error. You can clear the error by using View > To Do List. For more information,
see To Do List in the Common User's Guide.
Warning - The part encountered a warning. A relationship change such as connected parts
can cause the warning. You can clear the error by using View > To Do List. For more
information, see To Do List in the Common User's Guide.
Light Part - The part has not been detailed.
Manufacturing Object Status
Displays the status of the manufacturing object. This property only displays when you are
modifying a manufacturing object.
Up to Date - The part state is current with all of its relationships, such as connected parts.
Out of Date - The part state is not current with all of its relationships, such as detailed parts. A
relationship change can cause this state. You can update the manufacturing part by using
Manufacturing Service Manager . For more information, see Manufacturing Service
Manager (on page 319).
In To Do List - The part encountered an error or warning. A relationship change such as
connected parts can cause this state. You can clear the error by using View > To Do List. For
more information, see To Do List in the Common User's Guide.
Up to Date (Pre-nesting) - The state of a pre-nested part is current with all of its
relationships, such as connected parts.
Out of Date (Pre-nesting) - The state of a pre-nested part is not current with all of its
relationships, such as connected parts. A relationship change can cause this state.
In To Do List (Pre-nesting) - The pre-nested part encountered an error. A relationship
change can cause this state.
For more information on the pre-nesting service, see Pre-Nesting (on page 379).
Survivability Status

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 235

 Manufacturing Panel

Specifies the status associated with the manufacturability object. The list is defined by the
MfgState codelist.
Generated State - All the steps and rules were successfully applied, and the manufacturing
part was generated based on the steps and rules.
Partial State - Not all steps or rules were applied successfully. The information is not
complete and you must add information to pass the manufacturability check. After the check
passes, the step moves to Modified State.
Modified State - You have provided additional information that could lead to acceptance of
the manufacturability check. The part remains in a warning state on the To Do List. You can
refresh the part so that it is regenerated. If the check is successful, it gets a new status.

Process Tab (Manufacturing Panel Properties Dialog Box)

Results
Specifies a manufacturing panel process type from the list. This list is the same as the
Process List on the manufacturing panel ribbon. Clear the rule-based box to select a different
process type.
Parameter
Displays the parameters for the selected process.
Value
Specifies modifiable parameter values.
Rule-Based
Displays a check box if the value of the parameter is rule-based. Clear the check box and then
select a different parameter value if required.
Catalog Value
Displays the original catalog value for the process if you modified the value.

Parameters
A manufacturing panel uses the same process parameters as a manufacturing plate.
Neutral Axis
Some facilities make the neutral axis position a function of thickness. This determines the
position based on material, thickness, and bending direction where there is no change in
length when unwrapping.
Upside
The side of the part that is facing up while it is being cut.
Unwrap Algorithm
Select the unwrap algorithm:

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 236

 Manufacturing Panel

 Developable - Useful for unwrapping knuckled plates and single curved shell plates.
Bending lines are evaluated on the curved surface.

Unwrapping is done by unbending at the bending lines. The first two bending lines define
the plane that the shell plate is unwrapped into. The unbending is then done by rotating a
part of the shell plate around a bending line. By doing this rotation around all bending
lines, the shell plate is unwrapped into a plane.
 Flat - Useful for unwrapping flat plates. There is no unfolding done with this algorithm. The
contour curves and markings are simply transformed into a plane.
 TwoDirUnfold - Minimizes the change of curve length after unwrapping the curve to a
plane. Because this approach is based on minimizing the change of curve length, it does
not handle extremely curved surfaces (for example, bending angles larger than 120
degrees) which includes most closed surfaces. For a curved part with a great degree of
curvature (such as near the nose), split the plate into several pieces before unwrapping it.
 Geodesic_Merge - Depends on n-surface merge as it uses iso-u and iso-v meshed
points to evaluate normal and derivatives to derive local geodesic. The algorithm then
uses the meshed points to derive one-to-many corresponding u-v parameters for
unwrapping curves on the surface. The quality of this method largely depends on the
accuracy of the merged surfaces and the parameterization. This method can handle
closed surfaces if n-surface can generate a good result.
This method uses an approach similar to finite element modeling, where the surface to
unfold is approximated into a regular mesh of points and normals. The objectives are to
preserve the geodesic length and minimize the deformation of the mesh. This method
produces accurate results when unfolding developable surfaces such as cylinders, cones,
or developable ruled surfaces.
 SNU - Useful for unwrapping hull plates. All of the patches comprising the hull shape,
along with the contour and marking data, is sent to a third-party unfolding algorithm
developed by Seoul National University (SNU).

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 237

 Manufacturing Panel

 SNU_Single_Surface - Similar to SNU, except that the patches are merged into a single
b-spline surface before the software sends it to the SNU algorithm.
 SNU_FourSided_10 - Adds material to all four sides to create a rectangle which provides
a 10 mm margin around the original contours.

1 - Margin dimension
2 - Newly calculated contour

 SNU_FourSided_50 - Adds material to all four sides to create a rectangle which provides
a 50 mm margin around the original contours.
 SNU_FourSided_100 - Adds material to all four sides to create a rectangle which
provides a 100 mm margin around the original contours.
 SNU_Thermal - Indicates that the shop applied heat to shape the plate using steel
contraction.
 SNU_Cold - Indicates that the shop used pressure rolling to shape the plate using steel
expansion.
 SNU_Neutral - Indicates that the shop used hydraulic presses to shape the plate using
linear bending. This method does not induce expansion or contraction.
 SNU_Thermal - Rev - Similar to SNU_Thermal, except that the spine is reversed by
calculating perpendicular to the auto-spine direction.
 SNU_Cold - Rev - Similar to SNU_Cold, except that the spine is reversed by calculating
perpendicular to the auto-spine direction.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 238

 Manufacturing Panel

 The spine direction on a surface determines how that surface unfolds. The base
position of the spine determines the its elongation size and direction.

 The spine direction depends on the shipyard fabrication practices. The facility
determines whether to use an auto-spine or a reverse spine, and applies that
direction to the algorithm. For example, if the spine is parallel to the longer side, the
curvature of the surface is ignored, and the spine is positioned parallel to the longer
side. However, this process might not be right for every shipyard.

Bevel
The facilities need to handle the bevel information depending on their capabilities. They can
have a continuous bevel, a bevel within increments, or a fixed bevel. The deviation angle
determines when a segment of a physical connection should be created to provide new bevel
information for that segment.
Roll Lines
Specifies the roll line calculation process.
User Defined Values
Shipyards can control certain values used during the unfold process of plate parts.
Weld Tab
Automatically specifies a weld tab based on the assigned custom rule. These can be partially
solved by replacing the feature by an alternative representation defined for scallops.
Feature Tab
Automatically specifies a feature tab based on the process rule.
Knuckle Tab
Automatically specifies a knuckle tab based on the process rule.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 239

 Manufacturing Panel

Margin
Specifies margin values for the manufacturing object based on the process rule.
Shrinkage
Specifies shrinkage values for the manufacturing object based on the process rule.
Marking
Specifies marking lines for the manufacturing object based on the process rule.
Cut Mark Control
Controls the behavior of cut, mark, and ignore behavior for all features, openings, and hole
traces.
Marking Validate
Controls the validation of marking lines. You can merge overlapping marking lines or connect
disjointed markings.
Plate Custom
Stores custom manufacturing plate part attributes that will be exported to the final XML.
Feature
Shipyards control the way the plate features are processed during unwrap. Some openings
must be unwrapped with the plate. The rest should be reapplied after the unwrap process is
completed.
Some facilities are using this in their analysis software to determine if they are influencing the
strength of a plate and therefore should or should not be included in the unwrap process.

Marking Tab (Manufacturing Panel Properties Dialog Box)

Results
Specifies a manufacturing panel marking set from the list. This list is the same as the Marking
List on the manufacturing panel ribbon. Clear the rule-based check box to select a different
marking type.
Parameter
Displays the parameters for the selected marking set.
Value
Specifies modifiable marking values.
Rule-Based
Displays a check box if the value of the marking set is rule-based. Clear the check box and
then select a different marking value if necessary.
Catalog Value
Displays the original catalog value for the marking if you modified the value.

Parameters
A manufacturing panel uses the same marking parameters as a manufacturing plate.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 240

 Manufacturing Panel

Manufacturing plate marking sets are rule-based and can be customized by facility.
When you select multiple objects, you can change the properties that those objects
have in common. If the value of the property is the same for the objects that you have selected,
that value displays in the ribbon bar. If the values are different, the box for that value is blank.
Changing the value of a property makes that the value for all of the selected objects.
The following marking processes are considered to be included in the marking lists. This marking
list is fixed and uses the codelist proposal of Yes/No values.
The rules for marking lines, and the symbols they place, are customizable. For
example, you can customize the marking line rules to place marking lines at the left, right, or
center of the connected part.

Marking Type Comments

Plate Location System generated parameter. This parameter marks the locations of
the bounded plates.

Profile Location System generated parameter. This parameter marks the location of
stiffening profiles.

Collar Location System generated parameter. This parameter marks the location of
connected collar plates.

Bracket Location System generated parameter. This parameter marks the location of
connected bracket plates.

Lap Connection System generated parameter. This parameter marks the location of
lap connected plates.

End Connection System generated parameter. This parameter marks the locations of
end connected profiles.

Fitting Plate to Plate T Shipyards need to control the number of symbols, symbol type, and
Joint its parameters. Used for accuracy control when positioning
connected parts.

Fitting Plate to Profile Shipyards need to control the number of symbols, symbol type, and
Penetration its parameters. Used for accuracy control when positioning
connected parts.

Fitting Plate to Profile Shipyards need to control the number of symbols, symbol type, and
its parameters. Used for accuracy control when positioning
connected parts.

Reference Planes Frame System generated parameter. Displays the intersection of the plate
and X-planes within the range of the plate.

Reference Planes System generated parameter. Displays the intersection of the plate
WaterLine and Y-planes within the range of the plate.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 241

 Manufacturing Panel

Marking Type Comments

Reference Planes Buttock System generated parameter. Displays the intersection of the plate
and Z-planes within the range of the plate.

Block Control User marking. Displays marks for accuracy control.

Seam Control User marking. Displays marks for accuracy control.

Template Location Lines System generated parameter. Marks the locations of templates.

Base Control Line System generated parameter. Marks the location of template base
control lines.

Roll Lines System generated parameter. Marks the roll on a curved plate.

Knuckle Lines System generated parameter. Marks the location of a knuckle.

Naval Architect Lines System generated parameter. Marks the naval architect lines, such
as flat-of-side or flat-of-bottom.

Roll Boundaries System generated parameter. Marks the start and end of a roll on a
curved plate.

Ship Direction System generated parameter. Tick marks showing the global
orientation of the plate.

Diagonals System generated parameter. Displays the diagonals of the plate.

Robot Mark System generated parameter. Displays robot marks generated with
the User defined marking line option of the Marking command.

Painting Line System generated parameter. Displays painting lines generated with
the User defined marking line option of the Marking command.

Mark (ship name) User marking. Marks the ship name of the plate.

Plate Edge Check Lines System generated parameter. Displays marks near the plate edge for
accuracy control.

Web Frames Check Lines System generated parameter. Displays marks near the plate edge
connected to the hull for accuracy control.

Bridge This parameter is not currently used.

Feature Tab This parameter is not currently used.

Welding Tab This parameter is not currently used.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 242

 Manufacturing Panel

Marking Type Comments

Bending Control Line System generated parameter. Displays the bending control lines
generated in the unfold process.

Margin System generated parameter. Displays the pre-margin contour. For a

negative margin, this lies outside the final plate contour and is not
marked.

User Defined User marking. Displays user-defined markings.

Cut/Mark Tab (Manufacturing Panel Properties Dialog Box)

Specifies the properties for adding, cutting, or marking conditions to the manufacturing panel. Use
the properties on this tab to override the PlateCutMarkControl option.
Feature Name
Specifies the names of features, openings, and holes. When you select a feature on the dialog
box, that feature highlights in the model.
Condition
Specifies the cut option for the feature when it is applied to the unfolded manufacturing panel.
The available options include Cut, Mark, or Ignore.
Set by Rule
Sets the cut condition for all selected features as specified by the rules. Select a feature row in
the first column to use this option.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 243

SECTION 9

Manufacturing Profile
Creates a two-dimensional wireframe representation of a detailed profile that has
manufacturing data applied such as margins, shrinkage, marking lines, and beveling.
The profiles that the software allows you to select are controlled by manufacturing profile rules that
can be customized by your administrator.
Structural Manufacturing supports features on manufacturing profiles that split either the web or
flange into disjointed pieces such as those shown in the following figure.

You can unfold multi-face sections such as SquareBar, RoundBar, and HalfRoundBar.
Unfolding of closed cross section types can be controlled by the ProfileUnfold option. If the
ProfileUnfold option is set to Apply, round bar is unfolded like a wrap-around paper template. If
ProfileUnfold is set to Ignore, a projected view of the cross section is generated as
manufacturing output.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 244

 Manufacturing Profile

 For built-up profiles, you can generate the profile XML for the web and flange independently of
one another.
 The software automatically generates fitting marks on the web and flange of built-up profiles.

Manufacturing Profile Ribbon

Displays the controls used to create a manufacturing profile.

Properties
Activates the Manufacturing Profile Properties dialog box, which you use to view and
modify the properties, including process and marking properties, of the manufacturing profile
that you are about to place in the model. For more information, see Manufacturing Profile
Properties Dialog Box (on page 249).

Profile Part
Select the detailed profile part for which you want to create the manufacturing profile. You can
select the part in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer.
Finish
Creates the manufacturing profile using the parameters that you have defined.
Cancel
Clears all selected profiles.
Accept
Accepts all selected profiles.
Process List
Select a template process from the list. A process is a rule-based geometrical definition of a
profile based on particular manufacturing information. For example, adding a margin is a
process.
Marking List
Select a marking set from the list. A marking set is a group of rule-based marking line types
that can be applied to a manufacturing profile. For example, structural location marking lines,
reference marking lines, and roll lines can be grouped together and applied.

Weld Compensation Modify Ribbon

Properties
Activates the Weld Compensation Settings dialog box, which you use to view and modify
the settings for the selected weld compensation object. For more information, see Weld
Compensation Settings Dialog Box (on page 127).
Select Part
Select the plate part for the weld compensation.
Select Port
Select the edge of the plate for the weld compensation.
Select Start Point

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 245

 Manufacturing Profile

Select the weld compensation starting point. The software highlights the part where you can
set the point.
Select End Point
Allows you to set the weld compensation end point. The software highlights the part where
you can set the point.
Finish
Creates or modifies the weld compensation object.
Cancel
Clears the active step in the workflow, and returns to the previous step.
Accept
Accepts the current step in the workflow, and proceeds to the next step.
Sel Method
Specifies the selection method associated with the weld compensation.
Offset Type
Specifies the offset type associated with the weld compensation.
Offset Value
Specifies the distance from the reference point or object to the location in which the software
applies the weld compensation.
Weld Comp Radius
Specifies the approximate compensation shape along the selected edge of the part.

Weld Comp Offset

Specifies the offset distance for the weld.

Accept Weld Compensation to Form

Adds the current weld compensation values to the table if Form is selected.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 246

 Manufacturing Profile

Cancel Weld Compensation from Form

Deletes the highlighted weld compensation values from the table if Form is selected.
Form
Creation - Displays the weld compensation radius and weld compensation offsets defined for
the new weld compensations.
Modification - Displays the weld compensation radius and weld compensation offsets
defined for existing weld compensations on the selected edge.

What do you want to do?

 Generate a manufacturing profile (on page 247)
 Copy and paste a manufacturing profile (on page 248)
 Modify a manufacturing profile (on page 248)
 Delete a manufacturing profile (on page 248)
 Enable and set weld compensation (on page 248)

Generate a manufacturing profile

1. Click Manufacturing Profile .

2. On the Manufacturing Profile ribbon, click Profile Parts .

3. Select the detailed profile parts for which you want to generate manufacturing profiles.
You can select the parts in the model, or from the Workspace Explorer.
4. Click Accept
5. Select the process type from the Process List.
6. Select a marking set from the Marking Set.

7. Click Properties and change the default Process and Marking values if necessary.
8. Click Finish.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 247

 Manufacturing Profile

Copy and paste a manufacturing profile

1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the manufacturing profile to copy.

 You can select the manufacturing profile in the model, or from the Workspace Explorer.
 You can set the Locate Filter to Manufacturing Profile Part to make the selection
easier.
3. Click Edit > Copy.
4. Click Edit > Paste.
5. Select the profile on which to paste the manufacturing profile.
You must select a non-manufactured, detailed profile for the destination.
6. Click OK on the Paste dialog box.

Modify a manufacturing profile

1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the manufacturing profile to modify.
You can select the profile in the model, or from the Workspace Explorer.
3. Using the ribbon controls, edit the manufacturing profile as needed.

Delete a manufacturing profile

1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the manufacturing profile to delete.

3. Click Delete .

Enable and set weld compensation

This applies only to profile shape BUT. You must manufacture the web face as a plate rather than
a profile.
1. Enable weld compensation for the part.
a. Go to the Process Tab (Manufacturing Profile Properties Dialog Box) (on page 252)
of the manufacturing profile properties or the Process tab of the manufacturing built-up
member properties.
b. Set the Weld Compensation process to Apply or User-defined.
c. Click Finish.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 248

 Manufacturing Profile

Smart 3D creates a weld compensation object for the part.

2. Select the weld compensation object in the Workspace Explorer.

The Weld Compensation Modify ribbon displays.
3. Click Properties to view and edit weld compensation settings.
4. Set the first weld compensation starting point by clicking 1st Point and then clicking on a
point on the highlighted part. The default location is the midpoint.
5. Click Accept to confirm the first point.
6. Set the second weld compensation starting point by clicking 2nd Point and then clicking
on a point on the highlighted part.
7. Click Accept to confirm the second point.
8. Click Finish.
The weld compensation is applied from the starting point to the end of the part.

Manufacturing Profile Properties Dialog Box

Specifies the properties for the manufacturing profile that you are editing.
See Also
General Tab (Manufacturing Profile Properties Dialog Box) (on page 249)
Process Tab (Manufacturing Profile Properties Dialog Box) (on page 252)
Marking Tab (Manufacturing Profile Properties Dialog Box) (on page 254)
Cut/Mark Tab (Manufacturing Plate Properties Dialog Box) (on page 226)
Nesting Tab (Manufacturing Profile Properties Dialog Box) (on page 255)
Relationships Tab (on page 84)
Configuration Tab (on page 84)
Notes Tab (on page 86)

General Tab (Manufacturing Profile Properties Dialog Box)

Standard
Name
Specifies the name of the manufacturing profile.
Name Rule
Select the naming rule to use to name the manufacturing profile.
 Select DefaultNameRule to use the following syntax: <Parent Name (excluding block
name)>-<Workshare Location ID>. For example, SH.11-1-PS.1-1-1, where
SH.11-1-PS.1-1 is the parent name (the block name is taken out of the parent name), and
1 is the Workshare Location ID.
 Select User Defined to type a name in the Name box.
Frame System
Specifies the frame system associated with the manufacturing profile. This value indicates
whether the coordinate system is inherited from the parent object, or is set to a coordinate

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 249

 Manufacturing Profile

system that has frames in range of the object.

Survivability Status
Displays the survivability status of the manufacturing object.
 Generated - The system generated the manufacturing object.
 Edited - The user has edited the manufacturing object's geometry.
 Annotated - The user has edited the manufacturing object's annotations.
 PartInformation Edited - The manufacturing object's part information has been edited.
Error Sequence State
Specifies the reason for a manufacturing command failure.
Curvature Type
Displays the curvature type of the manufacturing object. The ProfileCurvature codelist defines
this list.
Profile Type
Displays the profile type of the manufacturing profile.
Is Twisted
Indicates whether the object is twisted or not twisted. The list is defined by the
StrMfgIsTwisted codelist.
Detailed Part Status
Displays the state of the parent part or parts for the manufacturing object. This property only
displays when you are modifying a part.
Up to Date - The part state is current with all of its relationships, such as connected parts.
Out of Date - The part state is not current with all of its relationships, such as connected parts.
A relationship change can cause this state. You can update the detailed part by using Tools >
Recompute Objects. For more information, see Recompute Objects in the Common User's
Guide.
In Error - The part encountered an error. A relationship change such as connected parts can
cause the error. You can clear the error by using View > To Do List. For more information,
see To Do List in the Common User's Guide.
Warning - The part encountered a warning. A relationship change such as connected parts
can cause the warning. You can clear the error by using View > To Do List. For more
information, see To Do List in the Common User's Guide.
Light Part - The part has not been detailed.
Manufacturing Object Status
Displays the status of the manufacturing object. This property only displays when you are
modifying a manufacturing object.
Up to Date - The part state is current with all of its relationships, such as connected parts.
Out of Date - The part state is not current with all of its relationships, such as detailed parts. A
relationship change can cause this state. You can update the manufacturing part by using
Manufacturing Service Manager . For more information, see Manufacturing Service
Manager (on page 319).

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 250

 Manufacturing Profile

In To Do List - The part encountered an error or warning. A relationship change such as

connected parts can cause this state. You can clear the error by using View > To Do List. For
more information, see To Do List in the Common User's Guide.
Up to Date (Pre-nesting) - The state of a pre-nested part is current with all of its
relationships, such as connected parts.
Out of Date (Pre-nesting) - The state of a pre-nested part is not current with all of its
relationships, such as connected parts. A relationship change can cause this state.
In To Do List (Pre-nesting) - The pre-nested part encountered an error. A relationship
change can cause this state.
For more information on the pre-nesting service, see Pre-Nesting (on page 379).

Dimensions
Length Structural Detail Total
Specifies the total length of the detailed object. The software measures the girth of the profile
part and the detailed part geometry.
Length Before Features Web
Specifies the web length before features for the manufacturing object. The software uses the
origin point from the manufacturing object.
Length Before Features Top Flange
Specifies the top flange length before features for the manufacturing object.
Length Before Features Bottom Flange
Specifies the bottom flange length before features for the manufacturing object.
Length Before Features Total
Specifies the total length before features for the manufacturing object.

 The Before Features values display the length that must be cut off the object stock
before it can be suitably cut at the ends. This is the length of the object before the end cuts
remove material from the profile solid. The software uses the Before Features values to
calculate the Material Take-Off (MTO) stock table.
 The lengths for each of the faces, as well as the total length, are all determined by the
end-cuts themselves which internally define length points. This is illustrated with the red
dot in the previous figure.
 The two length points that are farthest apart from each face define the Before Features
length for that face. Likewise, the two length points of the whole object that are farthest
from each other go to define the Before Features length of the whole object.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 251

 Manufacturing Profile

Length After Features Web

Specifies the web length after features for the manufacturing object.
Length After Features Top Flange
Specifies the top flange length after features for the manufacturing object.
Length After Features Bottom Flange
Specifies the bottom flange length after features for the manufacturing object.
Length After Features Total
Specifies the total length after features for the manufacturing object.

 The After Features lengths display the distance between the points of the object that
represent the extremity of material. This is computed after the end-cuts remove the
material from the stiffener solid.
 The After Features values determine the final shape of the profile part. In addition,
manufacturing and physical connection details (such as shrinkage, margins, feature cuts,
marking, bevel angles, part mounts, and so forth) affect the final shape.

User Process
Displays user-defined pre-processes that the software applies to all of the selected plates.
See Also
Manufacturing Profile Properties Dialog Box (on page 249)

Process Tab (Manufacturing Profile Properties Dialog Box)

Processes are rule-based and can be customized by each facility.
When you select multiple objects, you can change the properties that those objects
have in common. If the value of the property is the same for the objects that you have selected,
that value displays in the ribbon bar. If the values are different, the box for that value is blank.
Changing the value of a property makes that the value for all of the selected objects.
User Answers
Select a manufacturing plate process type from the list. This list is the same as the Process
List on the manufacturing profile ribbon.
Parameter
Displays the parameters for the process that you have selected.
Value

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 252

 Manufacturing Profile

You can modify the parameter values if necessary.

Rule-Based
If the value of the parameter is rule-based, a check box displays. Clear the check box and
then select a different parameter value if necessary.
Catalog Value
If you modified the value, the original catalog value for the process displays.

Process Name Comments

Upside The side of the part that is facing up while it is being cut.

Profile Neutral Axis The neutral axis is the dimension at which the profile length does not
change regardless of its curvature.

Inverse Bending Line Shipyards need to control the inverse bending line process. This process
is executed if the profile is within the specified curvature limit.

Weld Tab This is processed automatically based on custom rules. These rules can
be partially solved by replacing the feature by an alternative
representation defined for scallops.

Coaming Unwrap It is required to control coamings unwrap. This is only applicable for
profile edge reinforcements.

Clamp This is required to allow you to set a certain clamp value on a given face.

Bevel Allows you to select between different methods of setting the bevel
deviation angle. This angle determines how a varying bevel is split.

User Defined Values Shipyards can control certain values used during the unfold process of
profile parts.

Unfold Allows you to not unbend built-up profiles. The web can be cut to shape
instead of bent.

Manufacture as Plate If this process is set to apply, then separate plate XML data is generated
for the web and each flange. If it is set to ignore, then one set of profile
XML data is generated for the entire profile.

Weld Compensation Allows you to select between different methods of computing weld
compensation to account for the deformation on manufactured parts
(such as builtup profiles, web frame plate, and plates with edge
reinforcement), due to welding operations performed on them. If set, a
weld compensation object is created for the part with a generalized set of
properties that represent weld compensation information. Select the
weld compensation object to modify the properties. For more
information, see Enable and set weld compensation (on page 248).

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 253

 Manufacturing Profile

See Also
Manufacturing Profile Properties Dialog Box (on page 249)

Marking Tab (Manufacturing Profile Properties Dialog Box)

Profile marking sets are rule-based and can be customized by each facility.
When you select multiple objects, you can change the properties that those objects
have in common. If the value of the property is the same for the objects that you have selected,
that value displays in the ribbon bar. If the values are different, the box for that value is blank.
Changing the value of a property makes that the value for all of the selected objects.
User Answers
Select a manufacturing profile marking set from the list. This list is the same as the Marking
Set list on the manufacturing profile ribbon.
Parameter
Displays the parameters for the marking set that you have selected.
Value
You can modify the marking values if necessary.
Rule-Based
If the value of the marking set is rule-based, a check box displays. Clear the check box and
then select a different marking value if necessary.
Catalog Value
If you modified the value, the original catalog value for the marking displays.
The rules for marking lines, and the symbols they place, are customizable. For
example, you can customize the marking line rules to place marking lines at the left, right, or
center of the connected part.

Marking Type Comments

User Mark This is a user-defined mark.

Location Location line of the profile.

Lap Connection When profiles overlap, the lap area needs to be marked.

End Connection When other profiles are bounded to the profile, the end connection
needs to be marked.

Fitting Mark Profile Fitting marks of the profile relative to the location on the plate.

Block Control This is a user-defined mark.

Reference Planes Reference plane intersection marks in X direction.

Frame

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 254

 Manufacturing Profile

Reference Planes Reference plane intersection marks in Z direction.

WaterLine

Reference Planes Reference plane intersection marks in Y direction.

Buttock

Seam Control Seam control mark, when the profile is split.

Roll Boundaries Roll boundary mark in case of a curved profile.

Ship Direction The profile orientation relative to the ship.

Margin Marking of the margin if applied.

Inverse Bending Line Inverse bending lines which become straight after bending.

Knuckle Lines Knuckle location mark.

Profile Hole This marking type is not currently used.

Built-up PC Generates a line on the flange or web showing the location of the
connected web or flange of a built-up profile.

See Also
Manufacturing Profile Properties Dialog Box (on page 249)

Nesting Tab (Manufacturing Profile Properties Dialog Box)

Displays the nesting properties of the object. This tab is only available when you create a
MfgNestData object by sending the part to nesting and receiving feedback from the nesting
system.
Export Date
Displays the export date of the manufacturing object.
Registration Date
Displays the registration date of the manufacturing object.
Nesting Date
Displays the nesting date of the manufacturing object.
Lot Number
Displays the lot number of the manufacturing object.
Part Registered Number
Displays the part registered number of the manufacturing object.
Order Number
Displays the order number of the manufacturing object.
Lot Material Type

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 255

 Manufacturing Profile

Displays the lot material type of the manufacturing object.

Lot Material Grade
Displays the lot material grade of the manufacturing object.
Lot Length
Displays the lot length of the manufacturing object.
Lot Width
Displays the lot width of the manufacturing object.
Lot Thickness
Displays the lot thickness of the manufacturing object.
Part Type
Specifies the part type of the manufacturing object.
Output Type
Displays the output type of the manufacturing object.
Output Status
Indicates whether or not the nesting system is up to date. This attribute is not currently used.
Assembly Path
Displays the assembly path of the located object. The assembly path automatically updates
when the part is exported and moved to a new location.
Part GUID
Displays the part lookup service for the nesting system. Creating the nested data object sets
this value, and it should not be changed.
Nesting System
Displays the nesting system.
Routing
Displays production routing information.
Deletion Timestamp
Displays when the object is deleted.
Reference 1–Custom Attribute
Displays a user-defined value.
Reference 2–Custom Attribute
Displays a user-defined value.
Reference 3–Custom Attribute
Displays a user-defined value.
Number of Confirmed Parts
Displays the number of confirmed common parts in the nesting system.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 256

 Manufacturing Profile

Number of Nested Parts

Displays the number of common parts that are nested on a lot.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 257

SECTION 10

Manufacturing Member
Creates a two-dimensional wireframe representation of a detailed member that has
manufacturing data such as margins, shrinkage, marking lines, and beveling applied.
The members that the software allows you to select are controlled by the
CMfgProfile_MemberFilter rule. This rule also controls the members that are selected for
manufacturing when you select an assembly. This rule is delivered in the [Product Folder]
StructManufacturing\Data\Rules\MfgPlate\Filter\[Link]. The project is
compiled into [Link] and delivered in the Symbols share in the
[Reference Data Product Folder]\bin\StructManufacturing folder. The rules are also bulkloaded
into the Catalog.
Structural Manufacturing supports features on manufacturing members profiles that split either
the web or flange into disjointed pieces such as those shown in the following figure.

 For built-up members, you can generate the profile XML for the web and flange independently
of one another.
 The software automatically generates fitting marks on the web and flange of built-up
members.

Manufacturing Member Ribbon

Displays the controls used to create a manufacturing member.

Properties
Activates the Manufacturing Member Properties dialog box, which you use to view and
modify the properties, including process and marking properties, of the manufacturing
member that you are about to place in the model. For more information, see Manufacturing
Member Properties Dialog Box (on page 263).

Member Part
Select the detailed member part for which you want to create the manufacturing member. You
can select the part in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer.
Finish
Creates the manufacturing member using the parameters that you have defined.
Cancel
Clears the current selection.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 258

 Manufacturing Member

Accept
Accepts the current selection.
Process List
Select a template process from the list. A process is a rule-based geometrical definition of a
member based on particular manufacturing information. For example, adding a margin is a
process.
Marking List
Select a marking set from the list. A marking set is a group of rule-based marking line types
that can be applied to a manufacturing member. For example, structural location marking
lines, reference marking lines, and roll lines can be grouped together and applied.

Weld Compensation Modify Ribbon

Properties
Activates the Weld Compensation Settings dialog box, which you use to view and modify
the settings for the selected weld compensation object. For more information, see Weld
Compensation Settings Dialog Box (on page 127).
Select Part
Select the plate part for the weld compensation.
Select Port
Select the edge of the plate for the weld compensation.
Select Start Point
Select the weld compensation starting point. The software highlights the part where you can
set the point.
Select End Point
Allows you to set the weld compensation end point. The software highlights the part where
you can set the point.
Finish
Creates or modifies the weld compensation object.
Cancel
Clears the active step in the workflow, and returns to the previous step.
Accept
Accepts the current step in the workflow, and proceeds to the next step.
Sel Method
Specifies the selection method associated with the weld compensation.
Offset Type
Specifies the offset type associated with the weld compensation.
Offset Value
Specifies the distance from the reference point or object to the location in which the software

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 259

 Manufacturing Member

applies the weld compensation.

Weld Comp Radius
Specifies the approximate compensation shape along the selected edge of the part.

Weld Comp Offset

Specifies the offset distance for the weld.

Accept Weld Compensation to Form

Adds the current weld compensation values to the table if Form is selected.
Cancel Weld Compensation from Form
Deletes the highlighted weld compensation values from the table if Form is selected.
Form
Creation - Displays the weld compensation radius and weld compensation offsets defined for
the new weld compensations.
Modification - Displays the weld compensation radius and weld compensation offsets
defined for existing weld compensations on the selected edge.

What do you want to do?

 Generate a manufacturing member (on page 261)
 Copy and paste a manufacturing member (on page 261)

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 260

 Manufacturing Member

 Modify a manufacturing member (on page 262)

 Delete a manufacturing member (on page 262)
 Enable and set weld compensation (on page 248)

Generate a manufacturing member

1. Click Manufacturing Member .

2. On the Manufacturing Member ribbon, click Select Member Parts .

3. Select the detailed member parts for which you want to generate manufacturing members.
You can select the parts in the model, or from the Workspace Explorer.
4. Click Accept
5. Select the process type from the Process List.
6. Select a marking set from the Marking Set.

7. Click Properties and change the default Process and Marking values if necessary.
8. Click Finish.

Copy and paste a manufacturing member

1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the manufacturing member to copy.

 You can select the manufacturing member in the model, or from the Workspace
Explorer.
 You can set the Locate Filter to Manufacturing Member Part to make the selection
easier.
3. Click Edit > Copy.
4. Click Edit > Paste.
5. Select the detailed member part on which to paste the manufacturing member.
You must select a non-manufactured, member for the destination.
6. Click OK on the Paste dialog box.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 261

 Manufacturing Member

Modify a manufacturing member

1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the manufacturing member to modify.
You can select the member in the model, or from the Workspace Explorer.
3. Using the ribbon controls, edit the manufacturing member as needed.

Delete a manufacturing member

1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the manufacturing member to delete.

3. Click Delete .

Enable and set weld compensation

This applies only to profile shape BUT. You must manufacture the web face as a plate rather than
a profile.
1. Enable weld compensation for the part.
a. Go to the Process Tab (Manufacturing Profile Properties Dialog Box) (on page 252)
of the manufacturing profile properties or the Process tab of the manufacturing built-up
member properties.
b. Set the Weld Compensation process to Apply or User-defined.
c. Click Finish.

Smart 3D creates a weld compensation object for the part.

2. Select the weld compensation object in the Workspace Explorer.

The Weld Compensation Modify ribbon displays.

3. Click Properties to view and edit weld compensation settings.

4. Set the first weld compensation starting point by clicking 1st Point and then clicking on a
point on the highlighted part. The default location is the midpoint.
5. Click Accept to confirm the first point.
6. Set the second weld compensation starting point by clicking 2nd Point and then clicking
on a point on the highlighted part.
7. Click Accept to confirm the second point.
8. Click Finish.
The weld compensation is applied from the starting point to the end of the part.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 262

 Manufacturing Member

Manufacturing Member Properties Dialog Box

Specifies the properties for the manufacturing member that you are editing.
See Also
General Tab (Manufacturing Member Properties Dialog Box) (on page 263)
Process Tab (Manufacturing Member Properties Dialog Box) (on page 267)
Marking Tab (Manufacturing Member Properties Dialog Box) (on page 268)
Cut/Mark Tab (Manufacturing Plate Properties Dialog Box) (on page 226)
Relationships Tab (on page 84)
Configuration Tab (on page 84)
Notes Tab (on page 86)

General Tab (Manufacturing Member Properties Dialog Box)

Standard
Name
Specifies the name of the manufacturing member.
Name Rule
Select the naming rule to use to name the manufacturing member. Select User Defined to
type a name in the Name box.
Frame System
Specifies the frame system associated with the manufacturing member. This value indicates
whether the coordinate system is inherited from the parent object or is set to a coordinate
system that has frames in range of the object.
Curvature Type
Displays the curvature type of the manufacturing object. The ProfileCurvature codelist defines
this list.
Is Twisted
Indicates whether the object is twisted or not twisted. The list is defined by the
StrMfgIsTwisted codelist.
Detailed Part Status
Displays the state of the parent part or parts for the manufacturing object. This property only
displays when you are modifying a part.
Up to Date - The part state is current with all of its relationships, such as connected parts.
Out of Date - The part state is not current with all of its relationships, such as connected parts.
A relationship change can cause this state. You can update the detailed part by using Tools >
Recompute Objects. For more information, see Recompute Objects in the Common User's
Guide.
In Error - The part encountered an error. A relationship change such as connected parts can
cause the error. You can clear the error by using View > To Do List. For more information,
see To Do List in the Common User's Guide.
Warning - The part encountered a warning. A relationship change such as connected parts

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 263

 Manufacturing Member

can cause the warning. You can clear the error by using View > To Do List. For more
information, see To Do List in the Common User's Guide.
Light Part - The part has not been detailed.
Manufacturing Object Status
Displays the status of the manufacturing object. This property only displays when you are
modifying a manufacturing object.
Up to Date - The part state is current with all of its relationships, such as connected parts.
Out of Date - The part state is not current with all of its relationships, such as detailed parts. A
relationship change can cause this state. You can update the manufacturing part by using
Manufacturing Service Manager . For more information, see Manufacturing Service
Manager (on page 319).
In To Do List - The part encountered an error or warning. A relationship change such as
connected parts can cause this state. You can clear the error by using View > To Do List. For
more information, see To Do List in the Common User's Guide.
Up to Date (Pre-nesting) - The state of a pre-nested part is current with all of its
relationships, such as connected parts.
Out of Date (Pre-nesting) - The state of a pre-nested part is not current with all of its
relationships, such as connected parts. A relationship change can cause this state.
In To Do List (Pre-nesting) - The pre-nested part encountered an error. A relationship
change can cause this state.
For more information on the pre-nesting service, see Pre-Nesting (on page 379).

Dimensions
Length Structural Detail Web
Specifies an approximate length of the detailed web for the detailed manufacturing object.
Length Structural Detail Top Flange
Specifies an approximate length of the top flange for the detailed manufacturing object.
Length Structural Detail Bottom Flange
Specifies an approximate length of the bottom flange for the detailed manufacturing object.
Length Structural Detail Total
Specifies the total length of the detailed manufacturing object.
While there are four different lengths that display on the property page, only
Length Structural Detail Total displays the detailing length.
Length Unfolded Web
Specifies the web length of the unfolded manufacturing object.
Length Unfolded Top Flange
Specifies the top flange length of the unfolded manufacturing object.
Length Unfolded Bottom Flange
Specifies the bottom flange length of the unfolded manufacturing object.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 264

 Manufacturing Member

Length Unfolded Total

Specifies the total length of the unfolded manufacturing object.
The unfolded length values are the lengths of the extended objects after they are
unfolded but before any features are applied. This length has almost no meaning to the
designer because the extended length could be arbitrarily long. If the unfolded length is
shorter than Length Structural Detail Total, the unfolding process may have been
unsuccessful. Because the object is extended as a whole, the summation of the unfolded
lengths for the individual faces equal the total unfolded length. Because most stiffeners do not
have a bottom flange, the bottom flange unfolded length is typically zero. The same holds for
stiffeners that do not have a top flange.
Length Before Features Web
Specifies the web length before features for the manufacturing object.
Length Before Features Top Flange
Specifies the top flange length before features for the manufacturing object.
Length Before Features Bottom Flange
Specifies the bottom flange length before features for the manufacturing object.
Length Before Features Total
Specifies the total length before features for the manufacturing object.

 The Before Features values display the length that must be cut off the object stock
before it can be suitably cut at the ends. This is the length of the object before the end cuts
remove material from the profile solid. The software uses the Before Features values to
calculate the Material Take-Off (MTO) stock table.
 The lengths for each of the faces, as well as the total length, are all determined by the
end-cuts themselves which internally define length points. This is illustrated with the red
dot in the previous figure.
 The two length points that are farthest apart from each face define the Before Features
length for that face. Likewise, the two length points of the whole object that are farthest
from each other go to define the Before Features length of the whole object.
Length After Features Web
Specifies the web length after features for the manufacturing object.
Length After Features Top Flange
Specifies the top flange length after features for the manufacturing object.
Length After Features Bottom Flange

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 265

 Manufacturing Member

Specifies the bottom flange length after features for the manufacturing object.
Length After Features Total
Specifies the total length after features for the manufacturing object.

 The After Features lengths display the distance between the points of the object that
represent the extremity of material. This is computed after the end-cuts remove the
material from the stiffener solid.
 The After Features values determine the final shape of the profile part. In addition,
manufacturing and physical connection details (such as shrinkage, margins, feature cuts,
marking, bevel angles, part mounts, and so forth) affect the final shape.

Nesting
Export Date
Displays the export date of the manufacturing object.
Registration Date
Displays the registration date of the manufacturing object.
Nesting Date
Displays the nesting date of the manufacturing object.
Lot Number
Displays the lot number of the manufacturing object.
Part Registered Number
Displays the part registered number of the manufacturing object.
Order Number
Displays the order number of the manufacturing object.
Lot Material Type
Displays the lot material type of the manufacturing object.
Lot Material Grade
Displays the lot material grade of the manufacturing object.
Lot Length
Displays the lot length of the manufacturing object.
Lot Width

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 266

 Manufacturing Member

Displays the lot width of the manufacturing object.

Lot Thickness
Displays the lot thickness of the manufacturing object.
Part Type
Specifies the part type of the manufacturing object.
Output Type
Displays the output type of the manufacturing object.
Output Status
Indicates whether or not the nesting system is up to date. This attribute is not currently used.
See Also
Manufacturing Member Properties Dialog Box (on page 263)

Process Tab (Manufacturing Member Properties Dialog Box)

Processes are rule-based and can be customized by each facility.
When you select multiple objects, you can change the properties that those objects
have in common. If the value of the property is the same for the objects that you have selected,
that value displays in the ribbon bar. If the values are different, the box for that value is blank.
Changing the value of a property makes that the value for all of the selected objects.
User Answers
Select a manufacturing member process type from the list. This list is the same as the
Process List on the manufacturing member ribbon.
Parameter
Displays the parameters for the process that you have selected.
Value
You can modify the parameter values if necessary.
Rule-Based
If the value of the parameter is rule-based, a check box displays. Clear the check box and
then select a different parameter value if necessary.
Catalog Value
If you modified the value, the original catalog value for the process displays.

Process Name Comments

Upside The side of the part that is facing up while it is being cut.

Neutral Axis The neutral axis is the dimension at which the member length does not
change regardless of its curvature.

Inverse Bending Line Shipyards need to control the inverse bending line process. This process
(IBL) is executed if the member is within the specified curvature limit.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 267

 Manufacturing Member

Weld Tab This is processed automatically based on custom rules. These rules can
be partially solved by replacing the feature by an alternative
representation defined for scallops.

Coaming Unwrap It is required to control coamings unwrap. This is only applicable for
member edge reinforcements.

Clamp This is required to allow you to set a certain clamp value on a given face.

Bevel Allows you to select between different methods of setting the bevel
deviation angle. This angle determines how a varying bevel is split.

User Defined Values Shipyards can control certain values used during the unfold process of
member parts.

Unfold Allows you to not unbend built-up profiles. The web can be cut to shape
instead of bent.

Manufacture as Plate If this process is set to apply, then separate plate XML data is generated
for the web and each flange. If it is set to ignore, then one set of profile
XML data is generated for the entire profile.

Weld Compensation Allows you to select between different methods of computing weld
compensation to account for the deformation on manufactured parts
(such as builtup profiles, web frame plate, and plates with edge
reinforcement), due to welding operations performed on them. If set, a
weld compensation object is created for the part with a generalized set of
properties that represent weld compensation information. Select the
weld compensation object to modify the properties. For more
information, see Enable and set weld compensation (on page 248).

See Also
Manufacturing Member Properties Dialog Box (on page 263)

Marking Tab (Manufacturing Member Properties Dialog Box)

Member marking sets are rule-based and can be customized by each facility.
When you select multiple objects, you can change the properties that those objects
have in common. If the value of the property is the same for the objects that you have selected,
that value displays in the ribbon bar. If the values are different, the box for that value is blank.
Changing the value of a property makes that the value for all of the selected objects.
User Answers
Select a manufacturing member marking set from the list. This list is the same as the Marking
Set list on the manufacturing member ribbon.
Parameter
Displays the parameters for the marking set that you have selected.
Value

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 268

 Manufacturing Member

You can modify the marking values if necessary.

Rule-Based
If the value of the marking set is rule-based, a check box displays. Clear the check box and
then select a different marking value if necessary.
Catalog Value
If you modified the value, the original catalog value for the marking displays.
The rules for marking lines, and the symbols they place, are customizable. For
example, you can customize the marking line rules to place marking lines at the left, right, or
center of the connected part.

Marking Type Comments

User Mark This is a user-defined mark.

Location Location line of the profile.

Lap Connection When profiles overlap, the lap area needs to be marked.

End Connection When other profiles are bounded to the profile, the end connection
needs to be marked.

Fitting Mark Profile Fitting marks of the profile relative to the location on the plate.

Block Control This is a user-defined mark.

Reference Planes Reference plane intersection marks in X direction.

Frame

Reference Planes Reference plane intersection marks in Z direction.

WaterLine

Reference Planes Reference plane intersection marks in Y direction.

Buttock

Seam Control Seam control mark, when the profile is split.

Roll Boundaries Roll boundary mark in case of a curved profile.

Ship Direction The profile orientation relative to the ship.

Margin Marking of the margin if applied.

Inverse Bending Line Inverse bending lines which become straight after bending.

Knuckle Lines Knuckle location mark.

Profile Hole This marking type is not currently used.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 269

 Manufacturing Member

Built-up PC Generates a line on the flange or web showing the location of the
connected web or flange of a built-up profile.

See Also
Manufacturing Member Properties Dialog Box (on page 263)

Weld Compensation Settings Dialog Box

Specifies the properties for the weld compensation object that you are editing.
See Also
General Tab (Weld Compensation Properties Dialog Box) (on page 128)
Configuration Tab (on page 84)
Notes Tab (on page 86)

General Tab (Weld Compensation Properties Dialog Box)

Name
Displays the name of the selected object. If the name is too long to entirely display in the box,
hover the cursor over the box to display the complete name as a tool tip. If the name is not
defined by a rule, User Defined displays. If this name is generated by a naming rule,
Naming Rule displays. If you type a name in this box, Smart 3D automatically changes the
naming rule to User Defined.
Name Rule
Displays the available name rules for the selected object. Specify the naming rule to use to
name the object. You can select one of the listed rules, or you can select User Defined to
specify a custom name in the (Name) box.
Weld Compensation Radius
Specifies the approximate compensation shape along the selected edge of the part.

Weld Compensation Offset

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 270

 Manufacturing Member

Specifies the offset distance for the weld.

Direction
Specifies the direction in which Smart 3D applies the weld.
Creation Type
Specifies how the weld compensation was generated. This property is only available during
modification of an existing weld compensation.
Manufacturing Object Status
Specifies the status of the manufacturing object associated with the weld compensation. This
property is only available during modification of an existing weld compensation.
Detailed Part Status
Specifies the status of the detailed part associated with the weld compensation. This property
is only available during modification of an existing weld compensation.

Configuration Tab
Displays the creation, modification, and status information about an object.
Plant/Ship
Displays the name of the model. You cannot change this value.
Permission Group
Specifies the permission group to which the object belongs. You can select another
permission group, if needed. Permission groups are created in Project Management.
Transfer
Reassigns ownership of the selected model objects from their current permission group to
another satellite or host permission group. This option is only available if the active model or
project is replicated in a workshare configuration. The option is not available if all of the
objects in the select set already belong to another location and are non-transferable. For more
information, see Transfer Ownership Dialog Box in the Common User's Guide.
Approval State
Specifies the status of the selected object or filter. The display depends on your access level.
You might be unable to change the status of the object. The list is defined by the
ApprovalStatus codelist.
You can only edit or manipulate an object with a status of Working.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 271

 Manufacturing Member

Status
Specifies the location of the object in the workflow process. Changing this property sets the
Approval State. The list is controlled by the ApprovalReason codelist in the
[Link] file. You must bulkload this file. For more information, see
ApprovalReason in the Reference Data Guide.
Date Created
Specifies the creation date of the object.
Created by
Specifies the name of the person who created the object.
Date Last Modified
Specifies the date of the last modification to the object.
Last Modified by
Specifies the name of the person who last modified the object.

Notes Tab
Creates and edits user-definable text placed by the designer on an object in the model. The notes
provide special instructions related to the object for the fabricator and are available in downstream
tasks. For example, the notes appear in two-dimensional drawings and within design review
sessions.
Only one note of a given kind from a given object can be shown on a drawing. For
example, if there are two fabrication notes on a piping part, then only one of the notes shows on
the drawing. It is important to know about and to consider this situation when defining notes on an
object in the modeling phase. For example, you can display one Fabrication note and one
Installation note by defining two separate labels for the two kinds of notes.
Key point
Specifies the key point on the object to which you want to add a note.
Notes at this location, listed by name
Lists all notes for the selected key point on the object.
Date
Displays the date that the note was created. The system automatically supplies the date.
Time
Displays the time that the note was created. The system automatically supplies the time.
Purpose of note
Specifies the purpose of the note.
Author
Displays the login name of the person who created the note. The system automatically
supplies this information. You cannot change this information.
Note text
Defines the note text. The software does not limit the length of the note text.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 272

 Manufacturing Member

Show dimension
Indicates that the note generates a dimension.
If you are displaying the properties for a Support component, then a dimension can be
included for the component in the Support drawings, if you select the Show dimension
option. The note must be associated with one of the key points for the Support component. It
is recommended that you set the Purpose of note as Fabrication, but this is not a
requirement. The note Name and Note text are not used when you select this option.
New Note
Creates a new note on the object.
Standard Note
Displays a list of standard notes from which you can select. This feature is not available in this
version.
Highlight Note
Highlights the note in the graphic view so that you can easily find the note and the object to
which it is related. This feature is not available in this version.
Delete Note
Deletes the currently displayed note.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 273

SECTION 11

Part Viewers and Editors

The part viewing and editing commands review and edit parts.

Part Monitor
Generates and displays XML data for the manufacturing part so that the data can be reviewed
before it is output to the nesting or other manufacturing software. The XML can be displayed
graphically or as text.

You can monitor the following manufacturing parts that have an XML definition attached to them:
 Plate manufacturing parts
 Profile (stiffener) manufacturing parts

 Most markings are automatically applied to the detailed parts by rules. These rules, and the
symbols they place, are customizable. For example, you can customize the marking line rules
to place marking lines at the left, right, or center of the connected part.
 Marking lines that overlap frame lines are automatically removed from the XML file and part
monitor display. The tolerance for the overlap distance is controlled by rules.
 For built-up profiles, the web and flange display on the same sheet in the Part Monitor.
 If an object has custom properties, they are included in the generated XML. For example:
<SMS_CUSTOM_PROPERTIES INTERFACE_NAME="IJUAAssemblyChild">
<SMS_CUSTOM_PROPERTY NAME="Build Method" VALUE="5" UNITS_TYPE="long"
PRIMARY_UNITS="undefined" CODELIST="BuildMethodData"
CODELIST_VALUE="VerticalDrop"/>
<SMS_CUSTOM_PROPERTY NAME="Slot Connectivity" VALUE="4" UNITS_TYPE="long"
PRIMARY_UNITS="undefined" CODELIST="SlotConnectivityData"
CODELIST_VALUE="Double"/>
</SMS_CUSTOM_PROPERTIES>
 Custom XML is created for the following:
 The part the XML represents
 The detailed part

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 274

 Part Viewers and Editors

 Connected detailed objects

 Holes
 Bevels
 Margins.
 Depending on the type of bevel used in your design, the software changes the bevel symbol
used in the Part Monitor.
The Part Monitor command does not create new objects. It only displays the XML representation
of manufacturing objects created by other commands within the Structural Manufacturing task.

Bit Output Options

The following bit output options are available:
 XML Purpose
0 - Basic Output
1 - NC data is added to the XML
2 - Profile sketch
4 - Split curves add an array of points for curve data with higher precision and accuracy
controls. The following figure shows a close-up view:

8 - No shrinkage
16 - Support only
32 - Show XML report
64 - Output built-ups as SMS_BUILTUP
 Annotation Control
0 - Show nothing
1 - Show annotation only
2 - Show symbols only
4 - Show symbols as specified in Symbol Control (Long3)
 Symbol Control
1 - Bevel
2 - Grind
4 - Knuckle
8 - Part direction

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 275

 Part Viewers and Editors

16 - Shrinkage
32 - Feature symbol
64 - Margin
128 - Dimensions
256 - Labels
The following example shows output using Plates & Profiles COMBINED and Plates &
Profiles Symbols Only.

Symbol Controls and Annotation Controls have visual differences. Symbols load the
traditional style of symbols for bevels and other manufacturing attributes. Annotations draw
everything as groups of 2D objects that then create an annotation entity as defined by the
SMS_ANNOTATIONS.xml and the AnnotationSymbols rule.
The following example shows a bevel symbol:

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 276

 Part Viewers and Editors

The following example shows a bevel annotation:

The following example shows the same profile part with the option set to Plates & Profiles
Annotation:

 Viewer Option
1 - Part Monitor
2 - Part Editor
3 - Annotation Editor
8 - Output Command

Viewing Dimensions
 With Symbol Control set to 128 and Annotation Control set to 3 dimensions display in the
drawing.
 With Annotation Control set to 2, regardless of what the Symbol Control value is set to,
dimensions display in the drawing.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 277

 Part Viewers and Editors

Viewing Dimensions Example

The following example displays a profile output with dimensions.
Symbol output:

Part monitor view:

Manufacturing Plate Display in the Part Monitor

The orientation of manufacturing plates is determined by the software. The logic determines the
relationship between the PlateUpside (Molded or AntiMolded) property and the Orientation rule.
The software makes the following determinations to display the manufacturing plate:
1. The plane (XY, XZ, or YZ) to which the part belongs.
This is the plane in which the part mostly exists. It forms the base plane for the orientation.
 XY (looking down) - Parts on the bottom of the shell and on the deck belong to this
plane.
 XZ (looking port) - Parts on the two sides of the shell and on the longitudinal bulkheads
belong to this plane.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 278

 Part Viewers and Editors

 YZ (looking forward) - Parts on the forward or after sides of the shell and on the
transverse bulkheads belong to this plane.
2. The orientation in the Part Monitor.
 If the part belongs to the XY plane:

This example shows a deck part with a molded side bottom and an anti-molded side up.
The manufacturing output is oriented so that fore displays on the right side.

Molded side up Anti-Molded side up

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 279

 Part Viewers and Editors

 If the part is in the XZ plane:

The manufacturing output is oriented so that fore displays on the right side.

Molded side up Anti-molded size up

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 280

 Part Viewers and Editors

 The part is in the YZ plane:

The manufacturing output is oriented so that up displays on the top.

Molded side up Anti-molded side up

Part Monitor Ribbon

Displays the controls used to display manufacturing parts.

Select MFG Plate

Selects a manufacturing part whose XML data you want to display. You can select the part in
a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer.

Open XML File

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 281

 Part Viewers and Editors

Displays the Open dialog box so that you can select an external XML text file to open.
Accept
Opens the specified viewer for the selected parts.
Reject
Clears the select set.
Viewer
Specifies the viewer to use for the selected parts.
Template
Selects the template that you want to use as a background. Templates are the background
files for the Part Monitor. Most of them contain text boxes where various commonly-used
information is loaded into the 2D view. Some of the template files are empty so that many
parts can be loaded, such as the template files used with the various Check Drawing modes.
 Check Drawings - Reviews a selection of plates within the drawing. This option lets you
review the output data as a group rather than individually. The output created by this
option is similar to a nesting package. This is not actual nesting software, so the output is
not optimized for actual production. When you select Check Drawings as the template,
the software automatically selects the [Link] template file.

 Empty - Uses a blank template. This is the default option.

 EmptyDefaultXML - The default template for displaying plates, profiles, or member
objects. You can change the documents, but the internal settings must remain.
 [Link] - Displays output similar to the following figure:

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 282

 Part Viewers and Editors

 [Link] - Displays output similar to the following figure:

 MfgTemplateSet - The default drawing template document for displaying template

objects. You can change this document, but the internal settings must remain.
 PanelDrawings - Uses a panel template.
 PanelEmpty - Uses an empty panel template.
Output Format
Selects the output format rule to use. This affects the filter that is applied as well as many
other settings from the data build loaded to the catalog. For example, selecting the Plates &
Profiles, Split Curves format applies a preprocessing step to the XML output that generates
a list of coordinates for curved data and edges. The Part Monitor then uses these
coordinates to create a spline curve which gives a much cleaner final product.
 Plates and Profiles COMBINED and Plates & Profiles, Symbols - Uses the traditional
symbol engine.

 Plates and Profiles with Annotation - Uses a user-defined rule-driven annotation

engine. Each annotation is a group of lines, arcs, circles, and text boxes with a set of
attributes that comprise the annotation entity.

 Plates and Profiles as Plates - Uses rules to show manufacturing as plates.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 283

 Part Viewers and Editors

 Member SMS_Profiles - Sets the selector rule for picking members. You can only select
members.

 Plates & Profiles, Split curves - Supports high quality splines. This option is useful if you
must provide output for high-precision cutting robots. The curve is represented by a large
number of coordinate vertex points to which a spline can be fitted. The plate part shows a
large number of points along the curve.
The following image shows the part as it is loaded using either the Plates & Profiles
COMBINED or Plates & Profiles, Symbols options.

The following image shows the part as it is loaded using the Plates & Profiles, Split
Curves option.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 284

 Part Viewers and Editors

The individual coordinates along the curve can be seen in the following image.

Parts loaded using the Plates & Profiles, Split Curves option take longer to
process because of the extra data that must be processed for drawing in the 2D view.
 Check Drawings SMS_Profiles - Reviews many parts at once in a format that is similar
to a nesting package. This is not nesting software, so the output is not optimized for
production. When you select CheckDrawings SMS_Profiles, the Template box
automatically changes to the [Link] template file.
You can locate only profile and member objects when you use this mode.
 Check Drawings SMS_PLATES - Reviews many parts at once in a format that is similar
to a nesting package. This is not nesting software, so the output is not optimized for
production. When you select the CheckDrawings SMS_PLATES option, the Template
box automatically changes to the [Link] template file.
You can locate only plate objects when you use this mode.

 Plates & Profiles with Customization - Creates a plate or profile XML document. This
document includes annotations. It is adjusted from the default output using customizable

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 285

 Part Viewers and Editors

rules as specified in the catalog table. Common output customization includes the
assembly path for plates and cross section information for profiles.
 Panels SMS_Plate - Reviews panel objects and displays a report with part information.

 Panels - Drawing - Reviews the panel object and the related parts that make up the
panel.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 286

 Part Viewers and Editors

 Templates SMS_TEMPLATES - Reviews template sets. The Template box

automatically changes to the [Link] template file.

 Templates SMS_Plates - Default drawing template document, used to view template

objects based on the export format. You can change this document, but the internal
settings must remain.
 Templates with Annotation - Reviews template sets. The drawing is created with
annotations. For larger numbers of template sets, or template sets with very large
numbers of templates, this option can also generate large numbers of annotation entities.
This can impact load-time performance. The Template box automatically changes to the
[Link] template file.

 Templates Check Drawings - Reviews many templates or template sets at once in a

format that is similar to a nesting package. This is not nesting software, so the output is
not optimized for production. When you pick the Check Drawings Templates option, the
Template box automatically changes to the [Link] template file.

What do you want to do?

 Display manufacturing plate XML text (on page 288)
 Display manufacturing plate graphically (on page 289)
 Display manufacturing profiles XML text (on page 290)
 Display manufacturing profiles graphically (on page 290)
 Display manufacturing template XML text (on page 290)
 Display manufacturing template graphically (on page 291)

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 287

 Part Viewers and Editors

Display manufacturing plate XML text

1. Click Part Monitor .
2. Select Text from the Viewer list.
3. Select a format, such as Plates SMS_PLATES, from the Output Format list.
4. Select the manufactured detailed plates to display from the workspace.

 You can select the parts before starting the command.

 You can select the parts in the model, or click Open XML File to open an external
XML file.
5. Click View or Accept .

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 288

 Part Viewers and Editors

Display manufacturing plate graphically

1. Click Part Monitor .
2. Select Drawing from the Viewer list.
3. Select a format, such as Plates SMS_PLATES, from the Output Format list.
4. Select the manufactured detailed plates to display from the workspace.

 You can select the parts before starting the command.

 You can select the parts in the model, or click Open XML File to open an external
XML file.
5. Click View or Accept .
6. In the Part Monitor view, select a geometry element of the manufacturing part.
7. In the Attribute Viewer, view the attributes and values of the geometry element.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 289

 Part Viewers and Editors

Display manufacturing profiles XML text

1. Click Part Monitor .
2. Select Text from the Viewer list.
3. Select a format, such as Profiles SMS_PROFILES, from the Output Format list.
4. Select the manufactured detailed profiles to display from the workspace.

 You can select the parts before starting the command.

 You can select the parts in the model, or click Open XML File to open an external
XML file.
5. Click View or Accept .

Display manufacturing profiles graphically

1. Click Part Monitor .
2. Select Drawing from the Viewer list.
3. Select a format, such as Profiles SMS_PROFILES, from the Output Format list.
4. Select the manufactured detailed profiles to display from the workspace.

 You can select the parts before starting the command.

 You can select the parts in the model, or click Open XML File to open an external
XML file.
5. Click View or Accept .

Display manufacturing template XML text

1. Click Part Monitor .
2. Select Text from the Viewer list.
3. Select a format, such as Profiles SMS_TEMPLATES, from the Output Format list.
4. Select the part (plate, profile, or member) which has the template to display from the
workspace.

 You can select the parts before starting the command.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 290

 Part Viewers and Editors

 You can select the parts in the model, or click Open XML File to open an external
XML file.
5. Click View or Accept .

Display manufacturing template graphically

1. Click Part Monitor .
2. Select Drawing from the Viewer list.
3. Select a format, such as Profiles SMS_TEMPLATES, from the Output Format list.
4. Select a template, such as [Link], from the Template list.
5. Select the part (plate, profile, or member) which has the template to display from the
workspace.

 You can select the parts before starting the command.

 You can select the parts in the model, or click Open XML File to open an external
XML file.
6. Click View or Accept .

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 291

 Part Viewers and Editors

Part Monitor Dialog Box

Displays the manufacturing part that you have selected. You can use the standard SmartSketch
commands to navigate the file, but you cannot make changes to the file.

File Menu
Open
Opens an existing XML file.
Save As
Saves the drawing as an XML file.
Discard Changes and Exit
Returns to the 3D view.

Drawing Ribbon Bar

Open File
Opens an existing XML file. If you open multiple XML files, those files display on individual
tabs in the Part Monitor.
Close
Returns to the 3D view.
Attribute Viewer
Displays marking attributes such as contours and markings.
Show Styles Toolbox
Defines layers for the display of contours, markings, annotations, and references.
View Original XML
Displays the XML in text format.

Part Information text block

This area, located at the top of the Part Monitor graphical window, contains information about the
properties of the part. You can customize these properties. Most of these properties are
self-explanatory, but the following block requires some description:
Survivability
Displays the state of the part.
 Generated - All the steps and rules were successfully applied, and the manufacturing part
was generated.
 Annotated - The annotations on the manufactured part have been edited by the
Annotation Editor.
 Edited - The manufactured part has been edited using the Part Editor. The contours,
markings, attributes, or annotation on these objects may have been changed.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 292

 Part Viewers and Editors

Attribute Editor tabs

General tab
Displays the general attributes of the part.
Geometry tab
Displays the information about the selected contour or marking.
Process tab
Displays the process settings values for the part.
Marking tab
Displays the marking settings values for the part.
See Also
Part Monitor (on page 274)

Annotation Editor
Adjusts annotation objects and saves those changes back to the manufacturing plate, profile,
or member part. Use this command to adjust annotations when the plate geometry is correct but
you need to change the annotations. This command lets you move, rotate, and scale annotations
to avoid overlap, delete unnecessary annotations, and add annotations for clarity during
production. You can edit and regenerate annotations by changing annotation attributes and
annotation drawing geometry inputs. Annotations can also be deleted.

Bulk Editing
You can place multiple annotations at once if the selected objects are all of the same type with the
same attribute sets. Annotations can also be bulk scaled or bulk rotated, allowing for faster and
more efficient workflows.

Basic XML Structure

The root node of the configuration file is <SMS_OUTPUT_ANNOTATION>. At the highest level,
the configuration file is divided into categories for each type of annotation output.
<OUTPUT_ANNOTATION> contains the settings for the text arguments and geometry arguments
used to construct the annotation object.
Each annotation type XML node looks similar to the following figure:

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 293

 Part Viewers and Editors

(VB6)

(.NET)|

Delivered Annotation Types

You can create new annotations of any type. The following list describes the annotation types
delivered with the software.

Annotation Example Annotation Example

Type Type

Arrow Bevel-Parallel

Arrow-Prefix Car Deck

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 294

 Part Viewers and Editors

Bevel Change

Knuckle Line

Bevel-Normal Centerline

Collar Plate Info Lap

Connection-
Plate

Conn Part Lap

Info-Both Sides Connection-
Profile

Conn Part Lap Trace

Info-One Side

Corrugate Margin-Fixed
Reference

Corrugate Mount Angle

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 295

 Part Viewers and Editors

End Outfitting
Fitting-Bracket

End Fitting-End Plate Id

End Fitting-Start Plate

Id-Inverted

Entity Name Profile-Id

Flange Direction Punching

Grinder Rend-Circular

Grinder-End Rend-Linear

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 296

 Part Viewers and Editors

Grinder-Start Roll Boundary

Handle Roll Line

Inverse Bending Rope

Interval

Seam Template Half

Control-Diamond Pipe

Seam Control- Template

Displacement Knuckle

Seam Control-X Template

Profile HRB

Ship Direction Template

Profile RB

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 297

 Part Viewers and Editors

Ship Direction Template

-Inverted Rend

Sightline Template
Seam

Special Tack Weld

Annotation

Annotation Editor Ribbon

Displays options for selecting parts to edit the annotations.

Select MFG Plate

Select the part for which to edit the annotation. You can only select parts compatible with the
selection in the Output Format box.

Open XML File

Opens the Annotation Editor from an XML file that you select.
Accept
Accepts the selected objects and opens the Annotation Editor environment.
Cancel
Cancels the object selection.
Output Format
Specifies the selection filter. Select the option that matches what you want to view. The
options available in this list depend upon the selection rules in the catalog. The selection in
this box limits the parts that you can select.

Annotation Editor Environment

Displays options for editing annotations.
Close
Cancels any changes, exits the Annotation Editor, and returns to the 3D environment.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 298

 Part Viewers and Editors

Accept
Saves the annotation changes to the database. This command does not write any changes to
geometry to the database. Only the annotation objects are persisted.

Annotation
Displays the Annotation ribbon. For more information, see Annotation Ribbon (on page 314).

Attribute Editor
Displays the Part Editor Object Attribute Manager dialog box. If you have selected a 2D
object, then the dialog box displays the attributes of that object. If you have not selected a 2D
object, the dialog box displays general part attributes. If you have selected more than one 2D
object, the dialog box does not display. For more information, see Part Editor Object Attribute
Manager Dialog Box (on page 315).

Layers and Styles

Displays the Style dialog box. For more information, see Style Dialog Box (on page 318).
Display XML
Displays the original XML file for the part. If the output format is set to annotation, then the
annotation XML objects are included.
Changes to the part are not visible in the XML file viewer for that part until the
changes are persisted to the database and the part is reloaded.

Annotation Control
You can control the size of the selected annotation by using the <PART_EDITOR_CONTROL> in
the SMS_Annotation.xml file.

Decrease Size
Reduces the size of the annotation. The available sizes are controlled through the
SMS_ANNOTATION.xml file.

Increase Size
Enlarges the size of the annotation. The available sizes are controlled through the
SMS_ANNOTATION.xml file.
Select Size
Select a size for the annotation from the list. The available sizes are controlled through the
SMS_ANNOTATION.xml file. The values depend on the type of object that you have selected
to edit. For example, if you have selected a plate part, the list contains those values specified
for plates.

Rotate

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 299

 Part Viewers and Editors

Rotates the selected annotation. The software prompts you to select a rotation axis point, a
rotation starting point, and a rotation end point. The rotation end point is not needed if you
select a value in the Select Rotation Angle box.
Select Rotation Angle
Select a rotation angle for the annotation. The available angles are controlled through the
SMS_ANNOTATION.xml file. If you select a value in this box, the software uses that angle to
compute the rotation end point.

Type
Select the annotation type to place. The list contains the annotation types included in the
SMS_ANNOTATION.xml file using the attribute name <TYPE> and <DISPLAY_NAME>.

What do you want to do?

 Create an annotation (on page 300)
 Save annotation changes to the database (on page 301)
 Edit the annotation for a part (on page 301)
 Increase the size of annotation (on page 301)
 Decrease the size of annotation (on page 302)
 Rotate annotation (on page 302)

Create an annotation
1. Click Annotation Editor .
The Annotation Editor Ribbon displays.
2. To place a geometry specific annotation, select the 2D geometry objects. For example, select
a marking line or contour. To place a generic annotation such as plate identification, do not
select any 2D geometry.
You can select multiple 2D geometry objects to place multiple annotations. The 2D
geometry objects should be of the same type and should have very similar attributes.
Attributes that are not the same are not correctly inherited by the annotation.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 300

 Part Viewers and Editors

3. Select the annotation type to place from the Type box.

The Place Annotation dialog box displays.
4. Set up the attribute values to meet your needs.
The annotation attributes are inherited from the currently selected 2D object. You
must edit the values manually before placement. If the attribute values are different, they do
not display at placement.
5. Click OK.
The software creates the annotations on the selected objects.

Save annotation changes to the database

1. Click Accept.

Edit the annotation for a part

1. Click Annotation Editor .
The Annotation Editor Ribbon displays.
2. Select the part type for which to edit the annotation from the Output Format list.
3. Select the part for which to edit the annotation.
4. Click Accept .
The Annotation Editor Environment displays.
5. Use the options available in the Annotation Editor Environment to edit the annotation.
6. Click Accept to save your changes.

Increase the size of annotation

1. Click Annotation Editor .
The Annotation Editor Ribbon displays.
2. Select the part type for which to edit the annotation from the Output Format list.
3. Select the part for which to edit the annotation.
4. Click Accept .
The Annotation Editor Environment displays.
5. Select the annotations to make larger.
You can select multiple annotations and increase the font size for all of them at the
same time.

6. Click Increase Size , or select a larger size from the Select Size list.
7. Click Accept to save your changes.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 301

 Part Viewers and Editors

Decrease the size of annotation

1. Click Annotation Editor .
The Annotation Editor Ribbon displays.
2. Select the part type for which to edit the annotation from the Output Format list.
3. Select the part for which to edit the annotation.
4. Click Accept .
The Annotation Editor Environment displays.
5. Select the annotations to make smaller.
You can select multiple annotations and decrease the font size for all of them at the
same time.
6. Click Decrease Size , or select a smaller size from the Select Size list.
7. Click Accept to save your changes.

Rotate annotation
1. Click Annotation Editor .
The Annotation Editor Ribbon displays.
2. Select the part type for which to edit the annotation from the Output Format list.
3. Select the part for which to edit the annotation.
4. Click Accept .
The Annotation Editor Environment displays.
5. Select the annotations to rotate.
You can select multiple annotations and rotate them at the same time by using the
Set Text Rotation option.

6. Click Rotate .
If you have selected a value in the Select Rotation Angle box, the software rotates the
annotation. Otherwise, the software prompts you for a point of axis for the rotation. Continue
on with steps a-c.
a. Click the point in the graphic view to use as the point of axis for the rotation.
The software prompts you for a starting point.
b. Click the point in the graphic view to use as the starting point for the rotation.
The software prompts you for an ending point.
c. Click the point in the graphic view to use as the ending point for the rotation.
The software rotates the annotation.
7. Click Accept to save your changes.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 302

 Part Viewers and Editors

Place Annotation Dialog Box

Displays options for editing annotations.
Attribute
Displays the name of the attribute.
Value
Displays the value associated with the attribute. Values that are read-only display in a gray
box. Read-only attributes are controlled by the SMS_ANNOTATION.xml file.

 The properties defined in the SMS_PROPERTIES.xml file are reused in the

SMS_VIEWER.xml file. Because of this, changes in the SMS_PROPERTIES.xml file must be
made with caution as they can have other consequences in the software. For more
information, see Customizing the Part Editor in the Structural Manufacturing Reference Data
Guide.
 You can place annotations on multiple contour primitives with a single placement action. The
selected geometries must have the same attributes, other than their GUID, or the attributes
are not inherited by the annotations.

Part Editor
Edits manufactured parts. You can add markings, contours, and annotations to manufactured
parts, and then save those changes to the database.

Part Editor Ribbon

Displays the controls used to edit manufacturing parts.

Select Part
Select the part to edit. The value in the Output Format box controls the parts that you can
select.

Open
Opens a file.
Cancel
Clears the selection.
Accept
Accepts the selection, and starts the Part Editor.
Output Format
Select the type of manufacturing part to select in the model. This option sets the filter. You can
select only objects in the model that match this type.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 303

 Part Viewers and Editors

What do you want to do?

 Open the Part Editor environment (on page 304)
 Validate an edited part (on page 306)
 Save a modified part to the database (on page 306)
 Change the thickness direction of a marking (on page 306)
 Change the flange direction of a marking (on page 306)
 Change the marking side of a marking (on page 306)
 Trim markings (on page 307)
 Split markings (on page 307)
 Offset a marking (on page 307)
 Extend a marking (on page 307)
 Trim a contour (on page 308)
 Close the corners of a contour (on page 308)
 Split a contour (on page 308)
 Extend a contour (on page 308)
 Zoom in on the features of a contour (on page 308)
 Change the size of an annotation (on page 309)
 Rotate an annotation (on page 309)
 Rotate multiple annotations (on page 309)
 Change the attributes of a part (on page 309)
 Specify which layers display in the Part Editor (on page 310)

Open the Part Editor environment

1. Click Part Editor on the Part Monitor fly-out toolbar.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 304

 Part Viewers and Editors

If Part Editor does not display on the fly-out toolbar, it must first be activated.
To activate it, run the executable file [Product
Folder]\StructManufacturing\Client\bin\[Link], and select
Activate Part Editor.

After you restart Smart 3D, or switch to another task and then back to the Structural
Manufacturing task, the Part Editor is available.
For more information, see Structural Manufacturing Error Log Enable (on page 387).
2. Select the manufactured part, and click Accept .
The Part Editor opens in 2D.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 305

 Part Viewers and Editors

Save a modified part to the database

1. Click Persist to Database.

Validate an edited part

1. Click Validation to display the Validation ribbon.
2. Select the type of validation to run from the Validation Type list.
3. Click Accept.

Change the thickness direction of a marking

1. Click Markings to display the Markings ribbon.
2. Select the markings to change.
3. Click Toggle Thickness Direction. You may have to click the command more than once
to get to the thickness direction that you need.
The software toggles among the available thickness directions.

Change the flange direction of a marking

1. Click Markings to display the Markings ribbon.
2. Select the markings to change.
3. Click Toggle Flange Direction. You may have to click the command more than once to
get to the direction that you need.
The software toggles among the available flange directions.

Change the marking side of a marking

1. Click Markings to display the Markings ribbon.
2. Select the markings to change.
3. Click Toggle Marking Side.
The software changes the marking to the other marking side, updating the layers and line
style.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 306

 Part Viewers and Editors

Trim markings
1. Click Markings to display the Markings ribbon.
2. Select the marking to trim.

3. Click Trim Marking Line.

The software trims the selected elements to the nearest intersection.

Split markings
1. Click Markings to display the Markings ribbon.
2. Select the marking to split.
3. Click Split Marking.
4. Select the objects by which to split the markings.
The software splits the selected markings at the intersections to the selected objects.

Offset a marking
1. Click Markings to display the Markings ribbon.

2. Click Offset Object.

3. Select the objects to offset. You can select individual objects that are not closed or groups of
objects that are endpoint connected and not closed.
A temporary object displays in red to show you the position of the copy.
4. If necessary, change the value in the Offset box or click Toggle Offset Direction to
move the temporary copy to the other side of the original objects.
5. Click Accept.
The software copies the objects to the new location.

Extend a marking
1. Click Markings to display the Markings ribbon.

2. Click Extend Marking.

3. Select the object to extend near the end from which you want the extension to start.
The software extends the selected object to the nearest intersection.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 307

 Part Viewers and Editors

Trim a contour
1. Click Contours to display the Contours ribbon.
2. Select the contour to trim.

3. Click Trim Contour.

The software trims the selected elements to the nearest intersection.

Close the corners of a contour

1. Click Contours to display the Contours ribbon.
2. Click Close Corner Contour .
3. Select one of the objects to use to close the contour near the end that you want to extend.
4. Select the other object that to use to close the contour near the end that you want to extend.
The software extends the selected elements to their intersection.

Split a contour
1. Click Contours to display the Contours ribbon.
2. Select the contour to split.
3. Click Split Contour.
4. Select the objects by which to split the contour.
The software splits the selected contour at the intersections to the selected objects.

Extend a contour
1. Click Contours to display the Contours ribbon.

2. Click Extend Contour.

3. Select an open object to extend near the end from which you want the extension to start.
The software extends the selected object to the nearest intersection.

Zoom in on the features of a contour

1. Click Contours to display the Contours ribbon.
2. Select the contour containing the features to examine.

3. Click Feature Zoom.

The software zooms in to the first feature on the selected contour.
4. Click Feature Zoom again to display the next feature on the contour.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 308

 Part Viewers and Editors

Change the size of an annotation

1. Click Annotation to display the Annotation ribbon.
2. Select the annotation to change.
3. Click v Decrease Size to reduce the size of the annotation, ^ Increase Size to enlarge the
size of the annotation, or select a size from the Select Size list.
The software changes the size of the annotation.

Rotate an annotation
1. Click Annotation to display the Annotation ribbon.
2. Select the annotation to rotate.

3. Click Rotate.
If you have selected a value in the Select Rotation Angle box, the software rotates the
annotation. Otherwise, the software prompts you for a point of axis for the rotation. Continue
on with steps a-c.
a. Click the point in the graphic view to use as the point of axis for the rotation.
The software prompts you for a starting point.
b. Click the point in the graphic view to use as the starting point for the rotation.
The software prompts you for an ending point.
c. Click the point in the graphic view to use as the ending point for the rotation.
The software rotates the annotation.

Rotate multiple annotations

1. Click Annotation to display the Annotation ribbon.
2. Select the annotations to rotate.
3. Select a rotation angle from the Set Text Rotation list.

Change the attributes of a part

1. Click Attribute Editor to display the Part Editor Object Attribute Manager dialog box.
2. Select an object to view its attributes.
3. Edit the attributes to meet your requirements.
4. Click Apply.
Any changes that you have made to a contour, marking object, or to a general part
attribute object are canceled if you click on a new object before you apply the changes.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 309

 Part Viewers and Editors

Specify which layers display in the Part Editor

1. Click Layers and Style to display the Style dialog box.
2. Select the check boxes next to the layers to display.

Part Editor Environment

Displays the 2D editing controls as well as the Part Editor controls. The Part Editor lets you
manually edit the manufacturing data for a plate, profile, or member parts by adjusting the contour,
deleting contour segments and redrawing them, deleting all of the contours and drawing all new
contours, or creating custom cutout features.
Validation
Displays the Validation ribbon. For more information, see Validation Ribbon (on page 311).

Close
Cancels any changes, exits the Part Editor, and returns to the 3D environment.
Persist to Database
Saves the modified part to the database.
Markings
Displays the Markings ribbon. For more information, see Markings Ribbon (on page 311).

Contours
Displays the Contours ribbon. For more information, see Contours Ribbon (on page 313).

Annotation
Displays the Annotation ribbon. For more information, see Annotation Ribbon (on page 314)

Attribute Editor
Displays the Part Editor Object Attribute Manager dialog box. If you have selected a 2D
object, then the dialog box displays the attributes of that object. If you have not selected a 2D
object, the dialog box displays general part attributes. If you have selected more than one 2D
object, the dialog box does not display. For more information, see Part Editor Object Attribute
Manager Dialog Box (on page 315).

Layers and Styles

Displays the Style dialog box. For more information, see Style Dialog Box (on page 318).
Display XML
Displays the original XML file for the part. If the output format is set to annotation, the
annotation XML objects are included.
Changes to the part are not visible in the XML file viewer for that part until the
changes are persisted to the database and the part is reloaded.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 310

 Part Viewers and Editors

Validation Ribbon
Displays settings for running validation of edited manufacturing parts.

Settings
Displays the Validation Settings dialog box which displays the persistence validation
settings. These settings indicate what types of validation are enabled and what level of error
halts persistence for each type of validation. These settings are automatically loaded from the
configuration file. You cannot modify these settings.
Validation Type
Select the type of validation to run. The list includes the options enabled in the Part Editor
configuration file.
Accept
Accepts the settings and runs the validation. Errors or warnings display on the Part
Validation dialog box. If the entire text is not visible in a cell, hovering the mouse over that cell
displays a tooltip with the complete text. Click Rerun Validation on the Part Validation dialog
box to rerun the previous validation type on the part after you make changes.

Markings Ribbon
Displays controls for adding marking to the manufacturing part. This ribbon displays by default
when you open the Part Editor. Using these controls, you can adjust marking lines, delete
marking lines and redraw them, or delete all the marking sand draw all new markings.
Use caution when you use this tool. Persistence must pass a validation phase to ensure
consistence such as closed contour segments and attributes that match expected values such as
bevel and grind data that total up to the same value as the part thickness.
Validation errors are reported so that you can correct them. If there are only warnings, then
persistence does not stop.
- Toggle Thickness Direction
Changes the thickness direction attributes for all selected marking line objects. The
MEASURE_DIR attribute toggles between L, R, and C. The THICKNESS_DIR attribute toggles
between the appropriate directions. For example, if the THICKNESS_DIR is fore, then the
software toggles that attribute between fore, aft, and centered. The software also toggles the
orientation of any thickness direction symbols associated with the selected objects.
Click Toggle Thickness Direction to toggle any selected marking objects. This command
remains active until you click the button again or click another command. While this command
is active, any marking line that you select has its attributes toggled.
Toggle Flange Direction
Changes the flange direction attributes for all selected marking line objects. The
FLANGE_DIR_2D attribute toggles between L and R. The FLANGE_DIR attribute toggles
between the appropriate directions. For example, the software can toggle the FLANGE_DIR
attribute between fore and aft. The software also toggles the thickness direction symbols
associated with the selected objects.
Click Toggle Flange Direction to toggle any selected marking objects. This command

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 311

 Part Viewers and Editors

remains active until you click the button again or click another command. While this command
is active, any marking line that you select has its attributes toggled.
Toggle Marking Side
Changes the MARKED_SIDE attribute for all selected marking line objects from marking to
anti_marking, or the reverse. The software moves objects to the correct layer. For example,
objects that were on the marking layer before this command are moved to the anti-marking
layer. The software updates the line style for the changed objects. All objects that are moved
to marking display in a solid line style. Objects moved to anti-marking display in a dashed
line style.
Click Toggle Marking Side to toggle any selected marking objects. This command remains
active until you click the button again or click another command. While this command is
active, any marking line that you select has its attributes toggled.

Trim Marking Line

Trims open and closed elements to the closest intersection in both directions. To trim one
element at a time, click each element that you want to trim. To trim more than one element at
the same time, drag the pointer over the element segments that you want trimmed. When you
release the mouse button, all the elements that are touched by the mouse path are trimmed.
Split Marking
Splits the selected marking object.
You must select at least one object to be split before starting this command.
After you start this command, the software prompts you to select objects to do the splitting.
You can select an individual object, or drag the pointer over multiple objects. The attributes on
the original objects that you split are inherited by all of the new child objects. It is not possible
to split an object by itself.

Offset Object
Creates a copy of a selected line or group of objects at a given distance from the original
object along a line normal to the line connecting the endpoints of the object. You can offset
individual objects that are not closed, or groups of objects that are endpoint connected and
not closed. A temporary copy of the object displays in red so that you can verify your settings.
The temporary copy is not written to the design until you click Accept. This command
displays the following options:
Accept
Accepts the settings and creates the offset object.
Close
Cancels any changes, exits the command.
Toggle Offset Direction
Changes the direction of the offset from one side of the original object to the other.
Offset
Specifies the distance that the new object is offset from the original object.
If you click a new object before finalizing the offset, then the original offset is canceled and
a new temporary offset is created for the new object.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 312

 Part Viewers and Editors

When you finalize the offset, the software creates the new object with a default marking
line attribute set regardless of the type of the original object.
If the original object is a line and its end points are either connected to outer contours or in
close proximity to outer contours, then the new offset object is trimmed to the contours
after offset.

Extend Marking
Extends open objects to the nearest intersection point starting from the nearest end of the
object that you select. If there are no objects within the extension path of the object, then the
extend command does not work for that object. To extend one element at a time, click the
element that you want to extend nearest to the end point that you want extended.
Change to Contour
Displays the Contours ribbon.

Contours Ribbon
Displays options for editing contours.

Trim Contour
Trims open and closed elements to the closest intersection in both directions. To trim one
element at a time, click each element that you want to trim. To trim more than one element at
the same time, drag the pointer over the element segments that you want trimmed. When you
release the mouse button, all the elements that are touched by the mouse path are trimmed.
Close Corner Contour
Connects the end points of two objects. The new intersection point is the mid-point between
the two end points before the command is started. It is not possible to close more than one
corner contour at a time.
Split Contour
Splits the selected contour object.
You must select at least one object to be split before starting this command.
After you start this command, the software prompts you to select objects to do the splitting.
You can select an individual object, or drag the pointer over multiple objects. The attributes on
the original objects that you split are inherited by all of the new child objects. It is not possible
to split an object by itself.

Extend Contour
Extends open objects to the nearest intersection point starting from the nearest end of the
object that you select. If there are no objects within the extension path of the object, then the
extend command does not work for that object. To extend one element at a time, click the
element that you want to extend nearest to the end point you want extended.

Change to Marking
Deletes the attributes from all selected contour objects, and adds a default set of marking
attributes to those objects. This command gives a default set of marking attributes to all of the
selected objects that lack attributes and that are not located on the text or symbol layers. This
command deletes any contour symbols associated with the selected objects. Every object

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 313

 Part Viewers and Editors

changed to a marking object is placed on the marking layer. The displayed ribbon switches
from the Contours ribbon to the Markings ribbon.

Feature Zoom
Automatically zooms to each feature on the part. Click the command again to automatically
zoom to the next feature on the part if there is more than one feature. If the part has many
features, then clicking the command sequentially and automatically zooms to each of the
features. When all the features have been displayed, the command returns to the first feature
and continues.

Annotation Ribbon
Displays controls for adding and editing annotation objects.

Decrease Size
Reduces the size of the annotation. The available sizes are controlled through the
SMS_ANNOTATION.xml file.

Increase Size
Enlarges the size of the annotation. The available sizes are controlled through the
SMS_ANNOTATION.xml file.
Select Size
Select a size for the annotation from the list. The available sizes are controlled through the
SMS_ANNOTATION.xml file. The values depend on the type of object that you have selected
to edit. For example, if you have selected a plate part, the list contains those values specified
for plates.

Rotate
Rotates the selected annotation. The software prompts you to select a rotation axis point, a
rotation starting point, and a rotation end point. The rotation end point is not needed if you
select a value in the Select Rotation Angle box.
Select Rotation Angle
Select a rotation angle for the annotation. The available angles are controlled through the
SMS_ANNOTATION.xml file. If you select a value in this box, the software uses that angle to
compute the rotation end point.

Type

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 314

 Part Viewers and Editors

Select the annotation type to place. The list contains the annotation types included in the
SMS_ANNOTATION.xml file using the attribute name <TYPE> and <DISPLAY_NAME>.

Make Annotation
Displays the Part Editor Object Attribute Manager dialog box which creates custom
annotation for the selected object. For more information, see Part Editor Object Attribute
Manager Dialog Box (on page 315). The custom annotation attributes such as text and
geometry are controlled by the SMS_ANNOTATION.xml file. Making an annotation adds the
following:
 Annotation attribute set to the selected group.
 Annotation_Text attribute set to all text inside the group. For each text inside the group,
a CustomText_<number> is added as an attribute.
 Annotation_Edge attribute set to all edges inside the group.

Part Editor Object Attribute Manager Dialog Box

Displays options to control general part attributes. If no object is selected, the dialog box displays
general part attributes. If a 2D object is selected, the dialog box displays the attributes for that
object. If you have selected more than two 2D objects, the dialog box is not available.
If the dialog box cannot find the SMS_VIEWER.xml configuration file, it loads in read-only mode.
This file is delivered to the [Product Folder]\SharedContent\StructManufacturing\SMS_SCHEMA\
folder.
While the dialog box is open, you can select different objects to display their attributes.
Any changes that you have made to a contour, marking, or general object are canceled
if you click on a new object before you apply the changes.
The values associated with the attributes displayed on this dialog box fall into the following
categories:
 Text -Type any string of normal text.
 Unit - Type a decimal number followed by a unit. If you type only a number, the software
applies the default unit for that box.
 List - Select a value from the list.
 Read-only - You cannot edit read-only boxes.
Object Type
Displays the type (Marking, Contour, or General) of the currently selected object.
Bevel Category
Displays the basic bevel type (such as I, K, or Y) associated with the currently selected
contour. This option is only available when you select a contour with a defined bevel.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 315

 Part Viewers and Editors

Bevel Sub-category
Displays the specific bevel within a class, such as the one with a 20-degree bevel angle and a
2-mm root gap. This option is only available when you select a contour with a defined bevel.
The default subtype is Auto, which applies a subtype based on the thickness of the part.
Grind Category
Displays the basic grind type (such as I, K, or Y) associated with the currently selected
contour. This option is only available when you select a contour with a defined grind.
Grind Sub-category
Displays the specific grind within a class, such as the one with a 20-degree bevel angle and a
2-mm root gap. This option is only available when you select a contour with a defined grind.
The default subtype is Auto, which applies a subtype based on the thickness of the part.

General Attribute Guidelines

 This dialog box uses the general attribute SMS_PLATE||THICKNESS to calculate predefined
bevels on contours. Use caution when modifying this attribute.

Contour Attribute Guidelines

 The SMS_EDGE||TYPE attribute is the most powerful attribute for a contour. If the
SMS_EDGE||TYPE attribute is changed from one type to another, then attributes that are not
defined for the new SMS_EDGE||TYPE are discarded, and attributes defined for the new
SMS_EDGE||TYPE but not defined for the old SMS_EDGE||TYPE are added to the attribute
set. Attributes that are common to both the old and the new SMS_EDGE||TYPE are
preserved without change.
 The SMS_BEVEL||TYPE, SMS_GRIND||TYPE, and
SMS_PART_MARGIN_INFO||MARGIN_TYPE attributes similarly act as control attributes. If
those attributes are set to “(null)” then the bevel, margin, and grind attributes are not present
on the object or in the display. However, setting SMS_BEVEL||TYPE, SMS_GRIND||TYPE,
and SMS_PART_MARGIN_INFO||MARGIN_TYPE to something other than null adds bevel,
grind, or margin attributes onto the object.
 If a contour has bevel or grind attributes, the following attributes display:

<attribute> Type - Specifies the basic class of bevel or grind, such as I, K, or Y.

<attribute> Sub-Category - Specifies the specific bevel or grind within a class, such as a 20
degree bevel angle and a 2 mm root gap.
Bevel and grind types and subtypes are enumerated in the Part Editor default settings file and
are defined in a custom VisualBasic project. For more information, see
PREDEFINED_BEVEL_GRIND_CONTROL in the Structural Manufacturing Reference Data
Guide, or contact your product support specialist.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 316

 Part Viewers and Editors

When you select a bevel or grind type, the editor automatically applies the Auto subtype. This
applies a bevel or grind based on the part thickness and possibly other attributes. You can
override the Auto subtype by selecting another setting from the list.
 Whenever the bevel, grind or margin attributes are modified, the bevel, grind, and margin
symbols as well as any associated text boxes, are automatically updated.

Marking Attribute Guidelines

 The SMS_MARKING||TYPE attribute is the most powerful attribute for a marking. If the
SMS_MARKING||TYPE attribute is changed from one type to another, then attributes that are
not defined for the new SMS_MARKING||TYPE are discarded, and attributes defined for the
new SMS_MARKING||TYPE, but not defined for the old SMS_MARKING||TYPE, are added
to the attribute set. Attributes that are common to both the old and the new
SMS_MARKING||TYPE are preserved without change.
For example, by default, the strmfg_platelocation_mark SMS_MARKING||TYPE
contains the SMS_MARKING_PART_LOCATION||LOCATED_PART_NAME,
SMS_MARKING_PART_LOCATION||THICKNESS_DIR, SMS_EDGE||PART_DIR,
SMS_MARKING_PART_LOCATION||DECLIVITY, and
SMS_MARKING_PART_LOCATION||MEASURE_DIR attributes, but the
strmfg_general_mark SMS_MARKING||TYPE does not. Switching from
strmfg_platelocation_mark to strmfg_general_mark causes those attributes to be
discarded.

Annotation Attribute Guidelines

 Annotations can only be edited when the Annotation ribbon is active. For more information,
see Annotation Ribbon (on page 314).
 Annotations are edited by changing the values of text attributes using the Annotation ribbon.
When you click Apply, a new annotation is created with the updated attribute values and the
selected annotation is replaced with the updated one.
 Multiple annotations can be placed by selecting multiple objects of the same type.
 Annotation properties inherit their properties from the currently selected object if the attributes
from the currently selected object are compatible with the attributes from the current
annotation type.
 The geometry attributes can be edited by changing the SMS_ANNOTATION.xml file. Do not
edit the geometry attribute names in the SMS_ANNOTATION.xml file for existing annotations.
The names of the geometry attributes are used in the annotation rules, and changing the
names can cause the rules to stop working.
 Annotations can also be edited by changing a selected attribute's values directly in the
Attribute Editor. You can also select an annotation object while the Attribute Editor is open.
Click OK to regenerate the annotation object with the new values, update the attribute sets
accordingly, and close the Attribute Editor. Click Apply to regenerate the annotation object
with the new values and update the attribute sets, without closing the Attribute Editor. You
can then make additional changes, click on another object to make additional edits, or click
Cancel to cancel any unapplied changes.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 317

 Part Viewers and Editors

Style Dialog Box

Displays options to control visual settings in the Part Editor. Specifically, this dialog box controls
which layers are displayed.

Layers Tab (Style Dialog Box)

Displays options to control which layers display.
All Contours
Turns the display of all the contour layers on or off.
 Contours
 Openings
 Features
 Points
All Markings
Turns the display of all the marking layers on or off.
 Markings
 Anti-Markings
 Points
All Annotations
Turns the display of all the annotation layers on or off.
 Annotations/Symbols
 Bevel Annotations/Symbols
 Annotation Text/Labels
 Points
All References
Turns the display of all the reference layers on or off.
 Reference/Symbols
 Dimensions

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 318

SECTION 12

Manufacturing Service Manager

Manufacturing Service Manager (in the Structural Manufacturing task) or Tools >
Manufacturing Service Manager reviews and updates manufacturing objects. Review displays
a report of the current condition of the manufacturing objects that you have selected. Updating
pulls any outstanding changes into the manufacturing environment. The command is available on
the vertical toolbar in Structural Manufacturing, and by clicking Tools > Manufacturing Service
Manager in Molded Forms, Structural Detailing, Planning, and Structural Manufacturing.
You can select individual parts, assemblies, or blocks for this command.
The Manufacturing Service Manager pulls changes into the manufacturing environment instead
of associatively pushing from other tasks into the manufacturing environment. In this way, the
manufacturing environment is similar to the drawing environment; you have control over which
objects get updated and when.

 A manufacturing object goes on the To Do List for the following reasons:

 The object has a nonworking status, or it contains objects which are included in different
permission groups. You must change the manufacturing part status back to Working, and
then update the manufacturing part by using the Manufacturing Service Manager.
 The parent system of the manufacturing object was split in Molded Forms, and that split
migration produced an error.
 A compute found a failure within the rule and the manufacturing plate, manufacturing
profile, or manufacturing member returned a warning.
 Some other compute failure, with a specific action per entity, occurred.
 The same behavior occurs when the molded form split is performed by someone who does
not have write permissions to the manufacturing part. In this case, a person with write
permission to the manufacturing part must update the manufacturing part by the
Manufacturing Service Manager.

Manufacturing Service Manager Ribbon

Displays the controls used to update and review manufacturing objects.

Selection of Possible Report Data

Opens a dialog box from which you can set up reports.

Select
Selects objects in the model.
Finish
Starts the Manufacturing Service Manager.
Cancel

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 319

 Manufacturing Service Manager

Clears the current selection.

Accept
Accepts the current selection.
Action
Determines whether the Manufacturing Service Manager updates the objects, reviews the
objects, or reports the detailed review of the objects.
Filter
Specifies the type of manufacturing part to use.
 Parts - All plate, profile, and member parts.
 Parts or Assemblies - All plate, profile, member, and different assembly types. For
assemblies, you can select blocks, assembly blocks and assemblies.
 Plate Parts - Plate parts.
 Plate Parts and Connected Profiles - Includes all profiles connected to the plate parts.
 Profile Parts - Profile parts.
 Member Parts - Member parts.
 Systems - All plate systems, profile systems, and member systems.
 Systems or Assemblies - All systems and assemblies.
 Plate Systems - All plate systems.
 Plate Systems and Connected Profiles - All member systems.
 Profile Systems - All profile systems.
 Member Systems - All member systems and design member systems.
 CommonPart Managers - All common part managers.
 Manufacturing Objects - All manufacturing objects.
Connected
Specify which type of connected parts to use.
 <Ignore> - Only the selected part.
 Direct Connected - Includes objects that are physically connected to the selected part.
 Indirect Connected - Includes direct objects and objects that are physically connected to
the direct objects.
 Group - Includes all parts that are under the common part manager of the selected part.

What do you want to do?

 Review a manufacturing object (on page 321)
 Update a manufacturing object (on page 321)
 Review or update a set of objects selected by a filter (on page 321)
 Detail Review a manufacturing object (on page 322)

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 320

 Manufacturing Service Manager

Review a manufacturing object

1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the manufacturing objects to review.
You can select the objects in the model or from the Workspace Explorer.
3. Click Review in the Action box.
4. Select the type of manufacturing object to review in the Report Per box.
5. Click Finish.

Update a manufacturing object

1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the manufacturing objects to review.
You can select the objects in the model, or from the Workspace Explorer.
3. Click Update in the Action box.
4. Select the type of manufacturing object to review in the Report Per box.
5. Click Finish.
The software updates the database as each manufacturing object is updated. Clicking
Cancel stops the update for any objects that have not yet been posted to the database.

Review or update a set of objects selected by a filter

1. Click More from the filter selection list.
The Select Filter dialog box displays.
2. Set up the filter to meet your requirements. For example, you could define a filter to select
plate and profile parts in a specific block.
The software finds and highlights the objects that match the filter.

3. Click Service Manager (in the Structural Manufacturing task) or Tools > Manufacturing
Service Manager.
The software prompts you to use the selected list of objects.
4. Click Yes.
5. If required, add additional objects to the list.
6. Click Review or Update in the Action box.
7. Select the type of manufacturing object to review in the Report Per box.
8. Click Finish.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 321

 Manufacturing Service Manager

Detail Review a manufacturing object

1. Click Select .
2. Select the manufacturing objects to review in detail.
You can select the objects in the model or from the Workspace Explorer.
3. Select Detailed Review in the Action box.
4. Select the type of manufacturing object to review in the Report Per box.
5. Click Finish.

 The software reviews the objects and saves a report of each object containing all the other
inputs (and their status) to determine the current object status.
 The detailed review report is saved in the Windows temp folder.

Review Dialog Box

Displays the controls used to review the current manufacturing status of manufacturing objects.
This dialog box opens when you click Finish on the Manufacturing Service Manager
Ribbon.
The manufacturing object status display includes:
 Up to Date - Indicates that the object does not require updating.
 Out of Date - Indicates that the object requires updating.
 Can Be Deleted - Indicates that the object is no longer needed.
 To-Do-List (Error) - Indicates that the object is on the To Do List because of an error
condition.
 To-Do-List (Out-of-Date) - Indicates that the object is on the To Do List because it requires
updating.
 To-Do-List (Warning) - Indicates that the object is on the To Do List because of a warning
condition.
 Edited - Indicates that the object has been edited with the part editor. If you modify this part by
using the Manufacturing Plate or Manufacturing Profile commands, or use the BO
Recompute command, then the status does not display as Edited.
Properties
Displays the Selection of Possible Report Data dialog box. For more information, see
Selection of Possible Report Data Dialog Box (on page 323).
Report Per
Displays the current settings for the report data that is set to display. The information that
displays depends on what you have set to show or hide on the Selection of Possible Report
Data dialog box.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 322

 Manufacturing Service Manager

Update
Updates the objects. Only the objects shown on the dialog box are updated. This option does
not update parts with a status of Edited.
Cancel
Closes the dialog box.
File name
Type the path and file name for the report file. You can use the Browse button beside the box
to browse through the file system.
View
Displays the report file in the default text editor, such as Notepad.

Selection of Possible Report Data Dialog Box

Displays the controls used to determine which report data displays on the Review dialog box.

Attributes Tab
Option
Determines the manufacturing object type for which you are setting the review options. Select
the box next to the option, and change the setting to Show or Hide as necessary.

Settings Tab
Review Settings
Turn on the settings to apply when the Action is set to Review. The available options include:
 Only include Out of Date manufacturing objects
 Only include manufacturing objects in To Do List
 Check detailed part in To Do List
 Include light parts
 Refresh after Update
 Highlight Out of Date objects
Update Settings
Turn on the settings to apply when the Action is set to Update. The available options include:
 Delete objects under light part
 Update objects with detailed part in To Do List
 Update manufacturing objects in To Do List
 Recompute all manufacturing objects

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 323

SECTION 13

New (Block) Assembly

Creates a new assembly consisting of the parts or other assemblies you select in the graphic
view or the Workspace Explorer. You can also use the command to create a new assembly
block consisting of the parts, assemblies, or blocks you select in the graphic view or the
Workspace Explorer.

Creating Assemblies
You can think of an assembly as a folder containing other assemblies and parts. To create a new
assembly, you must select an existing assembly or block to act as the parent. You can also select
parts to assign to the assembly. After you create the new assembly, you can make any changes
you require (such as properties, assembly content, or orientation) and save the new assembly to
the hierarchy. After you create the assembly, you can change assembly content from the
Workspace Explorer using drag-and-drop, or you can use the Cut and Paste commands. Cut
and Paste are available both from the Edit menu and the shortcut menu of the Workspace
Explorer.
Paste is available for block, assembly, and assembly block objects; Cut is only
available for assembly objects.

Top-down versus Bottom-up Planning

The default process for creating blocks is based on the concept of top-down planning. By using
the Nested option in Split Block , you create a hierarchy of blocks starting with the top-most
block (B0), the entire marine structure, and successively breaking the blocks into smaller volumes
that are children to the larger blocks.
Blocks can also be created using a bottom-up planning concept. In this case, all of the blocks are
created using the Flat option in Split Block so that all of the blocks are at the same level. The
block hierarchy is then created by creating assembly blocks using New (Block) Assembly . In
other words, blocks are initially broken into their smallest components at the bottom of the
hierarchy, and combined upwards to create the large blocks.
At some point for both top-down and bottom-up planning, block definition stops and assembly
definition begins using New (Block) Assembly . The point where this transition occurs is a
function of the workflow of the facility and is not determined by the functionality of the software.

New (Block) Assembly Ribbon

Assembly Properties
Activates the Assembly Properties dialog box. You can use this dialog box to modify
properties such as assembly type or default build equipment, which you cannot set on the
ribbon. For more information, see Assembly Properties Dialog Box (on page 332).
Selects Sub-assemblies and Parts
Select the assembly or assembly block content. You can select objects in either a graphic
view or the Workspace Explorer. You can use the Tools > Hide command to hide the

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 324

 New (Block) Assembly

assembly content already selected, thus making it possible to find smaller objects.

Add Secondary Objects

Opens the Secondary Objects dialog box. In the dialog box, select the type of secondary
objects to include. The secondary objects, such as collars and profiles, are on plates included
in the assembly or assembly block.
Manufacturing Orientation
Sets the manufacturing orientation and a viewing direction of the selected assembly or
assembly block. When an assembly or assembly block is created, it is given a default
manufacturing orientation of marine structure's position as defined by the global coordinate
system. The manufacturing orientation plane displays as follows:

The local x-y plane created for manufacturing orientation defines the orientation of the block
as it is manufactured on a shop floor. The local z axis is the manufacturing orientation
up-vector. By default, it is in the same direction as the global coordinate Z axis.

 Manufacturing orientation is also known as assembly orientation.

 Manufacturing orientation is used by Show Assembly View, the Structural
Manufacturing task, and assembly method drawings in the Ship Drawings task.
See the Manufacturing Orientation Controls section below.
Finish
Commits the new assembly or assembly block to the database.
Cancel
Cancels the assembly content defined when the Selects subassemblies and parts step is
active. When the Select parent assembly or block step is active, cancels the assembly
parent. Cancel remains disabled until an assembly or part is selected.
Accept
When the Selects subassemblies and parts step is active on the ribbon, clicking Accept
accepts the assembly content and moves on to the next step. When the Select parent
assembly or block step is active on the ribbon, clicking Accept accepts the selected
assembly parent and moves on to the next step. An accept command is needed in order to get
a graphical view of the selected parent assembly. Accept remains disabled until an assembly
or part is selected
Type
Specifies whether the new planning item is an assembly or an assembly block.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 325

 New (Block) Assembly

Name
Specifies the name of the new assembly or assembly block.
Parent Assembly
Allows you to select the parent assembly or block. Click More to choose another assembly or
block with the Select Assembly dialog box.

Manufacturing Orientation Controls

Orientation Method
Provides the following options: Global, User Defined, or By Object.
When the manufacturing orientation is modified, the rotation of the local axes is
recomputed according to the following:
1. The software determines which global axis, the X, Y or Z, is closest to the local
up-vector, z.
2. If it is X, then the y-axis is aligned to be as close as possible to Y.
3. If it is Y, then the x-axis is aligned to be as close as possible to X.
4. If it is Z, then the x-axis is aligned to be as close as possible to X.
Global - Orients the assembly according to the global coordinate system (default).
User Defined - Defines the orientation by selecting or creating a plane using one of the
following six methods:
 Coincident - Defines a plane coincident to another plane.
 Offset from Plane - Defines a plane at a specified offset distance from another plane.
 Angle from Plane - Defines a plane at a specified angle or slope to another plane.
You must define an axis of rotation and the angle or slope.
 Plane by Point and Vector - Defines a plane using a vector normal to the plane being
defined and a third point to define the plane position along the vector.

 Plane by Three Points - Defines a plane using three points that you identify in the
model.
 Plane by Vectors Normal - Specifies the reference plane as being normal to another
plane that you select and having a rotation parallel to a vector that you define.

 / Remove/Maintain Relationships of the Plane - Maintains the relationships of

the plane to the definition method and the geometry used by the definition method. For
example, a plane created with Offset from Plane maintains the relationship of the
selected plane and the Offset value. Otherwise, this option disables the relationships of
the plane to allow moving of the plane.
When you copy a bracket and use Edit > Paste > Delete Optional to remove
a boundary, Remove/Maintain Relationships of the Plane / is not visible. You
must first click Select Bracket Supports to allow the command to determine the

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 326

 New (Block) Assembly

applicable options.
By Object - Defines the orientation by specifying a type of object from the Object Type list,
and then selecting the object in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer. The supported
object types are listed below.
Object Type - Specifies the type of object used to define the orientation.
 Plate - Defines the manufacturing orientation of the assembly by selecting the face of
a plate. The plate becomes the base plate, the face of the plate becomes the x'-y'
plane and the orientation up-vector matches the z' axis. If the selected plate is planar,
the selected face is oriented horizontally. If the selected plate is curved, the software
sets that plate as the base plate and then defaults to the 3-point method of definition
for defining the up-vector. The plate must be a child of the assembly.
 Pin Jig - Defines the manufacturing orientation of the assembly by selecting a pin jig.
The base plane of the pin jig becomes the x'-y' plane and the orientation up-vector
matches the z' axis. The pin jig must be related to one of the children of the assembly.
 Intersection Seam - Defines the manufacturing orientation of the assembly by
selecting an intersection seam. The orientation up-vector (the z' axis) matches the
direction of the seam. This method only allows selection of intersection seams
between a plate and a profile. The plate and profile pair that define the seam must be
children of the assembly.

 Seam (By Rule) - Defines the manufacturing orientation of the assembly by selecting
an intersection seam. The orientation up-vector (the z' axis) matches the direction of
the seam. This method only allows selection of intersection seams between a plate
and a profile that lead to slots on the plate after detailing in the Structural Detailing
task. The plate and profile must be children of the assembly and the slot must have a
positive opening angle.
 Coordinate System - Defines the manufacturing orientation of the assembly by
selecting a coordinate system. The orientation up-vector (the z' axis) matches the
direction of the coordinate system Z-axis.
 Assembly - Defines the manufacturing orientation of the assembly by selecting a
sub-assembly (that is, a child assembly in the Assembly tab hierarchy of the
Workspace Explorer). The orientation up-vector (the z' axis) matches the direction of
the up-vector of the sub-assembly.
 Frame/Axis - Defines the manufacturing orientation of the assembly by selecting an
axis of a coordinate system. The orientation up-vector (the z' axis) matches the
direction of the axis.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 327

 New (Block) Assembly

 Plane - Defines the manufacturing orientation of the assembly based on the normal
direction of the selected plane. A plane is a grid plane or a planar surface on an
object, such as a plate.
Orientation Object - When the Orientation Method is set to By Object, the list of
available of objects that can be used to define the orientation is displayed. You can also
select one of these objects from the graphic view or the Workspace Explorer.
Orientation Objects is not used by the Frame/Axis and Plane object types.
Relationship - Specifies the relationship between the selected orientation object and the
assembly. If the object is modified, then the manufacturing orientation of the assembly is
automatically updated. If the object is deleted, the manufacturing orientation does not
change, but the relationship between the object and the assembly is deleted.
 No Relation - The software maintains no relationship between the orientation object
and the assembly. The orientation object does not display when you select an
existing assembly for modification. If you modify the orientation object, the assembly
orientation does not change.
 Relation with Update - The software maintains the relationship between the
orientation object and the assembly. The orientation object displays when you select
an existing assembly for modification. If you modify the orientation object, the
assembly orientation updates.
 Relation with No Update - The software maintains the relationship between the
orientation object and the assembly. The orientation object displays when you select
an existing assembly for modification. If you modify the orientation object, the
assembly orientation does not update. This option is the default value.

Edit View Direction

Allows you to modify the view direction of the assembly when viewing the assembly in
manufacturing orientation and assembly method drawings. The view direction symbol is an
arrow placed in a quadrant of the manufacturing orientation plane. A default viewing direction
is initially provided based on rules. You can change the viewing direction to be used by
selecting a new quadrant. The arrow displays in the new quadrant.

X Rotation
Rotates the manufacturing orientation plane with respect to the local x axis. Type a positive
value for clockwise rotation about the axis. Type a negative value for counterclockwise
rotation about the axis.
Y Rotation
Rotates the manufacturing orientation plane with respect to the local y axis. Type a positive
value for clockwise rotation about the axis. Type a negative value for counterclockwise
rotation about the axis.
Z Rotation
Rotates the manufacturing orientation plane with respect to the local z axis. Type a positive
value for clockwise rotation about the axis. Type a negative value for counterclockwise
rotation about the axis.

Toggle Orientation

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 328

 New (Block) Assembly

Toggles the direction of the local z manufacturing up-vector about the local x-y plane used for
definition of the manufacturing orientation plane.

Fit to Assembly
Fits the graphic view to the assembly.

What do you want to do?

 Create a new assembly or assembly block (on page 329)
 Set assembly user-defined planar manufacturing orientation (on page 330)
 Set assembly manufacturing orientation by object (on page 331)
 Edit an assembly or assembly block (on page 332)

Create a new assembly or assembly block

1. Click New (Block) Assembly .
2. Select content for the new assembly or assembly block from the Workspace Explorer or
from the model.
3. In the Type box, select Assembly or Assembly Block.
For Assembly, you can also select Config Project Root as the parent assembly.
4. In the Parent Assembly box, select a parent assembly or block for the new assembly.

5. On the ribbon, click Add Secondary Objects .

The Secondary Objects dialog box appears.
6. Select the types of secondary objects to include in the new assembly and click Close.
7. If needed, click Manufacturing Orientation to specify a manufacturing orientation for the
assembly.
Set assembly user-defined planar manufacturing orientation (on page 330)
Set assembly manufacturing orientation by object (on page 331)
8. If needed, type a new name for the assembly in the Name box.
9. Click Finish.

 You can also create new assemblies by right-clicking in the Workspace Explorer and
selecting New Assembly from the shortcut menu.
 In the Workspace Explorer, you can use drag and drop to change assembly content, or you
can use cut and paste.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 329

 New (Block) Assembly

Set assembly user-defined planar manufacturing

orientation
This procedure applies to a new or an existing assembly or assembly block.

1. On the New (Block) Assembly ribbon, click Manufacturing Orientation .

2. In the Orientation Method box, select User Defined.
3. Specify the plane for the manufacturing orientation baseplate using one of the following
methods:
Define a coincident plane (on page 34)
Define an offset plane (on page 35)
Define plane using angle from plane (on page 36)
Define a plane using a point and a normal vector (on page 36)
Define a plane using three points (on page 37)
Define plane by vectors normal (on page 38)
A graphic of the x-y plane and the z up-vector direction displays in the graphic view.

4. If needed, click Edit manufacturing orientation to toggle the direction of the z' up-vector.
5. If needed, type values for X Rotation, Y Rotation, or Z Rotation to rotate the base plate
about each coordinate system axis.
6. Click Finish.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 330

 New (Block) Assembly

Set assembly manufacturing orientation by object

This procedure applies to a new or an existing assembly or assembly block.

1. On the New (Block) Assembly ribbon, click Manufacturing Orientation .

2. In the Orientation Method box, select By Object.
3. In the Object Type box, select Plate, Pin Jig, Intersection Seam, Seam (By Rule),
Coordinate System, Assembly, Frame/Axis, or Plane.
4. In a graphic view or the Workspace Explorer, select an object appropriate to the selected
object type:
 For Plate, select a plate part to use as a baseplate. The normal direction on the baseplate
is used as the up-vector.
 For Pin Jig, select a pin jig. The base plane of the pin jig is used as the baseplate. The
normal direction on the baseplate is used as the up-vector.
 For Intersection Seam, select an intersection seam between a plate and a profile. The
direction of the seam is used as the up-vector.
 For Seam (By Rule), select an intersection seam between a plate and a profile that lead
to slots on the plate after detailing, and the slot has a positive opening angle. The direction
of the seam is used as the up-vector.
 For Coordinate System, select a coordinate system. The direction of the Z-axis is used
as the up-vector.
 For Assembly, select a sub-assembly of the existing assembly. The orientation of the
sub-assembly is used for the assembly.
 For Frame/Axis, select an axis of a coordinate system. The direction of the grid plane or
axis is used as the up-vector.
 For Plane, select a plane, such as a grid plane, or a planar surface on a plate. The normal
direction on the plane is used as the up-vector.
A graphic of the x-y plane and the z up-vector direction displays in the graphic view.

5. If needed, click Edit manufacturing orientation to toggle the direction of the z' up-vector.
6. If needed, type values for X Rotation, Y Rotation, or Z Rotation to rotate the base plate
about each coordinate system axis.
7. Click Finish.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 331

 New (Block) Assembly

Edit an assembly or assembly block

1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Assemblies or Assembly Blocks in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the assemblies or assembly blocks to modify.
4. Using the ribbon controls, edit the assemblies or assembly blocks as needed.

Assembly Properties Dialog Box

Defines the building method properties for the assembly you are viewing.
General Tab (Assembly Properties Dialog Box) (on page 332)
Relationships Tab (on page 84)
Configuration Tab (on page 84)
Notes Tab (on page 86)

General Tab (Assembly Properties Dialog Box)

Displays and defines the general property names and values of the selected assembly or
assembly block. Only information that appears in a field with a white background may be edited.
All other fields are read-only.
Category
Select to display a group of assembly properties. Available settings are Standard, Planning,
Weight and CG, Assembly Range, and Position and Orientation.
Update
Calculates the non-persisted properties, such as length, weight and height.

Standard Category
Name
Name of the assembly. This name is usually generated by the active name rule. You can type
a different name for the assembly if you want. Names generated by a rule include a Global
Workshare name rule ID, if the name rule ID was defined when the model database was
created. For more information, see "Using Global Workshare" in the Global Workshare Guide.
Name Rule
Name rule used to generate the name. This field allows you to have optional rules for different
situations. The content of the list comes from the "Rule Options" function. Set this option to
User Defined if you want to specify the name yourself.
Assembly Type
Type of planning assembly, such as block, assembly, or pipe spool. The drop-down list
contains all available assembly types as defined in the reference data.
Parent Assembly
Displays the name of the parent assembly, block, or assembly block.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 332

 New (Block) Assembly

Symmetrically Related Assembly

Displays the name of the symmetrically related assembly if one has been defined using the
Mirror Assembly Command . If no relationship is defined, <None> is displayed.
Assembly Stage
Construction stage of an assembly from a facility-defined rule set. The drop-down list contains
all available stages as defined in the reference data. Examples of stages include part
production, assembly of subassemblies, assembly of sections with outfitting, and assembly of
sections before painting. If no stage is defined, <None> is displayed.
Workcenter
Assigned assembly workcenter from a facility-defined rule set. The drop-down list contains all
available workcenters regardless of their level in the workcenter hierarchy. Examples of
workcenters include docks, shops, bays, and panel lines. Workcenters may also be areas and
zones where a block is assembled from multiple assemblies.
Default Build Equipment
Primary equipment used to join the elements of the assembly. The drop-down list contains all
available build equipment as defined in the reference data. Examples of build equipment
include jig floors and bending equipment. Build equipment can be changed at the assembly
element level by clicking Sequence Form on the Sequence ribbon. For more
information, see Sequence.
Default Weld Equipment
Weld equipment used within the assigned workcenter when welding weld defined using
Generate Planning Joints . The drop-down list contains all available weld equipment as
defined in the reference data.
Exit Equipment
Crane or transport equipment within the assigned workcenter that moves the finished
assembly to its next assembly stage and workcenter. The drop-down list contains all available
exit equipment as defined in the reference data.
Building method comments
Allows you to type comments regarding workcenter or work process assignment or any other
issue pertinent to the assembly.
Build And Weld As Sequenced
Specifies if you want to weld objects as they are joined in the assembly sequence. Select
True to weld each object as it is joined, and select False to join all objects together before
welding.
Orientation Baseplate
Displays the assigned manufacturing orientation baseplate if one has been defined using the
Manufacturing orientation option. If no baseplate is defined, <None> is displayed.
Orientation Coordinate System
Allows you to select the global coordinate system used to define the local manufacturing
orientation coordinate system in the Manufacturing orientation option. Default value is
the main coordinate system.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 333

 New (Block) Assembly

Orientation X Rotation
The rotation of the assembly around the X-axis of the local manufacturing orientation
coordinate system (defined in the Manufacturing orientation option), whether based on
baseplate or a three-point plane definition. By modifying the rotational values, you can edit the
value to any exact orientation relative to the coordinate system. Manually changing the
orientation does not affect the selected baseplate, even though the assembly is no longer
oriented by the baseplate.
Orientation Y Rotation
The rotation of the assembly around the Y-axis of the local manufacturing orientation
coordinate system (defined in the Manufacturing orientation option), whether based on
baseplate or a three-point plane definition. By modifying the rotational values, you can edit the
value to any exact orientation relative to the coordinate system. Manually changing the
orientation does not affect the selected baseplate, even though the assembly is no longer
oriented by the baseplate.
Orientation Z Rotation
The rotation of the assembly around the Z-axis of the local manufacturing orientation
coordinate system (defined in the Manufacturing orientation option), whether based on
baseplate or a three-point plane definition. By modifying the rotational values, you can edit the
value to any exact orientation relative to the coordinate system. Manually changing the
orientation does not affect the selected baseplate, even though the assembly is no longer
oriented by the baseplate.
Boardside
Board of the assembly. The drop-down list contains all available values as defined in the
reference data, typically Center, Starboard Side, Port Side, and Both Sides. Default value
is Center.
Manufacturing Frame System
Allows you to select the coordinate system used to process structural manufacturing rules for
all objects in the assembly. The drop-down list contains all available coordinate systems as
defined in the reference data. If no coordinate system is defined, No Framesystem is
displayed and the local manufacturing orientation coordinate system (defined in the
Manufacturing orientation option) is used.

Planning Category
Build Method
Specifies the method used to position child objects in the block. The list contains all available
values as defined in the reference data for the assigned workcenter, typically Vertical Drop,
Drop at angle, Slide, and Default. The list is defined by the BuildMethodData codelist.
Slot Connectivity
Specifies the minimum welding requirement at profile and slot intersections to meet the build
method requirements. The list contains all available values as defined in the reference data,
typically None, Webleft, Webright, Double, N/A, and Default. The list is defined by the
SlotConnectivityData codelist.
You can customize slot and collar rules in the Structural Detailing task to use Build
Method and Slot Connectivity properties to determine the slots and collars placed during
detailing.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 334

 New (Block) Assembly

Weight and CG Category

Weight
Displays the weight of all child parts and assemblies of the assembly. Press update to
calculate is initially displayed because the property value is not persisted in the model.
CoG X
Displays the position of center of gravity along the X-axis in the CoG Coordinate System.
Press update to calculate is initially displayed because the property value is not persisted in
the model.
CoG Y
Displays the position of center of gravity along the Y-axis in the CoG Coordinate System.
Press update to calculate is initially displayed because the property value is not persisted in
the model.
CoG Z
Displays the position of center of gravity along the Z-axis in the CoG Coordinate System.
Press update to calculate is initially displayed because the property value is not persisted in
the model.
CoG Coordinate System
Allows you to select the coordinate system for calculation of center of gravity (CoG)
coordinates. The drop-down list contains all available coordinate systems as defined in the
reference data. Default value is the main coordinate system.

Assembly Range
The range box dimensions of an assembly are based on inputs such as the parts selection criteria,
the orientation, the assembly shrinkage, and the assembly margin.
Global - Length
Displays the length of the assembly range box in the global orientation.
Global - Width
Displays the width of the assembly range box in the global orientation.
Global - Height
Displays the height of the assembly range box in the global orientation.
Assembly Orientation - Length
Displays the length of the assembly range box in the assembly orientation.
Assembly Orientation - Width
Displays the width of the assembly range box in the assembly orientation.
Assembly Orientation - Height
Displays the height of the assembly range box in the assembly orientation.
Minimum Bound Box - Length
Displays the length of the assembly range box in the tight box orientation.
Minimum Bound Box - Width

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 335

 New (Block) Assembly

Displays the width of the assembly range box in the tight box orientation.
Minimum Bound Box - Height
Displays the height of the assembly range box in the tight box orientation.
Global - Shrinkage - Length
Displays the length of the assembly range box that includes the assembly shrinkage in the
global direction.
Global - Shrinkage - Width
Displays the width of the assembly range box that includes the assembly shrinkage in the
global direction.
Global - Shrinkage - Height
Displays the height of the assembly range box that includes the assembly shrinkage in the
global direction.
Global - Shrinkage and Margin - Length
Displays the length of the assembly range box that includes the assembly shrinkage and
margin in the global direction.
Global - Shrinkage and Margin - Width
Displays the width of the assembly range box that includes the assembly shrinkage and
margin in the global direction.
Global - Shrinkage and Margin - Height
Displays the height of the assembly range box that includes the assembly shrinkage and
margin in the global direction.
The length, width, and height values are computed after you click Update.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 336

SECTION 14

Batch Service Manager

Schedules a service manager batch job. This command is available on the Tools menu. Each job
has an associated XML file which contains the model database, the job name, the database
provider, and the server name. Service Manager batch jobs are run on the local computer.
You can run the Batch Service Manager command either from within the Smart 3D environment
or as a separate executable. If you run it as a separate executable, it always performs an update
on the entire model.
This command creates a batch log file for each job. The filename of the log file is stored in the
database, and the files are written to the %TEMP% folder. The information for the job is written to
the STRMFGBatchProcessInfo table in the Model database.
This command uses the Generic Batch command to specify the parameters for the batch job.

What do you want to do?

 Schedule a manufacturing service manager batch job (on page 337)
 Edit a manufacturing service manager batch job
 Delete a manufacturing service manager batch job (on page 338)

Schedule a manufacturing service manager batch job

1. Click Tools > Submit Batch Job..
2. Select More from the Batch Process list..
3. Select Production > Manufacturing from the Batch Process Type list.
4. Select Service Manager Update from the Select Batch Process list.
5. Define the batch input type by filter, assembly, or object. For example, select Assembly from
the Workspace Explorer, select the assembly to update, and then select the box next to its
name in the Generic Batch Command window.
For more information, see the Select Filter Dialog Box.
6. Click Schedule.
7. Specify the frequency at which you want to run the batch job.
8. Specify the time at which you want to start the batch job.
9. Review the batch job information. If the information meets your needs, click OK.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 337

 Batch Service Manager

Delete a manufacturing service manager batch job

1. Open the Intergraph Batch Manager.
2. Expand the Batch Servers hierarchy to display the appropriate queue.
3. Select the queue to which the job was submitted.
4. Select the job to remove, and click Delete on the ribbon bar.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 338

SECTION 15

Submit Batch Job

Tools > Submit Batch Job runs batch processes using the Intergraph Batch Services
framework.
This command runs the following types of batch jobs:
Detailing:
 Detail parts
 Undetail parts
 Update reports
Production:
 Generate manufacturing parts
 Generate XML output files
 Manufacturing Service Manager update
Custom batch processes:
 BO recompute
 Other custom batch processes that you define.

What do you want to do?

 Run a detailing batch process (on page 339)
 Run a production batch process (on page 340)
 Run a custom batch process (on page 340)
 Add a custom batch process (on page 341)

Run a detailing batch process

1. Click Tools > Submit Batch Job.
The Generic Batch Command dialog box displays.
2. Select the batch process to run from the Batch Process list. If the process you want to run is
not in the list, select More from the Batch Process list.
The Batch Process Selection dialog box displays.
3. Select Modeling > Detailing from the Batch Process Type list.
Smart 3D displays the available detailing batch processes in the Select Batch Process list.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 339

 Submit Batch Job

4. Select the process to run from the Select Batch Process list, and click OK.
Smart 3D returns to the Generic Batch Command dialog box.
5. Specify the Batch Input Type, and add inputs as necessary.
6. Click Schedule.
The Schedule [Task] Batch Job dialog box displays.
7. Set up the parameters to run the batch job. For more information, see Schedule [Task] Dialog
Box in the Common User's Guide.

Run a production batch process

1. Click Tools > Submit Batch Job.
The Generic Batch Command dialog box displays.
2. Select the batch process to run from the Batch Process list. If the process you want to run is
not in the list, select More from the Batch Process list.
The Batch Process Selection dialog box displays.
3. Select Production > Manufacturing from the Batch Process Type list.
Smart 3D displays the available production batch processes in the Select Batch Process list.
4. Select the process to run from the Select Batch Process list, and click OK.
Smart 3D returns to the Generic Batch Command dialog box.
5. Specify the Batch Input Type, and add inputs as necessary.
6. Click Schedule.
The Schedule [Task] Batch Job dialog box displays.
7. Set up the parameters to run the batch job. For more information, see Schedule [Task] Dialog
Box in the Common User's Guide.

Run a custom batch process

1. Click Tools > Submit Batch Job.
The Generic Batch Command dialog box displays.
2. Select the batch process to run from the Batch Process list. If the process you want to run is
not in the list, select More from the Batch Process list.
The Batch Process Selection dialog box displays.
3. Select Custom Batch Processes from the Batch Process Type list.
Smart 3D displays the available custom batch processes in the Select Batch Process list.
4. Select the process to run from the Select Batch Process list, and click OK.
Smart 3D returns to the Generic Batch Command dialog box.
5. Specify the Batch Input Type, and add inputs as necessary.
6. Click Schedule.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 340

 Submit Batch Job

The Schedule [Task] Batch Job dialog box displays.

7. Set up the parameters to run the batch job. For more information, see Schedule [Task] Dialog
Box in the Common User's Guide.

Add a custom batch process

1. Add the ProgID and job description of the custom batch process to the <Product
Folder>\CommonShip\SOM\Client\Xml\[Link] file.
For example:
<JOB>
<JobType>CustomBatchProcessD</JobType>
<JobType_LocaleID>103</JobType_LocaleID>
<JobDescription>Description of
CustomBatchProcessD</JobDescription>
<JobDescription_LocaleID>104</JobDescription_LocaleID>
<JobProgId> ProgID of CustomBatchProcess </JobProgId>
<IsModelSpecific>False</IsModelSpecific>
</JOB>
2. Click Tools > Submit Batch Job.
The Generic Batch Command dialog box displays.
3. Select the batch process to run from the Batch Process list. If the process you want to run is
not in the list, select More from the Batch Process list.
The Batch Process Selection dialog box displays.
4. Select Custom Batch Process from the Batch Process Type list.
The available custom batch processes display in the Select Batch Process list.
5. Select the custom process to run, and click OK.
Smart 3D returns to the Generic Batch Command dialog box.
6. Specify the Batch Input Type, and add inputs as necessary.
7. Click Schedule.
The Schedule [Task] Batch Job dialog box displays.
8. Set up the parameters to run the batch job. For more information, see Schedule [Task] Dialog
Box in the Common User's Guide.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 341

 Submit Batch Job

Generic Batch Command Dialog Box

Displays the controls used to submit a generic batch command.
Batch Process
Specifies the batch process to run. The list contains recently-selected job types. Click More to
display the Batch Process Selection dialog box, and select a process that is not on the list.
For more information, see Batch Process Selection Dialog Box (on page 343).
Batch Input Type
Indicates the input type for the batch process.
 Filter indicates that you are providing a filter as an input to the batch job.
 Assembly indicates that you are providing an assembly as input to the batch job.
 Object indicates that you are providing a set of objects as input to the batch job.

Add
Adds inputs to your batch job.
 If Filter is selected, this button displays the Select Filter dialog box so that you can add
filters as inputs to your batch job.
 If Assembly is selected, this button displays the Select Assembly dialog box so that you
can add assemblies as inputs to your batch job.
 If Object is selected, this button is not available. To add objects as inputs, select them
from the model or the Workspace Explorer.

Remove
Removes the selected inputs from the list. The software only removes the inputs that have the
associated check box selected.
Share
Saves the inputs for the next batch process. If this check box is cleared, Smart 3D clears the
inputs when you select a different batch process.
Schedule as Multiple Jobs
Processes each item in the inputs list as a separate batch process. If this check box is
cleared, Smart 3D processes all of the inputs as a single batch process.
Schedule
Displays the Schedule [Task] dialog box so that you can schedule the batch process. For
more information, see Schedule [Task] Dialog Box in the Common User's Guide.
Cancel
Exits the command.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 342

 Submit Batch Job

Batch Process Selection Dialog Box

Displays the controls used to specify the type of batch process to run.
Batch Process Type
Displays the general batch process types. Select a type to display the available batch process
of that type in the Select Batch Process list.
Select Batch Process
Displays the available batch process associated with the selected type.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 343

SECTION 16

Manufacturing Services
This command helps you create customized reports for specific manufacturing objects. These
reports can have different file formats (such as *.txt or *.xml). The Custom Processing command
gets the object types that can be reported and the processes that create the reports from selected
manufacturing objects from a configuration file named [Link] which is
located in the [Symbol Server]\StructManufacturing\CustomProcess folder.
This command is located on the Tools menu.

Configuration File
The configuration file is centralized at the symbol share location. On the symbol share, the
[Link] file is stored in the [Symbol
Server]\StructManufacturing\CustomProcess folder.
You can customize this XML file to add various reports, by using the following:
Name
The name of the filter set defined by the Identifier.
Identifier
A filter to the command. The properties set here act as the filter to the custom program.
Process name
A user-defined name of the custom program that creates the report.
Process id
The Prog ID of the custom program to execute.
FileType
The output type for the file. The custom command must save this information.
<MfgProcessSet>
The XML node used to control the different object entries.
<Object>
XML nodes for one object report type entry.
<process/>
XML nodes for one custom report entry.

XML Schema
The XML schema has the following format:
<?xml version="1.0" ?>
<MfgProcessSet>
<object name=" " Identifier=" ">

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 344

 Manufacturing Services

<process name=" " processid=" " FileType=" " />

<process name=" " processid=" " FileType=" " />
</object>
</MfgProcessSet>

Report Program
The following API interface generates a report.
Private Sub IJDCustomReport_Generate(
ByVal pElements As [Link],
strFileName As String,
eCustomReportStatus As [Link])
Examples are delivered to the [Product Folder]\StructManufacturing\Data\Rules\CustomReport
folder.

Custom Processing Ribbon

Displays the controls used to run a custom processing executable.

Select
Select input objects based on the selection in the Object Type field.
Finish
Run the custom processing command.
Cancel
Clears the selection.
Accept
Accepts the selection.
Object Type
Specifies the filter to use.
Process
Specifies the name of the process to use.
Output Location
Specifies where Smart 3D creates the file.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 345

 Manufacturing Services

Run a custom processing command

1. Click Tools > Manufacturing Services > Custom Processing.
2. On the Custom Processing ribbon, select the type of object to process from the Object Type
list.
3. Select the process to run from the Process list.
4. Select the objects on which to run the process from the graphics view or the Workspace
Explorer.
5. Select the location for the file under Output Location.
6. Click Accept.
7. Click Finish.

Stiffeners Diagonal Measurement

Provides a tool to extract distance information between two stiffeners or a pin jig for accuracy
verification. This tool also provides information on mounting angles. This command is located on
the Tools menu.

Stiffeners Diagonal Measurement Ribbon

Displays the controls used to extract diagonal lengths between stiffeners, or for pin jigs.
Selection By
Indicates whether the diagonals are between stiffeners, or for pin jigs.

First Stiffener
Select the first stiffener for the diagonal. This option is available only when the Selection By
list is set to Stiffeners.

Second Stiffener
Select the second stiffener for the diagonal. This option is available only when the Selection
By list is set to Stiffeners.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 346

 Manufacturing Services

Pin Jig
Select the pin jig for the diagonal. This is optional when the Selection By list is set to
Stiffeners.
View
Displays the Diagonal Lengths and Mounting Angle dialog box.

Diagonal Lengths and Mounting Angle Dialog Box

Displays the controls used to generate reports on distances and mounting angles.
Select Seam
Select a seam from the list of outer boundaries of the pin jig. This option is only available if a
pin jig is selected.
Distance
Specify a distance to identify which stiffeners are bounded to the selected seam. This option is
only available if a pin jig is selected.
Overlap Factor
Specifies the minimum overlap factor for the stiffeners on the pin jig remarking surface.
Angle Report Type
Specifies the method for reporting mounting angles. The available options are:
 Based on Surface - Report mounting angle with respect to the stiffening-surface normal
or the base-plane normal.
 Based on Tangent - Report mounting angle by constructing tangents at the circle
intersection points with the stiffening or remarking surface.

Convex Radius
Specifies the radius used for mounting angle computation when the curvature of the surface is
convex. This option is available only if the Angle Report Type is set to Based on Tangent.
Concave Radius
Specifies the radius used for mounting angle computation when the curvature of the surface is
concave. This option is available only if the Angle Report Type is set to Based on Tangent.
Select First Stiffener
Select the first stiffener from the list of stiffeners.
Select Second Stiffener

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 347

 Manufacturing Services

Select the second stiffener from the list of stiffeners.

First Stiffener
Points to Process
Select either Length Points or Vertex Points from the list. Length points are points defined
by the symbol file. The symbol file is then used to prepare the end cut. Vertex points are points
defined by the base or offset edge of the stiffener.
Stiffener Side
Select the point from which to measure. If the Points to Process option is set to Vertex
Points, then the available options include Base - Web Left, Base - Web Right, Base - All,
Offset Web Left, Offset - Web Right, and Offset - All. If the Points to Process option is set
to Length Points, then the options include Base - Web Cuts, Base - Flange Cuts, Base -
All, Offset - Web Cuts, Offset - Flange Cuts, and Offset - All.
Points
Select the point on the first stiffener from which to measure. The point names represent the
closest two edges of the stiffener. For example, WL_B_Point indicates the point on the left
side of the web and bottom of the stiffener. The point highlights in the model.

SecondStiffener
Points to Process
Select either Length Points or Vertex Points from the list. Length points are points defined
by the symbol file. The symbol file is then used to prepare the end cut. Vertex points are points
defined by the base or offset edge of the stiffener.
Stiffener Side
Select the point from which to measure. If the Points to Process option is set to Vertex
Points, then the available options include Base - Web Left, Base - Web Right, Base - All,

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 348

 Manufacturing Services

Offset Web Left, Offset - Web Right, and Offset - All. If the Points to Process option is set
to Length Points, then the options include Base - Web Cuts, Base - Flange Cuts, Base -
All, Offset - Web Cuts, Offset - Flange Cuts, and Offset - All.
Points
Select the point on the second stiffener from which to measure. The point names represent
the closest two edges of the stiffener. For example, WL_B_Point indicates the point on the
left side of the web and bottom of the stiffener. The point highlights in the model.
Parameter - Value table
Displays the distances and mounting angles based on the points that you have selected.
View/Report Options
Select the type of report to generate. Available options include Web left-Web left, Web
right-Web right, and Inner face-Inner face.

Fit View
Fits the view to the selected objects.
Generate Report

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 349

 Manufacturing Services

Creates a report on distances and mounting angles. Additionally, you can view the generated
report.

Select Connected Object

Provides a tool to check which objects are connected to a selected object based on physical
connections between the parts. You can determine if a given manufacturing plate or profile is out
of date. The information shown by this command is the same list as that shown on the Status tab
when you modify a single manufacturing plate or profile. This command is located on the Tools >
Struct Manufacturing menu. You must select the object, and then start the command.
You can also use Ctrl + Shift + M to start this command from the Structural Manufacturing task.
In version 7.4, you must start this command as a custom command using the ProgID
[Link].

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 350

 Manufacturing Services

Display connected objects

1. Select the object for which to display connected objects.
You can select a detailed plate or profile or a manufacturing plate or profile.
2. Click Tools > Manufacturing Services > Select Connect Object.
You can also press Ctrl + Shift + M to start the command.
The Dependent and Connected Objects dialog box displays.
3. Select the objects to highlight from the grid.
4. If necessary, click Show Properties to display the Properties dialog box for the selected
object.

Dependent and Connected Objects Dialog Box

Dependent Objects
Displays a list of the dependent objects.
Connected Objects
Displays a list of the objects connected to the dependent object, if available. The connected
objects have physical connections because they have profiles or plates as connected objects.
Click a cell to highlight that object in the model.
Show Properties
Displays the Properties dialog box for the selected object.
Highlight Physical Connections
Highlights the physical connections associated with the selected objects in the model.
Highlight Connected Objects
Highlights the objects connected to the selected objects in the model.
The highlighted objects in the model use the following colors:
 Green - Selected object
 Red - Dependent objects

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 351

 Manufacturing Services

 Yellow - Connected objects

Macro Editor
Provides a tool to view, edit, and overwrite generated macros placed on profile and member parts.
The software displays profile and member parts and the macros generated for the parts in a grid.
You can edit macro attributes in the property grid, or apply a different macro to a part. You can
also reset the definition and attributes of a macro to the rule-selected values. This command is
located on the Tools menu under Manufacturing Services.

Macro Editor Dialog Box

Select Manufacturing Services > Macro Command from the Tools menu to display the Macro
Editor.
Drag a column header and drop it here to group by that column
Groups the macro commands by the column header you select. Drag a column header to the
space above the List of Stiffeners/Members to group the macros by the selected column.
Click the column in the Grouped by space to change the sort order for that group. Drag the
column back to the List of Stiffeners/Members area to ungroup the macros. Alternatively,
click the 'x' in the column group box to ungroup the macros.

Column Chooser
Displays a list of columns that you can show or hide under List of Stiffeners/Members. The
available columns depend on whether the macro column grid is populated. By default, the
Part Name, Cross Section, Cross Section Name, and Standard/Version columns are
available. Additional columns display when you select a macro from the column grid. Clear a
column check box to hide that column.
List of Stiffeners/Members

 Click a column header to change the sort order for that column.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 352

 Manufacturing Services

 Click the filter in a column header to define arguments that narrow the list of macros in
that group.

 If you do not see one of the columns listed below, click Column Chooser and select
the check box for the hidden column.
Part Name
Displays a list of part names associated with the selected assembly, profile, or member.
Cross Section
Displays the cross-section associated with the part name in the current row.
Cross Section Name
Displays the cross-section name associated with the part name in the current row.
Sections are defined in the reference data. For more information about reference data,
see the Structure Reference Data Guide.
Standard/Version
Displays the standard and the version of the standard that contains the macro definition.

 The commands listed below are unavailable if the macro command grid is empty.
 The software does not populate the macro command grid until you select an assembly, a
profile, or a member either from the Workspace Explorer hierarchy or from the Smart 3D
model. For more information, see Selecting Objects (on page 19).
 When the software populates the command grid, the column headers also display in the
Column Chooser.
Features
End Cut at Start
Displays the macro for the corresponding part before end-cuts remove material from the
profile solid.
End Cut at End
Displays the macro for the corresponding part after end-cuts remove material from the
profile solid.
Macro command grid
Displays the stiffeners and members for the loaded assembly, profile, or member. If a macro
attribute is modified, it displays in the command grid with a yellow background. If a macro is
overwritten (that is, the macro definition is completely changed), the macro has a red
background.
When you select a macro in the command grid, the Macro Editor displays the
following commands on the right side of the Macro Editor.

Categorize
Sorts the macro properties by category.

Alphabetical
Sorts the macro properties alphabetically.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 353

 Manufacturing Services

Search box
Allows you to search for a macro property.
Macro Properties
Displays properties for the selected macro. You can select a different macro type from the
Name list, however the other properties are read-only.
Name - Select a macro type from the list to change the macro for the selected member.
Macro Output Properties
Displays the values for each of the macro output properties. You cannot edit these properties.
Parameters
Displays parameters for the selected macro property. Click a parameter field and type a new
value to modify the parameter.
Display Macro Image
Displays a preview of the macro image so that you can review changes before accepting
them. The macro image automatically updates when you change the macro name and then
click Save.
To display the macro image in a separate, sizable window, drag the macro image to
the Smart 3D window. The software clears the Display Macro Image check box, and the
check box is unavailable until you close the separate macro image window.
Reset
Returns all of the current macro settings to the rule-generated version.
Save
Saves changes to the selected macro.
If you select another macro before saving changes to the current macro, the
software prompts you to save or discard the current changes.

Copy Structure
Provides a tool to generate new plate geometry by copying from an original plate with advanced
plate system marks representing the connected structure. This allows you to produce the
manufacturing data bypassing any problems from the original model data set. This command also
provides a tool to generate a surface from plates that can be taken to GAR and repaired before it
is used for manufacturing data. This command is located on the Tools > StructManufacturing
menu.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 354

 Manufacturing Services

In version 7.4, you must start this command as a custom command using the ProgID
[Link].

Copy Structure Ribbon

Displays the controls used to generate a plate or surface by copying existing geometry.

Properties
Activates the Copy Structure Properties dialog box, which you use to view and modify the
properties of the copy that you are about to place in the model. For more information, see
Copy Structure Properties Dialog Box (on page 357). This option is not available if Action
Type is set to Generate Surface.

Plate Parts
Select the detailed plate parts to copy. You can select the parts in a graphic view or in the
Workspace Explorer.

Select Boundaries
Define boundaries by selecting them graphically either in a graphics view or in the
Workspace Explorer. Seams and frames are allowed as boundaries.
Finish
Displays a dialog box asking if you want to accept or reject the changes. If you click Accept,
the software displays a preview of the template set. Creates the template using the
parameters that you have defined.

Solve Ambiguity

The command switches to Solve Ambiguity automatically if an ambiguous solution

exists after clicking Accept or Finish. For more information, see Solve ambiguous
solution created by selected boundaries (on page 40).
Cancel
Clears the selection.
Accept
Accepts the selection.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 355

 Manufacturing Services

Action Type
Specifies the type of copy to make. The following options are available:
 Generate Plate - Creates a new plate part from the selected plates and boundaries.
 Generate Surface - Creates a new surface from the selected plates and boundaries
based on the selected Plate Side and Surface Type. The new surface is exported to a
SAT file.
 Generate Unfold Data - Creates unfolded data from the selected plate system and
boundaries. The selected surface is exported to a SAT file.
Reference
Specifies the reference hierarchy between the plate system and the plate part for the object.
Up Side
Select the side on which to create the plate. This option is only available if the Action Type is
set to Generate Surface. The following options are available:
 Molded Side
 Anti Molded Side
 Base Side
 Offset Side
Surface Operation
Select the type of surface to place. This option is only available if the Action Type is set to
Generate Surface. The following options are available:
 Detailing Neutral Surface
 Detailing Part Surface
 True Molded Surface
 True Part Surface
 Detailing Molded Surface
SAT File
Specify the SAT file into which to write the surface. This option is only available if the Action
Type is set to Generate Surface or Generate Unfold Data.
Frame System
Contains a list of frame system names that are in the range of plate part. The frame marks are
generated on the unfolded surface, based on the frame system selection. This option is only
available if the Action Type is set to Generate Unfold Data.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 356

 Manufacturing Services

Copy Structure Properties Dialog Box

Specifies the properties for the copy structure that you are editing.
See Also
General Tab (Copy Structure Properties Dialog Box) (on page 357)
Marks Tab (Copy Structure Properties Dialog Box) (on page 357)

General Tab (Copy Structure Properties Dialog Box)

Standard
Name
Specifies the name of the copy structure. If you change the name, then the name rule
changes automatically to User Defined. The default value is Copy of <Old plate system
name(parent of the plate picked)>. If you pick multiple plates, the names are separated by
an underscore (_).
Generic System Name
Specifies the name of the generic system object for the new plate.
Parent System
Select the parent system for the new generic system (if given) or plate (if generic system is not
given).
Parent Assembly
Select the assembly for the new plate parts.
Actual Thickness
Specify the actual thickness value. The default value is the thickness of the selected plate.
Split with Inner Seams
If set to No, the software does not split the new plate along the inner seams. If set to Yes, the
software splits the plate.
See Also
Copy Structure Properties Dialog Box (on page 357)

Marks Tab (Copy Structure Properties Dialog Box)

Displays a list of custom attributes. Typically, the attributes can be set to Apply or Ignore. These
values are codelisted, and they can have a rule ProgID associated to them as the long description.
These attributes are various advanced plate system marks for corresponding connections.
Reference Curve Marks
Displays reference curves on the selected plate parts.
Plate Location Marks
Displays connected plates on the selected plates.
Profile Location Marks
Displays profiles stiffening the selected plates.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 357

 Manufacturing Services

Collar Marks
Displays connected collar plates.
Bracket Marks
Displays connected brackets.
Lap Connection Marks
Displays connected lapped plates.
End Connection Marks
Displays profiles connected on their base or offset surface.
Inner Seam Marks
Displays seams between the selected plate parts.
Outer Seam Marks
Displays seams at the resulting outer contour of selected plates.
See Also
Copy Structure Properties Dialog Box (on page 357)

Generate Frame System from Pin Jig

Generates a frame system based on pin jig properties. The command creates a coordinate
system with the origin at (H0,V0) pin position, and creates frames at the pin rows and columns
along the x-axis and y-axis. Along the z-axis, the frames are created at the pin jig base plane, at
maximum and minimum pin heights as defined in the catalog. This command is located on the
Tools > Manufacturing Services menu.
This command does not generate frames for user-defined pins.

Generate Frame System from Pin Jig Ribbon

Select Pin Jig
Selects a reference pin jig object for generating the frame system.
Name
Displays the name of the frame system.
Parent
Specifies the parent for the pin jig frame system. Select More to select a parent from
workspace or database. For more information, see Select System Dialog Box (on page 360).
Finish
Generates a frame system using the selected pin jig's local coordinate system.

What do you want to do?

 Generate a frame system from Pin Jig (on page 359)

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 358

 Manufacturing Services

Generate a frame system from Pin Jig

1. From the Workspace Explorer, select a pin jig object.

The software highlights the pin jig layout.

2. On the main menu, click Tools > Manufacturing Services > Generate Frame System from
Pin Jig.

The software displays the pin jig ribbon.

3. On the ribbon, select a parent for the pin jig frame system.
4. Click Finish.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 359

 Manufacturing Services

The software creates a coordinate system, and generates the frames at pin positions.

Select System Dialog Box

Displays the systems applicable to the current command.
Look in
Specify where you want to look for the system.
 Select Workspace to look for the system in your defined workspace only.
 Select Database to look for the system in the entire model database.

Shell Plate Unfold Preview

Tools > Shell Plate Unfold Preview (in Molded Forms) or Tools > Manufacturing Services >
Shell Plate Unfold Preview (in Structural Manufacturing) generates a graphic preview of an
unfolded plate shape. This private graphic view displays the frame marks, roll line marks, a
surrounding minimum rectangle with annotated dimensions, an unfolded surface area, the
percentage of material used, and additional attributes.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 360

 Manufacturing Services

Attribute Description

Min Rectangle Length Minimum length of the unfolded plate contour bounding box.

Min Rectangle Width Minimum width of the unfolded plate contour bounding box.

Min Rectangle Area Minimum area of the unfolded plate contour bounding box.

Unfold surface area Active plate contour area.

Percentage of Factor of Unfold surface area related to Min Rectangle Area.

utilization

The attributes listed below display for each contour edge index (Edge1, Edge2,
Edge3, and so on).

3D Girth Length Length of the edge (along the edge length).

Straight Length Minimum distance between the edge end points. Enables you to
see the girth length on the amount of the bending.

Unfold Length Unfolded 3D Girth Length.

3D % Factor Scaling impact on the 3D contour to confirm the unfolding

scaling impact on the edge. The software calculates this value
using the following formula:
3D Factor = (3D Girth Length - Straight Length) / 3D Girth
Length * 100

2D % Factor Scaling impact on the 2D contour to confirm a deformation

impact. The software calculates this value using the following
formula:
2D Factor = (3D Girth Length - Unfold Length) / 3D Girth
Length * 100

Shell Plate Unfold Preview Ribbon

Select Plate System
Select the plate system to preview.
Boundaries
Select the seams, frames, or split knuckles that intersect the selected plate system.
Finish
Click to display the unfolded output of the shell plate.

Solve Ambiguity

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 361

 Manufacturing Services

If the boundaries that you selected can form the object in more than one way, then you have
defined an ambiguous solution. The software prompts you to select one or more solutions.
Reject
Click to reject the plate selection.
Accept
Click to accept the plate selection.
Frame System
Select the coordinate system to use for the unfolding.

1. Select Tools > Shell Plate Unfold Preview in Molded Forms.

-OR-
Select Tools > Manufacturing Services > Shell Plate Unfold Preview in Structural
Manufacturing.
2. Select the plate to unfold.
3. Select the coordinate system from the Frame System.
4. Click Finish.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 362

SECTION 17

Manufacturing Export
Controls export of DSTV and XML manufacturing data.
 Export to Nesting (on page 363)
 Managed Export for Smart Production (on page 365)
 Managed Export for DSTV (on page 365)
 Managed Export (on page 367)

Export to Nesting
Translates the geometry of selected manufacturing data exchange formats and stores this
information in a specified file. The manufacturing data is not saved in the Model database. This
command is located on the Tools > Manufacturing Export menu.
XML is the default manufacturing data format provided with the software and is used by third-party
nesting software. Other formats may be user-defined.
Before finalizing the information, the XML is parsed through an adaptor. The adaptor is a
user-defined rule which parses through the default XML schema and allows you to make
replacements, modifications, and deletions of entries before finalizing the XML output. This allows
customization of the data for different nesting applications.

 For built-up profiles, you can generate the profile XML for the web and flange independently of
one another.
 You can nest webs or flanges as either plates or flat bars.
 Material type, grade, and thickness are included in the output XML.
 Material type is exported appropriately for the needed nesting software.
 If an object has custom properties, those properties are included in the output XML. For
example:
<SMS_CUSTOM_PROPERTIES INTERFACE_NAME="IJUAAssemblyChild">
<SMS_CUSTOM_PROPERTY NAME="Build Method" VALUE="5" UNITS_TYPE="long"
PRIMARY_UNITS="undefined" CODELIST="BuildMethodData"
CODELIST_VALUE="VerticalDrop"/>
<SMS_CUSTOM_PROPERTY NAME="Slot Connectivity" VALUE="4" UNITS_TYPE="long"
PRIMARY_UNITS="undefined" CODELIST="SlotConnectivityData"
CODELIST_VALUE="Double"/>
</SMS_CUSTOM_PROPERTIES>

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 363

 Manufacturing Export

 Custom XML is created for the part the XML represents, for the detailed part, for connected
detailed objects, for holes, bevels, and margins.
 Free edge treatments on profiles and plates are included in the output XML.
For more information about the XML generated, see the documentation delivered to the [Product
Folder]\Shared Content\XML\StructManufacturing\Doc folder.

Output Data Ribbon

Displays the controls used to translate the geometry of selected manufacturing data exchange
formats and store this information in a specified file.
Select each plate manually
Select manufacturing plates and profiles.

Select all MFG parts in current workspace

Automatically selects all manufacturing parts in the workspace.
Finish
Creates the manufacturing data file.
Cancel
Clears all selected manufacturing parts.
Accept
Accepts all selected manufacturing parts.
Output Format
Select the output format for the manufacturing data file.
Output File
Select the name and location of the manufacturing data file.
Individual Output
Indicates that manufacturing data is output for each part. If this check box is left blank, the
manufacturing data is output for the select set. If you choose to output data for each part, the
XML file name is identical to the part. If the file already exists, a serial number is attached to
the file name to make it unique.

Create a MFG data file

1. Click Tools > Struct Manufacturing > Export to Nesting.
2. On the Output Data ribbon, click Select each plate manually .
3. Select manufacturing plate or profile parts.
Click Select all MFG parts in current workspace to select all the manufacturing
parts.
4. Select a value from the Output Format list.
5. Select a value from the Comparison Rule list.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 364

 Manufacturing Export

6. Select a location and name for the output file.

7. Click Finish.

Structural Manufacturing XML Schema

The Structural Manufacturing XML Schema is documented in the Symbols share in the
[Reference Data Folder]\Data\Symbols\XML\StructManufacturing\Doc folder.
The schema is delivered to the Symbols share in the [Reference Data
Folder]\Data\Symbols\XML\StructManufacturing folder.

Profile XML Schema

The Profile XML Schema is documented in the Symbols share in the [Reference Data
Folder]\Data\Symbols\XML\StructManufacturing\Doc folder.
The schema is delivered to the Symbols share in the [Reference Data
Folder]\Data\Symbols\XML\StructManufacturing folder.
See Also
Export to Nesting (on page 363)
Create a MFG Data File (on page 364)

Managed Export for Smart Production

Exports both the DSTV and XML data. This export uses the [Link] default
configuration file. This command is located on the Tools > Manufacturing Export menu.
Smart 3D delivers example configuration files for managed exports to the [Symbol
Share]\SharedContent\StructManufacturing\ManagedExport folder.
This command uses the Managed Export dialog box, automatically specifying the
[Link] file. For more information, see Managed Export Dialog Box (on page
366).

Managed Export for DSTV

Exports the DSTV data for the selected assembly, and manages the .nc1 files that the software
generates. This export uses the [Link] default configuration file. This command is
located on the Tools > Manufacturing Export menu.
Smart 3D delivers example configuration files for managed exports to the [Symbol
Share]\SharedContent\StructManufacturing\ManagedExport folder.
This command uses the Managed Export dialog box, automatically specifying the
[Link] file. For more information, see Managed Export Dialog Box (on page 366).

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 365

 Manufacturing Export

Managed Export Dialog Box

Controls parameters for exporting DSTV and manufacturing XML data for assemblies.
Configuration File
Displays the path and file name for the current configuration file. This configuration file drives
the managed export process. This is a required field for all types of managed exports. For
managed exports for DTSV, Smart Production, and SMS_SCHEMA, the software provides a
default configuration file. For neutral managed exports, you must specify the configuration file.
Click Browse next to the Configuration File box to navigate to the configuration file.
Export Type
Displays the type of data that you are exporting. The list contains options as defined in the
configuration file. You can use this option to organize your export by type of data (plates,
profiles, panels, templates, and so on), by location (host location or satellite location), or any
other category that you require.
Extraction Filter
Filters the entities that display in the Managed Export window. Use the check boxes to
include or exclude items. For example, you could exclude closed items from the list to reduce
the number of items displayed.
Add Row
Adds a blank row to the bottom of the Entities list. You can select new entities to be exported
in this row.
Entities
Displays information about previously exported assemblies.
Process - Indicates whether the block is exported. Select the option to add the block to the
export. Clear the option to avoid exporting the block.
Update - Updates the export.
Extraction - Creates output. The available extraction types are listed below.
New - An assembly that has not been exported.
Partial - A sub-assembly in a larger reference assembly that has been exported.
Full - Reference assemblies that contain sub-assemblies. You can extract partial exports
of sub-assemblies, or a complete export of the reference assembly.
Closed - Removes the row from the Managed Export window. You use this option when
an assembly export is complete.
Reference Assembly - Displays the name of the parent block or assembly.
Assembly - Displays the name of the assembly that the software is processing.
Versioning - Displays the version of the export for the block.
Status - Displays the status of the output.
Output Location - Displays the path and filename of the export .xml file.
Export
Starts the export process based on the selected configuration file.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 366

 Manufacturing Export

Managed Export
Creates a neutral export. This export does not have an associated configuration file. Instead, it
uses the configuration file that you select. This export is intended to be used with custom
configuration files. This command is located on the Tools > Manufacturing Export menu.
Smart 3D delivers example configuration files for managed exports to the [Symbol
Share]\SharedContent\StructManufacturing\ManagedExport folder. You can create your own
export file, but it must follow the format provided in the example files.
This command uses the Managed Export dialog box, but does not automatically specify a .xml
file. For more information, see Managed Export Dialog Box (on page 366).
The S3D Panel Welding & Cutting Export (SmartProductionWeldingConfig) (SDBY033) is a
separately purchasable service from Hexagon PPM that you can add to Smart 3D.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 367

SECTION 18

Nesting Report
The Nesting Report command enables you to review nesting data related to manufacturing
plates and profiles in the Smart 3D model. The data that the software displays is based on the filter
that you apply. Options are also available that enable you to initial, update, and delete nesting
data. The command is delivered in the [Product Folder]\Core\Container\Bin\Assemblies\Release
folder.

Nesting Report Dialog Box (on page 369)

Run the Nesting Report command

1. Open the [Product Folder]\Core\Container\Bin\Assemblies\Release folder, and double-click
[Link].
The software opens the Nesting Report dialog box.
2. Select Custom in the Filter Type list.
3. Use the Filter section to specify which nesting objects you want to view. Applying the filter in
the example limits the nesting objects to plate parts.

Use the AND and OR operators to build multiple filters.

4. Click Apply Filter.

In the Objects panel, the software lists the nesting objects that meet the filter criteria.

5. Select one or more nesting objects in the list.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 368

 Nesting Report

6. Select an action to perform in the Report Type list, and then click Execute Action.
For more information about the available options, see Nesting Report Dialog Box (on
page 369).

Nesting Report Dialog Box

Provides options for reviewing and updating nesting data in the Smart 3D model. The software
opens this dialog box when you run the Nesting Report command. For more information, see
Run the Nesting Report command (on page 368).
Filter
Displays the filter the software uses to retrieve nesting objects. A default filter
(NestingReportFilters - [Link]) is delivered with the software. The .xml file is located in the
[Product
Folder]\3DRefData\SharedContent\StructManufacturing\SMS_SCHEMA\NestingReport
folder.
Apply Filter
Retrieves the nesting data that meets the specified filter criteria.
Save Filter
Saves any changes that you have made to the filter.
Filter Name
Specifies the name of the filter. The default filters defined in the NestingReportFilters -
[Link] file are listed below.
 Nested Plates - Nested object where PartType is equal to Plate.
 All Nested Objects - All nested objects.
 Deleted Profiles - All Deleted Nested Profiles.
 Plate Parts - All Manufacturing Plates.
Filter Type
Specifies the type of filter to use. Available options are:
 System uses a system-defined query.
 SQL uses a SQL query.
 Custom builds the query based on conditions defined in the NestingReportFilters -
[Link] file.
Execute Action
Performs the action specified by Report Type.
Report Type
Identifies the action that the software performs when you click Execute Action. Select one of
the following:
 Delete removes the selected nesting data from the software. The nesting data, the
Nesting tab (on the Manufacturing Plate Part Properties dialog box), and the
relationship with the manufacturing object are deleted together.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 369

 Nesting Report

 Reset initializes the selected nesting data.

 Update regenerates the manufacturing output .xml file. If NestingFilePath is not defined
in the catalog, the software generates the .xml file in the local Temp folder.
 Alma-RemnantReport generates a Remnant report at the machine on which the Alma
nesting system is installed.
DB Server
Specifies the name of the database server.
Site
Specifies the name of the Site database for the active Smart 3D project.
Model
Specifies the name of the active Smart 3D project (model).
Objects
Displays a list of nesting data that meet the criteria of the applied filter.
Nesting Service
Controls the Nesting Service. Select the check box to turn on the service. Turning on this
service requires you to also specify InputXML and OutputXML files. To disable the service,
clear the check box.
InputXML
Specifies the input loopback .xml file that the software passes to the Nesting Service to
update nesting data. This option is available only when select Nesting Service.
Output XML
Specifies the .xml file to which the Nesting Service records results data. This option is
available only when select Nesting Service.
Execute Nesting Service
Runs the Nesting Service using the command arguments defined in the specified input and
output .xml files.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 370

SECTION 19

Check Manufacturability
Tools > Check Manufacturability (Tools > Check Hole in the Hole Management task)
analyzes objects in the current workspace and reports the objects that will be difficult or
impossible to manufacture according to standards defined in the reference data.

Check Manufacturability Ribbon

Provides the following options to check that objects in the model can be manufactured and to
generate production information.
Manufacturability Checking Settings
Shows the rules for the checking process. You can select any or all of the rules. For more
information, see Manufacturability Checking Settings Dialog Box (on page 373).

Check Manufacturability
Starts the checking process. If inconsistencies are found, the message Manufacturability
errors/warnings have been encountered displays.

Show Manufacturability Inconsistencies

Displays the objects with manufacturing issues. The list includes the issue severity, the
assembly name, a description of the assembly, and the name of the rule which detected the
manufacturing issue. For more information, see Show Manufacturability Inconsistencies
Dialog Box (on page 374).
Close
Exits the command.
Submit Job
Displays a message box asking if you want to execute the repair rules subsequently. If you
click Yes, the Schedule Planning Check Manufacturability dialog box displays so that you
can schedule the execution of the repair rules at some other time. For more information, see
Schedule [Task] Dialog Box in the Batch Services User's Guide and the Batch Services Quick
Start Guide.

 Learn more about Intergraph Batch Services in the Batch Services User's Guide and the
Batch Services Quick Start Guide.
 The Submit Job button is enabled only when Batch Services is installed and started on your
computer.
 The data on objects that cannot be manufactured is stored in the session file, not in the model.
Problem objects that apply to the Workspace are retrieved when you select the Check
Manufacturability command.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 371

 Check Manufacturability

What do you want to do?

 Check objects for manufacturability (on page 372)
 Schedule check manufacturability using Batch Services (on page 372)
 View the Manufacturability Checking Settings Dialog Box (on page 373)
 View the Show Manufacturability Inconsistencies Dialog Box (on page 374)

Check objects for manufacturability

1. Select objects for checking in the model or in the Workspace Explorer.
2. Click Tools > Check Manufacturability (Tools > Check Holes in Hole Management).
3. On the ribbon, click Manufacturability Checking Settings .
4. Specify the rules for the checking process.

5. On the ribbon, click Check Manufacturability to start the process.

6. On the ribbon, click Show Manufacturability Inconsistencies .

A list view displays the objects that were found to have manufacturing problems.
7. Select one row of the list at a time to view the inconsistency and solution for an object.
8. Repair the object manually, or click Repair if an Action Tool is available.

Schedule check manufacturability using Batch

Services
1. Select objects for checking in the model or in the Workspace Explorer.
2. Click Tools > Check Manufacturability.
In Hole Management, click Tools > Check Hole.
3. On the ribbon, click Manufacturability Checking Settings .
4. Specify the rules for the checking process.
5. Click Submit Job.
6. Click Yes to schedule the job for another time.
7. Complete the Schedule Check Manufacturability dialog box to configure batch processing,
and then click OK.
The software displays the message, "This job has been scheduled to run on the chosen
server."

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 372

 Check Manufacturability

8. Click OK to dismiss the message.

 For more information about Intergraph Batch Services, see the Batch Services User's Guide
and the Batch Services Quick Start Guide.
 After the job is successfully submitted, you can see the PlanningCheckMfcty_BatchJob.xml
file in the system temp folder (%temp%). This file contains the required information to run the
batch job.
 If any inconsistencies are observed during the execution of the check manufacturability rules
that you selected, information about the name of the object, manufacturability rule ProgID,
and repair rule ProgID are written to the PlanningCheckMfcty_InConsistencies.log file in the
system temp folder (%temp%).

Manufacturability Checking Settings Dialog Box

Sets options for the Check Manufacturability process.
Task List
Displays the list of tasks that contains the Check Manufacturability rules defined in the
catalog. These tasks allow you to filter the check rules based on the selected task in the Task
List.
Rule
Select which rules to process check manufacturability against. There are different rules based
on the task selected in the Task List option. Contact Intergraph Support
[Link] for help with customizing the XML data file.
 The Hole Management manufacturability checking process includes checking the
distance between hole traces; the distance between the hole trace and plate edges
(outside), brackets and coamings; and the distance between the hole trace and
seamlines, profiles, and openings. Because hole traces can affect the stress of the deck
or bulkhead on which they are placed, it is important to check holes before cutting them.
For more information about hole management checks, see Check Hole Rules in the Hole
Management Reference Data Guide.
 The Piping manufacturability checking process includes software simulators for cutting,
bending, and coating pipe. An XML data file controls the piping simulators. You can
customize this file to reflect the requirements, standards, and equipment of your facility.
For more information about piping checks, see Piping Check Manufacturability in the
Piping Reference Data Guide.
 The Planning manufacturability checking process includes software simulators for
planning joints, weld bevels, and slot types on structure. You can customize the planning
simulators rules to reflect the requirements, standards, and equipment of your facility. For
more information about planning checks, see Check Manufacturability Rules in Planning
Reference Data.
 The Structural Detailing checking process includes tee weld chamfer checks based on
changes to plate thickness, slot opening angles, and end cut type. For more information,
see Check Manufacturability Rules in Structural Detailing Reference Data.
 The Structural Manufacturing checking process includes margin check on the same
port, manufacturing plate and profile check, and shrinkage check.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 373

 Check Manufacturability

ProgID
Programming ID of the rule that found the inconsistency. Matches the Rule ProgID of the rule
on the Show Manufacturability Inconsistencies Dialog Box (on page 374) .
Select All
Specifies all available rules.
Clear All
Clears all available rules. You can select rules individually in the list view by clicking the boxes
beside the rule names.
Stop checking if a manufacturability error is found
Halts rule processing upon error detection.

Show Manufacturability Inconsistencies Dialog Box

Displays and repairs inconsistencies found by the rules of the Check Manufacturability process.
Inconsistencies
A list view of all inconsistencies. Click the button in the far left column to see the possible
solution. Solution descriptions are listed below.

Warning
A minor manufacturability problem has been found. The problem does not have to be
repaired.
Error
A major manufacturability error has been found. The error must be repaired.
Object or Assembly
Name of the object with an inconsistency.
Description

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 374

 Check Manufacturability

Description from the rule of the inconsistency

Rule ProgID
Programming ID of the rule that found the inconsistency. Matches the ProgID of the rule on
the Manufacturability Checking Settings Dialog Box (on page 373) .
Action
The type of action that is available in the software to repair the inconsistency. Blank if no
software action is available and the repair is done manually.
 COM Repair Object - Software code that can be run.
 SQL Script - SQL Script that can be run.
Action Tool
ProgID of the COM Repair Object or name of the SQL Script. Blank if Action is blank.
Solutions
Describes the details of an inconsistency and the repair that you need to perform for one
selected object from the list.
Repair
Runs the Action Tool to perform a repair, if one is available for the rule.
Fit
Fits one or more selected objects from the list view in the active graphic view.
Clear
Clears all inconsistencies and closes the dialog box. You must click Check
Manufacturability again to display the remaining inconsistencies.

Piping Inconsistencies Solution Messages

Pipe and Spool Length Messages
Pipe is too long
Pipe exceeds standard ordering length for pipe of this size, as defined in the pipe catalog. For
bent pipes the length check includes any extra pipe that had to be added at the ends or
between bends for clamping (see "Extra pipe must be added at end…" and "Insufficient
straight pipe between bends…" messages below.). If the pipe is bent, the elongation of the
pipe during bending will be taken into account when reporting this error.
Pipe is too short
Pipe length is less than the company standard for pipes welded on both ends.
Spool is too long
The overall length of the spool exceeds company standards. The length is measured along
the main axis of the spool.
Spool is too wide
The "width" in the spool is measured perpendicular to the main axis. This message indicates
that the width exceeds company standards. Checks that the surface treatment tank size is
done separately.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 375

 Check Manufacturability

Pipe Bending Messages

Bend angle too large
A pipe bend exceeds the maximum bend angle that the bending machine can make.
Bend angle too small
A pipe bend angle is less than the company standard for bends. That is, the pipe is almost
straight.
Bends have different radii, not allowed
Pipe has two or more bends, and they do not all have the same bend radius specified.
Bend radius too large or points too close together
The pipe geometry is physically impossible. This is an extreme case of the "insufficient
straight pipe between bends…" problem. This problem may be fixed by moving a bend or
using a smaller bend radius.
Extra pipe must be added at end, pipe end too short for bending machine to clamp onto
The bending machine needs a sufficiently long straight section at the start and end of the pipe
to clamp onto (start), and support (end). This is a warning; bending can be done with a longer
piece of pipe, with the extra pipe cut off afterwards.
Insufficient straight pipe between bends for bending machine to clamp onto
The bending machine needs a sufficiently long, straight section between bends to clamp the
pipe. This problem may be fixed by moving a bend, by using a smaller bend radius, or by
splitting the pipe and putting a joint between the bends.
No pipe bending machine for pipe diameter and bend radius
None of the pipe bending machines listed in the pipe shop XML data file have bend dies listed
for the pipe diameter and bend radius of this pipe.
Pipe hits machine or floor during bending
The pipe cannot be bent because the free end or part of the pipe would hit the bending
machine or the shop floor during bending. The simulator will have evaluated bending the pipe
starting from either end before reporting this error, and will have checked all available bending
machines with bend dies of the right size.
If the pipe has flanges on either end, and the Flange Welding check option has
been selected, the simulator also checks for attached flange (if any) hitting the machine during
bending.
Pipe and Spool Complexity
Too many bends in pipe
The number of bends in the pipe exceeds the company standard. This limit is normally set to
maintain dimensional accuracy standards because of accumulated error during bending.
Too many branches
The number of branches off of a main exceeds the company standard limit.
Too many planes in spool
The spool is difficult to fabricate because it is geometrically complex. That is, the number of
independent planes exceeds the company standard for spools.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 376

 Check Manufacturability

Treatment Tank
Spool too large for treatment tank
A spool that requires galvanization or other tank treatment is too large for the tank.
No treatment tank found for <treatment_name> required by pipe spool
No treatment tank has been given in [Link] for the treatment type called out by the
pipe specification. This is an error in the editing of the [Link] file, not a design error
in the piping.
Individual pipes in spool require different tank treatments
A pipe spool is composed of multiple pipes that reference different pipe specs, and those pipe
specs call out different, conflicting tank treatments.
Flange Welding
Flange hits machine or floor during bending, weld after bending
Flanges cannot be welded on the pipe before bending because they would hit the bending
machine or the shop floor during bending. The simulator will have evaluated bending the pipe
starting from either end before reporting this error, and will have checked all available bending
machines with bend dies of the right size.
Pipe too long for automatic flange welding
This is a warning that a straight pipe with flanges on one or both ends is too long to be put
through the automatic flange welder, and must be manually welded.
Pipe too short for automatic flange welding
This is a warning that a straight pipe with flanges on one or both ends is too short to be put
through the automatic flange welder, and must be manually welded.
Inside Grinding and Painting
Pipe too long for inside coating
A pipe requires internal coating, but the pipe is too long for the available Pipe Internal Sprayer.
No internal sprayer found for inside coating
A pipe requires internal coating (as defined in the pipe spec entry in the XML file), but there is
no Pipe Internal Sprayer available for the required coating material or for the pipe diameter.
Inaccessible for internal coating
A pipe that requires internal coating after bending has two or more bends. The sections
between the bends are inaccessible for coating.
Bend on branch not allowed
A branch weld is inaccessible for grinding after welding because of a bend in the branch pipe.
Branch too far from end of main
Grinding cannot be done on a branch connection because it is too far from the end of the pipe.

Planning Inconsistencies Solution Messages

First Meet Check
First Meet assembly does not match the Planning Joint assembly

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 377

 Check Manufacturability

The planning joint is not located under the assembly containing the parts joined by the
planning joint.
Hierarchy Check
Planning joint is not in an assembly that contains the two joined parts
The planning joint is located neither under the assembly containing the parts joined by the
planning joint nor under a parent assembly/block of the assembly.
Physical Connection Check
Weld name is unknown
The weld bevel of a physical connection is not known because of a change to its associated
planning joint.
Production Equipment Check
Production Equipment is not assigned to the assembly
The assembly has no production equipment assigned or the assigned production equipment
is not compatible and cannot perform the weld.
Weld Side Check
The Weld Side of the Planning Joint is incorrect
The weld side of the planning joint is incorrect.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 378

SECTION 20

Pre-nesting
Pre-nesting shapes do not use the physical connections to define the length of plates, profiles,
and members. Instead, they use the connected part mounting angle to define the length. For
profiles, the system allows you to control some corrections to the pre-nesting length of the profile.
Pre-nesting is a plug-in service for Structural Manufacturing. You control the settings associated
with pre-nesting by bulk loading the appropriate files. For more information, see Pre-nesting Setup
(on page 386).
After you enable pre-nesting, you can create the following objects with the light (undetailed) plate
and profile parts:
 Marking lines
 Shrinkage
 Margins
 Manufacturing plates
 Manufacturing profiles
 Service manager
 Weld Compensation
Manufacturing profiles use a plug-in rule to control the end-cut impact.

Pre-nesting Manufacturing Plates

If the manufacturing type is set to Pre-nesting, you can select either a light or detailed part for
manufacturing. The software uses the same manufacturing process for both light and detailed
parts with the following exceptions:

Light Parts
In production nesting, the software uses the detailed plate part to retrieve the neutral surface and
the contour information. When you detail a part, Smart 3D trims that part to the bounding structure.
This process causes the neutral surface and the contours to be trimmed to the bounding
elements.
With pre-nesting, the software uses the light part to get the neutral surface and its contours. In this
case, Smart 3D does not trim the contours to the bounding elements.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 379

 Pre-nesting

1. Molded Surface
2. Thickness Direction
3. Neutral Surface
4. Thickness Direction

Neutral surface from light part

1. Detailed Part
2. Neutral Surface
3. Thickness Direction

Neutral surface from detailed part

1. Neutral Surface
2. Thickness Direction
3. Molded Surface
4. Thickness Direction

Neutral surface from light part

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 380

 Pre-nesting

1. Neutral Surface
2. Thickness Direction
3. Molded Surface
4. Thickness Direction

Neutral surface from detailed part

Logical Connections
Production nesting uses physical connections to retrieve the bevel information from the model and
carry that information to the edge. With pre-nesting, the software stores the logical connections in
the manufacturing bevel objects.

Bevel Offset Correction Calculation

In production nesting, the software calculates the attachment angle directly from the plate upside
surface and the surface that touches the bounding structure element. Smart 3D calculates the
bevel offset correction from this attachment angle, the physical connection bevel properties, and
the plate thickness values.
In pre-nesting, the software always calculates the bevel offset correction for every contour edge to
the long point using the following algorithm.
1. Get the edge direction and plate upside surface normal.
2. Calculate the cross product of those vectors to get the material direction.
3. Get the logical connection from the bevel and the connected ports and connected structural
plate and profile parts.
4. Get all of the ports of the bounding plate or profile part.
5. For each face port in the port collection:
a. Project the input point onto the bounding surface in the material direction.
 For plates, the software projects the point onto the base and offset surfaces.
 For profiles, the software projects onto all lateral faces, except the base and offset
end caps.
b. Determine whether the point is projected towards the material direction or away from the
material direction.
 If the point is projected towards the material direction, the software takes the farthest
bounding point and calculates the negative bevel offset correction value.
 If the point is projected away from the material direction, the software takes the
closest bounding point and calculates the positive bevel offset correction value.
c. If the software finds a point at which the minimum or maximum bevel correction is
calculated, Smart 3D stores that point for further processing. The software also stores the
bevel correction value.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 381

 Pre-nesting

6. Calculate the attachment angle from the plate upside surface and the touching surface of the
bounding structure elements.
7. Adjust the bevel correction value to the long point based on the attachment angle and plate
thickness values.

Varying Bevel Calculation

If a deck plate is bounded by a shell plate, the mounting angle changes along the plate edge
length based on the hull curvature. In such a case, the software automatically applies the varying
bevel on the manufacturing part of the light part. The software splits the edge with the associated
logical connection at a few intermediate positions and calculates the attachment at the midpoint of
each segment. If the change of attachment angle varies more than the user-specified value
(typically 3 degrees per meter), then the software splits the edge, and each segment has its own
attachment angle. This behavior is similar to detailing the part and its physical connections.

Feature Cuts
In production nesting, the software applies feature cuts after unfolding the plate parts. In the
pre-nesting solution, the software does not apply feature cuts.

Margins and Shrinkages

In both production nesting and pre-nesting, the software applies margins and shrinkages on the
plate part. There are no changes in this functionality.

Pre-nesting Manufacturing Profiles

If the manufacturing type is set to Pre-nesting, you can select a light or detailed part for
manufacturing. The software uses the same manufacturing process for both light and detailed
pipes with the following exceptions:

Using Light Part

In production nesting, the software uses the detailed profile part to retrieve landing curve and
end-cut feature information. When Smart 3D details a part, it trims that part to the bounding
structure. This means that the software trims the landing curve to the bounding elements. The
landing curve is extended to the extreme range of the feature, and the end-cut features are
imposed on the unfolded feature solid. The software gets the contour information for the web and
flange from the resulting Boolean solid.
With Pre-nesting, the software uses the light part to get the landing curve information. Because of
this, the contours are not trimmed to the bounding elements, and there are no end cuts applied on
the profile part ends.

Using Logical Connections

Production nesting uses physical connections to retrieve the bevel information from the model and
carry that information to the edge. With pre-nesting, the software stores the logical connections in
the manufacturing bevel objects.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 382

 Pre-nesting

Bevel Offset Correction Calculation

In production nesting, the software extends the landing curve beyond the profile solid and trims
the ends by feature cuts. This technique also assigns physical connection and corresponding
bevel properties to the resulting edge. In the post-processing stage after unfolding, the software
computes bevel offsets for each edge and makes necessary corrections by offsetting the contour
curve according to the bevel properties.
In pre-nesting, the software always calculates bevel offset correction for every contour edge to the
long point using the following algorithm. This algorithm is used for both light and detailed parts.
1. Get the landing curve end point at the given end.
2. Get the profile cross section orientation vectors ( X and Y ) at the end. Evaluate the Z-direction
by crossing the X and Y vectors.
3. Set the Z-direction as the material direction that points towards the material side of the profile
part.

1. Bounding Plate Parts

2. Light Profile Part shown in web left plane
3. Material Direction
4. Material Direction
5. Supporting Plate
6. Landing Curve
4. Create a plane at the landing curve end point with the Z vector as the plane normal.
5. Intersect this plane with the profile part geometry (before any feature cuts are applied ) to get
the edges corresponding to the cross section shape.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 383

 Pre-nesting

6. Get all of the start points of the previous edges. These points represent the vertices of the
cross section at a given position.

1. Cross section plane at the end of the landing curve

2. Vertex Points
7. Get the logical connection from the face port and the connected ports and connected
structural plate or profile parts.
8. Get all of the ports of the bounding plate or profile part.
9. For each face port in the port collection:
 Check the direction of the port surface. If the port surface is not pointing towards the
material direction, the software does not use this surface.
 Project each cross section vertex point, which is calculated above, onto the bounding
surface in the material direction.
 For plates, the software projects the point onto the base and offset surfaces.
 For profiles, the software projects the point onto all lateral faces except base and
offset end caps.

1. Bounding surfaces upon which the software projects the vertex points
 Verify whether the point is projected towards the material direction or away from the
material direction.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 384

 Pre-nesting

 If the point is projected towards the material direction, the software takes the closest
bounding point and calculates the negative bevel offset correction value.
 If the point is projected away from the material direction, the software takes the farthest
bounding point and calculates the positive bevel offset correction value.
10. Store the bevel offset value in the manufacturing bevel object. The software then uses that
bevel object to make the bevel correction in the post-processing stage.

1. Manufacturing Profile Shape

2. Profile Length

Feature Cuts
In production nesting, Smart 3D applies feature cuts after unfolding the profile parts. In
pre-nesting, the software does not apply feature cuts.

Margins and Shrinkages

In both production nesting and pre-nesting, Smart 3D applies margins and shrinkages on the
profile part. There are no changes in this functionality.

Handling Free End Cuts

When a profile part is detailed in Structural Detailing, the software automatically runs the detailing
rules to generate free end cuts at the free ends (ends which are not bounded by structure). In the
production nesting solution, the software extends the landing curve and places end-cuts on the
profile end. This reduces the profile length according to the end cut feature dimensions. In some
situations, end cuts extend the profile part beyond the supported surface of the profile.
In pre-nesting, the profile is not detailed and end-cuts are generated by default. Because of this,
the profile length reported in pre-nesting is greater than the value reported in production nesting in
most free end cases.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 385

 Pre-nesting

Pre-nesting Setup
1. Bulk load the following Excel workbooks to the site and SITE schema databases in Add,
Modify and Delete mode:
[Product
Folder]\ShipCatalogData\BulkLoad\DataFiles\StructManufacturing\Pre-Nesting\AllStructMfg
[Link]
[Product
Folder]\ShipCatalogData\BulkLoad\DataFiles\StructManufacturing\Pre-Nesting\StructMfgCu
[Link]
2. Click Yes when prompted with the following message box.

3. Open Project Management, right-click the model you are working in, and select Properties.
4. Select the appropriate Pre-nesting Process value on the General tab of the Ship
Properties dialog box. The available options include:
Pre-nesting (from Molded Forms definition)
 Allows selection of light parts.
Pre-nesting (from Detailing definition, if applicable)
 Allows selection of both light and detailed parts.
 Manufacturing parts use detailed part and physical connections (if available) as input.
Production nesting
 Allows selection of only detailed parts.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 386

APPENDIX A

Structural Manufacturing Error Log

Enable
Controls registry flags and registry values that enable or disable certain features in the Structural
Manufacturing task.
This utility is delivered by default to the following location:
<Product Folder>\StructManufacturing\Client\Bin\[Link]
When you close the utility, all changes are saved to the registry. The next time you start the utility,
your new settings display.
See Also
Shrinkage Tab (Structural Manufacturing Error Log Enable Dialog Box) (on page 387)
Part Monitor Tab (Structural Manufacturing Error Log Enable Dialog Box) (on page 388)
Service Manager Tab (Structural Manufacturing Error Log Enable Dialog Box) (on page 389)
Unfolding Tab (Structural Manufacturing Error Log Enable Dialog Box) (on page 390)
Performance Tab (Structural Manufacturing Error Log Enable Dialog Box) (on page 390)
Geometry Tab (Structural Manufacturing Error Log Enable Dialog Box) (on page 393)

Shrinkage Tab (Structural Manufacturing Error Log

Enable Dialog Box)
Enables or disables logging of data related to shrinkage rules.
Enable Shrinkage Rule logging
Turns on or off the logging of shrinkage rule information. By default this option is not selected.
Assembly Shrinkage Rule log file name
Indicates the location of the log file. By default, this is
[Drive]:\Temp\[Link].
Part-Assembly based Shrinkage Rule log file name
Indicates the location of the log file. By default this is
[Drive]:\Temp\[Link].

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 387

 Structural Manufacturing Error Log Enable

Part Monitor Tab (Structural Manufacturing Error Log

Enable Dialog Box)
Controls various features of the Part Monitor. For more information, see Part Monitor (on page
274).
Part Monitor Attribute Viewer will take up <fraction> of the window
Indicates the ratio of Part Monitor to total screen. This is calculated from the Part Monitor's
usual position on the right side of the window. The default value is 1/4.
Activate Part Editor
Indicates whether the Part Editor is available. By default, this option is not selected.
Include GUIDs in reports
Indicates whether GUID data is included with the rest of the RAD data. The GUIDS always
change which can cause confusion if you are using a comparison engine to look for very
specific problems in the saved or loaded data. By default, this option is not selected.
Dump SHA file
This option is not currently available.
RAD Debug Reporting
Indicates whether the RAD data for RAD objects and attributes is dumped just before the RAD
objects are converted back to Geom2D objects for persistence. This confirms that the
attributes loaded are the same attributes as what was saved, and proves that persistence is
working. You can use this to track down any problems. By default, this option is not selected.
Use System Temp
Indicates whether the data is forced to the System %Temp% folder on the client computer.
This option is not currently available.
RAD Object Report path
Specifies the path that the software uses for writing the RAD Debug Reporting data. By
default, this box is blank.

Detailed performance tracking

Enable All Performance Tracking
Indicates whether all of the performance tracking options are selected. By default, this option
is not selected.
Master Load-time
Indicates whether over-all performance numbers are tracked. This option is required to enable
any of the other Detailed performance tracking options. By default, this option is not
selected.
Symbols
Indicates whether performance times for the placement of symbols, rotation, scaling, moving,
and so on are tracked. By default, this option is not selected.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 388

 Structural Manufacturing Error Log Enable

Supporting Functions
Indicates whether performance times for the supporting functions are tracked. Supporting
functions are the required functions that do not fit into any of the other categories. For
example:
 Finding points on objects, end-points, start-points, and center-points
 Getting system settings and selector rule options
 Setting up and activating layers
 Managing styles
 Grouping and ungrouping objects
By default, this option is not selected
Get XML Data
Indicates whether performance times are tracked for getting the XML data and processing it
before it is loaded. By default, this option is not selected.
Annotations
Indicates whether performance times are tracked for the placement of annotations, rotation,
scaling, moving, and so on. By default, this option is not selected.
RAD Functions
Indicates whether performance times are tracked for RAD functions. By default, this option is
not selected.
Load-time Drawing
Indicates whether performance times are tracked for drawing data in the Part Monitor,
Annotation Editor, or Part Editor. Examples include drawing lines, arcs, b-splines, circles,
contours, markings, annotations, and so on. By default, this option is not selected.
Attributes
Indicates whether performance times are tracked for setting attributes on all RAD objects.
This includes contours, markings, symbols, annotations, dimensions, and so on. By default,
this option is not selected.

Service Manager Tab (Structural Manufacturing Error

Log Enable Dialog Box)
Controls options for Manufacturing Service Manager. For more information, see Manufacturing
Service Manager (on page 319).
Manufacturing Service Manager Trace
Indicates whether the Manufacturing Service Manager process log is generated. By default,
this option is not selected.
Output file name
Specifies the log file name and location for the Manufacturing Service Manager trace. By
default, this value is [Drive]:\Temp\[Link].

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 389

 Structural Manufacturing Error Log Enable

Unfolding Tab (Structural Manufacturing Error Log

Enable Dialog Box)
Controls options for enabling or disabling the unfolding option.
Get Neutral Surface Topology using
Overrides the options selected in the Manufacturing Plate (on page 212) command. As part of
survivability, Structural Manufacturing uses various surfaces for unfolding. By default, this
value is set to Detailing Neutral Surface.

SNU
SNU unfold dump
Indicates whether the SNU unfold information is tracked. By default, this option is not
selected.
Generate single surface
Indicates whether all the patches (surfaces) that are on the neutral surface are merged into a
single b-spline surface and sent as an input to SNU. By default, this option is not selected.
Dump output folder
Specifies the root folder in which the software generates all of the curve and surface data
passed to the SNU unfolding algorithm. The software creates a subfolder at this location with
the plate name as the folder name. This data can be useful for the SNU developer to debug
any problems in their algorithm. By default, this option is [Drive]:\Temp\SNUOutput.

GSTracker Options
MfgPlate/MfgProfile unfolding semantic log
Indicates whether to omit user-defined (custom) texts in the manufacturing plate or
manufacturing profile unfolding semantic log files.

Performance Tab (Structural Manufacturing Error Log

Enable Dialog Box)
Controls options for logging performance numbers for various functions and modules.

Tracks the time taken by critical functions while creating Manufacturing objects
Log to file
Indicates whether the log file is created. Performance numbers are not saved unless this
option is selected. By default, this option is not selected.
Overwrite file
Indicates whether the log file is over-written each time the Structural Manufacturing Tracker is
run and writes to the file. If not selected, the data is appended to the file. If selected, the file is

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 390

 Structural Manufacturing Error Log Enable

erased and new data is written to the file each time. By default, this option is not selected.
Print Summary of function calls
Indicates whether the summary of the function calls at the end of a given block of code is
written to the log file. By default, this option is not selected.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 391

 Structural Manufacturing Error Log Enable

The following example shows the summary in red:

Output File name

Specifies the file name and location for the performance log. By default, this value is
C:\Temp\[Link]

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 392

 Structural Manufacturing Error Log Enable

Geometry Tab (Structural Manufacturing Error Log

Enable Dialog Box)
Controls options for geometry.
Neutral Surface Topology Diagnostics Dump
Indicates whether the Structural Detailing GetNeutralSurfaceTopology function is called by
the Structural Manufacturing task to get the neutral surface and contour information. If this
option is selected, the software creates a subfolder in the %TEMP% path with the time stamp.
This data can be useful to the Detailing team to analyze problems with their code. By default,
this option is not selected.
Geometry Topology Trace Operations
Specifies how the geometry and topology functions handle logging. All inputs and outputs are
written to a subfolder in the %TEMP% folder. This information is useful for the Manufacturing
and Geometry and Topology teams to analyze any failures that occur. By default, this option is
set to No dump.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 393

APPENDIX B

2D Symbol Logging Settings

Sets debug registry keys for Middle Marine RAD Symbols. These symbols are used by Molded
Forms, Structural Detailing, and Structural Manufacturing. This utility runs independently of Smart
3D.
The [Link] file is delivered to the [Product
Folder]\Core\Container\Bin\Assemblies\Release folder by default.
Task
Indicates the task for which you are loading the .xml file. Depending on the task you select
(Molded Forms, Structural Detailing, or Structural Manufacturing), the software loads the
appropriate data into the grid view.
Disable All Log
Indicates whether the grid view is available. If this option is selected, the grid view is
unavailable, and the software deletes all of the associated registry entries when you click
Finish.
Default
Indicates whether the software loads the values from the defaultdebugkey node in the
[Link] file into the Debug Key column of the grid view.
Symbol Type
Displays the symbol project name from the .xml file. This value can vary depending on the
value in the Task box. You cannot edit this value.
Symbol Name
Displays the symbol prog ID name from the .xml file. This value can vary depending on the
value in the Task box. You cannot edit this value.
Debug Key
Provides a list of the keys from the symbol debug key node. This list can vary depending on
the value in the Task box. Select a value from the list.
Browse
Navigates to the .xml file to load into the grid view. Typically, this is the
[Link] file, which is located in the [Product
Folder]\CommonShip\Environment\Xml\Include folder.
Finish
Writes the data displayed in the grid view to the registry.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 394

APPENDIX C

Alma Act/Cut Nesting

Smart 3D provides export to and import from Alma act/cut nesting software. XML data for
manufacturing plate parts, created with Manufacturing Plate , are exported to act/cut. In
act/cut, the plate parts are nested on standard mill plate sizes, and plate remnants are maintained
for future nesting. Finalized nesting XML data is then exported from act/cut and re-imported to
Smart 3D. Smart 3D maintains the nesting status of the plates.
Alma act/cut (SKBY485AV-0306A or SKBY486AV-A306A) is a separately-purchasable third-party
product available from Intergraph.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 395

Glossary
abaft
Toward the stern of a ship, behind, further aft than.
abstract part
A part that is only defined by a partial specification and that cannot be materially provided by the
organization that defines the specification.
access holes
An opening cut in the structure of a ship to permit entering or leaving various compartments.
Active Template Library (ATL)
Set of class templates and wizards supplied with Microsoft C++ Version 5.0 and later. You can use
an ATL when you create ActiveX controls and any other type of object that uses the Component
Object Model (COM). Using an ATL is generally preferred over Microsoft Foundation Classes
(MFC), because the implementations are smaller, easier to use, and more closely tied to the COM
model.
aft
Toward, at, or near the stern.
after body
The hull from aft of the midship section.
aftermost
Nearest the stern.
angle
The circular measurement taken from the intersection of two pipes at a turn or branch.
approval state
Recorded state of acceptance of information contained in objects within the database. The
approval states indicate a level of confidence in the information stored in the database and govern
your ability to alter specific data about a product.
arrangement (accommodation)
Those components of a system arranged in three-dimensional space with accurate dimensional
representation for installation. Various types include electrical, HVAC, machinery, outfitting, and
piping.
attribute
A single type of non-graphics information that is stored about an object such as diameter or end
preparation.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 396

 Glossary

auto-nesting
Automatic selection and location of various shapes and sizes of steel plate parts to fit on a
standard steel plate, minimizing scrap while optimizing cutting time and minimizing thermal
distortion.
axis
An imaginary line used to define the orientation of a system or object normally defined in terms of
an x-, y-, and z-axis. Some 3-D graphic objects have an associated axis used to define the center
or axis for rotations.
basic design
Engineering definition of the model and its systems.
bending
Process of conforming a plate to the hull surface. A bending process can be either simple (bent in
one direction) or compound (bent in multiple directions). The software must minimize compound
bending requirements.
bill of material (BOM)
Hierarchical decomposition of a product into constituent assemblies and parts. Specific types of
BOMs exist (for example, an EBOM is a bill of material from the point of view of an engineering
department; an MBOM is a bill of material from the point of view of manufacturing).
brace
A diagonal member used to stiffen a framework.
built ships
Complete database of NGC information after completion of the ship contract.
built-up member
A member built from multiple standard shapes to create a single, usually stronger, member.
bulkload
The process by which reference data in Microsoft Excel workbooks is loaded into the Catalog
database.
catalog
Repository of information about components and materials used in construction. When you use
catalog parts in the model, the software places an occurrence of the catalog part in the project.
This occurrence is a copy of the actual catalog part.
Catalog database
The database that contains the reference data. Each model database can reference a different
Catalog database.
ceiling
Overhead design of the cabin area, including distribution systems for power, water, and
ventilation.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 397

 Glossary

chain
A set of continuous and tangent segments.
change history
Process of recording information such as who, when, and why for any given modification.
change management
Software features or manual procedures for managing the consequence of change. For example,
software can support a change management feature to report drawings that need updating as a
result of a change in a 3-D model.
change propagation
Ability of the software to intelligently modify dependent design information to reflect change in a
higher order object.
class
Grouping of individual objects that share some very significant, common characteristics.
class rule check
Verification that the developing design meets the rules of a particular classification society, such
as ABS, Lloyd's, or DNV.
Class Rules
Classification Society Design Rules.
classification folder
A folder in the Catalog hierarchy that contains part classes. Classification folders are one level
above part classes. The ClassNodeType and R-ClassNodeDescribes sheets in the Microsoft
Excel workbooks define the classification folders.
codelist
A set of acceptable values for a particular property that can be referred to by an index number or
selected in a combo box. For example, the codelist for the material specification allows you to
select from a set of standard entries, such as ASTM A183-F316 Stainless Steel.
commodity code
A user-defined code that provides an index to parts in a catalog.
commodity item
A standard component found in a manufacturer catalog (an off-the-shelf component).
component
Physical part that a feature generates.
concurrent access
Ability of the software to allow multiple users to simultaneously access and modify the design of a
model.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 398

 Glossary

consolidated tasks
A collection of tasks that can be run in batch. For example, the software allows you to extract a set
of drawings immediately or to schedule the batch extraction for a future time.
constraints
A logical restriction that controls how part symbols' ports relate to each other and to reference
ports. There are four constraints: parallel, perpendicular, coincident, and distance.
contract
A Work Breakdown Structure object representing a scope of work, usually performed by an
external supplier. The contract is related to a project and appears in the Work Breakdown
Structure hierarchy.
control point
A point that is used to control the shape of a NURBS (non-uniform rational basis spline) curve or
surface. Curves have a one-dimensional array of control points, while surfaces have a
two-dimensional array.
coordinate
The location of a point along the X-, Y-, or Z-axis.
coordinate system
A geometric relation used to denote the location of points in the model. The most common
coordinate system is the rectangular coordinate system, whereby points are located by traversing
the X-, Y-, and Z-axes of the model. Normally, coordinate systems have their origin defined as
0,0,0.
cope
To cut out the top or bottom flanges and possibly the web so that one member frames into
another.
cover plate
A plate used in building up flanges, in a built-up member, to give greater strength and area, or for
protection.
cross section
The shape of a member when viewed along the member line.
cutback
An axial offset that typically represents the distance from a member centerline to its face.
Cutbacks are used to account for the difference between how a structure is modeled and
constructed in terms of lengths of members and quantities of materials.
cutting plane
A plane that cuts through an object.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 399

 Glossary

damage records
Data relating to the damage and repair of structure or components that occurred during or after
construction of a model.
data interchange
Capability to output the design, or portions of the design, in a standard format for use or movement
to another computer software system.
database
Repository for the product model data. The database contains information to describe individual
objects in the data model and the relationships between objects as appropriate.
database backup
Process of recording a backup copy of the complete database or the incremental changes after
the date that the last complete copy was created.
database break and recovery
Utilities used to restore a database after files are corrupted.
database copy
Functionality to copy large collections of model objects from one design project to another design
project.
database management
Functionality related to managing a product model database.
database monitor record
Transactions that occur in order to provide database (DB) recovery after a stop in response with a
minimum of lost data.
degree
The highest polynomial factor in the curve or surface mathematical definition. A line is a degree 1
curve, while a cubic B-spline is a degree 3 curve.
degree of freedom
An allowable direction of movement, either translation or rotation. There are six possible degrees
of freedom (DOFs): translation X, Y, and Z, and rotation RX, RY, and RZ.
design alternative
Difference in a design represented by a separate version. A design alternative can be a new
design prepared as a proposed change, or one of several elective options that the builder or
customer selects. Each design alternative has an identification assigned so you can uniquely refer
to the design alternatives.
design approval log
Record of review and approval of parts of the design.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 400

 Glossary

design data auto input

Automation in loading existing design data into a new design database.
design documents
Drawings, sketches, material lists, procedures, and so forth that are generated during the design
phase.
design object
Any object with properties that you can select. A design object can be related to one or more
contracts of different types, but related only to one contract of a given type.
design progress check
Analysis of the content of the design to some metric unit that gives an idea of the degree of
completion.
design review
Functionality to support rapid viewing of the design and markup of features with comments.
design service
Any general system services related to the design function.
design standard
Feature or object used in model design that has been determined to the normal or approved way
of accomplishing a design requirement. In the context of computer software, the term refers to
computer functionality to support standards, not the standard itself.
detail schedule
Lowest level of schedule used to manage and track work progress.
distributed systems
Systems consisting of sequential parts with a distributive characteristic (for example, pipes
distribute fluids, HVAC distributes air, cabling distributes power, and structure distributes loads).
distribution systems
Term synonymous and used interchangeably with the term distributed systems.
documentation
Drawings and other records that you must produce to document, obtain approval, or build the
design.
drawing tool
Tool that helps in the process of creating, modifying, or manipulating objects. Examples are
PinPoint and SmartSketch.
easting
A term that describes an east coordinate location in a coordinate system.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 401

 Glossary

edge
A topological object that represents a trimmed curve bounded by a start and end vertex.
edge distance
The distance from the center of a bolt or rivet to the edge of a plate or flange.
equipment catalog
Catalog of equipment geometry and limited properties that the software uses to identify and
visualize equipment and its placement in the model. The catalog is not the source for the total
specification and ordering data for the object.
external appendages
External structure attached to the hull, such as the propeller nozzle, shaft struts, bilge keel, and so
forth.
fabricate
To cut, punch, and sub-assemble members in the shop.
fabrication plans
Structural detailed drawings of individual structural members, describing exactly how they are to
be manufactured.
face
A topological object that represents a trimmed surface bounded by a loop of edges.
face plate
An edge reinforcement type that places a plate or profile at the selected plate edge.
face-to-face
The overall length of a component from the inlet face to the outlet face.
fasteners
Bolts and rivets used to connect structural members.
element
Primitive geometric shape such as a line, circle, or arc.
fence
Boundary or barrier that separates or closes off an area. To surround or close like a fence.
field adjustment
Material added to the neat design geometry of piping or structural parts to allow for extra material
when it is required due to uncontrolled variance in the manufacturing and construction process.
fire integrity
Deck and bulkhead treatments and fire and smoke blocks for fire control and retardation.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 402

 Glossary

flange
The projecting portion of a beam, channel, or column.
flavor
A different variation of a symbol. Each variation has different occurrence property values.
focus of rotation
A point or line about which an object or view turns.
full penetration weld
A type of weld in which the weld material extends through the complete thickness of the
components being joined.
function points
Part of the requirements documentation, function points are the smallest granularity of a
requirement statement that describe specific detailed actions that the software performs.
functional block diagram
Schematic representation of a system (piping, electrical, ventilation) showing system parts and
their relationship. You use symbols to represent equipment and components. A connecting
network of lines illustrates their relationship. Taken together, the symbols and the network
illustrate the function of the system.
furnishings
Parts such as movable articles and fittings that normally are not associated with a system (for
example, a chair).
generic specific
Object that is parametrically defined or defined to suit a family of specific parts (for example,
International Standards parametrics). For example, a 100 - 200 gpm pump in the catalog can
provide a general shape to appear in the model until a specific object has been identified.
GUIDs
Acronym that stands for Globally Unique Identifiers. The software automatically creates the
GUIDs sheet in the Excel workbooks when you create the Catalog database and schema. The
purpose of storing GUIDs within Excel workbooks is to help you keep track of what has been
loaded into the database. Storing GUIDs also helps to avoid the situation in which a replacement
Catalog database causes existing models to become invalid.
host location
The first location created for a Site. This host location is defined when the Database Wizard
creates the Site database.
host server
The database server on which the Site database was created using the Database Wizard.
Alternatively, if it is a restored database set, the Host Server is the database server where the Site
database is restored. The Host Server in a Workshare environment contains the origin for the Site,

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 403

 Glossary

Site Schema, Catalog, and Catalog Schema databases. Consequently, most Project
Management and reference data work must take place at the Host.
initial design
Early stage of design work, generally before contract, used to estimate construction costs and
provide a rough concept of the intended model. Contains information relating to a model created
during its initial (concept) design period.
initial structural plan
Principal structural plan for the model; also called a construction profile.
instantiation
Occurrence of a catalog object at a specific geometric location in the model.
interference checking
A process that identifies possible collisions or insufficient clearance between objects in the model.
jigs and fixtures
Design of, or data for, devices that position work or hold work in position for joining, transport, or
erection.
job order
Industrial authorization for accomplishing work; synonymous with a work order.
joiner
Non-structural bulkheads, and trim and built-in furnishings.
kinematics analysis
Analysis of mechanical motion.
ksi
Kips per square inch.
leg length analysis
Preferred term is welding length analysis.
library
Resource of reference information that you can access in developing a model design.
life cycle database
Information developed to assist in the maintenance and modernization of delivered models.
link
Way to store information about another file in your document. You can update a link so that
changes in the file appear in your document.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 404

 Glossary

lintel
A horizontal member used to carry a wall over an opening.
load group
A grouping in which all components feature uniform load limits and stress safety characteristics.
For example, if a pipe clamp from load group 5 has a maximum nominal load of 20kN, then so
does a threaded rod from load group 5.
location
A Location is defined by three user-defined inputs: 1) a unique name, 2) a unique name rule ID,
and 3) the server where the Site databases reside for that Location. A Location is defined and
created when the Site database is created using the Database Wizard. Additional Locations can
be created in the Project Management task. Each Location is a Site-level object, thus other
Models within the same Site collection can use the Locations when the Models are configured for
Workshare.
logical member
An object in the model used to represent the design topology.
machinery
Major pieces of equipment installed in a model.
macro
A sequence of actions or commands that can be named and stored. When you run the macro, the
software performs the actions or runs the commands. You can create the macros in Visual Basic
or other OLE-aware programming applications. Some of the other OLE-aware programming
applications are Visual Basic for Applications, Visual C++, and so forth.
maintenance envelope
A rectangular box around the part for clearance during maintenance operations.
maintenance parts
Required material for depot or on-board repair or overhaul of equipment, as determined by
engineering study. Generally at a level below the purchased construction object of the model.
maintenance records
Records of breakdown, repair, and overhaul of equipment.
marking and cutting
Marking lines used to align any parts for assembly; also marks used to identify parts and cutting of
standard plates into needed shapes, usually by N/C equipment.
material analysis
Analysis of a completed design work for extracting detailed material requirements; also called
material lists.
material list
An option category that controls the format and content of the bill of materials.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 405

 Glossary

member name
A user-definable alphanumeric code used to uniquely identify individual members in the model.
member part
A model object derived from the logical model that represents the manufactured physical member
parts.
member system
A logical collection of member parts that can be moved as a single entity.
methods
Objects in the database that describe the manufacturing methods to the component parts of a
model.
move from point
Starting point for an action. For example, when you move an equipment object, the Move From
point determines the point of origin for the move.
move to point
Ending point for an action. For example, when you move an equipment object, the Move To point
determines where you want the move to stop.
MTO neutral file
A non-graphic output file that can be fed into a material control system. MTO stands for Material
Take-Off.
natural surface
A surface without a boundary curve.
node
 One of the set of discrete points in a flow graph.
 A terminal of any branch of a network or a terminal common to two or more branches of a
network.
 An end point of any branch or a network or graph, or a junction common to two or more
branches.
northing
A term that describes a north coordinate location in a coordinate system.
nozzle
A piping connection point to a piece of equipment.
nozzle standout
The shortest allowable distance between the connection point of a nozzle and the start point of a
turn on the leg connected to the nozzle.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 406

 Glossary

NPD (Nominal Piping Diameter)

The diameter of a pipe.
object
A type of data other than the native graphic format of the application.
occurrence (of part or equipment)
Instantiation of a part of equipment in the model that refers to the part library; an instance of a
specific object. The design can be built several times, and therefore the occurrence can apply to
more than one hull. Typically, an occurrence points back to a specific object, either for its complete
definition, as in the case of a particular valve, or for its made from material, as in the case of a steel
plate part cut from sheets. Thus, when a designer selects a component from the catalog and
places it at a location in the space of the model, the software creates an occurrence of that object
in the model design.
occurrence property
A characteristic that applies to an individual object in the model. Occurrence properties are
designated with 'oa:' in the reference data workbooks. You can view and modify occurrence
properties on the Occurrence tab of the properties dialog boxes in the software. Depending on the
object, some occurrence properties are read-only.
origin
In coordinate geometry, the point where the X-, Y-, and Z-axes intersect.
origin point
The point at which the coordinate system is placed, providing a full Cartesian coordinate system
with positive and negative quadrants. Points are placed at coordinates relative to the origin point,
represented by the X, Y, and Z values.
orthogonal
The characteristic of an element consisting completely of elements positioned at 90-degree
angles. A square is an orthogonal element.
orthographic
A depiction of an object created by projecting its features onto a plane along lines perpendicular to
the plane.
P&ID
Diagram that shows the topology, functional components, and special requirements of a piping
system; generally represents the engineering design of the system.
package
Set of closely related classes. (UML)
painting
Computation of paint surface and recording of paint system requirements.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 407

 Glossary

parameter
A property whose value determines the characteristics or behavior of something.
part class
A group of similar objects. You can define part classes in the Excel workbooks. A part class can
have multiple parts. For example, a heat exchanger part class can contain heat exchangers with
different dimensions.
part number
Unique identifier of a part.
PDS (Plant Design System)
A comprehensive, intelligent, computer-aided design and engineering application for the process,
power, and marine industries. PDS consists of integrated 2-D and 3-D modules that correspond to
engineering tasks in the design workflow.
physical occurrence
Unique specific object that has traceability and is the physical manifestation of an occurrence
object. A physical occurrence applies to one and only one hull. It is a version of its occurrence
object with as-built or as-modified differences included and has a serial number or lot number.
PinPoint
Tool that allows you to place, move, and modify elements with precision, relative to a reference
point.
principle of superposition
The principle that states that the stresses, strains, and displacements due to different forces can
be combined. This principle is only valid for linear analysis.
product
Data objects that describe the components of a ship and any corresponding properties. An
individual object or part (or its representation in the product model) that may be installed in the
ship. Examples of individual products include objects such as a coffee urn, a light fixture, a piece
of pipe, a piece of ventilation duct, a radar display console, a bulkhead plate, and a structural
profile stiffening a bulkhead.
Product Data Management (PDM) System
Software intended to manage both product data and documents associated to the product data.
Functionality typically includes: object-based data modeling tools, user administration, business
rules, and document management. Document management typically includes document editing
or reviewing, document mark-up or redline, document storage, and full-text retrieval.
product structure
Hierarchical breakdown or decomposition of a product into constituent parts, volumes, or units.
(For example, a bill of material is one possible type of product structure.)
production planning
Functionality associated with the work breakdown and sequence of the construction of a model.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 408

 Glossary

promotion
Process of associating approval state with a product version. A product version begins its
existence at a working approval state. When the version is at some level of maturity, its approval
state is elevated to a higher approval state (that is, promoted). Then, further changes must be
carefully controlled and generally require the data set demoted to a working state. One or more
promotions can occur successively higher approval states (between working and approved) to
represent various intermediate levels of review or progressive approval.
query select sets
Set of objects that are selected in a query or queries on the database.
reference data
The data that is necessary to design plants or ships using the software. Reference data includes
graphical information, such as symbols. It also contains tabular information, such as physical
dimensions and piping specifications.
resource estimation
Rough estimate of material, manpower, and facility utilization for the design and construction of
the model.
route
1) A line connecting a series of points in space and constituting a proposed or traveled route. 2)
The set of links and junctions joined in series to establish a connection.
satellite server
The database server where the replicated databases reside for Workshare. The Satellite Server is
not used unless Workshare is activated.
schema
A database that creates the structure of another database. For example, a schema specifies the
queries, tables, fields, and data types in a database.
schema update utility
Functionality used to assist in processing existing product models to an updated database
structure after you modify or add to the database structure.
sheetbody
A topological object that represents a collection of faces joined along their common edges
(stitched).
shell structure
External portion of the surface of the model.
ship
A collection of modeled objects that can be simultaneously displayed and edited in a workspace. A
Ship points to a Catalog (optionally shared with other Ships). Access control is managed at the
Ship level.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 409

 Glossary

site
The top level in the Project Management hierarchy. A Site configuration may contain several
Catalogs, each shared by multiple Models.
site administrator
Person responsible for managing the standards and general parameters for a given model site
within a Site database.
site setup
Functionality associated with establishing a new model site or hull for design development.
sketch and trace
User interface for rough definition of a required design feature that typically works in a 2-D mode.
specials
An option category that allows you to control specialized calculations for equipment trim,
repeatability, and center-of-gravity.
specifications
Contracted requirements for the model.
steel outfitting
Internal structural elements of a ship that are required to meet a local requirement such as
foundations, non-structural bulkheads, walkways, and so forth.
stern frame
Casting and structure that support the rudder and shaft opening.
stiffener
An angle, plate, or channel fastened to a member to prevent buckling.
stud
A bolt, threaded on both ends, used to connect components.
suspended floor
A concrete floor system built above and off the ground.
swash bulkhead
A longitudinal or transverse nontight bulkhead in a tank that decreases the swashing motion of the
liquid contents. A plate in a tank that has this same effect but that does not extend to the bottom of
the tank is called a swash plate.
symmetric node
Type of vertex on a curve. A curve with a symmetric node has the same curvature on each side of
the node. A handle can be attached to a symmetric node for editing.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 410

 Glossary

system
A conceptual design grouping that organizes parts in hierarchical relationships. A system
represents a functional view of the model and includes information such as system name, type,
properties, and design specifications for the objects assigned to the system.
tag number
User-specific, unique number assigned to an object (for example, CV-101 for a control valve,
HE-2002 for a heat exchanger).
target point
The origin for coordinate measurements displayed by PinPoint. You can position the target point
anywhere on the drawing sheet or view.
tolerant geometry
A type of ACIS geometry - either an edge or a vertex - that is outside the tolerance for ACIS and
requires special handling.
transverse
At right angles to the fore-and-aft center line.
transverse frames
The athwartship members that form the ribs of the ship.
trim
The difference between the forward draft and the aft draft.
trimmed surface
A surface whose boundary is fully or partially inside the "natural" geometric definition of the
surface. Some or the entire control polygon extends outside the face boundary.
trunk
Feature that quickly reserves space for the distributive systems and other systems that have a
path. Along the trunk are stations that define the cross section and identify part or system
membership.
tumble home
The inboard slope of the side of a ship, usually above the designed waterline.
unit/module modeler
Facility of the system to structure collections of equipment and components into a single
identifiable object.
user attributes
A customized property in the reference data. The Custom Interfaces sheets in the Excel
workbooks define these properties. You can list the customized properties on the individual part
class sheets.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 411

 Glossary

version control
Ability of the system to manage multiple versions of a single part of the design. Version control
should support conditional analysis and promotion status, as well as alternate design features
among hulls within a model site.
vertex
A topological object that represents a point in the three-dimensional model.
vertical keel
A row of vertical plates extending along the center of the flat plate keel.
viewset
Set of objects (usually a subset of the entire database) that a view operation uses. Membership or
lack of membership for any object in a viewset does not affect the actual stored representation of
the object, but only its availability or desirability for viewing in the current scenario.
water line
A line parallel with the base line that depicts the water.
watertight door
A door that when closed prevents the passage of water.
weather deck
A deck exposed to the weather.
weathertight door
A door that when closed prevents the passage of rain and spray.
weight and CG analysis
Routines that compute the weight of commodity materials as configured in a given design (for
example, plate and pipe) and determine total weight and center of gravity (CG) for a collection of
material and equipment, as well as the complete model.
welding
Weld requirements for joining materials. Welding length analysis is the calculation of required
weld dimensions; also called leg length analysis.
windlass
The machine used to hoist and lower anchors.
wirebody
A topological object that represents a collection of edges jointed at their common endpoints.
wizard
Software routine attached to an application that provides guidance and expert help to you to
complete one of the functionalities of the application.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 412

 Glossary

work content
Estimation development of metrics from the database that relates to the work hour content of the
various construction units.
work order
Plant authorization for completing work; synonymous with a job order.
working plane
The available 2-D plane of movement for endpoint selection.
workset
Set of objects (usually a subset of the entire database) used in an interactive change, add, or
delete operation. Membership or lack of membership for any object in a workset does not
necessarily affect the actual stored representation of an object. However, you can change or
delete an object in a workset that also results in a change or deletion of the stored object.
Similarly, when you add a new object (not currently stored) to a workset, the software also adds
the object container.
workspace
Area that represents the portion of the model data needed to perform the intended task and
includes the user modeling settings.
workspace document
Document into which you can extract a portion of the model data for a user task.
Workspace Explorer
Tree or list representation of objects in your workspace.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 413

Index
2
C
2D Symbol Logging Settings • 394
catalog • 397
Catalog database • 397
A ceiling • 397
abaft • 396 chain • 398
abstract part • 396 change history • 398
access holes • 396 change management • 398
Active Template Library (ATL) • 396 change propagation • 398
Add a custom batch process • 341 Change the attributes of a part • 309
Add a margin by assembly connections • Change the flange direction of a marking •
115 306
Add a regional margin • 123 Change the marking side of a marking • 306
Add by vector shrinkage • 137 Change the size of an annotation • 309
Add connected fabrication margin • 106 Change the thickness direction of a marking
Add fabrication margin • 97 • 306
Add scaling by axis shrinkage • 136 Check Manufacturability • 371
Add scaling by edge shrinkage • 136 Check objects for manufacturability • 372
aft • 396 class • 398
after body • 396 class rule check • 398
aftermost • 396 Class Rules • 398
Alma Act/Cut Nesting • 395 classification folder • 398
angle • 396 Close the corners of a contour • 308
Annotation Editor • 293 codelist • 398
Annotation Ribbon • 314 commodity code • 398
approval state • 396 commodity item • 398
arrangement (accommodation) • 396 component • 398
Assembly Margin Child Properties Dialog concurrent access • 398
Box • 118 Configuration Tab • 84, 129, 210, 271
Assembly Margin Properties Dialog Box • Connect Fabrication Margin • 103
118 consolidated tasks • 399
Assembly Properties Dialog Box • 332 constraints • 399
attribute • 396 Contours Ribbon • 313
auto-nesting • 397 contract • 399
axis • 397 control point • 399
coordinate • 399
B coordinate system • 399
cope • 399
basic design • 397
Copy and paste a constant fabrication
Batch Process Selection Dialog Box • 343
margin • 99
Batch Service Manager • 337
Copy and paste a manufacturing member •
bending • 397
261
bill of material (BOM) • 397
Copy and paste a manufacturing plate • 214
Boundary List Dialog Box • 42
Copy and paste a manufacturing profile •
Boundary Methods • 38
249
brace • 397
Copy and paste a marking line • 80
built ships • 397
Copy and paste a pin jig • 194
built-up member • 397
Copy and paste a template set • 162
bulkload • 397

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 414

 Index

Copy and paste an oblique fabrication degree of freedom • 400

margin • 99 Delete a connected fabrication margin • 106
Copy and paste shrinkage • 138 Delete a manufacturing member • 262
Copy Structure • 354 Delete a manufacturing panel • 232
Copy Structure Properties Dialog Box • 357 Delete a manufacturing plate • 215
cover plate • 399 Delete a manufacturing profile • 249
Create a bilge keel mark • 87 Delete a manufacturing service manager
Create a block mark • 88 batch job • 338
Create a manufacturing tab • 150 Delete a manufacturing tab • 150
Create a marking line by 2D projection • 75 Delete a pin jig • 194
Create a marking line by intersection • 76 Delete a regional margin • 124
Create a marking line by reference curve • Delete a seam • 33
78 Delete a template set • 162
Create a MFG data file • 364 Delete a tube template • 179
Create a new assembly or assembly block • Delete an assembly margin • 115
329 Delete an edge template • 187
Create a pin jig • 193 Delete fabrication margin • 100
Create a plate or assembly template set • Delete marking • 81
161 Delete shrinkage • 139
Create a profile face template set • 173 Delete shrinkage from multiple objects • 144
Create a skid mark • 87 Delete weld compensation • 127
Create a tube template • 179 Dependent and Connected Objects Dialog
Create an annotation • 300 Box • 351
Create an edge template • 186 design alternative • 400
Create shrinkage on multiple objects • 143 design approval log • 400
cross section • 399 design data auto input • 401
Cut/Mark Tab (Manufacturing Panel design documents • 401
Properties Dialog Box) • 244 design object • 401
Cut/Mark Tab (Manufacturing Plate design progress check • 401
Properties Dialog Box) • 227 design review • 401
cutback • 399 design service • 401
cutting plane • 399 design standard • 401
Detail Review a manufacturing object • 322
D detail schedule • 401
Diagonal Lengths and Mounting Angle
damage records • 400 Dialog Box • 347
data interchange • 400 Display connected objects • 351
database • 400 Display manufacturing plate graphically •
database backup • 400 289
database break and recovery • 400 Display manufacturing plate XML text • 288
database copy • 400 Display manufacturing profiles graphically •
database management • 400 290
database monitor record • 400 Display manufacturing profiles XML text •
Decrease the size of annotation • 302 290
Define a boundary curve • 40 Display manufacturing template graphically •
Define a coincident plane • 34 291
Define a plane using a point and a normal Display manufacturing template XML text •
vector • 36 290
Define a plane using three points • 37 Display the plate parts in a manufacturing
Define an offset plane • 35 panel • 231
Define plane by vectors normal • 38 distributed systems • 401
Define plane using angle from plane • 36 distribution systems • 401
degree • 400 documentation • 401

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 415

 Index

drawing tool • 401 General Tab (Copy Structure Properties

Dialog Box) • 357
E General Tab (Fabrication Margin Properties
Dialog Box) • 100
easting • 401 General Tab (Manufacturing Member
edge • 402 Properties Dialog Box) • 263
edge distance • 402 General Tab (Manufacturing Panel
Edge Template • 185 Properties Dialog Box) • 233
Edit an assembly or assembly block • 332 General Tab (Manufacturing Plate
Edit the annotation for a part • 301 Properties Dialog Box) • 215
Enable and set weld compensation • 249, General Tab (Manufacturing Profile
262 Properties Dialog Box) • 250
equipment catalog • 402 General Tab (Manufacturing Tab Properties
Export to Nesting • 363 Dialog Box) • 151
Extend a contour • 308 General Tab (Margin Properties Dialog Box)
Extend a marking • 307 • 107
external appendages • 402 General Tab (Marking Folder Properties
Dialog Box) • 81
F General Tab (Marking Line Properties
fabricate • 402 Dialog Box) • 82
Fabrication Margin • 91 General Tab (Pin Jig Properties Dialog Box)
Fabrication Margin Properties Dialog Box • • 202
100 General Tab (Regional Margin Properties
fabrication plans • 402 Dialog Box) • 124
face • 402 General Tab (Shrinkage Properties Dialog
face plate • 402 Box) • 139
face-to-face • 402 General Tab (Template Properties Dialog
fasteners • 402 Box) • 163
feature • 402 General Tab (Tube and Edge Template
Feature Tab (Fabrication Margin Properties Properties Dialog Box) • 180
Dialog Box) • 103 General Tab (Weld Compensation
Feature Tab (Regional Margin Properties Properties Dialog Box) • 128, 270
Dialog Box) • 125 Generate a frame system from Pin Jig • 359
fence • 402 Generate a manufacturing member • 261
field adjustment • 402 Generate a manufacturing panel • 230
fire integrity • 402 Generate a manufacturing plate • 214
flange • 403 Generate a manufacturing profile • 248
flavor • 403 Generate Frame System from Pin Jig • 358
focus of rotation • 403 Generic Batch Command Dialog Box • 342
full penetration weld • 403 generic specific • 403
function points • 403 Geometry Tab (Structural Manufacturing
functional block diagram • 403 Error Log Enable Dialog Box) • 393
furnishings • 403 GUIDs • 403

G H
General Tab (Assembly Margin Child host location • 403
Properties Dialog Box) • 119 host server • 403
General Tab (Assembly Margin Properties
Dialog Box) • 118 I
General Tab (Assembly Properties Dialog Icon Relationships • 30
Box) • 332 Icons in the Workspace Explorer • 22

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 416

 Index

Increase the size of annotation • 301 Manufacturing Profile Properties Dialog Box
initial design • 404 • 250
initial structural plan • 404 Manufacturing Service Manager • 319
instantiation • 404 Manufacturing Services • 344
interference checking • 404 Manufacturing Tab • 147
Manufacturing Tab Properties Dialog Box •
J 151
Margin By Assembly Connections • 113
jigs and fixtures • 404 Margin Properties Dialog Box (Connect
job order • 404 Fabrication Margin) • 110
joiner • 404 Margin Properties Dialog Box (Margin By
Assembly Connections) • 115
K Margin Settings Dialog Box • 107
kinematics analysis • 404 Margins • 91
ksi • 404 Marking • 62
marking and cutting • 405
Marking by Definition • 87
L Marking by Definition Dialog Box • 88
leg length analysis • 404 Marking Folder Properties Dialog Box • 81
library • 404 Marking Line Properties Dialog Box • 82
life cycle database • 404 Marking Lines • 62
link • 404 Marking Tab (Manufacturing Member
lintel • 405 Properties Dialog Box) • 268
load group • 405 Marking Tab (Manufacturing Panel
location • 405 Properties Dialog Box) • 241
logical member • 405 Marking Tab (Manufacturing Plate
Properties Dialog Box) • 224
M Marking Tab (Manufacturing Profile
machinery • 405 Properties Dialog Box) • 255
macro • 405 Marking Tab (Template Properties Dialog
Macro Editor • 352 Box) • 168
Macro Editor Dialog Box • 352 Marking Tab (Tube and Edge Template
maintenance envelope • 405 Properties Dialog Box) • 184
maintenance parts • 405 Markings Ribbon • 311
maintenance records • 405 Marks Tab (Copy Structure Properties
Managed Export • 367 Dialog Box) • 357
Managed Export Dialog Box • 366 material analysis • 405
Managed Export for DSTV • 365 material list • 405
Managed Export for Smart Production • 365 member name • 406
Manufacturability Checking Settings Dialog member part • 406
Box • 373 member system • 406
Manufacturing Export • 363 methods • 406
Manufacturing Member • 258 Modify a connected fabrication margin • 106
Manufacturing Member Properties Dialog Modify a manufacturing member • 262
Box • 263 Modify a manufacturing panel • 232
Manufacturing Panel • 228 Modify a manufacturing plate • 215
Manufacturing Panel Properties Dialog Box • Modify a manufacturing profile • 249
233 Modify a manufacturing tab • 150
Manufacturing Plate • 213 Modify a pin jig • 194
Manufacturing Plate Properties Dialog Box • Modify a regional margin • 123
215 Modify a template set • 162
Manufacturing Profile • 245 Modify a tube template • 179
Modify an assembly margin • 115

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 417

 Index

Modify an edge template • 186 Part Monitor • 274

Modify fabrication margin • 98 Part Monitor Dialog Box • 292
Modify marking • 81 Part Monitor Tab (Structural Manufacturing
Modify shrinkage • 138 Error Log Enable Dialog Box) • 388
Modify shrinkage on multiple objects • 143 part number • 408
Modify weld compensation • 127 Part Viewers and Editors • 274
move from point • 406 PDS (Plant Design System) • 408
move to point • 406 Performance Tab (Structural Manufacturing
MTO neutral file • 406 Error Log Enable Dialog Box) • 390
Multi Shrinkage • 142 Permission Group Behaviors between Tasks
Multiple Shrinkage Properties Dialog Box • • 46
144 Permission Group Behaviors Between
Tasks • 47
N Permission Group Behaviors in Structural
Manufacturing • 51
natural surface • 406 physical occurrence • 408
Nesting Report • 368 Pick boundaries • 39
Nesting Report Dialog Box • 369 Pin Jig • 188
Nesting Tab (Manufacturing Profile Pin Jig 3D View Dialog Box • 196
Properties Dialog Box) • 256 Pin Jig Properties Dialog Box • 202
New (Block) Assembly • 324 PinPoint • 408
node • 406 Place Annotation Dialog Box • 303
northing • 406 Plane Methods • 33
Notes Tab • 86, 130, 211, 272 Plate Template • 153
nozzle • 406 Plate Template Properties Dialog Box • 162
nozzle standout • 406 Preface • 11
NPD (Nominal Piping Diameter) • 407 Pre-nesting • 379
Pre-nesting Manufacturing Plates • 379
O Pre-nesting Manufacturing Profiles • 382
object • 407 Pre-nesting Setup • 386
occurrence (of part or equipment) • 407 principle of superposition • 408
occurrence property • 407 Process Tab (Manufacturing Member
Offset a marking • 307 Properties Dialog Box) • 267
Open the Part Editor environment • 304 Process Tab (Manufacturing Panel
origin • 407 Properties Dialog Box) • 237
origin point • 407 Process Tab (Manufacturing Plate
orthogonal • 407 Properties Dialog Box) • 220
orthographic • 407 Process Tab (Manufacturing Profile
Properties Dialog Box) • 253
Process Tab (Tube and Edge Template
P Properties Dialog Box) • 182
P&ID • 407 Process Tab for Plates (Template Properties
package • 407 Dialog Box) • 166
painting • 407 Process Tab for Profile Faces (Template
Panel Plate List Dialog Box • 232 Properties Dialog Box) • 174
parameter • 408 product • 408
part class • 408 Product Data Management (PDM) System •
Part Editor • 303 408
Part Editor Environment • 310 product structure • 408
Part Editor Object Attribute Manager Dialog production planning • 408
Box • 315 Profile Face Template • 169
Part Filters (Margin Properties Dialog Box) • Profile Face Template Properties Dialog Box
110 • 174

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 418

 Index

Profile XML Schema • 365 Set assembly user-defined planar

promotion • 409 manufacturing orientation • 330
sheetbody • 409
Q Shell Plate Unfold Preview • 361
shell structure • 409
query select sets • 409 ship • 409
Show Manufacturability Inconsistencies
R Dialog Box • 374
Rebound objects • 41 Shrinkage • 132
reference data • 409 Shrinkage Properties Dialog Box • 139
Regional Margin • 120 Shrinkage Tab (Structural Manufacturing
Regional Margin Properties Dialog Box • 124 Error Log Enable Dialog Box) • 387
Relationships Tab • 84, 208 Shrinkages Tab (Shrinkage Properties
Remarking Lines Dialog Box • 195 Dialog Box) • 141
resource estimation • 409 site • 410
Review a manufacturing object • 321 site administrator • 410
Review Dialog Box • 322 site setup • 410
Review or update a set of objects selected Sketch 2D Best Practices • 52
by a filter • 321 sketch and trace • 410
Rotate an annotation • 309 Solve ambiguous solution created by
Rotate annotation • 302 selected boundaries • 40
Rotate multiple annotations • 309 specials • 410
route • 409 specifications • 410
Run a custom batch process • 340 Specify which layers display in the Part
Run a custom processing command • 346 Editor • 310
Run a detailing batch process • 339 Split a contour • 308
Run a production batch process • 340 Split markings • 307
Run the Nesting Report command • 368 Split Notification • 32
Status Tab • 227
steel outfitting • 410
S stern frame • 410
satellite server • 409 stiffener • 410
Save a modified part to the database • 306 Stiffeners Diagonal Measurement • 346
Save annotation changes to the database • Structural Manufacturing • 14
301 Structural Manufacturing Error Log Enable •
Schedule a manufacturing service manager 387
batch job • 337 Structural Manufacturing XML Schema • 365
Schedule check manufacturability using stud • 410
Batch Services • 372 Style Dialog Box • 318
schema • 409 Submit Batch Job • 339
schema update utility • 409 Supported Plate List Dialog Box • 195
Select Connected Object • 350 suspended floor • 410
Select Mfg Parts Dialog Box • 195 swash bulkhead • 410
Select System Dialog Box • 360 symmetric node • 410
Select Tab Type Dialog Box • 151 system • 411
Selecting Objects • 19
Selection of Possible Report Data Dialog
Box • 323
T
Service Manager Tab (Structural tag number • 411
Manufacturing Error Log Enable Dialog target point • 411
Box) • 389 Template Tab (Template Properties Dialog
Set assembly manufacturing orientation by Box) • 165
object • 331

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 419

 Index

Template Tab (Tube and Edge Template workspace • 413

Properties Dialog Box) • 181 workspace document • 413
Templates • 153 Workspace Explorer • 413
tolerant geometry • 411
Transfer Ownership Dialog Box • 85 Z
transverse • 411
transverse frames • 411 Zoom in on the features of a contour • 308
trim • 411
Trim a contour • 308
Trim markings • 307
trimmed surface • 411
trunk • 411
Tube and Edge Templates Properties Dialog
Box • 179
Tubular Member Template • 176
tumble home • 411

U
Unfolding Tab (Structural Manufacturing
Error Log Enable Dialog Box) • 390
unit/module modeler • 411
Update a manufacturing object • 321
Use the Boundary List dialog box • 39
user attributes • 411

V
Validate an edited part • 306
Validation Ribbon • 311
version control • 412
vertex • 412
vertical keel • 412
viewset • 412

W
water line • 412
watertight door • 412
weather deck • 412
weathertight door • 412
weight and CG analysis • 412
Weld Compensation • 125
Weld Compensation Settings Dialog Box •
128, 270
welding • 412
What's New in Structural Manufacturing • 12
windlass • 412
wirebody • 412
wizard • 412
work content • 413
work order • 413
working plane • 413
workset • 413

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Manufacturing User's Guide 420